t\w  ®hwlog«o»/ 

PRINCETON,  N.  J. 


% 


PRESENTED  BY 

THE  PRESBYTERIAN  BOARD  OF  PUBLICATION 

R L 


. ■> ' 1 m'  ♦ f '<  “^  - * 


t\i- 


•V  J' 


f ' K 


'%■ 


il 


|r_rf. 


t ■<. 


fJST'' 


;iv 


■■  a 


,vr-i . f . 

• • <*r 


’ • -4^ 


■. : 


• s- 

■H' 


• % >»■»'.'» 

A 


-f*_. 


i ^ ^ 

.■^4 


, -4 


■;> 

..  4^ 


pr^  Z 


r-%' 


»'  < . 

; Vf  ^ 


V- 


- / • 


-:m-  A 


i >-^f  "Oft  , 


ir 


V ^ ‘ ii*-.  -- 

-V 


"•I 


sr-'^  ;^ » .•.*!»•■■•  »'-';^ 


^ i 


V / ' 


T5f 


-.•■■1 


A' 


.-r 


- ** 


W:.> 


ir 


4 


-%i 


f 


% 


;.'V 


< 4 


. . .*  t 

■ - 


* • 


? 


< 


V 


V. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.prg/details/gemsfromcoralislOOgill 


1 


Mission  School  House.  Ngatangiia.  Frontispiece. 


GEMS 


PUOM 


OR  INCIDENTS  OF  CONTRAST  BETWEEN 

SAVAGE  AND  CHRISTIAN  LIFE 

OP  THE 

SOUTH  SEA  ISLANDERS. 


THE  REV.  WILLIAM  GILL, 

?■ 

RAROTONGA. 


EASTERN  POLYNESIA: 

COMPRISING 

THE  RAROTONGA  GROUP, 
PENRHYN  ISLANDS,  AND  SAVAGE  ISLAND. 


PHILADELPHIA  : 

PRESBYTERIAN  BOARD  OP  PUBLICATION, 

NO.  265  CURSTNUT  STREET. 


BTEIlEOTrPED  BT 


JESPEll  HARDING  & SON, 

KO.  57  SOUTH  THIRD  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA. 


INTRODUCTION. 


The  islands  of  the  Hervey  Group,  whose  missionary 
history  is  narrated  in  this  volume,  are  first  in  order  of  dis- 
covery and  date  of  Christian  instruction,  in  relation  to  those 
of  Western  Polynesia. 

With  a view,  however,  to  give  the  reader  an  insight  into 
the  wretchedness  and  cruelty  of  the  islanders  in  their  heathen 
state, — the  consequent  difficulties  which  have  to  be  overcome, 
and  the  plans  adopted,  both  by  European  missionaries  and 
native  teachers,  in  opening  up  intercourse  with  them, — we 
have  noticed  the  last  visited  islands,  first,  and  the  first,  last. 

This  has  been  done  upon  the  same  principle,  and  for  the 
same  reasons,  which  would  lead  us  to  invite  the  Christian 
voyager  who  might  be  about  to  investigate  for  himself  the 
progress  of  missions  in  those  lands,  to  travel  from  the  west 
to  the  east. 

In  the  extreme  west,  near  Australia,  he  would  see  heathen 
natives  in  all  their  ruin  and  misery ; in  the  New  Hebrides, 
and  some  of  the  adjacent  islands,  would  be  found  tribes, 
recently  visited  by  the  Christian  teacher,  and  who  are  just 

(iii) 


IV. 


INTRODUCTION. 


emerging  from  their  heathenism  and  idolatry ; and,  further 
eastward,  onward  to  the  Rarotonga  group,  he  would  discover 
an  amount  of  civilization,  intelligence,  and  Christianity,  as 
elevated  and  as  pure  as  any  yet  gained  by  the  inhabitants 
of  the  islands  of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

Thus  much  of  explanation  is  thought  necessary  for  devi- 
ating from  what  is  the  chronological  order  of  their  missionary 
history;  and  now,  without  any  remarks  respecting  the  details 
of  the  work  itself,  but  rather  asking  for  them  a careful  and 
candid  perusal,  we  would  only  state,  that  the  simple  design 
has  been  to  communicate  correct  information, — to  record 
facts  relative  to  the  past  history  and  the  present  state  of  the 
islands  noticed, — to  illustrate  the  efficacy  of  Christianity  by 
incidents  of  contrast  between  the  once  savage  and  now 
civilized  condition  of  the  islanders. 

This  design  has,  we  trust,  in  some  measure  been  accom- 
plished ; and  while  the  church  of  Christ  gives  thanks  to 
Almighty  God  for  the  successes  which  have  been  gained, 
may  it  have  a yet  more  vivid  and  enlightened  realization  of 
the  work  still  to  he  done,  and  supply  an  increased  amount 
of  sympathy,  prayer,  and  instrumentality  for  the  onward 
progress  of  Christian  missions  in  the  whole  world  ! 


CONTENTS 


^£rbcg  Islanb  45roup. 

THE  ISLiNJND  OF  RAROTONGxV. 

CHAPTER  I. 

FAQE 

Islaiuls  of  the  llervcy  Group — Situiition,  dimensions,  physical  eha- 
ractcristics  of  Rarotonga — Ancestral  tribes  of  the  present  popu- 
lation— Captain  Cook’s  discovery  of  the  other  islands  in  the 
group — Reports  of  his  expedition  brought  to  Rarotonga  by  na- 
tives— The  people  pray  to  their  gods  that  the  Kookes  may  be 
brought  to  their  island — Their  prayer  answered — Reports 
reach  the  island  of  the  English  missionaries  being  on  Tahiti 
— A Sydney  trading  vessel  visits  the  island — Lengthened  resi- 
dence of  Captain  and  crew — Numerous  evils  arising  therefrom — 

The  vessel  leaves  the  island — Natives  are  taken  away  on  board.  17 

CHAPTER  II. 

Location  of  the  different  tribes  in  Rarotonga — Native  family,  houses, 
and  furniture — Frequency  and  cruelty  of  their  wars — Religious 
character  of  the  people  in  their  heathenism — Their  gods — Their 
convictions  of  sin — Their  ideas  of  moral  evil — Ancient  prophe- 
cies concerning  the  overthrow  of  heathenism — An  example — 

The  necessity  of  an  atonement  for  sin  felt  by  the  people — Their 
efforts  to  satisfy  their  convictions — Occasional  human  sacrifices 
— Missionaries’  visit  to  the  oven  of  atonement — The  belief  of 
the  people  in  a future  state — Their  ideas  respecting  it — The 
adaptation  of  the  gospel  to  their  wants  and  experiences. 

1*  (V) 


26 


vi 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  III. 


The  natives  taken  away  from  the  island  are  left  at  Aitutaki — They 
hear  of  Christianity  there — Information  respeeting  the  island 
eonveyed  to  the  missionaries — Teachers  landed  on  the  island 
in  1823 — Tapaeru’s  reception  by  her  eountrymen — Heathen 
merry-making  on  account  of  her  return — Night  of  danger  to 
the  teachers  on  shore — Missionaries  resolve  to  leave  the  people 
without  a teacher — Papehia’s  determination  to  remain  as  teacher 
— Tapaeru’s  influence  for  his  safety — Surprise  of  tho  people  at 
the  new  things  he  made  known  to  them — His  preaching  to  the 
natives  in  a grove  of  cocoa-nut  trees — ^Thoir  questions  respecting 
God — They  think  his  book  to  be  his  god — Visit  of  Messrs.  Tyer- 
man  and  Bennett  to  the  island — Encouraging  advance  of  tho 
mission.  ........ 


38 


CHAPTER  IV. 

European  missionary  resides  on  the  island,  1827 — Separation  of  the 
tribes  to  their  own  districts — Adoption  of  a code  of  civil  law— 
Attention  of  tho  people  to  planting  and  house-building — Build- 
ing of  chapel  at  Ngatangiia — The  opening  service — Arrival  of 
Rev.  A.  Buzacott  in  1828 — A painful  reaction  on  past  successes 
— Moral  defection  in  a native  teacher — Opposition  of  heathen 
priesthood — Houses  of  the  Christian  party  and  chapels  destroyed 
by  fire — Mission  house  in  danger — Destitution  of  necessary  sup- 
plies— Heavy  floods — Destruction  of  missionary’s  house — Gene- 
ral and  fatal  sickness — Painful  and  joyful  deaths.  . .44 

CHAPTER  V. 

Arorangi  settlement  formed — Description  of  the  station — -Happy 
condition  of  the  people — New  station  at  Titikaveka — Notice  of 
the  adult  and  children’s  schools — Observance  of  tho  Sabbath 
by  the  islanders — Nature  and  object  of  native  classes — Weekly 
public  services — Hurricane  in  1831 — Distress  occasioned  there- 
by— Fresh  trials  from  the  ungodly — Introduction  of  printing 
press  to  tho  island,  1832 — Rarotongan  native  Christian  teachers 
go  forth  to  Samoa  the  same  year — Notice  of  Teava — His  prayer 
— His  labours.  . . . . . . .54 


CHAPTER  VI. 

Formation  of  Christian  church  on  Rarotonga  in  1833 — Translation 
of  Scriptures  into  the  native  language — Notice  of  Rarotongan 


CONTENTS. 


' Vll 


dialect — New  Testament  in  native  language  sent  to  England  to 
be  printed  in  1834 — Attempts  to  instruct  the  people  in  cotton 
spinning — Growth  of  cotton  on  the  island — Failure  of  health  in 
missionaries — Timely  native  assistance— Notices  on  the  institu- 
tion of  marriage — Statistics — Interesting  united  gathering  of 
the  natives — Native  letters.  . , . . .63 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Missionary  ship  Camden,  1838 — Arrives  off  Rarotonga,  1839 — 
Christian  village — Chapel,  school,  and  Sabbath  services — Mis- 
sionary house — Five  thous.and  copies  of  New  Testament,  in 
native  language,  taken  on  shore — Joy  of  the  people — ChieCs 
messenger  from  Arorangi — Young  missionary  takes  up  his  resi- 
dence at  his  station — The  work  he  has  to  do — First  attempt  in 
speaking  the  native  language — Missionary  makes  a globe  and 
maps — Building  mission  house — Fatal  epidemic— Happy  deaths 
— Orphans  of  the  island — Letters  to  friends  in  England — An 
aged  native’s  speech.  . . . . . .72 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

Statistics  of  the  island,  1843 — Notices  respecting  reported  island  of 
Tuanaki — Reports  respecting  Tahiti  and  New  Zealand  reach  the 
island — Native  impressions  respecting  those  reports — Conse- 
quent laws — An  American  resides  on  shore — His  difficulties  re- 
specting planting  and  land — Refusal  of  land  on  rent  to  mission- 
ary— Formation  of  boarding-school — Results — How  sustained 
— School-recreations — An  account  of  heathen  cruelty  to  children 
— Building  of  a new  chapel  at  Arorangi — Contrast  with  heathen 
temples — Death  of  an  aged  deacon.  . . . .83 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Formation  of  an  Institution  on  Rarotonga  for  the  education  of  na- 
tive teachers — The  desire  of  the  natives  to  extend  the  blessing 
of  the  gospel  to  other  lands — The  building  completed  in  1843 — 
Report  of  Institution  to  1844 — A fearful  hurricane,  1846 — Its 
commencement,  progress,  devastation,  at  each  settlement — Pro- 
vidential supply  of  provisions  after  the  gale — Liberal  aid  sent 
out  to  the  island  from  England — Native  occupation  at  their 
plantations — Subsequent  restoring  of  the  villages — Rev.  A. 
Buzacott  leaves  the  island  fur  England.  . . .92 


VIH 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  X. 

PAGE 

Daily  occupation  of  natives — Structure  and  furniture  of  native  houses 
— Their  meals — Their  dress — General  civilization — Daily  en- 
gagements of  a missionary  with  the  natives — Those  of  mission- 
ary’s wife — The  mission  printing  press — The  premises,  office, 
workmen — Statement  of  hooks  printed  in  Rarotongan  language 
up  to  1855— Total  press  work  for  five  years — Further  notices  of 
the  Institution — Students’ engagements  and  studies — Review  of 
the  results  of  the  Institution,  1852 — Inexpensiveness  of  its 
support — Formation  of  Matavera  settlement — Laws  respecting 
fermented  liquors.  ......  102 

CHAPTER  XL 

Anxieties  respecting  the  rising  generation — Statement  of  annual 
crime — Severe  and  general  illness  of  the  people,  1851 — A very 
general  awakening  and  revival — Death  of  a ringleader  in  evil 
practices — The  church  aroused  to  prayer  and  activity — An  in- 
stance of  obdurate  hardness  of  heart — His  conversion — The 
revival  advances — Statements  of  numbers  brought  under  con- 
victions of  sin — Letter  of  a native  penitent — Speech  of  a native 
convert — An  address  of  native  to  the  church — A united  com- 
munion service  of  all  the  church-members  on  the  island — Re- 
port of  native  addresses.  .....  112 

CHAPTER  XII. 

The  return  of  Rev.  A.  Buzacott  to  the  island,  with  first  edition  of 
complete  Bible  in  native  language — How  purchased  by  the  peo- 
ple— Native  auxiliary  missionary  societies — Letters  from  native 
secretaries  to  the  parent  society — Missionary  efforts  among  the 
young  people  of  the  island — Children  brought  from  Rimitara  to 
bo  educated. — Statistics  of  the  stations  to  1853 — Notices  on  de- 
crease of  population — Native  sailors — Shipping  trade  with  the 
islanders — How  conducted,  and  results — Character,  life,  and 
death  of  Tinomana,  chief  of  Arorangi — Conclusion.  . . 122 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 

CHAPTER  I. 

Relative  position  of  the  island  to  Rarotonga — When  discovered,  and 
the  landing  of  Christi.an  teachers — An  out-station  to  the  Tahiti 
mission  up  to  1839 — Maretu,  the  first  Rarotongan  teacher  sunt 


CONTENTS. 


IX 


to  the  island — Native  addresses  on  the  occasion  of  missionary 
of  Arorangi  going  to  Mangaia — Circumstances  of  the  voyage — 

A prayer  of  a native  at  sea — Circumstances  of  missionary  land- 
ing, 1841 — Weekly  arrangements  to  attend  to  native  inquirers 
— A Sabbath-morning  prayer-meeting — Public  service — Burial 
service  of  a heathen — Native  inquiries  respecting  ancient  cus- 
toms— The  oppressed  condition  of  Mangaian  females.  . . 133 

CHAPTER  II. 

Erection  of  a new  school  house — The  opening  service — Native 
speeches — The  number  and  character  of  scholars — Want  of 
books — Parents  betroth  their  children  in  infancy — Visit  to  Ta- 
marua — A public  service  there — Desire  of  the  people  for  a mis- 
sionary— Settlement  of  a native  pastor  there — Experience  of  a 
young  convert — Increase  of  people  attending  Sabbath  services 
at  Oneroa — People  erect  galleries  in  the  large  chapel — Notice  of 
subterranean  caverns — Account  of  heathens  on  the  island,  1841 
— Desire  of  the  young  people  to  attend  the  schools — Number  in 
church  communion  at  principal  station — Native  contributions 
to  London  Missionary  Society — Native  letter  to  London  Mis- 
sionary Society.  .......  143 


CHAPTER  in. 

Calamitous  accident  to  the  native  pastor — His  removal  to  Raro- 
tonga— Missionary  visit  to  Ivirua  settlement — Industry  of  the 
people  and  beauty  of  the  valleys — The  old  natives’  remem- 
brance of  Captain  Cook’s  visit  to  the  island — Their  sorrow  at 
the  cruel  treatment  of  Papehia- — Homage  done  to  the  first  pig 
put  on  shore — Opening  of  a new  chapel  at  Ivirua — Settlement 
of  Pori  there  as  native  pastor — An  English  captain’s  unjust 
trade  with  the  people — Third  missionary  visit  to  the  island  in 
1843 — State  of  education  at  the  principal  station — Christian 
Visitors’  Association — Statistics  of  Oneroa — Missionary  visit  to 
a heathen  family — The  death  of  Ngatae,  a native  teacher.  . 154 

CHAPTER  rV. 

Amusing  incident  connected  with  the  first  rabbit  seen  by  the  natives 
— Alarm  occasioned  by  cats  being  taken  to  the  island — Prac- 
tice of  tattooing,  and  laws  respecting  it — Conversion  of  a native 
from  an  exposition  of  Romans  vii.  9 — A native’s  encounter  with 
a shark  at  sea — Happy  results — Third  visit  to  Ivirua — The 


X 


CONTENTS. 


journey — A tale  of  heathen  barbarity — A missionary  prayer- 
meeting— Schools  and  church  of  Tamarua — Historical  notice 
of  an  old  native— The  missionary’s  departure  from  Rarotonga 
— Reflections.  .......  164 


CHAPTER  V. 

Another  teacher  sent  to  the  island — Supply  of  books  in  native  lan- 
guage— Appointment  of  English  missionary  to  Mangaia — His 
landing  in  the  year  1845 — Native  speech  on  the  occasion — 
Missionary  daily  labours  among  the  people — Reading — Schools 
— Assisting  in  work — Building  new  chapel — Native  laws  respect- 
ing foreigners  who  came  to  the  island — Arrival  of  two  French- 
men with  letter  from  French  consul — General  statistics  of  the 
island,  1845 — Native  views  of  the  past  and  present  position  of 
the  island — Exhortations — Pleasing  state  of  the  mission  on  the 
island,  January,  1846.  ......  174 


CHAPTER  VI. 

An  account  of  a devastating  hurricane,  March,  1846 — The  n.atives 
rise  above  their  depressing  circumstances — Send  contributions 
to  London  Missionary  Society  and  to  Bible  Society — Improve- 
ment of  public  roads  round  the  island — Arrival  of  mission.ary 
ship  at  the  island,  1848-  A jo3'ful  and  refreshing  public  service 
with  the  natives — An  address  on  the  occasion  by  a native — 
Opening  of  a new  chapel — Present  chapel  and  school  accommo- 
dation on  the  island — Arrival  of  English  missionary  to  inland 
stations — First  complete  edition  of  Bible  in  native  language  re- 
ceived on  shore — EflTects  of  a rain  storm — Two  men,  the  last  of 
the  heathen  families,  converted — Death  of  the  first  native 
teacher  to  the  island — Death  of  the  native  who  first  destroyed 
the  idols  of  the  land — Conclusion.  ....  185 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 

CHAPTER  I. 

Aitutaki,  the  third  island  of  the  group  in  size  and  population — The 
first  visited  by  the  Christian  teacher — Mission  commenced,  1821 
— Success  of  native  teachers — -Complete  overthrow  of  idolatry 
— The  Camden,  mission  ship,  visits  the  island,  1839 — Location 


CONTENTS. 


XI 


of  Rev.  H.  Royle  on  the  island — Wanton  act  of  cruelty  by  a 
captain  of  an  English  ship — Fears  of  the  people — Inconsistency 
and  laxity  in  marriage — Evils  of  divorce — Evils  arising  from 
betrothment  of  children — Missionary  fidelity  and  consequent 
troubles — Encouragement  in  schools — Chapel  burnt  down  by  a 
disafi'ected  party — Chapel  rebuilt — An  attempt  to  set  the  whole 
settlement  on  lire — New  chapel  destroyed — Missionary’s  life 
threatened — Successful  issue  of  faith,  patience,  and  labour.  . 196 

CHAPTER  II. 

Effects  of  !i  storm  on  the  island — Many  of  the  most  abandoned  cha- 
racters reclaimed — Deaths  of  some  of  the  missionary’s  early 
native  friends — Illness  of  the  missionary’s  wife— Visit  to  Raro- 
tonga— Mutual  rejoicing  of  the  natives  of  both  islands — A 
speech  of  an  Aitutakian — State  of  the  island  in  1846 — Some 
reasons  why  a mission  ship  is  needed  for  the  islands — Mission- 
ary’s ill  treatment  on  board  a ship — His  danger — Another  voy- 
age— Misconduct  of  seamen — A vessel  wrecked  on  the  reef  of 
the  island — Disorder  introduced  on  shore  by  the  crew — Euro- 
pean missionaries  for  some  time  required  at  stations  visited  by 
ships — The  mission  advances — Pleasing  instance  of  a young 
Christian.  .......  206 


CHAPTER  III. 

An  American  whale  ship  wrecked  on  the  island — A native  letter  of 
report — The  Captain’s  testimony — Contrast  in  the  cruelty  of 
natives  of  a heathen  island — Missionary  encouragements — The 
church  the  keystone  of  society — State  of  the  two  stations  on 
the  isl.and — Missionary  wife — Maternal  Association — Numbers 
iu  school — Missionary  zeal  of  the  native  church — Its  members 
gone  to  heathen  lands — Devastations  of  a storm  in  1854 — Grati- 
fying instance  of  native  kindness  and  concern  for  the  mission 
family — Ravages  of  measles  on  the  island — Practical  Chris- 
tianity of  the  natives — Their  missionary  contributions — Con- 
clusion. . . . . . . . .215 


THE  ISLAND  OF  ATIU. 


Tahitian  natives  driven  to  Atiu  in  a storm — The  island  discovered 
iu  1777 — First  missionary  visit,  1822 — Trials  of  the  native 


xii 


CONTENTS. 


teachers — Progress  of  the  mission — Papehia  visits  the  island — 
Rev.  E.  Krause  resides  among  the  people — Incidents  of  his  land- 
ing— Elnessof  M.  Krause — State  of  mission  in  1843 — The  Rev. 

H.  Royle’s  visit  to  the  island — His  labours — His  trials  and  per- 
secution— State  of  the  people  in  1845 — Romantic  tale  of  a hea- 
then voyager — New  chapel  opened  in  1846 — An  account  of 
Rupe,  the  native  pastor,  on  Atiu — Natives  of  Atiu  employed  in 
aiding  the  missionary  cause — Conclusion.  . . . 225 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MAUK^:. 

The  island  visited  hy  Lord  Byron — His  lordship’s  surprise  at  the 
civilized  state  of  the  people — Testimony  of  a sailor  who  lived 
some  time  on  Mauk4 — Lamentation  of  the  chief — Missionary 
visit  to  the  island,  1843 — Dangers  in  landing — Arrival  at  the 
village — Public  services — Missionary  contributions — Want  of 
school  material — Missionary  visit  to  the  island  in  1845 — Fright 
of  the  natives  on  seeing  the  new  mission  ship — Explanation  of 
the  cause — Progress  of  the  mission — Itio,  the  teacher,  and  his 
wife — Itio’s  letter  to  the  church  on  Rarotonga — The  annual 
meeting  of  the  schools — United  services  with  natives  of  other 
islands — Conclusion.  ......  235 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MITIARO. 

The  situation  and  general  appearance  of  the  island — Its  soil,  fruits, 
and  lake — Its  first  people  came  from  Atiu — The  people  of  Atiu 
take  the  gospel  to  Mitiaro — The  overthrow  of  idolatry  on  tho 
island — The  Tahitian  teacher  takes  up  bis  abode  with  the  peo- 
ple— Succeeded  by  a Rarotongan  evangelist — Missionary  visits 
to  the  island  in  1843  and  in  1845 — The  teacher’s  letter  to  the 
missionary,  1849 — Tho  teacher’s  wife  in  trouble  re.specting  tho 
women  of  Mitiaro  smoking  tobacco — Her  husband’s  measures 
to  do  away  with  the  practice — Teacher’s  endeavours  to  advance 
civilization — People  prepare  to  build  a stone  chapel — Supersti- 
tious difficulties — many  of  tho  people  visit  Mauke  .and  Aitutaki 
— Opening  of  the  new  chapel — Native  contributions  to  tho  cause 
of  missions — Conclusion.  ..... 


CONTENTS. 


xiii 


^ptnr^2ti  Isits. 

THE  ISLAND  OF  MANIIKI. 


PAOS 

Situation  of  Penrhyn  islands — Native  youth  from  Tahiti  landed 
on  Maniiki — His  report  of  Christianity — Voyages  of  the  islanders 
in  their  canoes — Consequent  calamities — Nine  natives  in  a canoe 
picked  up  at  sea  by  an  American  captain — These  are  brought 
to  the  Hervey  group — Landed  on  Manuai — Incidents  while 
there — Attempts  of  Aitutaki  church  to  visit  them — -Theirremoval 
to  Aitutaki — Kind  reception — The  Maniikians  wonder  at  what 
they  see  on  Aitutaki — The  natives  taken  to  Maniiki  in  the 
mission  ship — Rarotongan  teachers  land — Incidents  of  landing 
— Success  of  the  teachers — Chieftain  pride  rebuked — Mission- 
ary visit  in  1852 — Copplete  copies  of  the  Bible  taken  on  shore 
— Present  state  of  Maniiki.  , , . • . 255 


THE  ISLAND  OF  TONGAKEVAj  OR,  PENRHTN’S 
ISLAND. 


Tongareva  a lagoon  island — Visit  of  an  American  ship  in  1S4I — Tho 
wildness  of  the  natives — Opinion  of  a Queen’s  Commissioner 
respecting  the  natives — Murder  of  a New  Zealander — Sub- 
sequent blight  on  the  cocoa-nut  trees  of  the  island — A Cali- 
fornian vessel  wrecked  on  the  island — The  crew  saved — Two 
natives  of  the  island  brought  to  Rarotonga — Native  teachers 
return  with  them  to  Tongareva — Successes — Novel  coincidence 
about  the  act  of  sneezing — Reflections — Conclusion.  . . 265 


SAVAGE  ISLAND;  OR,  THE  ISLAND  OF  NIUE. 

Savage  Island  discovered,  1774 — The  heathen  character  of  the  people 

— Missionary  visit  in  1830 — Two  natives  taken  to  Raiatea 

Returned  to  instruct  their  countrymen — Were  murdered In- 

terview with  a Savage  islander  on  board  the  mission  ship — His 
2 


CONTENTS. 


xiV 

PAOll 

reports  respecting  his  countrymen — Intercourse  with  the  people 
in  1840 — A scheme  to  murder  the  missionary,  1842 — Native 
teachers  landed  in  1846 — The  fears  and  prejudices  of  the 
islanders — Their  ill  treatment  of  the  teacher — Subsequent  success 
— Chapel  built — Law  and  order  partially  established — Lament- 
able affray  with  a ship  of  war,  1852 — Visit  of  mission  ship, 
1854 — Complete  overthrow  of  idolatry — Conclusion  . . 270 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Mission  School-house,  Ngatangiia,  Rarotonga. — Frontispiece. 

PA6B 


Titikaveka  Chapel,  Rarotonga 
Avarua  Chapel,  Rarotonga  . . . 

Interior  of  Avarua  Chapel 
Arorangi  Chapel,  Rarotonga  . , 

Institution  House,  Rarotonga  . 

‘‘  What ! all  alone,  Tinomana?"  . 
IMangaia.  Mission  House,  Chapel,  etc. 
Natives  of  Mangaia  . . . . 

Mangaia.  A Rain  Storm  . . 

The  Island  of  Aitutaki  . . , 

Papehia.  Isaia,  Papehia’s  Son  . 

A Coral  Reef,  Lagoon  Island  . , 


55 

73 

74 
90 

108 

131 

146 

161 

192 

199 

227 

261 


* ri 

'W  ■'  -■■  *■  • . b»«V''  '^t  1 ' •' 

S 


bk- 


^C‘  ^ ‘‘ 


4t 


Iv  itrJ;i«,,Hg«i 


»p^' 


iiW  r »*>«M 


v^;-  • , a 
\o  %J9~  lo  ''>nAV 


7 ^ 


1 1 *<■ 


i;tl!  uuT 


^atasK  ,P£Xt  ji^iutil  ♦«4#trf>»IA 
rtt  Ucr{ii«u>M  ste 

'i*'  ‘•'*'‘'A  ^£awH;l  t 

t,’*^»(pip.  ^.i»fcf yi .-Ti#f!/,'^'^*«w.'  :*?inw 

ty»t  ii  irr»w  ^ ’ll* 

• \ ^ Wi-g  iji  ; tk  1 i^a^-tyrSi 

^ V • »■  «x 


GEMS  EEOM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


f crbc]|  IslHttb  6r0it^. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


CHAPTER  I. 

Islands  of  the  Hervey  group — Situation,  dimensions,  physical  charac- 
teristics of  Rarotonga — Ancestral  tribes  of  the  present  population  — 
Captain  Cook’s  discovery  of  the  other  islands  in  the  group — Reports 
of  his  expedition  brought  to  Rarotonga  by  natives — The  people  pray 
to  their  gods  that  the  Kookes  may  be  brought  to  their  island — Their 
prayer  answered — Reports  reach  the  island  of  the  English  Mission- 
aries being  on  Tahiti — A Sydney  trading  vessel  visits  the  island — 
Lengthened  residence  of  captain  and  crew — Numerous  evils  arising 
therefrom — The  vessel  leaves  the  island — Natives  are  taken  away 
on  board. 

The  Hervey  Island  group  consists  of  the  islands  of 
Rarotonga,  Mangaia,  Aitutaki,  Atiu,  Mauke,  Mitiaro,  and 
Manuai.  These  are  all  inhabited,  except  Manuai,  and  are 
situated  between  157°  and  160°  west  longitude,  and  18°  30' 
and  22°  south  latitude.  Most  of  these  islands  were  discovered 
by  that  untiring  navigator.  Captain  Cook,  in  the  years 
1773  and  1777 ; by  him  the  group  was  denominated  by 
2*  (17) 


18 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


its  present  name,  in  honour  of  the  Honourable  Captain 
Ilervey  of  the  Navy,  one  of  the  Lords  of  the  Admiralty. 

Rarotonga  is  nearly  seven  hundred  miles  south-west 
of  Tahiti,  is  situated  21°  12'  south  latitude,  and  1G0°  west 
longitude,  and  is  the  largest  island  of  the  Hervey  group. 
Its  outer  reef  is  thirty-five  miles  in  circumference,  and  its 
mountains  rise  four  thousand  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 
Its  barrier  reef  is  a protective  wall  of  immense,  deep^  com- 
pact, block  coral,  from  a quarter  of  a mile  to  a half  a mile 
broad;  which  at  low  tide  is  almost  bare,  but  which  at  high 
tide  has  four  feet  to  six  feet  of  water  on  it.  The  chasms 
seaward,  in  the  reef,  vary  from  ten  feet  to  twenty  feet  in 
width,  and  form  passages  of  egress  and  ingress  to  canoes 
and  boats;  one  of  these,  in  the  north,  is  large  enough  to 
admit  a vessel  of  forty  tons  burden,  but  affords  no  protection ; 
and  on  the  south-east  side  there  is  another,  which  forms  a 
miniature  harbour,  deep  and  safe,  and  beautifully  adorned 
by  four  evergreen  lovely  islets ; but  being  windward,  it  is 
not  available  for  ships.  With  these  exceptions,  there  is  no 
anchorage  round  the  island.  It  is  a reef-bound  coast, 
shelving  slightly  seaward,  then  sinking  perpendicularly 
thousands  of  feet  towards  the  foundation  of  the  sea. 

Against  this  barrier,  the  mighty  waves  of  the  Pacific,  of 
deepest  blue,  rise  in  majestic  grandeur  to  a height  of  more 
than  twenty  feet,  then,  curling  over,  break  in  innumerable 
myriads  of  silvery  white  spray,  and  dash  in  subdued,  yet 
graceful  beauty  on  tbe  shore. 

A long,  white,  sandy  beach,  varying  from  ten  to  a hun- 
dred feet  wide,  forms  a natural  margin  to  a comparatively 
level  tract  of  land,  round  the  whole  of  the  island;  and 
which  is  richly  and  constantly  covered  with  fruitful  groves 
of  chestnut,  cocoa  nut,  bread  fruit,  and  banana  trees. 

Beyond  this,  inland,  there  is  for  the  most  part  a long,  low, 
slip  of  marshy  ground,  cultivated  as  taro  swamps,  at 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


19 


whose  base  rise  hills  innumerable ; then,  deep,  wild,  ragged 
fertile  valleys  intervene  between  another  range  of  higher 
hills;  then,  other  valleys;  and  thence,  hill  on  hill,  and  moun- 
tain on  mountain,  piled  on  each  other  in  rich  variety  of  size, 
and  form,  and  verdure.  Some  of  them  present  a broad,  bold, 
black  biisaltic  face ; others,  yielding  to  the  effects  of  time 
and  weather,  reveal  a decomposed  red  sandy  soil ; while 
others  betray  their  heterogeneous  origin  by  conglomerated 
masses  of  pebble,  sand,  and  fragment  rock.  For  the  most  part, 
however,  both  hills  and  valleys  are  covered  with  deep  alluvial 
earth,  yielding  an  abundance  of  trees  and  shrubs,  and  fruit 
and  fern,  which  cover  the  highest  mountains,  whose  lofty 
summits  are  seen  sixty  miles  at  sea.  It  is  a lovely  spot, 
one  of  nature’s  fairest  gardens,  where,  if  anywhere  on 
earth,  we  should  have  found  man  an  incarnation  of  love  and 
holiness,  and  intelligent  adoration  of  the  Creator;  but  where, 
in  reality,  we  found  him,  true  to  his  apostasy,  ignorant, 
and  vile,  and  hateful;  a worshipper  of  idols,  a slave  to 
carnality,  a personification  of  the  devil. 

The  present  inhabitants  of  the  island  of  Rarotonga  are 
descendants  from  two  ancestral  tribes,  who,  according  to 
traditions,  came  together  to  the  island  about  thirty  genera- 
tions ago.  Stripping  those  traditions  of  what  may  be  deemed 
fabulous,  it  appears  that  one  tribe  came  under  the  guidance 
of  a renowned  Tahitian  warrior,  called  Tangiia;  and  that  the 
other  tribe  was  headed  by  a distinguished  chief,  called  Ka- 
rika,  from  Samoa ; but  although  the  Karika  tribe  was  the 
last  who  came  direct  from  Samoa,  yet  it  is  evident  that  the 
Tangiia  party  had  also  come  from  that  icestward  group  some 
generations  before,  and  had  found  their  way  to  Tahiti. 

On  reaching  Rarotonga  they  found  an  aboriginal  race 
on  the  south  side  of  the  island,  who  were  physically  and 
mentally  much  inferior  to  themselves.  The  people  of  this 
tribe  were  few  and  feeble,  and  most  of  them  were  soon  sub- 


20 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


dued;  while  the  remnant  amalgamated  with  the  new  pos- 
sessors of  the  soil. 

The  whole  of  the  land  was  then  divided,  almost  equally, 
between  the  Ngati-Tangiia  and  the  Ngati-Karika  tribes ; 
each  keeping  itself  distinct  and  independent  from  the 
other.  Thus  established,  they  eontinued  on  more  or  less 
terms  of  amity,  until  about  a hundred  and  fifty  years 
ago,  there  arose  a most  tyrannical  chief  over  the  Tangiia 
tribe ; so  sacred  was  his  body  considered,  that  he  rarely  ever 
walked  on  the  ground,  but  was  carried  on  a man’s  shoul- 
ders ; and  whenever  he  appeared  in  public  before  his  peoplej 
he  was  seated  on  the  naked  backs  of  two  or  three  of  his 
slaves,  whose  bodies  were  laid  prostrate  on  the  ground 
for  this  purpose ; all  land,  and  fruit,  and  fish,  and  property, 
and  persons  in  the  district,  were  subjected  to  the  cruel  des- 
potic will  of  this  would-be  god.  The  people  bore  this 
oppression  long,  but  finding  that  it  grew  beyond  all  endur- 
ance, a few  petty  chiefs,  who  had  well-nigh  lost  all  their 
rights,  united  in  a revolt,  and  succeeded  in  driving  the  des- 
pot and  his  family  to  the  west  and  south-west  parts  of  the 
island.  Since  that  time  these  confederate  chiefs  have 
maintained  their  independence.  Hence  the  third  party  on 
the  island.  1.  Ngati-Karika,  who  occupy  the  north  dis- 
tricts, and  are  governed  by  the  Makea  family.  2.  Ngati- 
Tangiia,  beinga  confederate  body  of  independent  landholders, 
who  retain  the  south-east  and  south  portions  of  the  land ; 
and  who  have  vested  magisterial  power  in  the  elder  branches 
of  the  families  of  Pa,  and  K.ainuka,  two  mighty  warriors 
of  ancient  renown.  And,  3.  Ngati-Tinomana,  who  are  the 
descendants  of  Ngati-Tangiia,  and  retain  equal  rank  with 
the  Makea  family;  these  with  their  landholders  and  clans 
inhabit  the  west  and  south-west  parts  of  the  island. 

In  his  passage  from  Mangaia  to  Aitutaki,  Captain  Cook 
must  have  passed  very  near  the  island  of  Karotouga,  but  he 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


21 


did  not  discover  it.  From  time  immemorial  the  people  had 
known  much  of  Tahiti,  and  Samoa ; hut  they  had  no  know- 
ledge whatever  of  other  lands  or  other  people,  until  about 
seventy  years  ago,  a canoe  having  drifted  from  one  of  the 
adjacent  islands  to  Karotonga ; in  which  there  were  natives 
who  landed  and  remained  some  time  on  shore.  These  were 
the  first  to  give  reports  respecting  the  white-skin  foreign- 
ers, whom  they  called  Kookes.  These  visitors  had  seen 
Captain  Cook;  and  their  descriptions  of  his  vessels,  the 
number  of  his  men,  the  vast  quantity  of  his  property,  the 
years  they  were  away  from  their  own  distant  land,  their 
food,  their  guns,  and  numerous  other  matters  connected 
with  the  white  men,  formed  the  whole  subject  of  conversa- 
tion ; and  the  intelligence,  with  repeated  additions  and 
exaggerations,  spread  from  tribe  to  tribe,  until  the  whole  of 
the  people  became  so  excited  and  interested  in  the  Kookes, 
that  they  made  special  prayer,  aceompanied  with  special 
offerings  to  the  gods,  that  these  wonderful  people  might  be 
brought  to  their  land. 

In  answer  to  this  prayer,  as  it  would  seem,  a large  Eng- 
lish ship,  soon  afterward,  appeared  off  the  island ; at  its 
sight  the  joy  of  the  people  exceeded  all  limits,  shouts  of 
praise  to  Tangaroa  were  heard  from  every  lip,  and  multitudes 
of  them  hastened  to  the  beach,  expecting  the  white  man 
would  land ; hut  as  the  mighty  vessel  came  near  to  the  shore, 
it  hove  to ; and  their  fear  became  equal  to  their  previous 
joy.  None  of  the  mysterious  strangers  appeared  disposed 
to  come  to  the  land,  and  for  some  time,  none  of  the  natives 
would  venture  off  to  them.  At  length  one  bold-hearted 
fellow  boarded  his  canoe  and  paddled  along  side  the  vessel; 
his  heart  however  failed  him,  and  he  was  about  to  turn  back, 
but  being  encouraged  by  the  foreigners  he  went  on  board. 
Kindness  overcame  his  fears,  but  not  his  astonishment ; 
with  almost  breatliless  surprise  he  silently  viewed  the 


22 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


sliip,  the  rigging,  the  people,  and  other  things ; and  after 
remaining  some  time  he  returned  to  his  canoe,  and  the  ship 
passed  on  her  voyage. 

On  landing,  this  hero  of  the  day  declared  that  he  had 
been  on  board  a floating  island ; that  groves  of  cocoa  nuts 
and  bread  fruits  and  bananas  were  growing  there;  and  that 
they  had  not  heard  the  half  respecting  the  wisdom,  the  pro- 
perty, and  the  kindness  of  those  wonderful  Kookes. 

Years  rolled  by  and  no  other  ship  came  to  Rarotonga; 
and  no  further  tidings  were  gained  respecting  the  white  man, 
until  a canoe,  driven  by  a storm  from  Aana,  near  Tahiti, 
reached  the  island,  having  on  board  two  or  three  natives. 
These  not  only  confirmed  former  reports  respecting  the 
Kookes,  but  revealed  still  further  wonders;  stating  that 
some  of  these  strangers  had  come  from  Beritani,  and  were 
the  servants  of  Jehovah,  their  God,  and  that  they  were 
teaching  his  word  to  the  people;  that  Jehovah  was  the  true 
God,  and  Jesus  Christ,  his  Son,  was  the  only  Saviour. 

This  news  alike  interested  and  astonished  the  islanders. 
Many  looked  forward  with  anxiety,  and  all  with  curiosity, 
to  a day,  as  being  certainly  near,  when  these  new  and  great 
things  would  reach  their  own  land.  But  nearly  twenty 
years  passed  away  before  another  English  ship  visited  their 
shores,  and  this  was  the  last  before  the  introduction  of 
Christianity  to  the  island ; and  as  it  is  intimately  connected 
with  that  event,  we  must  give  a brief  detail  of  its  visit : — 

In  the  year  1820,  or  thereabout,  a merchant  ship  from 
one  of  the  colonies,  sailing  between  the  islands  of  the  Her- 
vey  group,  discovered  the  then  unknown  island ; and  com- 
ing near  shore,  a boat’s  crew  of  white  men  was  landed  on 
the  district  belonging  to  Ngati-Tangiia. 

Without  intending  any  mischief,  the  wild,  savage,  yet 
delighted  natives,  rushed  to  the  boat,  and  made  attempts  to 
secure,  each  one  for  himself,  a white  stranger.  This  rough 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONOA. 


23 


dealing  however  alarmed  the  sailors,  who  fled  to  their  boats, 
and  on  being  pursued,  they  fired  their  guns  over  the  heads 
of  the  natives,  and  thus  escaped.  Not  willing,  however,  to 
leave  an  island  they  had  been  so  fortunate  to  discover,  and 
thinking  its  resources  might  add  to  their  merchandise, 
they  sailed  round  to  the  north  side.  There  the  vessel  was 
brought  to  an  anchor,  and  the  captain  and  crew  were  more 
mildly  received  by  the  Ngati-Karika  party,  than  they  had 
been  by  the  Ngati-Tangiia.  They  landed  every  day,  for 
nearly  a week,  and  then  removed  to  the  little  harbour  in 
the  east,  where  they  remained  three  months.  The  real  ob- 
ject the  captain  had  in  view  in  so  long  a stay,  among  such 
a people,  we  have  never  been  able  to  discover,  except  that 
he  employed  his  men,  some  portion  of  the  time,  in  cutting 
down  large  quantities  of  nono  trees,  a yellow  wood,  which 
might  have  been  mistaken  for  sandal  wood.  Be  that  as  it 
may,  the  whole  history  of  their  stay  on  the  shores  of  Raro- 
tonga was  a continued  series  of  rapine,  cruelty,  vice,  and 
bloodshed.  So  disgraceful  was  their  conduct  that  the  cap- 
tain did  not,  either  for  his  own  credit  or  safety  sake,  publish 
the  longitude  and  latitude  of  this  lovely  island ; of  which, 
but  for  his  wickedness,  he  might  have  received  the  honour 
of  being  the  discoverer. 

Besides  the  captain,  there  were  nineteen  Englishmen, 
two  New  Zealanders,  and  onoNew  Zealand  woman.  After 
setting  themselves  on  shore,  the  whole  party  gave  themselves 
up  to  work  all  manner  of  wickedness  with  greediness.  Lay- 
ing aside  their  own  clothing,  they  adopted  the  more  than 
half-naked  costume  of  the  native ; and  fully  revelled  in  all 
their  abominable  habits.  Taking  advantage  of  their  visitors, 
who  in  the  mean  time  had  become  so  much  like  themselves, 
the  Ngati-Tangiia  pai’ty  solicited  their  aid,  with  their  guns, 
to  make  an  attack  on  the  tribe  at  the  west  of  the  island 
To  this  they  consented,  and  in  the  affray,  three  of  the  natives 


24 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


were  shot  dead  on  the  spot.  This  produced  much  conster- 
nation in  the  people,  even  in  the  friends  of  these  wicked 
men,  for  they  knew  not  how  soon  these  deadly  weapons 
might  be  employed  for  their  own  destruction;  they  wished 
them  gone.  The  foreigners,  too,  who  had  given  themselves 
so  fully  to  vice,  now  felt  that  their  deeds  brought  forth  fruits 
of  distress,  and  pain,  and  death ; having  stolen  food,  and 
pigs,  and  property  of  the  people,  having  violated  the  sanctity 
of  the  native  temples,  and  at  the  mouth  of  the  gun  robbed 
the  chiefs  of  their  wives,  the  natives,  with  one  consent, 
resolved  to  rid  themselves  of  their  oppressors.  A con- 
spiracy was  formed,  aided  by  Tumu,  a New  Zealand  man, 
one  of  the  crew.  This  was  detected  by  the  white  men,  and 
they  secured  him,  and  in  the  midst  of  the  people,  shot  him, 
as  an  example.  He  was  buried  in  Matapare.  Things  now 
came  to  a crisis.  The  New  Zealand  native  woman  was  the 
next  to  fall ; and  subsequently,  four  of  the  white  men  were 
murdered  by  the  natives.  As  these  troubles  increased,  pigs, 
and  property,  and  women  were  removed  from  the  settle- 
ments to  hidden  places  in  the  mountains ; and  fearing  a 
secret  onslaught  on  the  remainder  of  the  ship’s  company, 
the  captain  gave  orders  to  prepare  the  vessel  for  sea.  Glad 
to  aid  in  this  purpose,  the  people  became  off  their  guard,  and 
allowed  the  women  to  come  again  about  the  beach;  several 
of  whom  were  taken  by  force  *on  board  the  ship.  One  of 
these  was  a young  chieftainess,  called  Tapa^ru ; as  she  was 
being  dragged  to  the  boat,  her  father  in  deepest  distress 
rushed  into  the  crowd,  clasped  her  in  his  arms,  and  weeping 
on  her  neck,  cried  to  his  gods  for  help ; and  that  failing, 
he  exclaimed,  “ Better  that  we  two  die  here,  than  that 
these  savages  should  take  you  away  with  them  to  sea.” 
But  he  was  compelled  to  yield  his  hold ; Tapaeru  was  taken 
on  board ; and  the  ship  sailed  away  from  the  land.  Alas  I 
we  blush  for  our  fellow-countrymen  who  thus  acted,  and 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONOA. 


25 


who  led  the  Rarotongans  to  conclude,  that  the  white  man 
was  as  far  beyond  themselves  in  wickedness,  as  he  was 
superior  in  power  and  in  wisdom;  that  Jehovah,  the  God 
by  whom  they  swore,  sanctioned  deeds  of  cruelty  and  blood- 
shed that  their  own  gods  deprecated  ; and  to  resolve,  as  far 
as  in  them  lay,  to  prevent  the  white  Kookes  from  again 
landing  on  their  shores. 


CHAPTER  II. 


Location  of  the  different  tribes  in  Rarotonga — Native  family,  house,  and 
furniture — Frequency  and  cruelty  of  their  wars — Religious  character 
of  the  people  in  their  heathenism — Their  gods — Their  convictions  of 
sin — Their  ideas  of  moral  evil — Ancient  prophecies  concerning  the 
overthrow  of  heathenism — An  example — The  necessity  of  an  atone- 
ment for  sin  felt  hy  the  people — Their  efforts  to  satisfy  their  convic- 
tions— Occasional  human  sacrifices — Missionaries'  visit  to  the  oven 
of  atonement — The  belief  of  the  people  in  a future  state — Their  ideas 
respecting  it — The  adaptation  of  the  Gospel  to  their  wants  and  expe- 
riences. 

Before  recording  the  circumstances  under  which  Chris- 
tianity was  introduced  to  Rarotonga,  we  purpose  in  the 
present  chapter  to  give  a few  brief  illustrations  of  the  pre- 
vious moral,  social,  and  religious  character,  aud  habits  of 
its  people. 

We  have  already  noticed  the  location  of  the  different 
tribes.  In  times  of  peace  these  tribes  inhabited  the  low, 
level  tracts  of  lands  near  the  sea-side,  but  in  war  they  fled 
to  the  mountain  fastnesses ; they  were  not,  however,  mi- 
gratory, but  formed  themselves  into  fixed  settlements, 
of  more  or  less  concentration,  as  circumstances  rendered 
expedient  for  their  safety.  In  each  settlement  the  arlki 
(chief)  was  supreme  in  power,  and  despotic  in  rule.  Next 
in  rank  to  him  were  ui  mataiapo,  a class  of  independent 
(26) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


27 


landholders,  either  related  to  the  ariki,  or  having  gained 
their  position  by  deeds  of  valour.  Under  these  were  vi 
ranjatira,  a kind  of  dependent  tenantry,  having  certain 
privileges  which  distinguished  them  from  the  ma.ss  of 
commou  people,  who  were  called  e an  uniga,  and  who 
under  the  above  three  ranks,  were  in  the  eondition  of  serfs. 
Caste  did  not  exist  as  a system,  yet  each  grade  had  its  dis- 
tinct position  in  the  heathen  society  of  Rarotonga. 

A family,  as  the  term  signifies  to  an  English  ear,  was  not 
known  among  this  people.  The  chiefs,  mataiapos,  and  ran- 
gatiras,  were  wont  to  have  from  three  to  ten  wives  each, 
according  to  rank,  or  property,  or  renown.  Their  habita- 
tions were  long,  narrow,  low,  reed  huts,  the  ground  being 
covered  with  dried  grass,  and  the  whole  of  the  furniture 
consisting  only  of  sleeping  mat,  native  bark  eloth,  eloth- 
making  block  and  mallet,  stools,  and  bowls.  Licentiousness, 
deceit,  and  theft  prevailed  to  a fearful  extent;  and,  so  gen- 
eral and  constant  were  the  enmity  and  jealousy  of  one  tribe 
toward  another,  that  the  majority  of  the  people  were  con- 
fined to  the  range  of  district  where  they  were  born,  only 
hearing  vague  reports,  but  knowing  little  definitely,  respect- 
ing the  tribes  beyond  them. 

War,  either  offensive  or  defensive,  was  their  continual 
employment  and  delight.  A state  of  peace  was  rarely  ever 
known  to  continue  long  between  the  tribes.  Frequent  quar- 
rels arose,  sometimes  by  the  people  of  one  tribe  trespassing 
the  boundary  line  of  their  neighbour’s  land ; at  others,  by 
the  absconding  of  wives  from  their  husbands ; sometimes 
they  were  occasioned  by  acts  of  plunder  on  the  cocoa  nut 
and  bread  fruit,  and  taro  plantations;  and  at  others,  by  re- 
venge of  former  wrongs.  These  quai'rels  invariably  led  to 
fighting,  in  which  the  warriors  of  each  tribe  engaged  with 
the  utmost  desperateuess  and  cruelty.  The  first  victims  se- 
cured in  war  were  presented  to  the  gods,  and  the  head  of 


28 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


eacli  was  taken  in  savage  triumph,  while  yet  reeking  in  its 
blood,  to  the  chief  of  the  tribe,  and  the  bodies  of  such 
were  eaten  in  their  cannibal  feasts.  Cannibalism  prevailed, 
but  not  to  so  fearful  extent  as  among  the  tribes  of  Western 
Polynesia,  and  infanticide  was  committed  on  a large  scale, 
but  was  chiefly  confined  to  female  children,  when  two  or 
three  were  already  in  a family. 

Thus,  without  entering  into  detail  on  these  subjects, 
which  is  not  the  design  of  this  work,  we  see  that  the 
inhabitants  of  this  lovely  garden-island  of  the  sea,  were 
sunk  in  an  abject  state  of  naked,  barbarous,  savage 
heathenism.  Gross  darkness  covered  the  people,  and  their 
dwelling-place  was  full  of  cruelty  and  abomination. 

But,  although  such  was  the  moral  and  social  degradation 
of  the  inhabitants  of  Rarotonga,  yet  it  must  be  remembered 
that  they  were,  nevertheless,  a religious  people.  They  be- 
lieved in  the  existence  of  gods;  they  had  convictions  of 
sin ; they  felt  the  need  of  an  atonement  j and  they  had  a 
firm  hope  in  a future  state,  after  the  death  of  the  body. 

They  believed  in  the  existence  of  gods.  We  have  never 
found  a heathen  people  in  the  islands  of  the  South  Sea, 
who  denied  the  existence  of  a God.  It  appears  to  us,  that 
Satan  has  never  tempted  these  degenerate  tribes  to  deny  the 
existence  of  a God,  but,  in  his  great  masterpiece  of  sin  and 
iniquity,  he  has  given  them  deities  innumerable.  The 
Rarotongans  had  gods  of  wood,  and  of  stone,  and  of  cloth, 
and  of  feathers.  After  consecration,  these  images  or  idols 
were  supposed  to  be  uruia,  or  possessed  by  the  vaerua, 
spirit  of  some  individual  personage,  or  power,  and  was 
henceforth  worshipped  with  all  sincerity.  There  was  a god 
who  presided  over  the  birth  of  children,  another  who  super- 
intended man’s  journey  by  land,  another  who  had  especial 
charge  of  the  sea,  another  who  gave  fertility  to  the  soil, 
others  whoso  special  aid  was  solicited  in  war,  and  others 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


29 


who  had  the  decision  of  man’s  destinies  at  death.  Over 
all,  there  was  one  great  Deity,  the  Creator  of  all  things, 
and  the  preserver  of  all  things,  called  Tangaroa,  a god 
alike  known  and  honoured  by  the  natives  in  all  the  islands, 
inclusive  of  New  Zealand  in  the  south  to  the  Sandwich 
Islands  in  the  north,  and  from  Tahiti  in  the  east  to  Samoa 
in  the  west. 

The  people  of  Rarotonga,  in  their  heathen  state,  had  also 
conviction  of  sin.  Naked,  wild  savages  as  they  were,  they 
needed  not  a written  revelation  to  inform  them  that  they 
were  not  morally  what  they  ought  to  be.  They  were 
conscious  of  certain  obligations  of  right  and  duty,  which 
they  ought  to  have  discharged  to  the  gods  and  to  their 
fellow-men,  but  which  they  had  not  discharged.  They  felt 
they  had  done  things  which  they  ought  not  to  have  done, 
and  left  undone  things  which  they  ought  to  have  done. 
This  is  sin ) and  these  heathens  in  this  sense  felt  that  they 
were  sinners.  They  held  that  it  was  sin  to  profane  the 
names,  the  representations,  the  word,  and  the  habitations  of 
the  gods.  They  knew  it  was  wrong  to  steal,  to  commit 
lewdness,  to  murder : they  felt  that  these  and  other  wicked 
deeds,  were  followed  by  punishment  here,  and  that  they 
would  be  subjected  to  penalties  hereafter.  They  had,  as  we 
are  taught  by  Jehovah  to  expect,  more  or  less  developed,  in 
every  heathen  people,  a “ law  written  in  their  hearts,”  their 
consciences  also  either  condemning  or  commending  every 
action  of  their  lives. 

Besides  this,  there  were  a few  men  in  each  generation 
raised  up  publicly  to  reprove  the  abounding  iniquity  of  the 
times,  and  who  exhorted  their  fellow-countrymen  to  live 
orderly,  honestly,  and  peaceably;  to  offer  (prayer)  and 
akapaajma  (praise)  to  the  gods,  and  to  expect  a time  to  come, 
when  good  should  prevail  over  the  evil,  and  happiness 
abound  over  the  misery  by  which  they  were  then  sur- 
3* 


30 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


rounded.  Among  the  sayings  of  these  sages,  one  of  many  is 
often  referred  to  by  the  people  as  having  been  now  fulfilled. 
It  is  as  follows : — 


Takatakai  marei,  o, 

E aku  au  potiki  o ! 

Aua  e oro  pu  i to  kino,  o, 

£,  i to  tamaki,  e mate  ei  o 
Takatakai  marei  e, 

E aku  au  potiki  o ! 

To  vai  ra  tetai  inapotoa  e ! 

Kia  ora,  e aku  potiki  e ! 

Karo  tola  e mou. 

A heathen  father  is  here  represented  as  exhorting  the 
young  men,  growing  up  around  him,  not  to  ruin  themselves 
in  acts  of  folly  and  in  war.  It  may  be  translated  thus : — 

0 sons  beloved  ! 

Tread  gently  in  your  course. 

Run  not  rashly  to  do  evil, 

Or  into  deadly  war. 

0 sons  beloved ! 

Tread  gently  in  your  course. 

For  seasons  bright, 

Of  shining  light. 

As  full  moon  night. 

Are  yet  to  be  seen  on  earth. 

And  may  you  live  ! 

My  sons  beloved, 

For  the  present  is  not  lasting. 

Repeating  these  lines,  at  a missionary  meeting,  a year  or 
two  ago,  an  old  native,  who  for  many  years  had  been  a con- 
sistent member  of  the  church,  said,  “ Thus  did  my  father 
exhort  me,  and  blessed,  indeed,  are  my  eyes,  for  now  I see 
these  ‘ seasons  bright,  of  shining  light,’  of  which  he  spake. 
Jesus  is  that  light,  and  we  rejoice  in  him.” 

But  without  enlarging  at  present  on  the  happy  change 
now  come  over  the  people,  as  contrasted  with  the  reign  of 


31 


THE  ISLAND  OP  RAROTONGA. 

darkness,  under  which  they  had  these  convictions  of  sin, 
we  must  notice  the  fact  that,  urged  by  fears  and  anxieties, 
arising  out  of  these  convictions,  they  were  led  to  devise 
various  schemes  of  atonement  for  sin. 

They  felt  the  need  of  an  atonement.  They  were  not  those 
convictionless,  fearless,  thoughtless  kind  of  beings  which 
some  persons  suppose  heathens  to  be.  They  had  painful 
anxieties  and  dreadful  apprehensions.  In  approaching 
their  gods,  they  felt  that  it  was  necessary  to  perform  some 
service,  or  to  present  some  sacrifice,  in  order  to  expiate  con- 
tracted guilt,  and  to  secure  a desired  blessing.  “ How  shall 
I come  before  the  gods  ?”  was  the  hcartful  cry  of  every  in- 
dividual who  visited  the  heathen  altar  of  sacrifice.  All 
beasts  and  fowls,  all  fruits  and  flowers,  all  birds  and  fish,  all 
precious  ores  and  precious  stones — ^yea,  all  that  a man  had 
would  he  give,  if  so  be  he  might  thereby  propitiate  the  gods, 
and  gain  peace  to  his  troubled  heart;  and,  often  feeling  that 
his  all  was  too  poor  and  inefficient  to  secure  that  which  he 
needed,  the  distressed  heathen,  in  the  depth  of  his  extrem- 
ity, had  recourse  to  human  sacrifices,  and  not  unfrequently 
offered  the  fruit  of  his  body  for  the  sins  of  his  soul.  Such 
was  the  condition  of  the  Rarotongans  prior  to  the  introduc- 
tion of  the  gospel.  They  had  sacrifices  of  pigs,  and  fish, 
and  food,  and  also  human  sacrifices.  They  had,  what  might 
be  denominated,  acts  of  national  atonements,  and  of  family 
atonement,  and  of  individual  atonement  for  sin. 

On  the  prevalence  of  any  great  calamity  in  the  island, 
such  as  famine,  sickness,  war,  or  death,  the  first  thought  of 
the  people  was,  that  some  offence  had  been  given  to  the  gods 
— that  they  were  angry.  In  order  to  avert  this  anger,  and 
to  gain  a removal  of  the  calamity,  sacrifices — generally  on 
such  occasions  human  sacrifices — were  resorted  to.  Two  or 
three  natives,  the  most  wicked  of  their  own,  or  of  other 
tribes,  were  secured.  Their  arms  and  legs  being  bound 


32 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


with  green  thongs,  they  were  dragged  to  the  great  altar  of 
sacrifice,  on  which  they  were  presented  alive  to  the  gods,  the 
priest  at  the  same  time  making  confession  of  sin,  and  suppli- 
cating a removal  of  the  calamity.  This  ceremony  being 
over,  the  living  bodies  of  the  victims  were  then  removed 
and  placed  on  an  oven  of  red-hot  stones,  sometimes  called 
te  umu  Mini  07-a,  or,  “seeking  salvation  oven,”  and  at 
others,  te  umu  tarangaara,  or  the  “oven  of  atonement.” 

Three  or  four  years  ago,  in  company  with  a few  old  men, 
who  had  spent  the  first  years  of  their  manhood  in  heathen 
life,  I visited  this  great  oven  of  national  sacrifice.  The  paths 
leading  to  it  had  long  since  grown  over  with  brushwood, 
which  we  had  to  cut  down  as  we  advanced.  On  reaching 
the  spot,  I found  an  area  of  comparatively  clear  ground 
about  a hundred  feet  in  circumference,  surrounded  by  high 
trees  and  dense  bush.  In  the  centre,  was  a pit  five  feet 
deep  and  twelve  feet  wide.  This  pit  was  wont  to  be  filled 
with  firewood,  on  the  top  of  which  were  piled  large  basaltic 
stones.  These  were  heated  to  a red-hot  heat,  and  as  the 
wood  consumed,  they  sank  to  a level  with  the  ground.  This 
was  the  oven ; on  it  the  living  human  sacrifices  were  placed, 
and  burnt  to  death,  as  an  atonement  for  the  sins  of  the 
people.  As  we  gazed  on  this  scene,  and  remembered  the 
generations  of  bygone  days,  our  hearts  were  filled  with  emo- 
tions of  mournful  interest;  and,  singing  a hymn,  expressive 
of  sympathy  with  the  heathen  yet  in  darkness,  we  retired, 
praising  God  that  the  knowledge  of  the  true  atonement 
for  sin  had  been  brought  to  the  inhabitants  of  Rarotonga, 
not  a few  of  whom  had  proved  its  efficacy,  and  rejoiced  in 
its  grace. 

From  what  has  been  said,  it  will  be  seen  that,  in  trans- 
lating the  Scriptures  into  the  language  of  this  people,  and 
in  expounding  to  them  the  gospel  of  salvation  by  Jesus 
Christ,  we  have  no  need  to  introduce  foreign  words  to 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONOA. 


33 


represent  ideas  of  God,  and  sin,  and  atonement,  and  sal- 
vation ; but  that  we  adopt  their  own  words,  which  express 
sentiments  and  feelings  in  accordance  with  the  doctrines 
of  Christianity,  and  which  are,  in  a measure,  understood 
and  appreciated  by  those  whom  we  seek  to  instruct  and  to 
bless. 

In  closing  these  notices,  we  can  only  further  add  that  the 
natives  of  Rarotonga,  in  their  heathen  state,  believed  in 
future  existence  after  the  death  of  the  body.  This  will  have 
been  inferred  from  what  has  already  been  said ; their  con- 
victions, fears,  and  sacrifices  could  have  no  other  interpret- 
ation, and  consequently  we  find  that  this  doctrine  formed  a 
part  of  their  faith.  It  was  usual  to  speak  of  persons  dead  as 
being  asleep,  as  having  fallen,  as  gone  away,  and  as  having 
sailed  their  last  voyage.  These  terms  were  never  employed 
to  denote  the  death  of  beasts,  or  birds,  or  fish ; concerning 
them  the  word  mate,  dead,  was  invariably  and  exclusively 
used.  With  most  of  the  tribes  of  East  and  West  Polynesia, 
the  Rarotongans  believed  that  when  the  body  died,  the 
vaerua,  or  soul,  escaped  towards  the  setting  of  the  sun,  to 
a region  called  Avaiki;  that  the  favourites  of  the  gods 
were  admitted  into  their  presence,  where,  with  chiefs  and 
warriors,  they  revelled  in  every  excess  of  sensual  gratification, 
while  those  excluded  from  this  place  went  to  the  po,  a 
region  of  darkness,  horror,  and  distress. 

Much  more  might  be  said  on  these  important  subjects, 
both  by  way  of  fact  and  illustration,  but  enough  has  been 
advanced  to  answer  our  present  purpose.  These  heathen 
tribes  were,  in  their  heathenism,  a religious  people.  They 
had  ideas  concerning  God,  and  right  and  wrong,  their  con- 
victions of  sin  were  pungent,  and  led  to  a practical  concern 
about  something  which  they  called  salvation.  But,  alas, 
poor  distressed  creatures ! they  were  there  left  to  grope  in 
the  dark.  Neither  the  beautiful  light  of  nature,  nor  the 


34 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


convincing  light  of  reason,  was  sufficient  to  lead  them  to 
peace,  purity,  and  joy.  Nature  and  reason,  indeed,  did 
enlighten,  but  it  was  only  to  convince  and  to  condemn. 
Hence  the  wisdom  and  the  love  of  Jehovah  in  Christ,  and 
his  mission ; — “ I give  thee  a Light  to  lighten  the  Gen- 
tiles, that  thou  mayest  be  my  salvation  to  the  ends  of  the 
earth.”  The  whole  history  of  Christianity  in  the  world 
proves  its  divine,  perfect,  and  exclusive  adaptation  to  the 
end  proposed.  Its  facts,  and  no  less  the  facts  of  man’s 
religious  condition  in  the  heathen  world,  make  it  an 
imperative  duty,  on  Christians,  to  preach  the  gospel  to 
every  creature.  These  facts  form  the  basis  on  which  is 
built  the  glorious  and  benevolent  superstructure  of  Chris- 
tian missions,  and  are  our  apology,  to  unbelieving  and 
sclfi.sh  men,  for  the  talent,  and  the  time,  and  the  wealth 
expended  in  attempts  to  reach  the  necessities  of  a heathen 
world. 


CHAPTER  III. 

The  natives  taken  away  from  the  island  are  left  at  Aitutaki — They  hear 
of  Christianity  there — Information  respeeting  the  island  conveyed 
to  (he  missionaries — Teachers  landed  on  the  island  in  1823 — Ta- 
paeru’s  reception  by  her  countrymen — Heathen  merry-making  on 
account  of  her  return — Night  of  danger  to  the  teachers  on  shore — 
Missionaries  resolve  to  leave  the  people  without  a teacher — Papehia’s 
determination  to  remain  as  teacher — Tapaeru’s  influence  for  his 
safety — Surprise  of  the  people  at  the  new  things  ho  made  known  to 
them — His  preaching  to  the  natives  in  a grove  of  cocoa-nut  trees — 
Their  questions  respecting  God — -They  think  his  book  to  be  his  god 
— Visit  of  Messrs.  Tyorman  and  Bennett  to  the  island — Encourag- 
ing advance  of  the  mission. 

At  the  close  of  the  first  chapter  we  had  occasion  to 
mourn  over  the  wickedness  and  cruelty  of  the  white  man 
in  his  first  intercourse  with  the  natives  of  Rarotonga  j we 
have  now  to  see  how  God,  in  his  providence,  restrains  the 
wickedness  of  the  wicked,  and  overturns  their  deep-laid 
evil  schemes,  to  their  own  confusion,  and  to  his  own  glory_ 
As  Kurunaki  sailed  away  in  his  ship  from  the  shores  of 
Rarotonga,  he  no  doubt  regretted  the  loss  of  four  of  his 
crew,  but  must  have  rejoiced  that  he  had  escaped  with  his 
own  life,  and  in  having  gained  what  he  would  call  a triumph 
over  the  savage  islanders.  What  purposes  filled  his  mind 
in  reference  to  Tapaeru  and  her  captive  companions,  whom 
he  had  on  board,  we  know  not,  but  after  two  day’s  sail  the 

(35) 


36 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


ship  made  the  island  of  Aitutaki,  situated  about  a hundred 
and  fifty  miles  north  of  Rarotonga;  and  having  had  inter- 
coui’se  with  the  people,  he  was  induced  to  put  the  Raroton- 
gan  natives  on  shore  there.  This  act  led  to  the  introduction 
of  the  gospel  to  Rarotonga.  The  man  thought  not  so ; but 
God  was  there,  going  before  his  servants,  a breaker-up  of  the 
way,  securing  means  for  their  access  to  a heathen  people 
then  unknown  to  the  world. 

In  1821,  the  Rev.  J.  Williams,  on  his  voyage  to  New 
South  Wales,  succeeded  in  locating  native  teachers  on  the 
island  of  Aitutaki.  He  had  previously  heard  in  the  legend- 
ary tales  of  the  Tahitians,  of  Rarotoa,  and  now  the  fact 
of  its  existence  was  confirmed  by  accounts  which  he  gained 
from  the  Aitutakians,  but  which  they  called  Rarotonga.  In 
their  first  letters  to  Mr.  Williams,  the  native  teachers  on 
Aitutaki  gave  more  information  respecting  Rarotonga, 
stating,  with  certainty,  that  they  knew  its  situation,  and 
moreover  mentioning  that  a number  of  Rarotongan  natives 
were  on  Aitutaki,  ‘^who  had  been  brought  there  in  a white 
man’s  large  ship ; ” that  these  natives  had  renounced  hea- 
thenism, had  put  themselves  under  Christian  instruction, 
and  that  they  were  desirous  to  return  to  their  own  land,  in 
order  to  introduce  the  Christian  teacher  to  their  people. 

This  was  good  news  to  the  missionary  brethren  on  the 
eastern  islands ; it  was  considered  a sufi&cient  call  for 
further  effort ; and  after  conference  and  prayer,  Messrs. 
Williams  and  Bourne  were  appointed  to  visit  Aitutaki,  and 
thence  to  seek  the  introduction  of  teachers  to  Rarotonga. 
This  voyage  was  taken  in  1823.  The  ardent,  toiling  zeal 
of  the  missionaries  was  alike  rewarded  and  strengthened  on 
their  reaching  Aitutaki,  in  witnessing  gospel  successes  there; 
and  having  gained  all  possible  information  about  Rarotonga, 
they  determined  to  set  out  without  delay  for  its  discovery. 
The  people  of  Aitutaki  did  all  they  could  to  dissuade  them 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONOA. 


37 


from  their  purpose,  saying  that  the  people  of  Rarotonga 
■were  very  nuiuerous,  and  that  they  were  known  to  be  savage 
cannibals.  Rut  this  moved  them  not,  and  having  received 
the  exiled  natives  on  board,  in  company  with  a body  of 
teachers,  they  set  sail. 

The  first  and  second  days  at  sea  were  spent  pleasantly 
and  profitably  in  listening  to  details  from  the  natives  about 
the  various  islands  of  the  group,  but  from  the  third  to  the 
sixth  days  the  voyagers  were  in  tedious  and  anxious  sus- 
pense, being  baffled  in  their  attempts  to  discover  the  de- 
sired island.  Altering  their  course,  the  vessel  then  made  a 
circuit  of  the  hnoicn  islands  of  the  group,  Mangaia,  Atiu, 
and  Mitiaro.  At  each  of  these  islands  additional  informa- 
tion was  gained  respecting  Rarotonga,  which  encouraged 
another  attempt  to  find  it.  Again  they  set  sail,  and  after 
many  days  of  further  anxiety,  just  at  the  moment  when  the 
ship’s  stores  were  nearly  exhausted,  and  when  hope  and 
patience  had  well  nigh  yielded  to  despair,  the  soul-inspiring 
shout  of  “Land  0!  Land  0 !”  was  heard  from  the  looker- 
out  at  the  masthead ; and  in  a few  hours  afterwards,  the 
lovely  island  lay  unveiled  before  the  enterprising  men  of 
God. 

As  the  ship  drew  near  to  the  shore,  an  immense  number 
of  natives  were  seen  in  a state  of  great  excitement.  Their 
surprise  was  great  indeed  when  they  saw  a native  canoe 
laden  with  their  own  people  coming  from  the  ship;  but 
their  excitement  exceeded  all  bounds  when  they  were  told 
that  Tapaeru  and  her  party,  who  had  been  taken  away  in 
Kurunaki’s  ship,  had  returned,  and  that  they  had  brought 
with  them  e pvlce  orometua  to  instruct  the  people  about 
Jehovah,  and  his  Son,  Jesus  Christ.  Under  other  circum- 
stances the  announcement  of  the  arrival  of  the  pulic  oro- 
mefita  would  have  been  the  great  matter  of  interest,  but 
now  the  fact  of  Tapaeru’s  return  was  predominant  in  heart 


38 


OKMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


and  utterance.  The  chief  ordered  a special  escort  to  go  to 
the  ship,  headed  by  his  eldest  son,  to  convey  her  to  the 
shore.  On  landing  she  fell  at  the  feet  of  her  uncle,  who 
was  seated  in  heathen  state  under  the  shade  of  a wide-spread 
teinanu  tree.  Reverential  and  affectionate  obeisance  was 
paid  to  him,  and  then  in  a most  affecting  manner  she  intro- 
duced to  him  Papehia,  Vahineino,  and  the  other  Christian 
teachers.  The  missionaries  did  not  venture  on  shore.  It 
was  not  prudent  so  to  do,  for  apart  from  the  naturally  savage 
character  of  the  people,  they  still  remembered,  with  emo- 
tions of  revenge,  Kurunalci’s  ship,  and  were  jealous  of 
another  white  man  landing  in  their  midst.  Whilst  the  ship 
lay  off  and  on  the  island,  and  the  missionaries  were  on  hoard 
in  anxious  and  prayerful  suspense,  the  natives  were  revelling 
on  shore;  the  finest  fed  hogs  were  slaughtered,  the  best  fruits 
of  the  plantations  were  gathered,  and  as  the  shadows  of 
evening  came  on,  groups  of  savage  priests  and  warriors  came 
from  all  parts  of  the  island,  and  regaled  themselves  in  a 
sumptuous  feast.  As  night  advanced,  song,  and  dance,  and 
Zmaa,  inflamed  the  worst  passions  of  the  savages,  and  they 
talked  of  murdering  the  teachers,  and  of  placing  their  wives 
in  the  seraglio  of  the  chiefs.  Preparations  were  even  made 
to  perpetrate  their  vile  deed,  and  it  only  remained  for  the 
chief  to  give  his  nod  of  assent,  and  the  devoted  teachers 
would  have  been  sacrificed;  but  Tapneru,  faithful  to  her 
promise,  was  their  protectress;  she  argued,  and  wept,  and 
literally  fought  for  their  preservation. 

Spared  through  the  night,  at  early  dawn  the  following 
morning  the  teachers  returned  to  the  ship.  Delighted  to 
see  them  alive,  the  first  inquiry  of  the  anxious  mi.ssionaries 
was,  “ Can  you  remain  on  shore  ?”  “ Alas  !”  replied  the 

teachers,  “these  people  are  the  fiercest  savages  we  have 
ever  known.  The  Tahitians  were  bad,  but  these  are  much 
worse.”  Pointing  to  the  bruises  on  their  bodies,  and  exhib- 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAllOTONGA. 


39 


iting  their  torn  garments,  they  continued,  ‘‘We  have  spent 
a fearful  night ; but  for  Tapaoru  we  should  not  have  been 
alive  this  inoruiiigj”  aud  the  general  impression  was,  that 
none  could  venture  to  live  on  shore. 

It  was  felt  to  be  a trying  aud  a responsible  hour ; but  just 
at  the  moment  when  the  missionaries  had  decided  that  the 
island  must  be  left  unoccupied,  Papehia,  a young  native 
Christian,  came  forward,  and,  “ instead  of  uniting  with  us,” 
says  Mr.  Williams,  “ in  our  useless  regrets,  resolved  to  be 
left  to  attempt  the  work.”  “ Whether  the  savages  spare 
me,  or  kill  me,”  said  this  intrepid  preacher,  “ I will  land 
among  them.”  Ko  Jehova  toka  tiakl.  Jehovah  is  my 
Shepherd.  Tei  roto  au  i tuna  rima.  I am  in  his  hand ;” 
and  leaving  his  all  behind  him,  simply  clothing  himself' in  a 
shirt,  and  a few  yards  of  calico  as  a wrapper,  and  tying  in  a 
handkerchief  a book  containing  portions  of  the  Holy  Scrip- 
tures, printed  in  the  Tahitian  language,  he  was  prepared  for 
his  work.  On  the  reef  there  stood  a number  of  tall,  ath- 
letic warriors;  they  looked  in  proud  anger  and  disdain  on 
the  servant  of  Jesus  as  he  came  near  the  shore,  aud  with 
their  spears  poised  had  a will  to  hurl  them  at  him  ; but  they 
were  restrained,  and  I’apehia  landed,  alone  in  the  midst  of 
the  heathen  population  of  Rarotonga,  the  first  Christian 
teacher,  to  instruct  them  in  the  knowledge  of  the  true  God, 
and  of  salvation  by  Jesus,  his  Son. 

Of  the  few  natives  who  had  come  with  the  teacher  from 
Aitutaki,  only  two  or  three  could  be  depended  on  as  being 
faithfully  attached  either  to  himself  or  to  his  cause  ; among 
these,  Tapaeru  was  the  most  conspicuous,  who  already  gave 
evidence  that  she  had  not  received  the  mercy  of  God  in  pro- 
fession only  but  in  power.  Under  her  influence,  the  chief 
])romised  his  protection  to  her  friend,  but  laughed  at  his  at- 
tenijiting  to  overthrow  the  gods  of  RarotoTiga. 

Prom  the  first  day  of  his  lauding  Papehia  gave  himself 


40 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


solely  to  his  work;  every  act  of  his  daily  life  stood  out  in 
bold  contrast  with  the  deeds  of  the  people,  and  was  a lesson 
of  instruction  concerning  God  and  the  doctrines  of  his 
word.  Whether  at  home  or  abroad,  whether  at  meals  or 
at  work,  he  was  at  all  times  surrounded  by  a number  of 
natives,  curious  to  see  and  hear  some  new  thing.  As  his 
actions  and  words  wei'e  reported  from  clan  to  clan,  crowds 
of  people  came  from  all  parts  of  the  island,  to  whom  he 
gave  a simple  exposition  of  the  great  design  of  the  Evan- 
(jelia  a Jesii,  and  narrated  to  each  party  details  respecting 
the  overthrow  of  heathenism  and  idolatry  in  the  Tahitian 
i.slands.  That  there  was  no  more  war  among  the  tribes  of 
those  lands  was  as  mysterious  and  marvellous  as  that  the 
former  gods  were  no  more;  and,  without  understanding 
anything  of  the  genius  and  ultimate  design  of  the  gospel, 
the  ma.sses  of  these  barbarous  people  knew  and  appreciated 
the  advantages  of  peace,  and  were  willing  to  wish  success 
to  the  tuatua  tu  he,  the  strange  word  that  could  secure  its 
establishment.  Hence  were  kept  in  abeyance,  for  a time, 
those  feelings  of  hatred  and  opposition  which  a more 
intimate  acquaintance  with  the  purity  of  the  gospel  ex- 
cited, and  which  threatened,  subsequently,  to  destroy  the 
mission. 

At  this  time,  however,  novelty  and  excitement  brought 
the  people  together  in  such  crowds  as  to  create  the  necessity 
for  more  formal  public  worship.  A large  and  beautiful 
grove  of  cocoa-nut  trees  was  selected  for  the  temple,  and 
there,  in  the  midst  of  the  wild  multitude,  the  man  of  God 
day  by  day  expounded  the  mystery  of  the  words  of  his 
book.  At  first  scarcely  anything  excited  more  ridicule  than 
his  prayers;  to  how  before  nothing,  and  to  speak  to  a deity 
not  visible,  was  in  their  estimation  the  climax  of  folly. 
“ Hoes  not  your  God  visit  the  earth  T’  inquired  some  of  tlie 
people.  “ He  is  everywhere  present,”  replied  the  teacher. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


41 


‘‘presiding  over  and  blessing  all  the  works  which  he  hath 
made.”  “Ask  him  to  come  down  and  show  himself,”  was 
then  demanded.  “ He  is  a Spirit,  and  a spirit  only,”  was 
the  answer.  “ What ! a god  without  a body !”  was  the 
jeering  retort.  “ Who  will  believe  that  ?”  The  teacher 
was  unable  to  go  beyond  his  first  replies;  and  if  he  had 
had  the  ability,  the  persons  taught  had  no  power  to 
receive  it.  But,  adapted  to  his  work,  Papehia  turned  the 
discourse  to  something  practical.  “You  and  your  fath- 
ers,” he  said,  “ believe  that  Tangaroa,  and  Bongo,  and 
Oro,  are  great  gods  of  power,  and  that  to  injure  their  tiki 
would  be  followed  by  death.  Now,  in  the  Tahitian  islands, 
thc.se  gods  have  been  destroyed ; they  are  no  gods,  they  are 
a lie.  Jehovah  is  the  true  God.  He  is  a Spirit,  and  can- 
not be  seen.”  At  these  remarks  the  excited  natives  con- 
cluded that  the  teacher  was  not  only  nevena,  a fool,  but 
that  he  was  a tangata  pihikaa,  a liar.  “ Why  does  he 
talk  thus,”  said  they,  “ does  he  think  that  we  are  matapo, 
blind  ? He  says  that  his  God  cannot  be  seen,  and  yet  look 
at  him,  he  carries  his  God  about  with  him.  See,  how  he 
talks  to  it,  and  what  his  God  says  to  him  he  tells  us. 
Wherever  he  goes  he  carries  it,  when  he  sleeps  he  has  it 
near  him — that  is  his  God.”  It  was  his  book  to  which 
tliey  referred.  They  for  some  time  sincerely  believed  his 
book  was  his  god,  as  much  as  Tangaroa  was  theirs. 

Tlie  next  important  movement  which  engaged  Papehia’s 
attention  was  the  establishment  of  a daily  school.  Having 
a few  books  in  the  Tahitian  language,  he  began  to  teach  the 
young  people  the  alphabet,  and  many  of  the  old  folks  learnt 
portions  of  Scripture  by  memory.  By  these  and  other 
methods  knowledge  increased,  and  with  it  grew  a distaste 
for  the  follies  of  heathenism  and  idolatry;  and  it  became 
evident,  on  this  account,  as  well  as  from  the  determined 
opposition  of  the  priesthood,  that  Papehia  needed  assist- 


42 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


ance.  Up  to  this  time  he  had  been  the  only  teacher  on  the 
island,  but  just  now  he  was  joined  by  another  from  Tahiti, 
and  the  pioneering  work  of  the  mission  advanced  most 
rapidly.  There  were  but  few  real  converts,  yet  so  mighty 
had  been  the  teaching  of  the  gospel  in  this  short  time,  that 
the  foundations  of  idolatry,  as  a system,  were  evidently 
being  broken  up.  The  priests  were  the  most  inveterate  in 
their  opposition  to  Christian  teaching ; yet  strange  it  was, 
that  one  of  the  priests  was  the  first  man  on  the  island  who 
publicly  gave  up  his  idol,  at  the  same  time  placing  his  son 
under  the  care  and  instruction  of  the  teachers ; and  within 
ten  days  after  the  destruetion  of  his  idol,  fourteen  others 
were  consumed  in  the  flames. 

The  first  chief  who  publicly  gave  up  his  idols  was  Tino- 
mana.  One  day  after  a final  conversation  with  Papchia  on 
the  subject,  he  said  to  one  of  his  attendants;  “Take  a 
torch,  and  set  fire  to  the  vaerua  hino  and  his  temple.  “ Do 
it  not,”  commanded  his  priests,  “ he  is  mad.”  Still  Tino- 
mana  persisted,  against  the  expostulations  of  the  people. 
He  said,  “ My  heart  has  taken  hold  of  the  word  of  Jeho- 
vah j”  and  truly  nothing  but  this  could  have  induced  him  to 
burn  the  gods  that  his  fathers  held  so  sacred,  and  wor- 
shipped so  devotedly,  from  time  immemorial. 

Thus  the  work  of  destroying  idols  began  on  Rarotonga, 
and  ceased  not  until,  within  the  short  space  of  a few  months, 
a great  number  of  the  people  from  each  district  had  nomi- 
nally renounced  heathenism,  and  placed  themselves  under 
Christian  instruction.  Partly  to  secure  this  object,  and 
partly  to  strengthen  themselves  against  a threatened  attack 
from  the  remaining  portion  of  the  heathen  population,  the 
Christian  party  formed  an  alliance,  and  lived  together  in  one 
district;  and  not  fifteen  months  after  the  landing  of  Pape- 
hia,  the  London  Mis.sionary  Society’s  deputation,  Messrs. 
Tyerman  and  Bennett,  called  at  the  island,  and  found  the 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


43 


people  erecting  a chapel  300  feet  long  ! This  building  was 
tinished ; a pulpit  was  placed  at  the  extreme  of  either  end, 
from  which  each  teacher  simultaneously,  and  without  an- 
noyance, addressed  near  fifteen  hundred  naked,  wild  savages, 
whose  wildness,  however,  was  marvellously  kept  under 
restraint,  by  a general  conviction  that  Christianity  teas 
truth,  and  by  means  of  the  novelty  and  excitement  its  in- 
troduction to  the  island  had  occasioned. 

Mr.  Bourne,  of  the  Tahitian  mission,  who,  it  will  be  re- 
membered, was  with  Mr.  Williams  when  Papehia  was 
landed,  visited  the  island  about  twelve  months  after  Messrs. 
Tyerman  and  Bennett;  he  preached  in  the  large  chapel, 
saw  the  change  that  had  been  effected,  and  wished  that  his 
brother  Williams  had  been  with  him  to  share  his  joy.  flow 
wonderful!  A nation  changed  in  a day  ! Tyio  native  teach- 
ers, themselves  born  heathens,  and  trained  in  idolatry,  in  an 
island  nearly  seven  hundred  miles  away,  land  on  Barotonga, 
and  in  less  than  two  years  and  a half  were  the  sole 
instruments  in  bringing  about  the  revolution  we  have  thus 
far  witnessed  in  the  character,  habits,  and  worship  of  its 
heathen  population. 


CHAPTER  IV 

European  missionary  resides  on  the  island,  1827 — Separation  of  the  tribes 
to  their  own  districts — Adoption  of  a code  of  civil  law — Attention 
of  the  people  to  planting  and  house  building— Building  of  chapel  at 
Ngatangiia— The  opening  service — Arrival  of  Rev.  A.  Buzacott  in 
1828 — A painful  reaction  on  past  successes — Moral  defection  in  a 
native  teacher — Opposition  of  heathen  priesthood — Houses  of  the 
Christian  party  and  chapels  destroyed  by  fire — Mission  house  in 
danger — Destitution  of  necessary  supplies — Heavy  floods — Destrue- 
tion  of  missionary’s  house — General  and  fatal  sickness — Painful  and 
joyful  deaths. 

The  6tli  of  May,  1827,  was  a day  of  peculiar  joy  to  the 
enterprising  missionary  Williams.  For  the  first  time,  he 
then  landed  on  the  shores  of  Rarotonga.  Each  past  hurried 
visit  to  the  island  had  impressed  him  with  the  importance 
of  making  it  a principal  mission  station ; and  to  further  this 
object,  he  had  now  come  to  reside  awhile  with  the  peoj^le, 
in  order  to  consolidate  and  direct  their  transitive  state. 
He  had  the  happiness  also  to  be  accompanied  by  the  Rev. 
0.  Pitman,  who  had  been  appointed  to  take  up  a permanent 
abode  on  the  island.  Who  can  describe  the  heart  experience 
of  these  two  devoted  men,  as  on  that  day  they  witnessed 
the  remarkable  advance  already  made  against  former  hea- 
thenism, and  more  especially  in  the  enthusiastic  desire, 
manifested  by  a majority  of  the  population,  to  bo  further 
(IJ) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


45 


instructed  in  the  word  of  God.  Williams  remembered  his 
days  of  labour,  and  his  nights  of  anxiety  when,  four  years 
before,  he  put  Papehia  on  shore;  and  now  he  was  permitted 
to  reap  the  first  fruits  of  an  abundant  and  glorious  harvest. 
Ihtmau  was  young  and  devoted,  discriminating  and  ciiu 
tious;  and  whilst  he  rejoiced  that  the  foundations  of 
Christianity  had  been  laid,  yet  he  felt  that  a great  and 
responsible  work  demanded  the  best  energies  of  himself 
and  colleagues,  to  build  up  the  desired  superstructure  of  an 
enlightened,  pure,  and  active  Christian  people.  Hence,  on 
the  day  of  his  landing,  he  exclaimed  in  the  language  of 
united  praise  and  prayer:  “This  people,  so  recently  pagan, 
have  renounced  idolatry,  and  professedly  are  Christians. 
The  large  chapel  is  crowded  with  them,  and  they  are 
preached  to  by  a native  teacher.  0 thou  great  Head  of 
thy  church,  now  begin  and  carry  on  thy  regenerating  and 
sanctifging  work  in  their  hearts.” 

Much  pioneering  work  had  been  done,  which  could  not 
have  been  done  by  missionaries : but  now  the  people  were 
prepared,  and  required  instruction  and  discipline,  which 
native  teachers  at  that  period  were  not  able  to  give ; and  as 
we  proceed  in  this  narrative,  we  shall  have  abundant  reason 
to  rejoice,  that  European  missionaries  were  placed  on  the 
island  just  at  a time  to  take  advantage  of  the  previous  in- 
valuable labours  of  the  teachers. 

We  have  already  noticed,  that  the  natives  who  renounced 
idolatry  had,  for  the  purposes  of  instruction  and  safety, 
assembled  themselves  together  on  one  district  of  the  island. 
This  plan  was  wise  at  the  time,  and  not  without  its  beneficial 
effects  ; but  as  the  people  belonged  to  different  tribes,  it  was 
soon  found  not  only  to  be  inconvenient,  but  to  be  attended 
with  positive  evils;  and  soon  after  the  landing  of  Williams 
and  Pitman,  meetings  were  held  with  the  people  to  discuss 
the  propriety  of  forming  two  distinct  and  independent 


46 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


stations.  This  was  advised  by  the  missionaries,  and  most 
of  the  natives  wished  it,  but  peculiar  difficulties  arising 
out  of  their  family  and  land  relations,  increased  by  their 
pride,  envy,  and  jealousy,  for  some  time  prevented  its 
accomplishment.  These,  however,  were  at  length  overcome, 
and  the  Tangiia  party  took  up  their  residence  in  their  own 
district,  Ngatangiia;  and  the  Karika  tribe,  together  with 
Tinomana  and  his  party,  settled  at  Avarua;  each  division 
of  people  numbered  between  three  thousand  and  four  thou- 
sand, and  their  separate  location  was  an  important  epoch 
in  the  history  of  the  island.  It  was  the  commencement  of 
order,  which  introduced  a state  of  civil  and  social  life  of 
which  the  natives  had  previously  been  ignorant. 

In  their  heathen  state  every  form  of  civil  and  social 
crime  was  rampant ; theft,  adultery,  and  murder  were  acts  of 
every-day  occurrence;  and  although  punishment,  it  is  true, 
was  sometimes  inflicted  on  offenders,  yet  it  was  at  the  will 
of  the  chief,  who  was  alike  cruel,  unjust,  and  despotic;  to 
whose  will  were  subjected  life  and  property,  and  who  was 
himself  often  the  greatest  criminal  in  the  community.  In 
the  new  state  of  things,  however,  now  introduced,  the  neces- 
sity of  a righteous  code  of  common  law  was  soon  felt ; and 
circumstances  led  to  its  establishment.  Time  after  time,  as 
offences  occurred,  both  people  and  chiefs  consented  to  the 
enforcement  of  such  laws  as  were  adapted  to  meet  these 
offences;  until  the  simple  code  became  sufficiently  complete 
to  meet  the  existing  condition  of  society.  In  each  case  the 
law  was  discussed,  and  agreed  to  in  a popular  assembly  of 
ui  ariki,  and  ui  mataiapo,  and  ui  rangatira,  by  whose 
authority  it  was  written,  and  afterwards  signed  by  the  chiefs 
of  the  different  districts.  A staff  of  tried  men  were  selected 
as  a police  force,  trial  by  jury  was  adopted,  and  the  office  of 
chief  magistrate  was  vested  in  an  individual  of  known  char- 
acter and  ability,  at  each  settlement. 


THR  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


47 


Hoping  that  the  plunder  and  desolation  occasioned  by  war 
had  ceased,  the  people  were  encouraged  at  this  period  of  the 
mission  to  attend  to  their  plantations  with  greater  care  and 
constancy  than  they  had  hitherto  done;  and  the  industrial 
arts  of  civilized  life  were  also  introduced  to  them  as  far  as 
the  limited  resources  of  the  missionaries  allowed.  Instead  of 
the  low  unhealthy  huts  in  which  the  natives  had  formerly 
lived,  they  were  in.structed  and  assisted  to  build  neat  comfort- 
able lime  and  wattle  cottages;  and  in  this,  and  other  works 
connected  with  civilization,  the  carpenter’s  saw,  and  plane, 
and  mallet;  the  smith’s  forge,  and  bellows,  and  anvil;  and 
the  builder’s  scaffold,  and  rule,  and  line,  and  square,  were 
in  daily  use;  and  every  achievement  completed  by  these 
mighty  instruments  was  its  own  reward,  and  gave  a healthy 
impetus  to  the  newly  awakened  energies  of  the  semi-heathen 
people. 

'i'he  large  chapel,  three  hundred  feet  long,  built  by  the 
native  teachers,  was  a novel  and  interesting  building;  but 
it  was  also  rude,  inconvenient,  and  unsubstantial.  The 
time  had  now  come  when  something  better  should  be  intro- 
duced, and  the  people  of  Ngatangiia  began  in  good  earne.st 
to  accomplish  the  work;  tons  of  coral  lime  were  burnt, 
immense  trees  were  felled,  and  sawn,  and  otherwise  prepared 
for  the  building;  a suitable  site  was  cleared,  and  in  two 
mouths  from  the  time  of  commencement,  the  first  chapel, 
worthy  the  name,  was  finished.  It  was  one  hundred  and  fifty 
feet  long,  and  fifty-six  feet  wide.  Its  thatched  roof  was  sup- 
ported on  either  side  by  seven  iron-wood  pillars  twenty-five 
feet  high.  There  were  ten  doors,  three  at  each  side  and 
two  at  each  end,  and  twenty  windows  of  large  Venetian 
blinds  placed  at  proportionate  distances  round  the  whole  of 
the  building.  Not  being  ceiled,  the  roof  was  exposed;  and 
i t the  request  of  the  people,  some  of  their  former  au  tiki, 
or  carved  gods,  were  stripped  of  their  sacred  bark  cloth,  and 


48 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


hung  by  their  necks  at  the  rafters,  as  an  emblem  of  their 
degradation  and  death.  On  the  occasion  of  its  being  opened 
for  public  worship,  Mr.  Williams  preached  an  appropriate 
sermon  from  2 Chron.  vii.  14 — 16:  ‘‘I  will  forgive  their 
sin,  and  will  heal  their  land.  Mine  eyes  shall  he  open,  and 
mine  ears  attent  unto  the  prayer  that  is  made  in  this  place, 
and  mine  heart  shall  be  there  perpetually.” 

This  was  a saered  season  of  holy  joy  both  to  the  mission- 
ary, and  teachers,  and  people.  It  would  be  gratifying  to 
linger  here,  and  to  give  further  and  more  minute  details 
of  the  praetical  development  of  the  new  life  of  the  people 
at  this  stage  of  the  mission ; but  this  we  must  not  attempt. 
Things  having  been  thus  far  arranged,  Mr.  Williams 
removed  to  the  Avarua  station;  leaving  Mr.  Pitman  to 
carry  on  the  work  at  Ngatangiia,  who  preached  his  first  ser- 
mon to  the  people  in  the  month  of  August,  1827. 

Anxious  to  extend  his  missionary  enterprises  amongst  the 
heathen  natives  on  islands  further  west,  Mr.  Williams  was 
encouraged  in  his  purpose  by  the  appointment  of  the  Rev. 
A.  Buzacott  to  the  Rarotonga  mission ; who  landed  on  the 
island  February  4th,  1828.  The  people  of  Avarua  would 
willingly  have  detained  Mr.  Williams  as  their  missionary, 
hut  finding  that  he  had  other  work  to  do,  they  gave  a 
hearty  welcome  to  Mr.  Buzacott;  and,  quick  to  perceive  his 
numerous  and  peculiar  qualifications,  and  adaptation,  they 
exclaimed,  “ This  is  the  man  for  us  ! Koia  ia,  Truly,  this 
is  the  man  for  us !”  He  proved  himself  worthy  of  their 
highest  confidence  and  praise.  In  teaching,  and  preaching, 
and  labours  abundant,  he  and  his  devoted,  yet  more  weakly 
and  often-affiicted  colleague,  Mr.  Pitman,  were,  in  the  short 
space  of  seven  years  after  the  introduction  of  the  gospel, 
permitted  to  see  two  large  Christian  settlements,  which  for 
organization,  attendance  on  instruction,  and  general  results 
of  civilization,  presented  a fruit  of  Christ’s  gospel  as  com- 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


49 


plete  and  aa  glorious  as  any  gained  in  its  previous  conquests 
over  the  lieathen  world. 

AVe  have  hitherto  witnessed  the  advance  of  Christianity 
on  this  island  under  circumstances  favourahle  to  its  pro- 
gress; but  we  must  now  record  some  of  those  untoward 
events,  and  those  opposing  powers,  which  are  usually  ex- 
perienced by  it  soon  after  the  announcement  of  its  triumphs. 
A reaction,  severe  and  painful,  yet  natural  and  salutary,  now 
set  in  upon  the  professedly  Christian  stations.  The  first 
blighting  influence  occurred  in  the  moral  defection  of  one 
of  the  native  teachers,  not  Papehia,  but  his  early  com- 
panion. He  was  a man  of  strong  passions,  also  of  superior 
mental  and  physical  power;  and  he  succeeded  in  gaining  a 
dominant  position  among  a party  of  this  subdued  and  hesi- 
tating people;  in  this  position  his  grace  failed  him,  and  he 
fell.  His  fall  was  an  arrow  in  the  hearts  of  the  faithful  few, 
a stone  of  stumbling  to  many  of  the  formal  professors,  an 
oifeuce  and  a reproach  from  the  heathen  party;  and  a sig- 
nal triumph  of  the  spiritual  powers  and  principalities  in  high 
places. 

Encouraged  by  this  circumstance,  and  the  subsequent 
declension  of  many  occasioned  by  it,  the  revengeful  priest- 
hood sought  opportunity,  even  now,  to  crush  Christianity. 
Seventy  of  them  vowed  a vow  over  their  sacred  fires,  and 
in  the  name  of  the  neglected  gods,  to  die  rather  than  sub- 
mit to  the  gospel  of  Christ.  These  were  aided  and  sustained 
by  some  of  the  greatest  mataiapo  of  the  land,  who  did  all 
they  could  to  involve  the  two  settlements  in  war.  This, 
however,  failing  of  success,  they  had  recourse  to  setting  fire 
to  the  houses  of  the  Christian  party. 

At  Ngatangiia,  one  night  soon  after  the  missionary  had 
retired  to  rest,  the  war  whoop  was  heard  from  a hundred 
voices  in  the  settlement,  and  many  houses  near  his  own 
were  seen  in  flames.  Anxious  to  save  the  chapel  from  de- 


50 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


I 


struction,  he  ventured  out  into  the  midst  of  the  mixed 
crowd  of  friends  and  enemies ; but  alas  ! his  efforts  were 
unavailing,  and  that  night  the  beautiful  house  of  prayer,  to 
which  we  have  already  referred,  was  consumed  by  the  flames 
to  the  ground. 

At  Avarua  the  same  ruthless  work  of  destruction  was 
carried  on.  Night  after  night,  house  after  house  was  burnt 
to  the  ground;  until  things  had  advanced  so  far,  that  it  ap- 
peared only  to  require  the  destruction  of  the  missionary’s 
house  in  order  to  secure  the  complete  overthrow  of  the  mis- 
sion. The  little  band  of  Christians  arranged  themselves 
into  classes  of  flfteen  to  twenty  individuals  nightly,  to  guard 
the  mission  house ; these  had  wooden  gongs  which  they 
struck  continually,  making  a noise  sufficiently  loud  to  be 
heard  a mile  distant ; so  long  as  these  gongs  were  being 
beaten,  and  their  harsh,  discordant,  deafening  sounds  kept 
up,  so  long  could  the  mission  family  sleep,  for  that  was  a 
sign  of  safety;  but  as  soon  as  the  gongs  ceased,  and  were 
quiet,  the  missionary  was  awakened  through  fear,  lest  the 
watch  should  be  asleep ; and  not  knowing  the  moment  his 
house  might  be  in  flames,  and  he,  wife,  and  children,  buried 
in  its  ruins.  This  was  a time  of  trial.  Neither  of  the  mis- 
sionaries was  able  to  render  assistance  to  the  other.  Each 
was  surrounded  by  the  same  circumstances  of  distress,  and 
stood  in  jeopardy  of  his  life  every  hour.  Their  situation 
was  further  rendered  more  trying,  at  this  period,  from  the 
fact  that  no  ship  had  visited  them  for  eighteen  months; 
hence  they  were  left  without  supplies  of  clothes,  and  flour, 
and  other  things  necessary  to  their  continued  existence. 
There  was  no  “Children  of  England  Mission  Ship”  then; 
and  the  little  known  of  the  island  was  so  unfavourable  to  mer- 
chant ships  going  there,  that  captains  were  not  willing  to 
take  supplies,  unless  their  exorbitant  demands  were  met. 
But  one  morning,  after  waiting  twelve,  months  in  anxious 


i 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


51 


suspense,  a ship  was  seen  ofiF  the  island,  as  if  coming  from 
Tahiti.  The  missionaries  were  sure  it  was  a vessel  of  relief, 
hut  alas  ! for  them,  it  was  a stranger,  a merchantman,  direct 
from  England,  too,  but  not  having  a particle  of  supply  to 
aid  the  mission  in  its  circumstances  of  distress  and  want. 

These  disastrous  events  of  defection  and  war,  and  fire 
and  famine,  had  scarcely  subsided,  before  another  calamity 
occurred  which  occasioned  much  distress,  alleviated  only  by 
the  thought  that  it  came  direct  from  the  hand  of  God. 
Heavy  and  long-continued  rains  caused  the  whole  of  the 
badly-drained  low  lands  to  be  flooded,  which  induced  much 
dysentery,  together  with  fever  and  ague,  amongst  the  peo- 
ple. The  members  of  the  mission  families  were  also  laid 
low  by  the  disease,  and  both  Messrs.  Pitman  and  Buzacott 
were  brought  near  to  death. 

Mr.  Buzacott’s  house  had  been  built  on  low  ground,  and 
one  night,  after  he  had  retired  to  rest,  a rush  of  water  came 
with  great  force  from  the  mountains ; the  banks  of  the  river 
overflowed,  plantations  were  destroyed,  and  the  missionary 
house  became  knee  deep  in  water,  before  the  calamity  was 
known.  The  house  being  a wooden  frame  was  in  danger  of 
being  swept  away  by  the  flood ; and  it  was  with  difficulty 
that  the  family  escaped.  In  a state  of  exhaustion  and  fright, 
Mrs.  Buzacott  was  carried  by  a native  to  a hut  some  dis- 
tance inland ; and  was  laid  aside  by  a sickness  of  three 
mouths’  duration  from  the  time  of  the  catastrophe. 

Distressing,  however,  as  these  personal  calamities  were, 
the  devoted  missionaries  and  their  wives  were  sustained; 
gaining  daily  strength  equal  to  daily  trial  and  duty,  they 
kept  a constant  watch  over  the  best  interests  of  the  peo- 
ple; and  although  the  majority  had  hitherto  proved  them- 
selves unworthy  of  their  altered  position,  yet  it  was  a cause 
of  deep  sorrow  to  see  them  suffer  and  die.  During  the  pre- 
valence of  the  disease,  which  assumed  the  form  of  a fearful 


52 


GEMS  FEOM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


epidemic,  almost  every  house  on  the  island  was  a scene  of 
desolation  and  woe ; and  so  great  were  its  ravages,  at  one 
time,  that  the  known  deaths  numbered  one  hundred  a doi/. 

In  this  affliction  most  of  the  ringleaders  of  the  late  dis- 
turbances were  cut  off,  many  of  whom  died  in  agony  of  de- 
spair, saying  that  they  were  sure  of  eternal  destruction. 
Their  statements,  at  death,  respecting  themselves,  their  deeds 
and  their  intentions,  had  their  lives  been  spared,  were  awful 
in  the  extreme,  and  made  a deep  impression  on  the  hearts 
of  those  who  survived  them. 

In  the  case  of  others  it  was  greatly  affecting  to  witness  a 
fixed  Pharisaical  self-complacency,  because  they  had  given 
up  heathen  practices,  and  had  been  regular  in  the  duties  of 
external  Christian  profession.  There  were,  however,  a few 
who  knew  in  whom  they  had  believed.  Their  minds  were 
enlightened,  their  hearts  were  renewed,  and  their  previous 
life  had  shown  that  they  were  ripe  for  heaven ; as  a kind 
of  first-fruits  of  those  who  should  be  saved  from  amongst 
the  tribes  of  Karotonga.  When  spoken  to  of  the  ability 
and  willingness  of  Jesus  to  save  sinners,  one  Christian  man 
replied,  that  he  felt  it  was  only  through  Jesus  that  he  could 
be  saved,  that  he  felt  his  sinfulness,  and  that  his  heart  was 
continually  grasping  after  the  word  of  God.  Another, 
who  had  been  one  of  the  most  active,  consistent  Christian 
women  of  the  community,  said,  when  reference  was  made 
to  her  consistent  deportment,  “ that  it  was  like  her  poor, 
worthless,  helpless,  dying  body,  of  no  avail  for  her  salva- 
tion, but  that  Jesus  was  all  her  salvation.”  These  evi- 
dences were  cheering  to  the  heart  of  the  missionaries,  and 
encouraged  them  to  be  instant  in  season  and  out  of  season 
in  proclaiming  the  words  of  eternal  life ; and  they  needed 
these  consolations  the  more,  as  they  saw  several  of  the  few 
excellent  young  men,  who  had  bid  fair  soon  to  become  of 
great  assistance  to  the  mission,  laid  low  among  the  dying. 


THE  ISLAND  OP  EAKOTONGA. 


53 


Many  of  these  themselves  felt,  as  was  expressed  by  one, 
“ that  it  was  a great  straggle  to  give  up  the  prospect  of  a 
useful  life  in  aiding  forth  the  cause  of  the  gospel,  which 
he  was  quite  sure  would  advance  on  the  island;”  but  giving 
up  his  soul  to  Jesus,  he  exclaimed,  “It  is  all  right.  I must 
die.  The  first  surge  of  death  has  passed  over  me,  I have 
now  to  pass  through  the  flood  of  hitter  water,  but  I do  not 
fear.  My  trust  is  in  Jesus.  There  is  none  other.” 

The  redemption  of  one  soul  is  precious.  Let  us  rejoice, 
then,  with  the  brethren,  at  this  period  of  our  narrative ; 
who  through  Christ  were  brought  out  of  their  tribulation 
more  than  conquerors;  and  who,  rewarded  and  adorned  with 
the  priceless  gems  of  his  grace,  give  him  the  glory,  and 
were  yet  willing  to  do,  or  to  sufi'er,  all  his  will. 

5» 


CHAPTEH  V. 


Arorangi  settlement  formed — Description  of  the  station — Happy  condi- 
tion of  the  people — New  station  at  Titikaveka — Notice  of  the  adult 
and  chUdren’s  schools — Observance  of  the  Sabbath  by  the  islanders 
— Nature  and  object  of  native  classes— Weekly  public  services 
— Hurricane  in  1831 — Distress  occasioned  thereby— Fresh  trials 
from  the  ungodly — Introduction  of  printing  press  to  the  island, 
1832 — Rarotongan  native  Christian  teachers  go  forth  to  Samoa  the 
same  year — Notice  of  Teava — His  prayer — His  labours. 


Some  time  prior  to  the  disasters  mentioned  in  the  last 
chapter,  it  was  found  necessary  to  form  another  distinct  sta- 
tion at  Arorangi,  for  the  numerous  and  independent  tribe 
under  the  chief  Tinomana.  Since  the  overthrow  of  idol- 
atry, most  of  his  people  had  resided  with  the  Karika  tribe  j 
but  owing  to  the  distance  of  their  plantations  it  was  found 
that  a number  of  them  were  kept  away  from  religious  in- 
struction. This,  together  with  evils  ariang  from  the  two 
tribes  living  at  one  station,  led  the  brethren  to  advise  a sep- 
aration. The  site  fixed  on  for  their  settlement  is  about  six 
miles  from  Avarua,  a level  piece  of  ground  two  miles  long, 
at  the  base  of  a noble  range  of  beautiful  mountains,  and  fa- 
cing due  west.  It  involved  no  little  difficulty  and  labour  to 
clear  this  land,  for  it  was  densely  covered  with  trees  and 
brushwood,  the  growth  of  many  generations;  but  the 
clearing  of  the  land  was  only  the  small  commencement 
(54) 


- > ■ » • TL  J 71.  J I 


-7- 

f'  Hk-'4^*\  ■ • ■>■'  it>,i:M<-ii:>  ^ 

rfu*SVt  sill  t^,  ^ ^ -'■' 


i 'IT  ^‘Jrr<l>ifW  oj  wwij  ivuS  . t ^ 

r 

: •rSh3  ^yi^xh^  br.imn^^ihZ-!^  -Ki  •..  ^>,1;  *>  ;1 

*l.»li  ^n>  <i^.-,c?r  I.f,f»,  ..<11  v4«5*.  M 

i^hi  tiinsjt  'Trti  rfiiw-ltitWt  MP/.|.^W-j  Mif  >.  i-.ft,  , v^,  3|f^  • 

j,  y^  jp.  y 

! ftt;^  Ml^,ifl  *jj,  ,.  jpji^  ■TS'T^';  sf 

t i.»  Wrjfi»rt»b<il^  -*1^'  ' 

, r^toi’ H*-#  ^ 

\ A b*a.v«}^m  ^ ^ 

*h<W5«# 

- jrfl  tPo  <trw  Uiri  bA 


Rarotonga. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


55 


of  labour  compared  with  that  required  for  building  and 
other  things  connected  with  the  formation  of  the  settle- 
ment. 

The  people  had  a mind  to  the  work,  hut  it  needed  the  as- 
sistance, direction,  and  time  of  the  missionary,  and  these  he 
cheerfully  gave.  A day  was  fixed  on  late  in  1828,  and,  ac- 
companied by  the  chief  and  the  people,  the  Eev.  A.  Buza- 
cott  began  the  honourable  work  of  founding  a Christian 
village.  An  abundance  of  hogs,  bread  fruit  and  cocoa-nuts 
was  served  up  at  a feast  worthy  of  the  occasion ; praise  was 
presented  by  the  people  to  Jehovah,  who  had  caused  them 
to  return,  with  gospel  mercies,  to  their  own  district  of  coun- 
try ; prayer  was  ofl'ered  for  his  help  and  blessing,  and  that 
day,  a man  was  famous  aceording  as  he  lifted  up  his  axe,  or 
wrought  with  other  tools,  as  instruments  to  establish  and  to 
advance  the  common  cause  of  civilization.  In  a few  months 
the  village  was  completed.  It  was  nearly  a mile  and  a-half 
in  length;  a wide  and  straight  road,  gravelled  with  sea-side 
sand,  was  made  from  one  extremity  to  the  other,  on  either 
side  of  which  were  rows  of  the  tall  and  delicately  beautiful 
tufted-top  ti  trees.  The  houses  were  built  of  lime 
and  wattle,  with  general  uniformity,  from  thirty  to 
forty  feet  long,  twelve  feet  high,  twenty  feet  wide  each, 
and  divided  into  three  or  four  rooms.  Each  row  of  houses 
stood  fifty  or  sixty  yards  from  the  road,  and  were  about  the 
same  distance  from  each  other,  and  the  whole  was  pro- 
tected seaward  by  numerous  large  trees  which  girt  the 
shore.  In  the  centre  of  this  settlement  was  erected  an  are 
hure  anga,  house  of  prayer,  and  opposite  it  an  are  apii  anga, 
house  for  teaching,  each  seating  a thousand  persons. 

The  public  opening  of  the  chapel  dated  the  ofiicial  settle- 
ment of  the  station.  It  iWis  a day  of  great  rejoicing.  Only 
a few  years  before,  yonder  mountains,  which  now  form  the 
background  of  the  village,  were  the  fastnesses  of  the  people 


56 


GEMS  FROM  TUE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


when  oppressed  by  their  conquering  tribes.  How  changed 
their  condition  ! AVar,  tyranny,  and  dread,  exchanged  for 
peace,  and  liberty,  and  joy;  and  the  honoured  man,  Papehia, 
who  first  took  them  the  gospel,  was  stationed  amongst 
them  as  their  teacher.  In  the  habitation  where  “dragons” 
lay,  there  was  now  safety,  fertility,  and  civilization.  The 
Avilderuess  was  glad,  the  desert  rejoiced  and  blossomed  as 
the  rose.  A highway  for  the  word  of  God  had  been 
established,  and  it  came  to  the  people  with  recompense  and 
salvation. 

At  a later  date  than  that  which  marked  the  formation  of 
Arorangi  station,  was  the  location  of  a part  of  Tangiia 
tribe  in  the  district  of  Titikaveka,  on  the  south  side  of 
the  island.  The  settlement  of  this  people  was  the  cause 
of  much  toil  and  anxiety  to  the  Rev.  C.  Pitman,  but  subse- 
quently yielded  its  proportion  of  encouragement  and  reward. 

Soon  after  the  landing  of  Papehia  on  the  island,  it  will  be 
remembered  that  he  succeeded  in  gathering  together  a few 
lads  in  his  native  hut,  for  the  purpose  of  teaching  them 
letters  and  reading.  His  ability  was  small,  and  his  means 
still  more  limited,  yet  he  did  what  he  could,  and  a few  made 
good  progress.  The  missionaries,  who  subsequently  resided 
among  the  people,  took  advantage  of  this  previous  prepara- 
tion, and  from  the  first  gave  themselves  to  daily  labour 
in  the  schools.  The  formation  of  a settlement,  or  the 
erection  of  a chapel,  was  never  thought  complete  without 
an  appropriate  school-house.  At  each  village,  adult  classes 
for  teaching  to  read  were  formed,  and  attended  to  from 
half  past  five  o’clock  in  the  morning  until  seven.  Not 
more  than  one  half  of  the  adults,  however,  were  found 
capable  of  learning  to  read  at  all,  and  not  more  than  two- 
thirds  ever  gained  sufiicient  kq^wledge  to  enable  them 
to  read  fluently,  so  that,  at  this  period  of  the  mission,  it 
was  deemed  desirable  to  encourage  them  to  commit  to 


THE  ISLAND  OP  RAROTONGA. 


57 


memory  catechisms  and  portions  of  Scripture,  which  would 
give  instruction  to  their  minds,  and  influence  their  con- 
duct. In  this  way,  many  of  the  natives  who  were  fifty 
years  old  when  schools  were  formed,  gained  a correct 
knowledge  of  Watts’s  First  and  Second  Catechisms,  the 
Assembly’s  Shorter  Catechism,  together  with  chapters,  and 
in  a few  cases,  whole  books  of  the  word  of  God. 

At  the  dispersion  of  the  adults  from  the  school-house, 
the  children  were  collected  together,  and  for  nearly  two 
hours  every  morning  were  taught  in  classes  the  elements  of 
reading,  writing,  arithmetic,  and  geography,  according  to 
their  several  attainments.  During  the  first  years  of  the 
mission,  it  was  not  without  much  difficulty  and  labour  that 
anything  like  a regular  good  attendance  could  be  secured ; 
but  so  popular  had  the  schools  become  in  1831,  only  eight 
years  after  the  landing  of  the  Christian  teacher,  that  out  of 
the  limited  population  of  the  island,  no  less  than  one  thousand 
six  hundred  adults,  and  two  thousand  children,  were  under 
daily  instruction  and  consequent  mental  and  moral  discipline. 

Nothing,  however,  at  this  time,  was  more  remarkable  or 
pleasing  in  the  people  of  Rarotonga,  than  their  attendance 
on  public  worship  and  Christian  instruction  on  the  Sabbath- 
day.  The  greater  part  of  the  entire  population  were  in 
attendance  on  the  services  held  in  the  chapels,  and  after 
the  services,  many  of  them  met  together  at  a friend’s  house, 
in  order  to  collect  and  to  arrange  what  each  had  remembered 
of  the  sermon,  and  otherwise  to  aid  each  other’s  advance  in 
knowledge.  This  led  to  the  formation  of  classes;  voluntary 
associations,  numbering  from  fifteen  to  twenty  natives,  were 
formed  into  a pupu,  or  class,  each  of  them  having  a 
teacher  of  known  intelligence  and  character  appointed  to 
superintend  its  affairs.  Three  or  four  of  these  classes  were 
met  by  the  missionary,  separately,  and  on  different  days, 
between  each  Sabbath,  which  constituted  a kind  of  Bible- 


58 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


class ; and  by  this  means,  nearly  the  whole  of  the  natives 
desirous  of  being  instructed,  were  periodically  brought  into 
contact  with  the  missionary.  This  plan  was  found  to  he 
of  great  practical  utility,  alike  in  the  direct  information 
received  by  the  people  at  the  time  of  meeting,  and  in  the 
knowledge  gained  by  the  missionary  about  them,  by  which 
he  was  able  opportunely  and  appropriately  to  direct  his 
labours  for  their  welfare. 

These  classes  led  to  the  establishment  of  a Friday  evening 
public  service  at  each  village,  which  has  been  continued  to 
the  present  time,  and  to  the  benefit  of  which  we  shall  have 
to  refer  in  a subsequent  part  of  this  narrative. 

Members  in  class,  both  men  and  women,  have  a united 
service  every  Friday  evening,  at  which,  after  singing  and 
prayer,  and  a five  minutes’  introductory  address  from  the 
president,  four  or  five  of  the  natives  give  short  addresses  in 
rotation.  Sometimes  these  addresses  are  on  points  of  doc- 
trine or  experience,  arising  out  of  the  sermons  of  the  pre- 
vious Sabbath,  at  other  times  incidents  of  past  heathen  life 
are  related,  and  a lively  and  grateful  contrast  is  given  be- 
tween the  past  and  the  present  position  of  the  island ; and 
frequently,  appropriate  reference  is  made  by  the  speakers  to 
events  that  are  passing  over  their  own  or  other  lands.  "While 
the  individuals  attending  this  meeting  were  all  class  mem- 
bers, they  were  not  all  regarded  as  being  truly  converted  to 
God.  Many  of  them,  at  the  time  of  which  we  write,  had 
not  been  baptized,  but  each  person  was  expected  to  be  of 
known  moral  character,  and  having  a desire  to  be  instructed 
in  the  truths  of  Cbristianity. 

Thus  the  affairs  of  the  mission  were  gradually  yet  en- 
couragingly advancing,  when,  in  December,  1831,  a trying 
calamity  blighted  its  opening  prospects,  and  but  for  the 
vitality  of  the  word  of  God,  which  had  been  received  in  a 
few  hearts,  must  have  proved  fatal  to  the  future  welfare  of 


THE  ISLAND  OE  RAROTONGA. 


59 


the  island.  A fearful  hurricane  devastated  the  whole  land, 
plantations  and  buildings  were  irttcrly  destroyed,  so  that  the 
missionaries  and  people  began  the  year  1882  in  distress, 
lamentation,  and  woe.  After  the  storm  had  subsided,  the 
sea  was  as  calm  and  the  sky  was  as  bright  and  as  blue  as 
ever.  The  hearts  of  the  men  of  God  were  also  calm ; they 
were  still  and  held  their  peace,  for  it  was  the  Lord’s  doing, 
but  there  was  no  sunshine  there ; it  was  the  stillness  of  that 
deep  unuttered  feeling  of  the  inner  soul,  which  apprehends 
approaching  evils,  more  fearful  than  those  which  have  past, 
and  finds  its  only  strength  in  quiet  repose  on  God.  In  the 
might  of  this  repose,  they  prayed  to  be  enabled  to  meet  all 
the  difficulties  of  their  isolated  position,  in  work,  in  famine, 
in  declension  of  the  people,  and  in  disease. 

The  work  of  each  settlement  had  to  be  recommenced,  for 
every  chapel  and  mission-house,  and  almost  every  native 
dwelling,  was  in  ruins ; but  before  these  could  be  attended 
to,  the  plantations  had  to  be  cleared  and  planted,  which, 
with  the  greatest  industry,  did  not  yield  a sufficient  supply 
to  meet  the  wants  of  the  people  for  six  or  eight  months 
afterwards.  During  this  time  both  the  people  and  the  mis- 
sionaries suffered  much  want,  and  the  mass  of  the  popula- 
tion had  nothing  to  eat  but  the  sfalks  of  the  banana  tree 
cooked  with  the  roots  of  the  ti.  It  was  a distressing  season. 
Many  died  of  starvation,  all  were  much  injured  in  constitu- 
tion, and  weakness  and  disease  were  induced,  the  results  of 
which  are,  to  this  day,  felt  by  the  people. 

Amongst  the  people  at  this  time  there  were  many  who 
manifested  a deportment  worthy  of  their  Christian  profes- 
sion ; but  a far  greater  number  of  them  were,  under  the 
influence  of  superstitious  notions  connected  with  their  semi- 
heathen state,  led  to  draw  back  from  their  attachment  to 
the  new  state  of  things  brought  about  by  the  gospel ; and 
there  were  not  wanting  those  who  did  all  in  their  power . to 


60 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


make  the  calamity  an  occasion  for  the  re-establishment  of 
heathenism  and  crime. 

The  struggle  was  severe  hut  not  doubtful.  The  founda- 
tions of  the  ancient  system  had  been  razed,  never  again  to 
be  laid.  Although  the  great  enemy  is  permitted,  at  times, 
to  wield  air,  and  fire,  and  disease  as  instruments  to  retard 
the  progress  of  Christ’s  kingdom ; yet  he  is  but  a permitted 
agent,  confined  within  prescribed  limits.  Hitherto  shalt 
thou  come  and  no  further.  It  was  so  in  Rarotonga,  in  the 
troubles  we  are  recording.  After  a few  months  of  labour, 
in  faith  and  patience,  prosperity  again  dawned  on  the  mis- 
sion, and  before  the  end  of  the  year,  which  commenced  so 
disastrously,  the  settlements  were  comparatively  restored  to 
their  former  state;  new  chapels  had  been  built,  schools 
were  recommenced,  and  an  organization  was  set  in  motion, 
which  has  yielded,  through  God,  the  numerous  beneficial 
results  we  shall  have  to  notice  as  we  advance  in  this  mis- 
sionary history. 

The  two  most  important  events  which  closed  this  year, 
were  the  introduction  of  & printing  press  to  the  island,  and 
the  sending  some  of  the  first  converts  to  Christianity  to  the 
heathen  islands  beyond.  The  circumstances  of  destitution 
in  which  the  mission  was  placed  by  the  gale,  led  the  Rev. 
A.  Buzacott  to  visit  Tahiti  for  the  purpose  of  gaining  sup- 
plies, and  of  making  arrangements  with  the  missionaries 
there  to  secure  a more  frequent  and  certain  visitation  of  the 
island.  While  there,  Mr.  Buzacott  gained  a sufficient 
knowledge  of  the  art  of  printing  to  enable  him  to  be- 
come a practical  man  at  the  work,  and,  returning  to  Raro- 
tonga, he  took  with  him  an  old  press,  and  equally  old 
fount  of  type,  with  which  he  had  the  honour  of  instructing 
many  of  the  natives  in  printing,  who,  in  their  proficiency 
and  results  of  labour,  far  exceeded  his  most  sanguine 
expectation. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


61 


This  year  also  witnessed  the  extension  of  Christianity 
from  Rarotonga,  and  Rarotongan  native  agents,  to 
islands  of  the  Samoan  group.  These  far-distant  islands,  up 
to  this  time,  were  in  heathen  ignorance  and  idolatry,  and 
the  Rarotongans  had  no  sooner  felt  the  power  of  the  gospel 
of  Christ  themselves  than  they  earnestly  desired  to  take  the 
boon  to  others.  Among  these  early  converts  Teava  deserves 
honourable  mention,  as  a distinguished  fruit  of  good  Pape- 
hia’s  labours,  and  an  illustrious  imitator  of  his  example. 
In  making  known  his  desire  to  go  as  a Christian  evangelist 
to  the  savage  tribes  of  Samoa,  he  wrote  : — “ My  desire  to 
fulfil  Christ’s  command  is  veiy  great : He  said  to  his  dis- 
ciples, ‘ Gro  ye  into  all  the  world.’  My  heart  is  compassion- 
ating the  heathen  who  know  not  the  salvation  which  God 
has  provided  for  the  world.  Let  me  go  to  those  savages. 
Why  is  the  delay  ? May  God  direct  us  : but  my  desire  for 
this  work  is  very  great.” 

This  good  man’s  desire  was  fulfilled.  He  was  taken  to 
Samoa ; he  landed  in  the  midst  of  its  savage  population ; he 
gained  a position  at  Monono,  an  influential  station,  and, 
besides  being  one  of  the  most  intelligent  and  consistent 
pioneers  to  the  European  missionaries  there,  he  has  for 
many  years  been  one  of  their  best  native  assistants  in 
translating,  in  schools,  and  in  the  general  work  of  the 
stations. 

A part  of  a prayer  of  this  excellent  teacher  has  been 
recorded  by  Mr.  Williams,  which  he  offered  to  God,  on 
board  ship,  on  his  passage  to  Samoa,  which  is  worthy  of  a 
place  here,  and  will  suitably  illustrate  the  design  of  these 
pages : “ ....  if  we  fly  to  heaven,”  said  the  good  man, 
addressing  God,  “ there  we  shall  And  thee ; if  we  dwell 
upon  the  land,  thou  art  there  also ; if  we  sail  on  the  sea, 
thou  art  there ; and  this  aflfords  us  comfort,  so  that  we 
sail  upon  the  oceanTvithout  fear,  because  thou,  0 God,  art 
in  our  ship. 

6 


G2 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


“ The  king  of  our  bodies  has  his  subjects,  to  whom  he 
issues  his  orders,  but  if  he  himself  goes  with  them,  his 
presence  stimulates  their  zeal ; they  work  with  energy,  they 
do  it  soon,  they  do  it  well.  0 Lord,  thou  art  the  King  of 
our  spirits;  thou  hast  issued  orders  to  thy  subjects  to  do  a 
great  work ; thou  hast  commanded  them  to  go  into  all  the 
world,  and  preach  the  gospel  to  every  creature.  We,  0 
Lord,  are  going  upon  that  errand,  and  let  thy  presence  go 
with  us  to  quicken  us,  and  enable  us  to  persevere  in  the 
great  work  until  we  die. 

“ Thou  hast  said  that  thy  presence  shall  go  with  thy  peo- 
ple even  to  the  end  of  the  world.  Fulfil,  0 Lord,  to  us  this 
cheering  promise. 

“ I see,  O Lord,  a compass  in  this  vessel  by  which  the 
seamen  steer  the  right  course,  that  we  may  escape  obstruc- 
tion and  danger.  Be  to  us,  0 Lord,  the  compass  of  sal- 
vation.” 

In  reading  this  effusion,  no  less  striking  for  its  intelli- 
gence and  piety,  than  it  is  beautiful  for  its  originality  and 
novelty,  let  it  be  remembered  that  only  nine  years  prior  to 
its  utterance,  Teava  was  one  of  the  heathen,  idolatrous,  and 
savage  inhabitants  of  the  island  whose  history  we  are  nar- 
rating, and  from  among  whom  many  such  as  he,  were,  at 
this  early  period  of  missionary  labour,  purified  by  the  grace 
of  God,  and  dignified  to  the  glory  of  gems  in  the  diadem 
of  Jesus  the  Saviour. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


Formation  of  Christian  church  on  Rarotonga  in  1833 — Translation  of 
Scrintures  into  the  native  language — Notice  of  Rarotongan  dialect — 
New  Testament  in  native  language  sent  to  England  to  be  printed  in 
1834 — Attempts  to  instruct  the  people  in  cotton  spinning — Growth 
of  cotton  on  the  island — Failure  of  health  in  missionaries — Timely 
native  assistance — Notices  on  the  institution  of  marriage — Statistics 
— Interesting  united  gathering  of  the  natives — Native  letters. 

Prudent  and  cautious,  as  they  were  laborious  and  ardent, 
the  early  missionaries  on  Rarotonga  delayed  for  some  years 
instituting  the  ordinances  of  the  church  of  Christ;  wishing 
rather  to  instruct  and  to  root  the  converts  in  the  doctrines 
and  principles  of  the  gospel.  But  the  important  and  happy 
day  had  now  arrived,  deemed  the  proper  time  to  select  a 
few  of  the  long-tried  and  intelligent  Christians,  who  with 
the  missionaries  and  teachers  should  be  united  together  in 
visible  Christian  communion,  around  the  “ table  of  the 
Lord.” 

On  Sabbath,  the  6th  of  May,  1833,  just  six  years  after 
the  landing  of  English  missionaries,  the  church  of  Christ 
was  formed  on  the  island.  Each  missionary  at  his  station, 
ore  with  five,  and  the  other  with  three,  of  the  first-fruits, 
broke  bread  together,  and  drank  of  the  fruit  of  the  vine,  in 
remembrance  of  the  Saviour.  With  trembling  joy  the 

(63) 


64 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


brethren,  speaking  of  the  occasion,  say,  that  it  was  a season 
truly  delightful ; that  they  had  confidence  in  the  reality  of 
discipleship  of  those  with  whom  they  united  ; that  they  had 
others  in  view  who  would  soon  be  added  to  their  number; 
that  they  felt  themselves  to  be  in  the  path  of  duty  in  the 
course  they  had  adopted;  and  they  looked  forward  with 
pleasure  to  the  time  when  He,  who  despises  not  the  day  of 
small  things,  would  cause  their  little  one  to  become  a 
thousand. 

In  addition  to  the  abundant  labours  which  devolved  on 
the  missionaries  of  Rarotonga  at  this  time,  they  had  to  give 
much  of  their  time  and  energy  to  the  translating  of  the 
Holy  Scriptures  into  the  language  of  the  people.  Many 
portions  of  the  Scriptures  had  been  printed  in  the  Tahitian 
language,  at  the  Mission  press  in  that  group,  and  these 
were  supplied  to  Rarotonga  as  opportunity  occurred ; but  it 
soon  became  apparent  that  the  people  would  make  but 
little  progress,  either  in  Scriptural  or  general  knowledge, 
until  books  were  circulated  among  them  in  their  own  lan- 
guage, but  before  this  could  be  accomplished,  it  was  neces- 
sary to  compile  a correct  dictionary  and  grammar  of  the 
language,  every  word  of  which  had  to  be  picked  up,  and 
every  line  written  by  the  missionaries.  The  language  of 
Rarotonga  is  a dialect  of  the  one  prevailing  Eastern  Poly- 
nesian language,  varieties  of  which  are  spoken  in  all  the 
islands  within  2500  miles  of  longitude,  and  4500  miles  of 
latitude.  The  use  of  the  h and  the  ng,  however,  in  the 
Rarotongan  dialect,  which  are  not  found  in  the  Tahitian,  and 
other  differences  in  structure  and  pronunciation,  rendered 
it  impracticable  for  the  Rarotongans  to  adopt  the  Tahitian 
books. 

Scarcely,  however,  could  idolatry  be  said  to  be  overthrown 
on  the  island,  before  the  brethren  gave  themselves  to  the 
preparation  of  the  word  of  God  into  the  proper  tongue  of 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


65 


the  people ; and  as  fast  as  the  manuscript  was  finished  so 
was  it  printed.  Some  portions  were  printed  at  the  Tahit- 
ian Mission  press,  and  others  at  Mr.  Buzacott’s  press,  to 
which  reference  has  already  been  made ; and  thus,  in  the 
tenth  year  after  Mr.  Williams  landed  Papehia  on  the  island, 
he  had  the  happiness  to  receive  Messrs.  Pitman  and  Buza- 
cott’s manuscripts,  and  printed  portions  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment, which  enabled  him  to  print  the  first  complete  edition 
on  his  arrival  in  England  in  1834  j while  the  brethren  con- 
tinued their  translations,  and  in  a short  time  supplied  the 
people  with  an  edition  of  the  Pentateuch,  Psalms,  and 
other  portions  of  the  Old  Testament,  from  the  Mission 
press  on  the  island. 

Anxious  to  encourage  and  assist  the  natives  in  things 
which  pertain  to  their  temporal,  as  well  as  to  their  spiritual 
condition,  the  directors  of  the  London  Missionary  Society 
had  sent  to  the  Tahitian  islands  Mr.  Armitage,  an  efficient 
artisan  in  cotton-spinning,  with  a view  to  instruct  the  peo- 
ple in  the  manufacture  of  clothing  for  their  own  use.  With 
this  object  in  view,  Mr.  Armitage  came  also  to  Rarotonga, 
and  towards  its  accomplishment  the  missionaries  rendered 
him  ail  the  assistance  in  their  power.  Under  the  superin- 
tendence of  Mr.  Armitage,  the  natives  made  many  spinning- 
wheels,  warping  machines,  and  looms;  much  material  was 
brought  into  a state  of  forwardness  for  wearing,  and  a few 
pieces  of  cloth  were  finished,  greatly  to  the  delight  of  the 
wondering  people.  Circumstances,  however,  occurred  which 
proved  that  the  time  had  not  yet  come  when  the  manufacture 
could  be  carried  on  efficiently,  or  with  justness  to  the  opera- 
tive, which,  with  the  early  departure  of  Mr.  Armitage  from 
the  island,^led  to  the  discontinuance  of  the  work.  Still  it 
was  an  era  in  the  history  of  the  people,  in  which  they  re- 
ceived much  useful  information,  and  they  frequently  speak 
of  it  with  gratitude  and  pleasure.  A great  quantity  of  cot- 


66 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


ton  is  still  grown  on  the  island,  and  much  more  might  be 
raised  by  cultivation,  but  it  is  doubtful  whether  it  can  ever 
be  largely  prepared  on  the  spot  for  use ; yet  it  is  hoped  that 
the  time  is  not  distant  when  it  will  be  generally  cultivated, 
and  form  an  important  article  of  export,  and  in  that  way  be 
one  means  of  providing  a supply  to  meet  the  demands  of 
the  advancing  civilization  of  the  people. 

Amidst  the  brightening  prospects  which  now  opened 
upon  the  mission  on  this  island,  the  frequent,  and  often- 
times severe  ill  health  of  the  missionaries,  and  of  their 
wives,  was  a great  trial,  and  a source  of  much  apprehension. 
Past  labours,  and  difficulties,  and  privations,  had  wrought 
their  natural  effect  on  the  bodies  of  the  brethren;  and  the 
Rev.  C.  Pitman,  especially,  was  more  than  once  so  far 
reduced  in  strength  as  to  be  obliged  to  cease  from  labour. 
But  happily  the  toils,  which  had  induced  ill  health,  yielded 
timely  fruit,  in  efficient  and  appropriate  native  agency. 
Several  pious  and  intelligent  young  men,  among  whom 
were  Maretu,  and  Iro,  and  Rupe,  and  Okotai,  were  raised 
up  to  assist  in  the  schools,  and  to  take  part  in  public  wor- 
ship, by  which  means  the  work  at  each  station  was  con- 
tinued without  interruption,  during  the  different  periods  of 
temporary  absence  of  Mr.  Buzacott  to  Samoa,  and  of  Mr. 
Pitman  to  the  Tahitian  islands  j and  it  now  becomes  difficult 
to  select  and  to  compress,  within  the  limits  of  one  short- 
chapter,  the  varied  and  abundant  successes  which  crown 
these  years  of  the  mission. 

The  institution  of  the  ordinance  of  marriage  among  the 
people,  was  one  of  the  most  important  connected  with  the 
establishment  of  Christianity  on  the  island ; it  had,  as  will 
be  apparent,  a powerful  and  regenerating  influenee  over  the 
whole  moral  and  social  condition  of  this  once  heathen  and 
licentious  population.  The  manner,  introduced,  of  celebrating 
the  ordinance  is  as  simple  as  the  institution  is  sacred,  and 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


67 


it  is  generally  found  to  result  in  an  amount  of  fidelity 
and  happiness,  which  forms  a striking  contrast  to  the  poly- 
gamy and  libertinism  of  former  years.  When  affection  is 
conceived  for  an  individual,  without  running  the  risk,  as 
they  think  it,  of  a lengthened  and  uncertain  courtship,  an 
offer  is  made,  sometimes  by  letter,  at  others  in  person,  but 
mostly  by  some  well-known  and  confidential  friend.  In 
case  of  mutual  agreement,  the  parties,  accompanied  by  their 
respective  witnesses,  come  to  the  missionary  or  native 
teacher,  for  the  purpose  of  having  their  names  registered. 
These  are  then  published  at  a public  service,  either  in  the 
chapel  or  school,  at  which  time  it  is  stated,  that  the  wed- 
ding will  take  place  on  such  a day,  except  reasonable  cause 
be  shown  why  it  should  not.  Supposing  matters  to  proceed 
favourably,  the  bride  and  the  bridegroom  make  their  appear- 
ance the  day  fixed  on,  each  accompanied  by  friends ; the 
usual  questions  are  proposed,  and  by  joined  hands,  held  in 
the  hand  of  the  minister,  while  he  pronounces  them  to  be 
man  and  wife,  the  important  deed  is  ratified. 

According  to  the  station  and  consequent  property  of  the 
parties,  so  is  the  character  of  the  feast,  varying  in  quantity 
from  100  to  1000  cocoa  nuts,  100  to  1000  bread  fruits,  100 
to  1000  bananas,  20  to  100  fish,  and  from  2 to  200  hogs  j 
together  with  potatoes,  taro,  and  other  vegetables  in  pro- 
portion. Numerous  presents  are  also  made,  consisting  of 
native  bark  cloth,  baskets,  English  cloth,  bowls,  stools,  and 
cloth-beating  mallets ; and  these,  with  the  food,  according 
to  ancient  custom,  are  mutually  exchanged  by  the  parties ; 
the  bridegroom  giving  his  portion  to  the  bride,  who  orders 
it  to  be  distributed  among  her  friends ; while  she  gives  her 
own  portion  to  her  husband,  which  he  distributes  to  his 
friends. 

From  1827  to  1834,  inclusive,  450  couple  were  married, 
250  adults  and  360  children  were  baptized,  40  members 


68 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


were  admitted  to  church-fellowship,  many  more  than  that 
number  were  hopeful  candidates,  and  the  whole  population 
was  under  Christian  instruction.  But  scarcely  under  any 
circumstance  was  the  happy  change  and  positive  improve- 
ment of  the  people  more  strikingly  seen  than  in  their 
united  assemblies,  where  500  persons  of  one  settlement 
met  500  others  from  another  settlement,  in  the  “house  of 
prayer,” — persons  who  but  a few  years  before  were  enemies, 
and  hating  one  another  with  heathen  revenge,  and  a blood- 
thirstiness of  cannibal  desire.  Now,  twice  a year  they  met 
together  as  brethren  in  Jesus.  After  reading  the  Scrip- 
tures, singing,  and  prayer,  sermons  were  preached  from 
such  texts  as,  “ Old  things  are  passed  away,  behold,  all  things 
are  become  new;”  “He  is  our  peace,  who  hath  made  both 
one;”  “Ye  were  sometime  darkness,  hut  now  are  ye  light 
in  the  Lord;”  “Other  sheep-I  have  which  are  not  of  this 
fold;  them  also  must  I bring;”  “Ye  are  not  your  own, 
but  ye  are  bought  with  a price;”  “Such  were  some  of 
you,  but  ye  are  washed;”  “That  they  all  may  be  one;” 
“Blessed  are  your  eyes,  for  they  see,  and  your  ears,  for  they 
hear.”  These,  and  like  passages,  had  a peculiarly  beautiful 
and  significant  application  to  their  hearts  at  the  time,  and 
many  of  them  would  make  short  speeches,  in  which  they 
unburdened  a grateful  heart  in  praises  to  God,  and  expres- 
sions of  love  to  one  another.  After  one  of  these  gatherings, 
the  following  letter  was  written  by  a native  young  man  to 
Mr.  Pitman,  which  illustrates  his  piety  and  his  intelligence  : 
“The  love  of  God  is  great  indeed.  He  has  given  his  be- 
loved Son  to  die  for  the  world.  Had  he  withheld  him,  no 
man  could  have  been  saved.  This  is  the  only  source  of 
salvation, — the  shedding  of  his  blood.  But  for  him,  the 
desire  of  Satan  would  have  been  accomplished — all  men 
would  have  been  lost.  The  wrath  of  God  for  the  sins  of 
men  was  placed  upon  him.  He  sustained  it.  He  died  that 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


69 


man  might  live.  Now,  men  have  found  happiness;  have 
obtained  salvation.  This  was  according  to  his  purpose.  He 
died.  This  is  my  desire,  that  his  blood  may  be  known  and 
valued  by  all  the  world.  Let  the  word  of  God  spread  all 
over  the  world — it  will  then  be  well.  I am  continually 
thinking  on  the  anger  and  the  love  of  God  : his  anger 
toward  sin;  his  love  toward  men.  May  many  in  this  land 
return  from  their  sin,  forsake  wickedness,  and  be  made  the 
children  of  light.  This  is  all  I have  now  to  say  concerning 
the  great  love  of  God,  which  has  reached  even  unto  us.” 
Thus  did  the  people  realize  and  appreciate  the  marvellous 
change  which  had  taken  place  in'  themselves,  and  desired 
to  extend  the  same  blessing  to  others.  Teava,  whom  we 
have  noticed  before  as  having  gone  out  a native  evangelist 
to  Samoa,  affords  another  happy  illustration  of  this,  in  a 
letter  he  sent  to  his  fellow  countrymen  at  Rarotonga : — ■ 
“My  brethren,  my  heart  is  much  rejoiced  by  your  letters 
which  have  reached  me,  telling  me  of  the  continued  growth 
of  the  word  of  God  in  Rarotonga.  That  is  the  work  of  the 
Holy  Spirit;  as  it  is  written  by  Paul,  ‘I  have  planted, 
Apollos  watered,  but  God  giveth  the  increase.’  Truly  it  is 
of  God.  When  I left  you,  the  good  work  had  not  taken 
much  root,  but  now  I hear  it  has  spread  over  the  land.  All 
the  people  have  received  it.  My  friends,  be  diligent  in  the 
use  of  the  means,  in  learning,  in  reading,  in  hearing,  in 
prayer:  search  the  word  of  God.  But  I will  ask  you.  Do 
you  expect  to  be  saved  by  your  works  ? No;  no  man  can 
be  thus  saved.  Salvation  is  obtained  through  Jesus.  There 
are  two  kinds  of  scaffolding — one  of  banana-stalks,  and  the 
other  of  iron-wood ; those  who  trust  in  their  own  works  are 
resting  on  the  banana-stalks,  and  will  fall;  but  let  our 
minds  be  fixed  on  Jesus  alone,  then  we  shall  be  safe.  I am 
seeking  nourishment  in  this  land,  but  I can  only  get  at  the 
sap  of  the  tree,  but  you  in  Rarotonga  have  the  heart,  and 


70 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


may  have  it  for  your  own.  You  have  prayed  for  Samoa, 
and  your  prayers  have  been  heard.  The  word  of  the  gospel 
is  taking  root  here.  The  idols  are  being  abandoned.  The 
evil  practices  of  heathenism  are  being  done  away,  and  the 
people  are  receiving  instruction.”  The  little  company  of 
believers  at  Avarua  had  sent  Teava  a present  of  native 
cloth,  mats,  and  other  articles  useful  to  him  in  his  work 
among  the  heathen ; and  he,  having  obtained  a bell  from  a 
ship  that  called  off  his  station,  writes  back,  “ Friends,  my 
body  is  far  away  from  you,  but  my  heart  cleaves  to  you 
closely  as  two  pieces  of  cloth  joined  with  paste.  I have 
lately  gained  an  English  bell,  which  I now  send  to  you  as  a 
token  of  my  affection,  to  call  the  people  to  the  house  of 
God.” 

In  these  simple  notices  of  native  writing,  the  friends  of 
missions  will  find  much  to  gratify  and  to  encourage.  The 
foundations  of  knowledge,  truth,  justice,  purity,  and  peace, 
had  been  deeply  and  substantially  laid,  and  the  people, 
growing  up  in  them,  developed  a character  at  once  the  re- 
ward and  joy  of  all  who  had  taken  part  in  the  work. 

In  the  midst  of  this  growing  prosperity,  when  every  de- 
partment of  the  mission  required  labours  more  abundant, 
when  schools,  church-members,  candidates,  when  workers  in 
wood,  and  in  iron,  and  in  stone,  and  when  those  in  the 
printing  department,  demanded  the  continued  oversight  and 
directions  of  the  missionaries,  it  was  with  deepest  anxiety 
that  they  apprehended  the  entire  failure  of  health  in  Rev. 
C.  Pitman.  Writing  at  this  time  respecting  him.  Rev.  A. 
Ruzacott  says,  “His  illness  is  severely  felt,  for  we  need  an 
increase  rather  than  a decrease  of  labourers.  Besides  the 
work  to  be  done  on  this  island,  there  are  the  other  islands 
of  this  group  to  be  visited.”  To  meet  this  demand,  it  was 
proposed  to  the  directors  of  the  London  Missionary  Society, 
that  another  missionary  be  sent,  who  should  assist  in  the 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


71 


various  departments  of  labour  on  this  island,  and,  by  alter- 
nate visitation  to  tbe  other  islands,  extend  and  consolidate 
the  interests  of  the  whole. 

The  friends  of  missions  enabled  the  directors  to  respond 
to  this  call  in  1838 ; and  in  the  future  chapters  of  this  nar- 
rative we  shall  have  to  record  further  triumphs  over  local 
evils,  and  successful  efforts  to  extend  the  aggressions  of 
Christianity  on  the  idolatry  and  heathenism  of  distant  lands. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

Missionnry  stip  Camden,  1838 — Arrives  off  Rarotonga,  1839 — Chris- 
tian village — Chapel,  school,  and  Sabbath  services — Missionary 
house — Five  thousand  copies  of  New  Testament,  in  native  language, 
taken  on  shore — Joy  of  the  people — Chief’s  messenger  from  Aro- 
rangi — Young  missionary  takes  up  his  residence  at  his  station — 
The  work  he  has  to  do — First  attempt  in  speaking  the  native  lan- 
guage— Missionary  makes  a globe  and  maps — Building  mission 
house — Fatal  epidemic — Happy  deaths — Orphans  of  the  island — 
Letters  to  friends  in  England — An  aged  native’s  speech. 


The  lltli  of  April,  1838,  is  a day  still  fresh  in  the  mem- 
ory of  many  friends  of  the  London  Missionary  Society  in 
England,  when  they  accompanied  the  Rev.  J.  Williams  and 
his  band  of  missionary  followers  down  the  river  Thames,  to 
the  missionary  brig  Camden.  Two  of  these  were  appointed 
to  occupy  stations  on  the  Rarotonga  group  as  might  be 
deemed  advisable  on  our  arrival.  On  the  morning  of  the 
4th  of  February,  1839,  ten  months  after  leaving  England, 
we  came  in  sight  of  the  island ; and  as  we  drew  near  the 
windward  station,  Ngatangiia,  two  or  three  natives  came  off 
to  us  in  their  canoes,  who,  as  soon  as  they  discovered  who 
we  were,  added  no  little  to  our  interest  and  amusement,  by 
quickly  paddling  back  to  the  shore  to  announce  to  their 
countrymen  that  it  was  Wiliamus’  missionary  ship  from 
Beritani,  Britain.  Sailing  round  to  the  north  we  were  soon 
(72) 


■:  if  I . .-rrksTT^^,,  U 

•.'•  si-  .„pi;se^,  J, 

: :■  ,.  ,r^.-  I V , . .^  . 1 . 

• ’'V  *-’*  • O*?/-.  -.  ^ ,s  ^ , J- 

■— .►  ■ ■ *l.'.  : rr  •,. 

-4,..  , ; „t.l  .i.'.  -■■' 

■ ■*  '-fr T-iJt  *1-  ■■'  l>  '’5.  • ■ 'ij'"" 

- -butiil  . ,, ,:.  tr-  •-'.  ^ ,r  ..*  i 

• ..  '!•/*'.:  V I ’.  . ',,Jm  * ' 'J'W  ^^;^T 

D»  ‘.  -.  V ,]/,  . jtV,  ^ * . ,.:  / .'  . 

1‘Ka  iiMIHW  i ••■T- I 

'.«'V  ,•  '..r  c - . , 

I^^pt>^....,,  . , .^1 

*ii|  v.fTSvwii  ■■/(■..  ; ' •,  v7rr>  ai'iV-fTl...  [. 

♦feA^iyrt7T  -uj.  ^ N,:  ',^4b<r/; 

:■  •■  ’ •1*  - ; 
^ tr  ;-./*. .x'.i'.o' . .;  jinr** 

vr’f  m ;.  ,<v  ’’  • <■  .^.rC, 

,»fWW...^r  »-.lf  ••  ; .r  , 

-rf  , , .,1^.^  trt  ^ - - - 

Iff-  rl  (jh^  1 ,i«*tii«  •!'  jllifV/  fJ  - 

K.*>>  ‘j'/f  fl’jlufl  jiU  i>i  ' r.hi.  ,i!»-i  ,(0| 

■«  a«  I 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


73 


under  the  lee  of  Avarua  station,  and  finding  a patch  of 
coral  rock  in  moderate  depth  of  water  outside  the  reef,  we 
came  to  an  anchor. 

We  were  soon  visited  by  the  Rev.  A.  Buzacott,  who  em- 
braced his  friend  Williams  with  no  ordinary  delight,  and 
gave  the  young  missionaries  a warm  fraternal  welcome  to 
the  island.  On  landing  in  the  midst  of  the  people,  we  were 
pleasingly  afiected  with  the  mildness  of  their  manners,  and 
general  decorum  of  conduct,  as  compared  with  what  we  had 
expected  to  see  in  a semi-heathen  population.  The  first 
conspicuous  object  which  attracted  our  notice  was  the  large 
commodious  chapel,  built  in  a frame,  140  feet  long  and  45 
feet  wide,  filled  up  with  wattle  and  lime  plaster,  white  as 
driven  snow.  On  entering  this  building,  we  were  filled  with 
emotions  of  astonishment  and  grateful  praise ; it  was  well 
fioored,  surrounded  by  a deep  well-arranged  gallery,  and  had 
a unique  ornamental  pulpit  and  desk  at  one  end.  It  was  a 
wonderful  and  overpowering  sight,  our  first  Sabbath  on  shore, 
to  see  this  house  of  prayer  filled  with  more  than  1000  na- 
tives, all,  with  but  few  exceptions,  clothed  in  native  cloth ; 
and  to  remember,  that  only  ten  years  before  they  were  wild, 
naked  savages,  but  now  subdued,  and  a goodly  number  of 
them  thirsting  for  instruction  which  should  still  further 
dignify  and  bless  them. 

Next  to  the  chapel  stood  the  large  and  well-planned  school- 
house.  At  eight  o’clock  on  Sabbath  morning,  700  chil- 
dren were  in  it,  each  class  of  ten  or  twelve  scholars  having 
its  teacher  ; a hymn  was  sung,  prayer  was  offered,  a short 
passage  of  Scripture  was  then  repeated  by  one  of  the  boys, 
and  a few  words  of  address  given  by  the  missionary,  after 
which  each  class  removed  to  the  chapel. 

Only  next  in  interest  and  importance  to  these  buildings 
was  that  of  the  missionaries’  house;  with  it  we  were  much 
pleased  ; it  was  a neat,  commodious,  clean,  home-like  abode. 

7 


74  GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLA'nDS. 

Not,  however,  being  large  enough  to  accommodate  our  par- 
ty, 3Ir.  Williams  and  ourselves  were  lodged  in  the  chiefs 
house.  This  was  a large,  well-built,  convenient  dwelling, 
erected  by  the  assistance  of  an  American  carpenter  who  had 
been  detained  on  the  island.  It  was  also  well  furnished 
with  chairs,  sofas,  tables,  and  beds,  and  the  floors  covered 
with  mats.  As  we  looked  at  these  things,  we  endeavoured 
to  realize  the  change  which  had  been  effected  over  this  peo- 
ple and  their  habits  by  the  wonder-working  power  of  the 
gospel  of  Jesus. 

It  was  our  privilege  to  convey  to  this  people,  on  this 
occasion,  the  first  complete  edition  of  the  New  Testament, 
in  their  own  language ; 5000  copies  had  been  printed  by  the 
British  and  Foreign  Bible  Society.  As  fast  as  these  were 
taken  to  the  different  settlements,  so  were  they  purchased 
by  the  natives  j the  missionaries’  house  was  more  like  a 
public  bazaar  than  a private  dwelling  for  many  days  after 
our  arrival.  Crowds  of  inquiring  natives  came  to  and  fro 
from  morning  unto  night,  some  to  purchase  books,  others  to 
relate  details  of  what  had  happened  on  the  island  since  Mr. 
Williams’  departure ; some  were  eager  to  know  all  about  the 
printing  of  the  Testaments,  the  purchase  of  the  mission 
ship,  and  the  state  of  the  churches  in  England;  while 
others  listened  with  delight,  and  gave  occasional  sugges- 
tions, respecting  plans  to  aid  the  advance  of  God’s  word  on 
their  own  and  other  islands. 

One  day,  while  in  the  midst  of  this  excited  multitude,  a 
fine,  tall,  half-naked  native  was  observed  running  up  the 
pathway  leading  to  the  house,  and  his  entrance  commanded 
immediate  silence.  Seating  himself  cross-legged  on  the 
floor,  and  for  a minute  or  two  vigorously  using  his  fan  to 
cool  himself,  addressing  Mr.  Williams,  he  said,  “ Blessing 
on  you,  I am  a messenger  of  the  chief  Tinomana.”  “ Blessing 
on  you,  my  friend,^”  replied  Mr.  Williams ; “ what  is  your  mes- 


:?^-;st£Ssn£..'A';^ 


ji0$U 

Jilkmlj  fi4  .Mwd  WO^WB 

^ m « i*!*****  ^ 'ST'  -»W  ^ 

^^4  44i,  Ai  iM*a  it!  « 

“^"f 

-ill  «* 

ifStItlL«-w.i>i*'M  >muM^ 

j,»,,*«i  ,**5^*l!<.ji>iii^si»sa  i 

««i,i  'n'lfli*  '•■^i  a;  «iuiMf  ' 

.hu  >» 

w^h^  riio**" 


- THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


75 


sage?”  “ Tinomana  bas  heard  of  your  arrival,  and  is  greatly 
glad,  and  he  has  sent  to  inquire  if  you  have  fulfilled  your 
promise.”  “ My  promise!”  inquired  Mr.  Williams,  “ what 
did  I promise?”  “ You  promised,”  rejoined  the  messenger, 
“ that  when  you  returned  from  Beritani  you  would  bring  a 
missionary  for  our  part  of  the  island.  I am  in  haste.  Tell 
me.  It  is  the  chief’s  message.”  Pointing  to  one  of  tho 
young  brethren  with  a nod,  and  with  one  word  to  the  native, 
Mr.  Williams  signified  that  his  promise  was  fulfilled.  The 
sign  was  no  sooner  given,  and  the  word  uttered,  than  the 
messenger  leaped  from  his  seat,  and  hastily  exclaiming, 
“ It  is  enough !”  he  bounded  down  the  road  with  the  swift- 
ness of  a hunted  deer,  and  stayed  not  his  speed  until  he 
reached  his  distant  village.  Never  was  there  a more  literal 
fulfilment  of  the  joyous  exclamation,  “ Behold  ! how  beau- 
tiful upon  the  mountains  are  the  feet  of  him  that  bringeth 
glad  tidings  of  good  things !”  than  that  now  felt  by  this 
long-expecting  people. 

Scarcely  a week  had  elapsed  after  the  announcement  of 
our  arrival,  before  arrangements  were  made  to  receive  us  at 
the  station.  Long  before  sun-rise,  on  the  day  appointed, 
about  a hundred  stout  men  came  to  aid  the  removal  of  our 
goods  and  supplies — and  the  conveyance  of  them  formed 
one  of  the  most  amusing  and  grotesque  incidents  of  early 
missionary  experience.  Tying  each  article  to  a pole,  two 
men  carried  a box,  other  two  a bed,  other  two  a bed-post. 
Six  or  eight  took  charge  of  a barrel  of  flour,  others  of  chairs, 
and  pans,  and  kettles,  and  other  things  necessary  to  the 
settlement  of  a European  station.  Arriving  at  the  village, 
we  were  conducted  to  the  native  teacher’s  house,  where  the 
whole  of  the  day  we  received  the  kind  welcome  of  the 
people ; some  of  whom  brought  presents  of  fowls,  pigs,  and 
native  vegetables  for  an  immediate  supply  of  our  wants. 
As  night  drew  on,  it  became  necessary  to  put  up  our  bed- 


76 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


stead;  as  it  was  the  first  English  made  one  that  the  people 
of  this  station  had  seen,  nothing  would  satisfy  their  curios- 
ity but  allowing  them  to  see  its  erection,  and  I suppose  some 
two  or  three  hundred  of  them  visited  the  bed-room  for  that 
purpose  before  we  could  retire  to  rest. 

To  describe  the  feelings  of  a young  missionary  not  know- 
ing the  language,  left  alone  in  such  a situation,  is  quite  out 
of  the  question ; he  is  surrounded  by  much  to  gratify,  much 
to  annoy,  and  much  to  urge  to  diligence  and  patience. 
Much  work  has  to  be  done  of  which  he  had  no  conception 
until  his  arrival,  work  that  must  he  done,  and  done  by  him- 
self, if  he  would  secure  a position  among  the  semi-barbar- 
ous  tribes,  worthy  of  his  character,  and  beneficial  to  their 
advancement.  In  proportion  to  his  desire  to  adapt  himself 
to  his  new  circumstances,  so  he  feels  the  limited  resources 
at  his  command — no  shops,  no  stores,  no  trades,  no  pro- 
fessed artisans  nearer  than  four  thousand  miles  across  the 
sea.  Within  a day’s  sail  of  Rarotonga,  I remember,  in 
great  anxiety,  saying  to  Mr.  Williams,  “ Alas  ! what  shall  I 
do  ? I have  forgotten  to  bring  hinges  for  the  doors  of  our 
house,  but  I suppose  there  are  smiths  on  shore  who  make 
them.”  Smiling  at  my  plight,  and  rubbing  his  hands,  in 
his  own  good-natured  way,  he  replied,  “ O sir,  you  will  find 
the  natives  able  to  make  and  do  anything  that  you  will  teach 
them.” 

Our  nearest  flour-market  being  at  Sydney,  we  had  brought 
a barrel  or  two  with  us  from  that  colony,  but  how  to  bake 
it  became  a serious  question.  The  native  oven  in  which 
they  cook  all  their  food  is  a pit  dug  in  the  ground,  around 
which  are  laid  stones  heated  to  a proper  heat,  on  which  the 
food  is  placed,  and  covered  with  leaves  and  earth  until  done. 
This  mode  of  cooking  was  found  to  answer  well  for  native 
vegetables,  but  it  was  not  available  to  bake  bread.  It  there- 
fore became  necessary  to  attempt  an  umu  papaa,  a foreign 


••  THE -ISLAND  OP  EAROTOTSTGAV  ''  IT 

oveii;  and  returning  from  school  one  morning  we  set  to 
work.  With  large  stones  we  built  up  a table  about  three 
feet  high  and  four  feet  square,  on  which  we  raised  a mound 
of  earth  to  the  size  and  shape  required,  and  then  built  it 
over  with  small  fire-proof  stone.  This  contrivance  answered 
our  purpose  very  well  until  we  obtained  bricks  from  a vessel 
wrecked  on  the  island. 

One  great  anxiety  of  a missionary  entering  on  a foreign 
field  of  labour  is  the  acquisition  of  the  language  of  the 
people.  Towards  attaining  this  object  we  had  had  almost 
daily  classes  on  our  voyage ; and  on  lauding  on  the  island, 
acting  on  the  advice  of  our  elder  brethren,  we  spent  as 
much  time  as  possible  during  each  day  in  actual  contact 
with  the  people,  learning  from  them,  rather  than  from  books 
alone,  the  words,  idiom,  and  pronunciation  of  the  language. 
Every  morning  we  went  to  the  schools,  many  hours  during 
each  day  were  spent  with  the  people  at  their  work;  and 
every  evening,  visits  were  encouraged  to  the  native  class- 
room. Early  attempts,  however,  to  speak  correctly  in  a new 
tongue,  are  generally  failures,  and  are  sometimes  of  a most 
ludicrous  character ; but  the  natives  are  kind,  and  although 
they  laugh  at  your  mistakes,  yet  they  take  great  pains  to 
set  you  right,  and  with  a moderate  share  of  diligence  and 
perseverance,  each  missionary  on  the  group  has  begun  his 
first  public  speaking  in  the  assemblies  of  the  people  with 
tolerable  correctness,  within  six  months  after  his  residence 
among  them. 

In  attempting  to  advance  the  young  people  in  general 
knowledge,  we  much  felt,  at  this  period  of  the  mission,  our 
limited  supply  of  school  material.  A few  simple  elementary 
addresses  were  given  on  astronomy  and  geography,  which 
much  interested  the  awakening  minds  of  the  scholars,  and 
led  ns  to  try  oifi-  skill  in  map  and  globe  making.  A cala- 
bash 18  inches  in  diameter  was  procured,  native  cloth  waa 
7 » 


78 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


pasted  over  the  ends  to  make  it  shapeable,  and  the  whole 
was  covered  with  writing-paper;  on  this  we  marked  in  ink, 
with  sufficient  correctness  for  our  purpose,  the  different 
nations,  and  continents,  and  islands  of  the  globe,  which, 
being  varnished  and  placed  on  a pedestal,  mightily  asto- 
nished and  in  some  measure  instructed  the  people. 

In  addition  to  these  things,  we  had  to  superintend  the 
building  of  our  dwelling-house  j and,  with  a view  to  give 
information  to  friends  who  have  made  inquiries  respecting 
the  mode  of  erecting  such  buildings,  I may  be  excused  for 
giving  a short  detail  here.  On  the  location  of  a missionary 
or  teacher  at  a station,  either  the  chief  or  principal  land- 
holder gives  him,  in  virtue  of  his  office,  a piece  of  ground 
sufficiently  large  to  build  a house  on ; the  proprietor  reserv- 
ing to  himself  the  right  of  possession  when  the  missionary 
leaves  the  station.  On  this  ground  the  missionary  builds 
his  house,  and  it  is  the  only  landed  property  held  by  mission- 
aries in  the  Rarotonga  group.  Towards  the  erection  of  his 
house  the  majority  of  the  people  voluntarily  assist : a feast 
is  given  by  the  missionary,  and  it  is  understood  that  all  who 
come  to  the  feast,  pledge  themselves  to  erect  the  shell  and 
to  thatch  the  building.  On  the  day  of  thatching,  another 
feast  is  given  upon  a larger  scale  than  the  former, 
when  the  missionary  selects  his  workmen  for  finishing  off 
the  different  apartments  of  the  house,  to  whom  he  gives 
an  ample  supply  of  tools.  When  the  work  is  finished,  an- 
other feast  is  provided  for  the  workmen,  and  each  receives, 
at  a fair  valuation,  articles  of  clothing,  as  a remuneration 
for  his  labour.  In  this  way  our  house  was  built  at  Aroran- 
gi,  and  we  were  permitted  to  occupy  it  within  ten  months 
after  our  arrival  at  the  station.  At  one  end  of  it  there  was 
a large  native  room,  capable  of  containing  fifty  persons,  in 
which,  besides  select  gatherings  two  or  three  evenings  in 
each  week,  Bible  and  other  classes  were  daily  held. 


THE  ISLAND  OP  RAROTONGA. 


79 


About  this  time  the  last  settlement  formed  on  Rarotonga, 
Titikaveka,  was  adorned  with  a beautiful,  strong,  stone 
chapel.  It  was  the  first  stone  building  erected  on  the  island, 
and  still  stands  a monument  of  the  industry  of  the  people, 
and  of  the  skill  of  Mr.  Cunningham,  a gentleman  then  re- 
siding with  the  people;  and  who,  by  superintending  the 
erection,  rendered  good  service  to  the  missionary  in  his  at- 
tempts to  advance  their  civilization.  The  gospel  was  intro- 
duced into  this  district  in  1832,  and  when  this  chapel  was 
opened  in  1843,  the  whole  population  formed  a flourishing 
Christian  out-station  of  Ngatangiia,  and  was  conducted  by 
the  efficient  agency  of  a native  teacher. 

Amidst  the  spiritual  successes  which  now  obtained  on 
Rarotonga,  the  missionaries  had  continually  to  mourn  over 
the  ravages  of  death  on  the  population.  The  hurricanes 
and  subsequent  famine  of  former  years  had  induced  disease, 
which  threatened  speedily  to  depopulate  the  island.  But 
amidst  this  sorrow  there  was  joy,  for  hundreds  of  converted 
souls,  ripe  for  glory,  were  by  this  dispensation  gathered 
into  heaven.  A volume  of  no  mean  dimensions  might  be 
written,  devoted  entirely  to  the  record  of  the  individual 
Christian  life  and  triumphant  death  of  those  who  were  the 
first-fruits  of  Christianity  on  the  island,  only  one  of  whom, 
however,  we  can  notice  here. 

“ To-day,”  writes  Mr.  Pitman,  “ I have  spent  an  hour 
with  my  valued  friend  Tupe,  a deacon,  whose  days  are  fast 
closing.  ‘ It  is  strange  to  observe  your  seat  in  the  house  of 
God  vacant,’  I observed.  ‘ Ah  !’  he  replied,  ‘ it  is  the  will 
of  God.  As  I hear  the  people  sing,  oh ! I wish  to  be  there. 
But  God  is  with  me  here ; he  will  not  forsake  me.’  I then 
spoke  of  several  texts  from  which  1 had  recently  preached, 
and  found  that  he  had  been  told  them  by  his  family ; and 
referring  to  the  promises  of  God,  he  said,  ‘Not  one  good 
thing  hath  failed  me.’  I mentioned  to  him  my  sorrow  at 


8a 


GEMS  PROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


the  loss  I should  sustain  by  his  departure.  ‘ Yes/  he  said; 

‘ we  have  been  permitted  to  work  together  for  God  : his 
love  has  been  great  to  us,  but  grieve  not ; detain  me  not.  I 
have  no  fear : Christ  is  my  refuge.  Salvation  is  of  grace, 
through  the  blood  of  Jesus.’  Calling  again  on  the  day  of  his 
death,  I inquired,  ‘ How  is  it  with  the  soul,  now  V ‘ All 
well.’  ' Do  you  find  the  Saviour  near  V ‘ Yes ; he  is  near.’ 

‘ Is  the  pathway  clear  ?’  ' All  clear,’  he  replied ; ‘ no  ob- 

struction whatever.’  ‘ What  shall  I say  to  the  church  for 
you?’  I inquired.  ‘Tell  the  church,’  he  replied,  ‘to  be 
strong,  to  be  diligent,  to  hold  fast  unto  the  end.’  Life  was 
fast  ebbing,  and  he  said,  ‘ I shall  now  soon  drink  of  the  wa- 
ter of  life.  Christ  is  mine.  Be  not  cast  down.’  These 
■were  his  last  words,  and  his  spirit  took  its  flight  to  glory.” 

One  distressing  circumstance  arising  out  of  these  frequent 
deaths,  was  the  destitution  which  they  occasioned  in  nu- 
merous families ; so  much  so,  that  in  1842  it  was  found 
there  were  no  fewer  than  a thousand  orphans  on  the  island ; 
as  far  as  possible,  their  relatives  provided  for  their  subsist- 
ence, but  it  was  utterly  out  of  their  power  to  clothe  them. 
A statement  of  their  case  was  at  this  time  made  to  friends 
in  England,  many  of  whom  sent  out  a liberal  supply  of  gar- 
ments, to  be  distributed  to  the  most  destitute;  and  the 
following  are  specimens  of  native  letters  sent  by  these  young 
persons  to  their  benefactors. 

“ Brethren  and  Sisters  in  England ; — Great  is  the  joy  of 
our  hearts — the  destitute  and  fatherless — because  of  your 
compassion  to  us.  This  is  that  by  which  we  know  your 
love  to  us.  You  formerly  prayed  for  us,  and  your  prayers 
were  prosperous.  God  heard  them,  and  his  word  grew 
quickly  on  Barotonga;  and  now  you  have  given  clothing' 
to  the  fatherless.  We  shall  now  think  continually  of  God’s 
love,  and  we  will  also  pray  to  him  for  you,  that  his  love  may 
grow  abundantly  with  you  in  your  laud.”  . • ' 


THE  ISLAND  OP  RAROTONGA. 


81 


Another  writes  : “ Friends  and  Brethren : — We  had  for- 
merly heard  of  God’s  love  to  you,  but  now  we  know  that 
you  have  been  loved  by  him,  because  you  have  had  compas- 
sion on  us.  You  have  sent  us  the  ‘good  word,’  and  slates, 
and  pencils,  and  teachers;  and  more,  you  have  sent  us 
clothes,  that  we  may  be  clothed  on  the  Sabbath-day.  Our 
mothers  are  dead,  and  we  now  dwell  parentless;  God  is 
our  parent.  Our  native  cloth  soon  rots.  It  is  only  the 
bark  of  a tree.  Therefore  we  are  glad  for  the  clothing  now 
sent  by  you.  May  you  be  saved  by  the  Messiah !” 

While  thus  assisted,  the  people  were  desirous  to  assist,  to 
the  best  of  their  ability,  the  onward  interest  of  the  mission. 
They  had  no  money  then,  but  readily  fell  in  with  the  sugges- 
tion to  have  an  annual  missionary  service,  with  an  especial 
view  to  gain  information  respecting  the  work  of  God  in  the 
world,  and  to  give  contributions  of  native  property  towards 
the  support  of  the  Societe  Medua  (Parent  Society) ; and 
during  the  two  or  three  years  of  their  deepest  poverty, 
they  raised  arrowroot  for  the  society  to  the  value  of  forty 
pounds,  and  sent  to  the  British  and  Foreign  Bible  Society 
the  same  sum,  in  part  payment  for  the  New  Testaments 
they  had  so  recently  received. 

At  one  of  these  annual  services,  an  aged  native  spoke 
thus  to  the  young  people  : “ Exalt  your  voices  high  in  praise 
to  God ; he  has  saved  you  from  the  pit  of  heathenism.  We, 
your  fathers,  know  the  character  of  that  pit ; some  of  us 
were  born  there.  The  place  on  which  we  are  now  met  was 
once  a fearful  place — a place  of  murder ; spears  were  our 
companions,  and  the  sling  and  stone  were  our  cherished 
property.  Alas ! alas ! we  ate  human  flesh,  we  drank  human 
blood ; but  now  we  are  saved  out  of  that  death.  Let  us 
praise  God.  His  love  is  great,  and  let  us  do  what  we  can 
to  send  the  word  of  God  to  those  who  are  as  we  once  were. 
The  church  of  Christ  is  doing  much;  they  call  on  us  to 


82- 


gems  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANBS. 


help ; we  have  no  property,  but  we  have  land,  and  we  know 
how  to  plant.  Let  us  continue  to  plant  arrowroot  for  this 
purpose ; and  what  we  do  with  our  hands,  let  us  see  that 
our  hearts  be  there  also.”  That  year,  three  thousand  pounds 
of  arrowroot  were  subscribed,  at  the  different  settlements 
on  the  island,  towards  the  funds  of  the  London  Missionary 
Society. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


Statistics  of  the  island,  1843 — Notices  respecting  reported  island  of  Tu- 
anaki — Reports  respecting  Tahiti  and  New  Zealand  reach  the 
island — Native  impressions  respecting  those  reports — Consequent 
laws — An  American  resides  on  shore — Ilis  difficulties  respecting 
planting  and  land — Refusal  of  land  on  rent  to  missionary — Forma- 
tion of  boarding-school — Results — How  sustained — School-recrea- 
tions— An  account  of  heathen  cruelty  to  children — Building  of  a 
new  chapel  at  ^Vrorangi — Contrast  with  heathen  temples — Death  of 
an  aged  deacon. 

The  STATISTICS  of  the  island  for  the  year  closing  Decem- 
ber, 1843,  were  as  follows: — Population,  3300.  Deaths 
during  that  year,  were  443.  Births  for  the  same  time,  100. 
Total  admissions  to  membership  in  the  church  since  its  for- 
mation to  this  date,  722.  Number  admitted  to  membership 
that  year,  91.  Total  in  communion  at  the  same  period,  408. 
In  adult  schools,  850.  In  children’s  schools,  1300.  The  only 
distressing  feature  of  these  figures  is  the  immense  dispropor- 
tion of  births  to  the  deaths  in  the  population ; hut  as  we  shall 
have  to  notice  this  fact  more  fully  in  a later  period  of  this 
history,  we  pass  on  to  detail  works  connected  with  the  in- 
dividual and  general  improvement  of  the  people. 

Early  in  1844  a little  schooner  came  from  Rurutu,  an 
island  in  the  Tahitian  group,  to  Rarotonga.  Under  the  di- 
rection of  the  Rev.  G.  Platt,  it  had-been  sent  in  search  of 

(83) 


84 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


an  island  called  Tuanaki,  known  by  tradition  in  all  the 
islands  of  our  group,  but  yet  undiscovered.  It  is  asserted 
to  be  situated  not  more  than  200  miles  to  the  south,  or 
south-west  of  Rarotonga,  and  is  said  to  consist  of  three  low 
islands  within  one  reef,  and  to  be  thickly  inhabited.  Prior 
to  the  arrival  of  the  Rurutu  vessel  we  had  heard  much  of 
this  island,  and  had  taken  a voyage  of  a week,  hoping  to 
have  seen  it.  Two  native  sailors  have  seen  the  island,  at 
different  times,  when  on  board  whaling  ships,  one  of  whom 
had  intercourse  with  the  people.  He  says,  that  “ they  ex- 
actly resemble  the  Mangaians  in  person,  dress,  and  customs ; 
that  they  had  heard  of  the  overthrow  of  idolatry  on  Raro- 
tonga and  Mangaia,  and  that  they  were  waiting  with  expec- 
tation some  foreign  teachers  to  visit  them.”  That  such  an 
island  exists  there  seems  to  be  no  doubt,  and  that  it  is  com- 
paratively near  to  the  Hervey  group  is  confirmed  by  all 
reports,  but  of  its  exact  position  we  can  gain  no  correct  in- 
formation. The  natives  are,  however,  quite  sure  it  will  be 
found,  and  often  pray  for  means  to  commence  a voyage  of 
discovery. 

About  this  time  the  inhabitants  of  Rarotonga  became 
much  concerned  and  discouraged  at  reports  about  the  doings 
of  the  French  in  Tahiti,  and  the  war  between  the  English 
and  natives  of  New  Zealand.  Every  captain  and  ship’s 
crew  who  visited  the  island  was  strictly  and  separately  ques- 
tioned respecting  those  events,  and  on  reports  thus  gained 
they  formed  their  own  opinions  respecting  those  events. 
Sometimes,  prejudicially  to  their  own  interests,  they  were 
evidently  suspicious  lest  the  establishment  of  Christianity 
on  their  island  should  ultimately  lead  to  such  disasters  as 
those  of  which  they  heard  in  other  islands.  Hence  the 
authorities  convened,  and  resolved,  that  it  should  be  a law 
not  to  sell  any  land  to  foreigners,  neither  to  allow  them  to 
marry  native  females;  concluding,  from  what  they  had 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


85 


heanl,  that  these  were  the  begetting  eauses  of  the  evils 
which  they  dreaded. 

lu  order  to  illustrate  the  policy,  independence,  and  de- 
termination with  which  they  carried  out  this  purpose,  it  may 
be  stated  that,  some  time  afterward,  a respectable  American 
captain  conceived  a desire  to  make  the  island  his  home. 
On  landing,  he  was  received  and  entertained  by  the  chief 
judge  of  the  station,  as  his  visitor  and  friend.  Marking  a 
somewhat  larger  piece  of  unoccupied  ground  than  usual 
between  the  judge’s  house  and  his  neighbour’s,  the  captain 
one  day  produced  a large  quantity  of  cabbage,  coffee,  pump- 
kin, and  various  other  seeds.  “Fine  place  this  to  plant 
some  of  these  seeds,”  said  the  visitor.  “ Truly  so,”  replied 
the  native,  “ let  my  servants  help  you.”  And  the  thing 
was  done.  A month  or  two  afterwards,  when  the  plants 
had  grown,  the  captain  asked  and  gained  permission  to  get 
a wall  fence  put  up,  round  the  small  plantation. 

Early  one  morning,  before  the  judge’s  friend  had  made 
his  appearance,  two  stout  young  men  were  on  the  spot  with 
wood  for  framework  of  a house,  and  they  began  to  clear  the 
ground  for  its  erection.  The  captain  was  soon  with  them, 
and  commanded  them  to  desist.  “ No,”  said  the  young 
men,  “ it  is  our  land,  and  we  are  going  to  build  our  house 
on  it.”  “ It  is  mine,”  replied  the  angry  foreigner,  and  he 
would,  in  all  probability,  have  laid  hands  on  them,  had  not 
John,  the  judge,  very  opportunely  made  his  appearance. 
Depending  on  his  friend’s  interference  on  his  behalf,  he  de- 
manded immediate  redress;  but  was  answered  with  pro- 
voking coolness,  “ that  it  was  bad  to  be  angry,  and  worse 
to  fight ; and  that  the  thing  could  soon  be  decided  in  court 
before  the  chief.”  That  day  the  case  was  heard,  and  the 
foreigner  was  obliged  to  relinquish  what  he  supposed  he  had 
secured.  The  two  young  men  were  sons  of  a native  who 
was  dead.  The  spot  of  land  planted  was  the  site  of  their 
8 


8G 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


father’s  house,  but  during  their  minority,  they  had  been 
living  elsewhere  ; now,  one  of  them  was  about  to  settle  in 
life,  and  he  adopted  the  only  plan  in  his  power  to  regain  his 
homestead.  This  matter  being  thus  decided,  much  to  the 
chagrin  of  the  captain,  he  inquired  about  a small  coffee 
plantation  inland,  which  he  had  planted  on  the  sole  ground 
of  friendship,  as  in  the  other  case.  “Very  good,”  replied 
John,  “ the  seeds  have  grown,  the  plants  are  high,  and  when 
they  bear  fruit,  the  fruit  is  yours,  but  the  ground  is  mine, 
and  the  trees  are  mine.”  “ Nonsense,”  replied  the  foreigner, 
“ they  are  both  mine,  and  when  I leave  the  island  cannot  I 
sell  them  to  whom  I choose  ?”  “ No,  no,”  rejoined  the 

native,  “ we  do  not  dispose  of  our  land ; as  long  as  you  re- 
main you  may  have  the  fruit,  but  the  land  and  the  trees  are 
mine.” 

The  missionary  had  not  heard  a word  of  this  affair,  until 
the  captain  himself  came  on  the  evening  of  the  day  to  re- 
hearse his  supposed  grievances  ; and  he  only  seemed  to 
moderate  in  his  feelings  of  displeasure  when  he  was  re- 
minded that  he  knew  how  highly  the  natives  esteemed  their 
missionary,  and  that  only  a few  weeks  previously  they  had 
refused  him  the  annual  renting  of  a small  potato  plantation, 
upon  the  ground  that  they  had  resolved  neither  to  sell  nor 
let  their  land  to  foreigners. 

Frequent  attempts  have  also  been  made  by  English  and 
American  sailors  to  disannul  the  law  re.specting  marriage, 
but  hitherto  both  the  one  and  the  other  remain  in  force  on 
the  whole  island.  Different  opinions  will  doubtless  be  formed 
respecting  these  decisions ; but  it  must  be  remembered  that 
they  are  entirely  of  native  origin,  created  by  their  own 
opinion  of  foreign  interference  in  other  lands.  There  are 
reasons  which  would  induce  the  missionary  to  advise  a con- 
trary course  of  procedure,  could  the  relation  and  the  alliance 
prohibited,  be  secured  on  principles  of  good  faith,  honesty, 


TUB  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


87 


and  morality ; but  it  will  be  clearly  seen  to  be  both  bis  duty 
and  his  strength  to  be  quiet  in  the  matter. 

To  return  to  the  advance  of  missionary  work  on  the 
island,  we  must  notice  the  establishment  of  boarding  schools. 
It  was  felt  desirable,  as  the  mission  advanced,  to  select  a few 
of  the  best  scholars,  of  good  ability,  acquirements,  and  char- 
acter ; and  for  the  purpose  of  taking  them  away  as  far  as 
pos.sible  from  native  influence,  to  make  arrangements  for 
them  to  reside  on  the  missionary  premises,  where  they  should 
be  taught  in  branches  of  knowledge  which  could  not  be 
taught  in  the  general  schools,  and,  as  far  as  necessary,  be 
provided  with  board  and  clothing.  Mrs.  Pitman  established 
one  of  these  schools  for  girls,  at  Ngatangiia,  which  for  some 
time  was  efficiently  conducted  by  her  sister.  Miss  Corrie. 
Subsequently,  Miss  Buzacott  has  superintended  one  of  the 
same  kind,  at  Avarua,  upon  a more  extended  scale,  and 
which  will  be  a lasting  blessing  to  the  people. 

At  Arorangi,  we  commenced  our  boys’  boarding-scbool  in 
1843.  The  school-house  was  built  on  our  premises  by  the 
people  of  the  settlement,  at  a very  moderate  expense  ; and 
during  ten  years,  twenty-six  lads  were  admitted  to  its  ad- 
vantages. Two  classes  were  attended  to  every  day,  embra- 
cing lessons  in  reading,  writing,  arithmetic,  geography,  his- 
tory, English  reading,  and  lectures  on  general  useful 
subjects ; besides  which,  three  hours  a-day  were  spent  in 
learning  the  use  of  carpenter’s  tools,  under  the  care  of  a 
native  artisan.  Without  entering  largely  into  details,  the 
following  report,  given  in  1853,  will  show  the  result  of  its 
working  : — Twenty-six  scholars  were  admitted  during  ten 
years;  of  whom  one  was  a heathen  lad  from  Maniiki,  who 
returned  home  educated  and  hopefully  pious  ; three  were 
young,  and  characters  not  formed ; four  were  intelligent,  but 
no  evidence  of  piety ; one  died ; three  engaged  as  seamen 
on  board  American  ships ; five  were  candidates  for  church 


88 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


fellowship ; eight  were  members  of  the  church,  four  of 
whom  wore  usefully  employed  in  the  settlement  schools;  and 
three  had  gone  out  as  teachers  to  the  heathen. 

There  were  generallj'  twelve  or  fourteen  youths  in  the 
school  at  one  time,  and  the  whole  expense  of  board  and 
clothing  each  did  not  exceed  three  pounds  a year.  Five  of 
the  above  number  were  supported  by  friends  in  England, 
who  unitedly  subscribed  fifteen  pounds  a year;  this  sum  was 
laid  out  in  the  purchase  of  articles  of  English  manufacture, 
and  forwarded  to  us,  and  the  others  were  provided  for  by 
boxes  of  articles,  sent  to  us  from  congregations,  and  ladies’ 
missionary  associations — contributions  of  famous  and  useful 
notoriety  in  every  field  of  missionary  labour. 

Desirous  to  enliven  as  well  as  instruct  the  children  of  our 
schools,  we  were  in  the  habit  of  having  half-yearly  treats 
and  recreations  for  them.  At  some  of  these,  the  children 
of  other  settlements  united  in  the  festivities  of  the  occasion. 
The  principal  gathering  was  held  in  the  month  of  May. 
Each  class,  accompanied  by  its  teacher,  walked  to  the  end 
of  the  station,  where  they  were  joined  by  the  visitors,  and 
where  together  they  sang  a hymn  of  praise  to  God  for  gospel 
privileges.  Having  partaken  together  of  a feast,  they  were 
formed  into  ranks,  and,  with  banners  of  native  cloth  of 
many  colours,  decorated  with  leaves  and  flowers  and  fea- 
thers, they  marched  from  one  end  of  the  village  to  the  other. 
At  the  close  of  such  occasions,  they  were  addressed  by  one 
or  two  of  the  old  men,  who  had  been  redeemed  out  of  actual 
heathenism,  and  to  whom  the  young  people  always  listened 
with  interest  and  delight.  The  following  will  serve  as  a 
specimen  of  such  addresses. 

An  old  Tiian,  who  in  former  years  had  been  a warrior, 
priest,  and  cannibal,  engaged  the  attention  of  the  children, 
by  reciting  in  a vehement  manner  an  ancient  invocation  to 
Tangaroa,  their  idol.  He  then  said  : “Children  and  youths, 
listen  to  me.  These  were  our  words,  and  this  was  our  man- 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


89 


ncr  in  the  days  of  your  fathers  who  are  dead;  yes,  they  are 
dead  ! Oh,  if  they  had  lived  now,  how  happy  would  they 
be  to  see  what  I see  ! My  dear  young  people,  I wish  you 
to  know  the  great  deliverance  you  enjoy.  You  have  often 
been  told  of  the  dark  deeds  practised  in  this  land  before 
the  love  of  God  reached  us.  I will  not  say  much  to-day ; 
but  just  tell  you  of  a little  child  in  heathenism,  whose  fate 
I knew.  At  a time  before  the  word  of  God  shone  upon  us, 
we  were  at  war  with  the  people  of  the  other  side  of  the 
island.  There  was  no  safety  at  that  time.  If  men  or  women 
or  children  left  home  in  the  morning,  perhaps  they  would 
be  killed  before  night.  During  this  war,  a father  and 
mother  left  their  house  on  yonder  mountain  to  fish  in  the 
sea  towards  Avarua.  They  had  a little  child,  whom  they 
took  with  them ; and,  being  weary,  they  sat  under  a tree  to 
rest.  While  here,  they  were  surprised  by  the  sudden  ap- 
proach of  two  men  from  the  enemy-station.  What  to  do, 
they  did  not  know.  In  a moment,  however,  they  put  the 
child  up  in  the  tree,  and  hid  themselves  in  the  bush.  Alas ! 
the  child  was  seen  by  the  two  men.  Was  it  compassionated  ? 
Was  it  saved?  No;  they  took  it,  and,  with  wild  shouting, 
they  dashed  it  to  death  on  a heap  of  stones.  But  this  did 
not  satisfy  them ; they  took  up  the  stones,  and  crushed  its 
body  to  atoms.  Alas  ! alas  ! my  heart  weeps  for  that  child. 
Had  the  word  of  God  come  in  his  time,  he  would  have  lived, 
and  perhaps  would  now  have  been  in  our  midst.  Ye  little 
children,  and  ye  older  youths,  weep  for  that  child,  and  for 
the  cruel  deeds  of  your  fathers.  But  blessed  are  your  eyes, 
for  they  see  this  season  ! Here  you  all  are,  the  children  of 
these  two  settlements,  united  in  love  ! Be  diligent,  be  at- 
tentive, be  followers  of  God  as  dear  children.” 

How  true  the  Divine  testimony  concerning  the  heathen  ! 
“ Their  habitation  is  full  of  cruelty,  and  their  feet  are  swift 
to  shed  innocent  blood  I”  but  thanks  unto  God  for  the  word 


90 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


of  his  power  and  grace,  which  has  subdued  such  evils  as 
those  on  Rarotonga,  and  made  the  people  to  rejoice  aloud  in 
his  salvation.  Let  the  people  of  God,  thus  encouraged, 
increase  the  agency  by  which  this  instrument  of  mercy 
shall  be  applied  to  every  people  and  tribe  who  are  still  as 
ignorant  and  degraded  as  the  Rarotongans  were  before  it 
was  conveyed  to  them. 

We  have  already  had  to  notice  the  desolating  effect  of  one 
severe  hurricane  since  the  introduction  of  the  gospel  to  the 
island,  and  every  year’s  experience  confirmed  the  opinion 
that  a more  substantial  mode  of  building  houses  should  be 
adopted  as  soon  as  possible.  Already  the  advantages  of 
the  stone  chapel  at  Titikaveka  were  seen,  and  the  people 
of  Avarua  and  Ngatangiia  had  built  stone  school-houses. 
In  1844,  the  old  wooden-frame  chapel  of  Arorangi  was 
in  a dilapidated  state,  and  it  was  resolved  by  the  natives  to 
build  a stone  one  in  its  stead.  The  association  of  Classes 
undertook  the  work,  and  after  burning  many  tons  of  lime 
we  made  preparation  for  laying  the  foundation  stone. 

The  day  of  this  ceremony  was  one  of  peculiar  interest. 
A numerous  meeting  of  natives,  including  many  church 
members  and  deacons,  of  the  other  village  churches,  came 
to  the  station.  Makea,  and  Pa,  formerly  rival  chiefs  in  hea- 
then life,  but  now  loving  helpers  of  each  other  in  the  gos- 
pel, together  performed  the  ceremony  of  fixing  the  centre 
stone  of  the  building;  a hymn  was  sung,  a prayer  was 
oflFered,  when  good  old  Tinomana,  the  first  chief  who  burnt 
the  idols  of  the  land,  gave  a short  address.  In  making  re- 
ference to  the  mode  of  building  the  temples  of  idolatry,  he 
said,  “that  the  principal  pillar  was  always  erected  with 
offerings  and  sacrifices : property,  food,  and  sometimes 

human  beings,  were  placed  iu  the  bottom  of  the  pit,  where 
the  pillar  was  to  he  placed,  which  was  called  a tarangaara, 
or  propitiation  to  the  gods.”  Appropriate  use  was  made 
of  this  fact  by  subsequent  speakers,  and  the  service  of 


Aioraugi  Chapel,  llaiotoupa. 


.Ai>y4yr»>iif  H in  smt 

W ' ^ "-''li*  V ftQi)  yoif'rii/)  mM 

(I,  n ulj 

•;  .'d'^  '«■!  !,iu  '««ur  li/rf  .■•  ■Jlirwl 

gv»w  ■««  • ••  ■'  e <iif  -ujj  if'l 

'-v)  .■■  y ; I,  ••  >iim 

; i^!#  s-yit  x/UL0^':  )'>  ■;  ,- i ■-  ..  ,^.,«r  i*f»n^  .,•(, 

»4rr  ,/Ju'rt  ic  j. 

i»U4  .*c  ,»JO!>llia,  'tivit  dj'tv  qu  ItjVilUl 

■<11*  h«  Wf>(v  4. 

■hU  '>.  U4t  kaubdiPiffn  « tt  aj.'f-o  fcrt 

v..<lio  "U  r4M4a  * how 

Irti  moBfr.  ^ .-Qaatii^cf  ,4i  > ?.  -i  -.r4i‘T»it 

."!  9W-^  ‘^<4  :-*n>ixu  «4 

i_.u  iicwilivb  V*  *»Oii  » : -^m  iaoxl 

■ lr>*i'v^ii{  i»fUt  baft  ‘ tfi.4»,t  In 
wMt  :.«ii:,a4  -lituitf  »»  ' ii  >. 

>1  <w  ,crij?iu  bcs  il  ■'  t-  * »iH  !<,•  ^.^jmi  iiaij 

gg  ;<;r  r^i..i->«rji  I ^ <k..  . b^brjjo 

-nta.fi.  ' >"fw t«  i i-itV,  i-Hi  «K<  ^»I.  (Hio 
buMiriv^ii  Oiwf  ' '/  oi^'-dlWb 

■alb^  • <^«t A .-^  ■-  f itM  ^itdjavf.9  p 

otMkA  oi  (4mA  * i>ia<>J4ig  i . . jn  ■ — mAt. 

-Mm  . -xl  1^  ooh  xt  if  >1,01  ^ itiT* 

• ,L«4  i<i«  ai|i(jHp  «cv  tf 

i , ;<ii..<<;>ji'iJ<  "jii! -4<  >jj>{  ^ '4 

it  4 »T-  >a  rlni  i-i  1 . y 1 

-w/ti  r .i  !■.(  ..  '■  . -u«.  . * «f  ^Utvr  \ • t,..d 

o':  i),;:-  . - . . ; • -.i.  -i  1 ■ >/  t 

wM^lMMTUib  T-iJ,  ! /«  ,->:  t-rnL-  -^,4  ,i<xnWiblto 

; sotWtJ  >:  ■'•  < Bv,  wtof  iwaKlpi  . •!»»  ;oobi 

• UMtiimlti  iniitj  > ; >.-n  l-.h-n.iiiat  ••  t :m>  inW 

i<il»  V.  •>;  I'l.  ..  .,<  r -M;  ■■■ji-.;  ^ ,;■„  J{/. 

• '■•M  i — ii(  ^til  L'.it:  v^lifru^  rol  jrf  ,t.<  i “ ^iiim 

' aiJif  j[t|  ,)-x  . tijwJ  I,#vu  iml  v»a 


THE  ISLAND  OP  RAROTONGA. 


91 


tlie  occasion  closed,  forming  one  of  those  happy  eras 
which  contrast  so  strikingly  with  the  former  habits  of  this 
once  heathen,  but  now  simple-hearted,  and  grateful  Christ- 
ian people. 

The  building  of  this  chapel  was  a great  work  for  these 
unpractised  natives,  and  it  took  twelve  months  to  complete. 
Its  dimensions  were,  inside,  sixty  feet  long,  fifty  feet  wide  j 
walls  thirty  inches  thick,  and  twenty-four  feet  high.  The 
interior  was  filled  up  with  three  galleries,  closed  pews,  and 
rosewood  stained  pulpit.  The  engraving  gives  a view  of  its 
exterior,  and  when  it  is  remembered  that  the  whole  of  the 
work  was  done  by  the  natives  themselves,  under  no  other 
superintendence  than  that  of  the  missionary,  it  cannot  fail 
to  interest  those  who  justly  expect  an  advance  in  the  prac- 
tical arts  and  science  of  civilized  life  wheresoever  the  gospel 
of  Jesus  is  preached  and  practised. 

Such  was  the  interest  manifested  in  this  new  building, 
that  many  of  the  natives  who  were  sick  and  infirm,  were 
carried  to  the  spot  in  order  to  see  it.  I remember  calling 
one  day  on  the  oldest  deacon  of  our  church,  who  was  near 
death — in  former  days  he  had  been  a celebrated  warrior  and 
cannibal,  and  was  known  as  “ always  having  human  Jlesh  on 
his  meat-hook.”  He  had  assisted  a little  in  the  former 
work  of  the  chapel,  and  wished  much  to  see  it  finished  ; but 
it  was  otherwise  appointed.  He  had,  however,  made 
arrangements  to  be  carried  to  see  it,  but  being  disappointed 
through  weakness,  he  said,  “ Never  mind : there  is  a 
house  not  made  with  hands — a heavenly  house — my  treas- 
ure is  there.”  After  a little  pause,  as  though  in  trouble,  he 
exclaimed,  “ Alas ! my  distress,  my  former  character,  my 
sins,  my  murders ; how  can  I enter  that  heavenly  house  I” 
but  on  being  reminded  “that  the  blood  of  Christ  cleanseth 
from  all  sin,”  he  burst  into  tears,  a-nd  calmly  and  firmly 
said,  “ Yes,  he  is  my  justifier,  and  my  priest,  and  no  sin- 
ner has  ever  been  cast  away  by  him.” 


CHAPTEK  IX. 


Formation  of  an  Institution  on  Rarotonga  for  tho  education  of  native 
teachers — The  desire  of  tho  natives  to  extend  the  blessing  of  the 
gospel  to  other  lands — The  building  completed  in  1843 — Report  of 
Institution  to  1844 — A fearful  hurricane,  1846 — Its  commencement, 
progress,  devastation,  at  each  settlement — Providential  supply  of 
provisions  after  tho  gale — Liberal  aid  sent  out  to  the  island  from 
England — Native  occupation  at  their  plantations — Subsequent  re- 
storing of  the  villages — Rev.  A.  Bnzacott  leaves  the  island  for 
England. 


We  have  now  reached  a period  in  the  Rarotonga  mission, 
when  it  is  our  pleasing  duty  to  notice  the  founding  and 
growth  of  an  Institution,  on  the  island,  for  the  education 
of  a native  ministry.  We  have  already  seen  that  the  de- 
votedness of  the  church  of  Christ  here,  waited  not  for  the 
establishment  of  such  an  educational  Institution,  before  it 
sent  out  its  members  to  the  heathen  beyond  them ; whilst 
yet  few  in  number,  and  feeble  as  they  were  few,  and  even 
before  all  the  evils  of  heathenism  in  their  island-home  had 
been  overcome,  prayer  and  effort  for  the  idolatrous  people  of 
other  lands,  were  the  evidence  and  fruit  of  their  own  con- 
version to  God.  Feeling  how  much  the  by-gone  generations 
of  their  own  land  had  lost  by  delay,  their  zeal  would  have 
led  them,  in  the  first  year  of  their  knowledge,  beyond  pro- 
(92) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


93 


per  pi-udencc,  had  not  their  isolated  position  and  limited 
means  prevented.  Tuanaki,  Maniiki,  Tongaveva,  Samoa, 
and  other  islands  were  constantly  mentioned  before  God  in 
prayer,  with  more  than  ordinary  desire  to  convey  to  them 
the  tidings  of  salvation,  and  not  a few  of  the  natives  suitably 
qualified  for  the  work  then  to  be  done,  said,  “ 0 Lord,  our 
God,  Jehovah,  here  are  we,  send  us.  Let  a ship  come  to 
our  help  in  this  work.  We  feel  the  heathen  to  be  our 
brethren.  0 Lord,  let  us  be  the  means  of  saving  them,  in 
this  world,  from  the  teeth  of  the  savage,  and  of  leading 
them  to  Jesus,  the  Saviour.”  Such  was  the  language  of 
their  prayer;  and  no  hymns  of  praise  were  sung  with  greater 
fervour  or  sincerity,  than  those  which  had  reference  to  the 
heathen,  of  which  the  following  are  almost  literal  transla- 
tions : — 

« Mourn  for  the  heathen,  In  blindness  they  sin, 

Bound  as  in  prison.  And  Satan  their  king.” 

“ Let  all  the  idols  perish.  Lord,  False,  and  only  false  are  they ; 

Thou,  and  thou  alone,  art  God,  Evermore  we  worship  thee.” 

“Shall  we  who  have  knowledge.  And  life  from  above. 

Shall  we  quench  this  knowledge;  This  life-lamp  of  love 
It  is  life,  yes,  ’tis  life  ! Oh,  sound  it  abroad ; 

Lot  all  the  world  know  it.  And  live  by  this  word  1” 

“Ye  messengers  of  Christ,  sent  forth. 

Many  are  your  foes  and  strong ; 

But  Jesus  is  your  shield  and  strength. 

By  him,  victory  is  won  ; 

And  the  crown 
Of  everlasting  glory,  yours.” 

Thus  did  the  early  converts  of  Karotonga  sing  as  they 
sent  out  Teava,  Marie,  Matatia,  and  Anania,  as  their  first 
c\'angclists  to  the  heathen.  These  brethren,  and  many 
others  like  them,  were  each  for  some  years  under  the  private 
tuition  of  the  missionaries,  but  in  order  to  secure  an  eSicient 
native  ministry,  as  well  as  to  provide  a continual  and  suitable 
class  of  pioneers,  it  was  fouud  needful  to  establish  an  In- 


94 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


stitution  where,  by  a few  years’  residence,  the  character  and 
qualifications  of  candidates  might  be  proved,  and  where 
tliey  might  enjoy  advantages  which  could  not  be  secured  by 
any  private  missionary  instruction.  This  object  engaged 
tlie  best  attention  of  the  Directors  of  the  London  Mission- 
ary Society,  during  the  stay  of  the  Rev.  J.  AVilliams  in 
England,  and  in  1839,  on  his  return  to  the  island,  means 
were  supplied  to  commence  the  work  without  delay. 

An  extensive  and  suitable  piece  of  ground  was  purchased 
from  the  Chief  of  Avarua,  on  which  to  erect  the  Institution 
Building,  with  an  understanding  that,  if  the  Institution 
should  be  ever  given  up,  the  ground  should  return  to  his 
family.  In  1840,  a number  of  neat  and  commodious  stone 
cottages  for  students  were  built,  and  in  1843,  the  house  for 
resident  missionaries,  containing  a large  Lecture  Room,  and 
a room  for  female  classes  held  daily  by  the  missionary’s 
wife,  was  completed.  The  Rev.  A.  Buzacott  was  architect 
and  superintendent  of  the  building;  the  labours  of  which, 
together  with  the  duties  of  the  station,  were  arduous  and 
self-denying  beyond  all  eulogy,  but  in  the  fruit  of  which  he 
has  had  a reward,  and  a joy  peculiarly  his  own.  AYritiug 
in  June,  1844,  Mr.  Buzacott  reports  that,  since  its  establish- 
ment in  1839,  thirteen  students  had  been  admitted,  eight 
of  whom  were  married,  whose  wives  had  also  received  daily 
instructions  by  Mrs.  Buzacott;  and  six  young  men  had  been 
admitted,  with  a view  to  go  forth  as  pioneers  to  heathen 
lands.  The  whole  number,  male  and  female,  who  had 
received  its  advantages,  up  to  that  date,  was  thirty-three  •, 
some  of  whom  were  then  engaged  in  the  work  of  stated 
ministry  on  the  home  stations,  and  others  had  gone  forth 
to  the  western  islands  to  prepare  the  way  for  more  efficient 
labourers. 

Thus,  in  the  twentieth  year  after  the  landing  of  a Chris- 
tian native  teacher  on  the  island  of  Rarotonga,  in  the  midst 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


95 


of  a heathen,  idolatrous,  and  cannibal  people,  we  see  these 
evils  razed  at  their  foundations,  and  the  institutions  of 
Christianity  and  consequent  civilization  established  on  their 
ruins,  and  largely  sustained  by  the  voluntary  and  unaided 
efforts  of  the  people  themselves.  We  have  yet  to  give 
further  details  of  missionary  successes  of  this  mission,  but 
before  doing  so,  we  must  notice  one  of  the  most  devastating 
afflictions  that  ever  befell  the  island,  and  which,  for  some 
time,  curtailed  the  resources,  and  retarded  the  advance,  of 
the  people. 

For  a week  prior  to  the  14th  of  March,  1846,  heavy  rains 
had  been  falling,  which  rendered  most  of  the  roads  on  the 
island  impassable ; and  on  that  day  the  weather  was  so  un- 
favourable, that  it  was  with  difficulty  public  worship  was 
held  in  the  chapels.  On  the  morning  of  the  15th  the  wind 
had  increased  much,  but  steadily  blowing  from  the  east,  we 
did  not  apprehend  danger,  as  the  usual  season  of  storms  had 
passed  by,  and  we  had  had  two  rather  severe  gales  within 
the  past  three  months  j but  alas  ! in  a few  hours — a few,  aw- 
ful, never-to-be-forgotten  houns — our  prosperity  was  blighted, 
aud  our  hearts  caused  to  mourn  in  anguish,  over  a desolation 
before  unknown  either  to  ourselves  or  the  people.  The 
wind  steadily  increased  through  the  day,  and  in  the  evening 
was  more  fitful,  and  came  in  gusts  of  fearful  strength, 
which  generally  precede  a hurricane,  and  the  mercury  indi- 
cated an  increase  of  the  storm.  Clouds  of  densest  black- 
ness were  very  low,  and  flying  with  terrific  rapidity  ; tor- 
rents of  rain,  with  scud  from  the  sea,  mingled  by  tbe  force 
of  the  wind,  fell  on  the  ground  with  a density  and  power 
of  heaviest  hail.  As  far  as  possible  efforts  were  made,  by 
natives  and  missionaries,  to  secure  the  thatch  of  the  roofs 
of  our  houses  from  being  raised,  and  loose  and  portable  ar- 
ticles of  furniture  and  stores  were  packed  away  in  places 
thought  to  be  most  secure.  As  night  came  on,  the  fury  of 


96 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


the  storm  increased,  accompanied  with  heavy  thunder  and 
vivid  chain-lightning ; and  the  dense  flying  sheet  of  clouds 
which  enveloped  the  island,  descended  nearer  and  nearer 
until  the  whole  was  completely  enveloped. 

So  terrific  was  the  roar  of  wind  that  the  loudest  thunder 
was  not  heard ; it  was  one  continued  deep,  hollow,  awful, 
maddened  moan  of  destruction,  and  although  it  was  the 
time  of  full  moon,  yet  it  required  the  most  concentrated 
flash  of  lightning  to  reveal  the  nearest  objects  to  our  view. 
In  the  short  space  of  six  hours,  the  barometer  fell  from  30° 
to  27°  0'  50",  and  faithful  to  this  indicator,  the  storm  raged 
with  increasing  fury  until  about  midnight,  when  suddenly 
there  was  a calm — a perfect  calm — the  rain  abated,  not  the 
faintest  whisper  of  wind  was  heard — the  falling  of  heavy 
drops  of  water,  and  the  sound  of  swelling  streams  around 
us,  alone  broke  the  silence.  This  continued  for  the  space 
of  three  or  four  minutes,  and  so  mysterious  was  the  suspense 
during  the  time,  that  the  experience  of  every  individual 
was  that  of  intense,  breathless  anxiety,  which  was  only  re 
lieved  when  the  centre  of  the  hurricane  had  passed  over  us, 
and  it  began  again  to  blow,  from  another  point,  with  more 
than  its  former  violence.  This  completed  the  work  of  des- 
truction : plantations,  houses,  chapels  were  made  the  play- 
thing of  the  storm,  and  our  expectations  would  have  been 
realized,  had  the  foundations  of  the  island  been  broken  up, 
and  every  vestige  of  its  existence  been  swept  from  the 
bosom  of  the  sea. 

At  Ngatangiia  a little  trading  schooner  was  lying  at  an- 
chor within  the  reef,  and  as  the  sea  rose  it  was  in  imminent 
danger.  With  a view  to  save  his  own  life  and  that  of  the 
crew,  the  captain  hoisted  the  sails  of  the  vessel,  and  cutting 
the  cable  gave  her  up  to  the  wind  and  sea,  to  be  driven 
landward.  She  was  instantly  lifted  up  by  the  raging  bil- 
lows, carried  over  trees  eighteen  feet  high,  and  taken  some 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


97 


distance  beyond  the  beach,  whence  It  took  the  natives  three 
niontlis’  work  to  get  her  back  again  into  the  sea.  Ngatan- 
giia  itself  was  a complete  ruin.  The  sea  had  in  most  parts 
obliterated  every  sign  of  its  ever  having  been  a settlement ; 
native  houses,  chapel,  school-house,  and  missionary’s  house 
were  swept  away,  and  the  mission  ftimily  hardly  saved  from 
a watery  grave.  Mr.  Pitman  lay  some  time  senseless  from 
exhaustion.  Mrs.  Pitman  sat  many  hours,  in  great  danger, 
on  a stone  wall,  surrounded  by  a sea  of  water,  and  IMiss 
Corrie  was  only  saved  from  death  by  the  timely  attentions 
of  a friend,  who,  with  a native  female,  was  instrumental  in 
her  rescue,  by  dragging  her  through  the  water,  which  in 
some  places  was  neck-deep. 

At  Avarua,  upwards  of  three  hundred  houses  were  de- 
stroyed, and  the  entire  station  desolated.  On  the  mi.ssion- 
premises,  the  student’s  cottages  and  printing-offices  were 
unroofed;  and  the  In.stitution-house  alone  surviving  the 
wreck,  lamps  were  put  in  each  window,  in  order  to  en- 
courage natives  who  might  see  the  light,  to  come  there  for 
shelter;  it  soon  became  filled  to  overflowing,  and  intense, 
indeed,  was  the  subsequent  horror  of  the  missionary’s  heart, 
when  the  house  trembled  at  its  foundations,  and  every  gust 
of  wind  was  expected  to  ingulf  the  occupants  in  its  niins. 

At  Titikaveka,  every  house  was  unroofed,  many  were 
entirely  destroyed,  and  its  stone  chapel  alone  was  left  stand- 
ing in  the  midst  of  surrounding  desolation. 

At  Arorangi,  about  nine  o’clock  in  the  evening,  while 
removing  books,  medicine,  and  papers,  into  boxes  for  safety, 
our  house  gave  indications  that  it  could  not  long  withstand 
the  fury  of  the  storm.  We  sought  shelter  in  a stone  house, 
which  stood  near,  but  had  scarcely  entered  it  before  it  was 
in  ruins.  During  this  consternation,  a native  ventured  to 
carry  Mrs.  Gill  to  a small  detached  school-house  on  our 
premises.  I lingered  awhile,  hoping  to  arrange  a box  or 
9 ' 


98 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


two,  SO  as  to  preserve  a few  stores.  Before,  however,  this 
could  be  done,  a native,  who  had  been  watching  our  dwell- 
ing-house, came,  crying  in  most  piteous  strains,  “ Oh,  where 
is  the  missionary  ? Listen  to  my  voice  !”  (nothing  could 
be  see7i.')  “ The  house  is  down ! we  shall  all  die  ! we  cannot 
live  out  this  night !”  Hastening,  in  a crawling  position,  to 
Mrs.  Gill,  we  endeavoured  to  encourage  each  other  in  God, 
and  then  removed,  unsheltered,  accompanied  only  by  a 
single  native,  to  an  open  field.  We  dared  not  go  towards 
the  mountains,  for  trees,  torn  up  by  the  roots,  were  being 
can-ied  through  the  air  in  every  direction,  and  we  could  not 
go  towards  the  settlement,  for  the  floods  had  covered  all 
the  lowlands.  Thus  exposed,  we  well  nigh  despaired  of 
life ; but  receiving  strength  from  on  high,  we  watched  for 
the  morning. 

Oh,  that  morning ! It  is  still  living  in  our  experience. 
Every  village  a ruin;  almost  every  dwelling-house  de- 
stroyed ; every  plantation  devastated ; furniture  spoiled ; 
wearing  apparel  injured;  valuable  books,  a mass  of  rubbish; 
and  our  store-barrels,  in  which  had  been  our  future  supplies, 
were  for  the  most  part  empty,  and  swimming  in  the  floods. 
But  all  this  was  borne  with  comparative  patience  and 
quietude,  until  the  natives  ventured  to  tell  us  that  our 
beautiful  new  chapel,  so  recently  finished,  was  an  utter 
ruin.  This  was  the  climax  of  desolation ; it  overwhelmed 
our  soul,  and  for  a moment  we  yielded  to  despair.  Looking 
toward  the  settlement,  I saw  a long  procession  of  300  men 
and  women,  coming  to  offer  their  condolence  and  sympathy ; 
they  were  literally  clothed  in  sackcloth,  and  rags,  and  a.shes. 
As  they  came  near,  their  loud  cry  of  lamentation  and  woe 
was  heard,  but  not  exactly  understanding  it,  I inquired  of 
the  natives  who  were  with  me,  who  said,  “ that  this  was  an 
ancient  method  of  expressing  their  grief,  and  that  they  were 
coming  to  compassionate  me.”  Arriving  on  the  ruins  of 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


99 


our  house,  the  whole  party  wailed  and  wept  bitterly ; after 
wliicli  an  old  man,  the  appointed  speaker,  addressing  me, 
said,  “Alas,  our  missionary  ! Oh,  our  missionary  ! What 
will  yoxi  do  in  this  death  ? Our  hearts  are  full  of  grief  for 
you.  We  are  at  home.  We  can  eat  roots  of  trees.  We 
have  known  these  trials  before ; but  what  will  you  do  ?” 
Then  referring  to  the  chapel,  he  continued,  “ 0 Ziona, 
Ziona  ! our  holy  and  beautiful  house  ! our  rest  and  our  joy! 
What  shall  we  do  for  thee?  Who  shall  comfort  us  for 
thee  ? When  shall  we  be  able  again  to  build  thee  ? But 
it  is  written,  ‘Jehovah  is  our  refuge.’  Let  us,  then,  be 
strong  in  him.” 

Whilst  these  atfectionate  Christian  natives  thus  sympa- 
thized with  us,  and  expressed  their  sorrow  on  the  mission- 
ary’s account,  the  missionary’s  heart  was  filled  with  dis- 
tressing apprehension  on  their  behalf.  Many  months  of 
famine  were  before  them,  which,  in  their  already  weakened 
state,  led  us  to  fear  the  most  disastrous  consequences ; and 
even  with  the  utmo.st  labour  and  prosperity,  we  felt  that  five 
or  six  years  would  be  required  to  place  the  stations  in  the 
same  position  they  were  in  before  the  calamity. 

But  our  hope  was  in  God ; and  his  grace  and  providence 
were  timely  and  appropriately  bestowed.  The  first  remark- 
able interposition  on  our  behalf  was  the  arrival  of  a home- 
ward-bound American  ship,  a few  days  after  the  gale,  hav- 
ing a large  supply  of  biscuits,  fiour,  molasses,  and  other 
stores  to  dispose  of.  The  next  mark  of  God’s  care  for  us  in 
our  isolated  position,  was  the  unexpected  arrival  of  our  mis- 
sion ship,  only  a fortnight  afterwards,  having  on  board  our 
supplies  from  Sydney.  She  was  bound  for  Tahiti,  but  was 
driven  out  of  her  intended  course  b}’  contrary  winds,  which 
much  perplexed  the  captain  and  all  on  board,  until  in  our 
condition  they  saw  that  the  “ Lord  had  brought  them  by  a 
right  way.”  Another  great  advantage  to  the  people  aro.se 


100 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


from  the  fact  that,  a few  weeks  before  the  gale  occurred,  a 
quantity  of  superior  and  prolific  puuipkin-secd  had  been 
brought  to  the  island,  which  had  been  extensively  planted. 
These  soon  grew,  and  yielded  a large  and  timely  supply  of 
fruit. 

As  soon,  also,  as  the  tidings  of  our  distress  were  known 
in  England,  the  Directors  made  an  appeal  to  the  churches 
on  our  behalf,  to  which  they  responded  with  promptness  and 
liberality;  and  a large  supply  of  clothing  and  tools  was  for- 
warded without  delay,  to  assist  in  rebuilding  our  chapels, 
schools,  and  mission-houses.  This  was  a noble  testimony  and 
evidence  of  Christian  sympathy,  and,  besides  the  actual  ser- 
vice rendered  towards  restoring  our  waste  places,  it  did  the 
Christianity  of  the  natives  good,  by  showing  them  the  dis- 
interestedness with  which  the  churches  in  England  sought 
their  temporal,  as  well  as  their  spiritual  good. 

Thus  encouraged  and  assisted,  the  people,  for  many 
months,  gave  the  best  portion  of  their  time  to  their  planta- 
tions, and  at  the  close  of  the  year  were  permitted  to  rejoice 
in  an  abundance  of  food.  The  villages  however  were  not 
so  soon  restored — it  was  a great  work;  yet  by  patient  and 
prudent  and  regular  labour  it  was  done.  Temporary  huts 
and  houses  were  at  first  erected;  but  being  convinced  of 
the  importance  of  more  substantial  buildings  to  withstand 
these  periodical  storms,  the  people  resolved  to  build  strong, 
stone  houses,  in  the  accomplishment  of  which  they  spared 
no  time  nor  labour.  As  an  illustration,  we  may  mention 
one  village  as  a specimen  of  the  whole.  The  inhabitants 
did  not  exceed  800  persons,  of  whom  not  more  than  300 
were  available  for  work ; but  in  three  years  this  handful  of 
people,  besides  attending  to  labour  connected  with  provid- 
ing their  daily  subsistence,  built  eighty  reed  huts,  fifty  lime 
and  wattle  houses,  forty  strong,  stone  cottages,  a stone 
chapel  and  mission-house;  and  in  less  than  five  years  alter 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


101 


the  hurricane  on  the  islands  of  Mangaia  and  Rarotonga, 
there  were  built,  not  including  a large  number  of  inferior 
houses,  twelve  large,  substantial,  stone  chapels  and  school- 
houses,  three  mission-houses,  and  upwards  of  300  stone 
cottages,  averaging  from  thirty  feet  to  sixty  feet  long, 
twenty  feet  to  thirty  feet  wide,  with  walls  twenty  inches  to 
thirty  inches  thick,  and  ten  feet  to  twelve  feet  high ; these, 
with  an  annually  increasing  number,  now  adorn  the  differ- 
ent settlements  of  each  island ; and  we  trust  their  superi- 
ority to  the  old  style  of  building  may  preserve  them— a 
reward  to  the  people  for  their  industry,  whenever  the  island 
may  again  be  visited  by  so  fearful  a storm  as  that  from 
which  they  have  so  happily  recovered. 

One  of  the  direct,  and  at  the  time  painful,  consequences 
of  the  calamity  we  have  recorded  in  this  chapter,  was  the 
failure  of  health  in  Rev.  A.  Buzacott,  which  obliged  him 
to  leave  the  island,  in  December,  1846.  For  some  time 
previous  to  this,  the  missionaries  had  met  together  two  weeks 
in  each  month,  to  revise  and  correct  the  manuscript  of  the 
Old  Testament  Scriptures,  with  a view  to  print  them;  but, 
this  work  being  now  interrupted,  with  but  little  prospect  of 
speedy  recommencement  on  the  island,  it  was  committed  to 
Mr.  Buzacott  to  be  completed  in  England.  Thus  we  were 
the  more  reconciled  to  his  departure,  feeling  that  while  his 
absence  would  be  a present  loss  to  the  mission,  it  might  be 
a means  of  restoring  his  health  for  future  years  of  service, 
and  of  giving  to  the  people  of  the  whole  group,  at  an  earlier 
period  than  could  have  otherwise  been  secured,  the  first 
complete  edition  of  the  Bible  in  their  own  language. 

9* 


CHAPTER  X. 

Daily  occupation  of  natives— Structure  and  furniture  of  native  houses 
— Their  meals — Their  dress — General  civilization — Daily  engage- 
ments of  a missionary  with  the  natives — Those  of  missionary’s  wife 
— The  mission  printing  press — The  premises,  office,  workmen — 
Statement  of  books  printed  in  Rarotongan  language  up  to  1855 — 
Total  press  work  for  five  years — Further  notices  of  the  Institution 
— Students’  engagements  and  studies — Review  of  the  results  of  the 
Institution,  1852 — Inexpensiveness  of  its  support — Formation  of 
Matavera  settlementr— Laws  respecting  fermented  liquors. 

In  reply  to  numerous  inquiries  in  reference  to  the  daily 
occupation  of  the  natives  of  Rarotonga,  and  the  general 
habits  of  their  domestic  life,  we  will,  without  entering  very 
minutely  into  these  subjects,  give  a few  brief  notices.  Com- 
pared with  most  natives  of  tropical  climates,  the  people  of 
this  island  are  an  active  and  industrious  race : they  are 
capable  of  enduring  any  amount  of  privation  and  toil  for  a 
limited  time,  but  the  want  of  physical  stamina  unfits  them 
for  long  and  continued  labour.  Their  principal  food  is 
vegetables  and  fish ; pigs  and  poultry  are  numerous,  but  are 
rarely  cooked  except  on  festive  occasions.  There  are  no 
shops  or  stores  where  food  is  sold ; each  family  and,  in  nu- 
merous cases,  each  individual  has  to  labour  daily  in  pro- 
viding and  preparing  his  sustenance. 

A large  majority  of  adults,  male  and  female,  attend  to 
(102) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


103 


educational  exercises  every  morning,  from  half-past  five 
o’clock  until  half-past  six.  A family  meal  consisting  of 
taro,  potatoes,  and  fish,  is  taken  about  eight  o’clock,  and  at 
nine  o’clock  most  of  the  men,  frequently  accompanied  by 
their  wives,  are  on  their  plantations,  variously  engaged 
during  the  day  in  planting,  weeding,  and  preparing  food  for 
the  evening  meal,  and  for  that  of  the  morning  of  the  next 
day. 

Each  person  is  pretty  much  his  own  master  in  the  choice 
of  his  daily  work,  and  the  time  in  which  he  does  it ; even 
the  nngas,  or  dependants  on  the  land  proprietors,  have  prac- 
tically their  own  plots  of  land,  and,  as  serfs  under  an  ea.sy 
feudal  system,  are  only  expected  to  bring  their  masters  a 
certain  portion  of  food  grown  on  the  land,  and  occasionally 
to  assist  in  work  connected  with  his  house. 

Besides  planting,  the  men  are  variously  occupied  in 
house-building,  canoe-making,  net-weaving,  and  fishing; 
the  women  prepare  food  for  meals,  frequently  assist  in  plant- 
ing, make  bark-cloth,  work  bed  and  seat  mats,  and  sew 
garments  for  the  family. 

The  natives  have  three  kinds  of  houses — reed,  wattle,  and 
stone ; the  reed  hut  is  a long,  low  building,  having  a floor 
of  dried  grass,  and  when  new  and  clean  is  comparatively 
comfortable.  The  wattle  house  is  higher,  and  more  con- 
venient and  durable  than  the  reed  hut,  one  or  two  rooms 
are  generally  floored  with  planks  of  wood,  and  have  Venetian 
blinds.  The  stone  cottages,  to  which  we  have  already  made 
reference,  are  the  best  kind  of  buildings,  and  are  vearly 
increasing  in  number.  The  furniture  of  the  hou-ses  of  the 
poor,  and  the  slothful,  consists  merely  in  a bundle  of  bed- 
mats,  clothes-box,  two  or  three  bowls,  and  trinkets  of  knives, 
scissors,  looking-glass,  and  articles  of  the  like  character; 
but  those  of  the  more  wealthy  and  industrious  have,  in 
addition  to  the  above,  bedsteads,  beds,  sofas,  chairs,  tables, 


104 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


cupboards,  and  the  floor  covered  with  finely-wrought  mats. 
It  must  not,  however,  be  thought,  that  chairs  are  generally 
used  as  seats,  even  by  the  better  classes  of  the  people;  their 
habit  is  to  sit  on  mats,  with  their  legs  gracefully  crossed 
over  each  other,  whether  at  meals,  or  at  work,  or  in  com- 
pany. 

At  their  regular  meals,  morning  and  evening,  the  whole 
family  assemble  and  sit  round  the  food,  which  is  served  up 
on  a table-cloth  of  fresh  plucked  leaves,  spread  on  the  floor. 
Every  article  of  food  is  divided,  and  all  equally  distributed 
to  each  individual  at  the  table — none  is  reserved — each 
person  eats  what  he  chooses,  and  collects  the  remainder  of 
his  own  portion,  in  a green  cocoa-nut  leaf-basket,  which  is 
taken  to  the  table  for  that  purpose. 

Their  dress  consists  of  light  English  and  American  cotton 
material,  made  up  in  loose  European  style;  the  women 
having  a native  cloth  wrapper,  as  inner  garment,  over  which 
is  worn  a long  flowing  robe ; they  have  no  shoes,  but  a 
bonnet  of  finely  wrought  plait,*  and  neatly  trimmed  with 
foreign  ribbon,  is  considered  essential  to  complete  their  dress. 
The  men  wear  shirt,  trowsers,  waistcoat,  and  coat;  most  of 
them  have  strong  rush  bats,  for  common  use,  and  finer  ones 
for  occasional  service,  and  about  one  in  every  twenty  com- 
pletes his  full  dress  by  putting  on  stockings  and  shoes. 
The  general  appearance  of  the  whole  population  is  appro- 
priate to  their  climate  and  habits,  and  in  this  sense  is  civil- 
ized, decent,  and  respectable ; so  much  so,  that  a stranger 

♦ A bonnet  of  this  native-wrought  material,  neatly  made  in  English 
style,  was,  in  1851,  presented  to  Queen  Victoria,  for  the  Princess  Royal; 
which  Her  Majesty  “was  graciously  pleased  to  accept;  and  at  the  same 
time  to  express  her  deep  feelings  of  gratification,  at  the  results  of  the 
teaching  of  the  doctrines  of  Christianity  to  the  isl.anders,”  and,  with  a 
view  to  encourage  the  industry  of  those  far-distant  island  females.  Her 
Majesty  ordered  a quantity  of  the  plait,  for  the  purpose  of  having  it 
made  up. 


TUK  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


105 


to  tlieir  past  history,  landing  in  their  midst,  could  not  dis- 
cover, in  their  present  position,  any  sign  of  their  toriuer 
idolatry  and  heathenism,  and  would  scarcely  believe  that 
they  are  the  same  race,  and  in  many  instances  the  very  same 
men,  who,  only  thirty  years  ago,  were  the  naked,  savage 
cannibals  described  in  the  former  chapters  of  this  work. 

Many  curious  questions  have  been  asked  respecting  the 
practical  every-day  employment  of  a missionary  among  such 
a people  as  the  Rarotongans ; and  anxious  to  diffuse  correct 
information  on  this  as  on  other  subjects  of  island  life,  we 
will  give  a statement  of  the  daily  routine  of  his  engage- 
ments. It  will  be  remembered  that  I write  of  missionary 
life  on  Rarotonga,  which,  with  its  Institution  and  printing 
press,  has  its  local  peculiarities ; yet,  with  little  variation,  it 
will  be  found  to  correspond,  more  or  less,  with  the  duties  of 
each  missionary  station  in  the  islands  of  the  South  Seas. 

During  the  first  years  of  the  mission,  the  missionary  had 
to  attend  the  early  morning  adult  service ; but  now,  that 
being  conducted  by  native  teachers,  he  devotes  the  hour 
from  six  o’clock  to  seven,  in  giving  out  medicine  to  the 
sick ; from  eight  o’clock  to  nine  he  is  either  at  the  children’s 
general  school  in  the  village,  or  attending  to  private  ad- 
vanced classes  at  home,  or  having  converse  with  natives 
about  public  matters  in  settlement  or  island,  on  which  they 
wish  his  advice.  From  nine  o’clock  until  eleven  he  meets 
the  students  in  class  room.  From  eleven  o’clock  till  twelve 
he  is  generally  in  workshop,  where  either  the  students  of 
Institution,  or  the  boys  of  boarding-school,  are  practising 
the  use  of  carpenter’s  tools.  The  next  hour  is  spent  in  the 
printing-office,  where  the  natives  have  been  putting  up  type, 
printing,  and  binding,  since  seven  o’clock  in  the  morning. 
From  one  o’clock  to  two  is  the  dinner  and  reading  hour; 
from  two  o’clock  till  three  the  missionary  has  individual  and 
private  conversation  with  three  or  four  members  of  the 


106 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLAND. 


church,  or  candidates  for  church-fellowship,  or  inquirers  af- 
ter sacred  and  general  knowledge.  Four  days  in  the  week, 
from  three  o’clock  to  four,  Bible  classes  are  held  with  inqui- 
rers, or  classes  with  the  teachers  in  the  schools.  At  most 
of  the  stations  public  services  are  held,  three  evenings  in 
the  week,  from  five  o’clock  until  six : one,  a church  members’ 
prayer  meeting,  another  preaching,  and  a third,  the  Friday 
general  class  meeting,  at  each  of  which  the  missionary  pre- 
sides. From  six  o’clock  till  seven,  if  the  weather  be  fine, 
the  missionary  and  his  wife  take  walking  exercise  in  the 
settlement,  embracing  this  opportunity  to  call  on  natives 
who  are  sick;  from  seven  o’clock  to  eight  he  is  in  his  study, 
either  reading,  or  translating,  or  preparing  students’  lec- 
tures, or  sermons,  or  proof-sheets  from  printers;  and  from 
eight  o’clock  to  half-past  eight  is  devoted  to  the  service  of 
family  prayer  with  students,  scholars  of  boarding-school,  and 
domestics ; from  which  time  until  nine  o’clock  is  engaged 
in  free  general  conversation  with  the  natives  of  the  house- 
hold, with  a view  to  enliven  and  instruct,  and  thus  closes 
the  public  labours  of  the  day ; these,  with  little  variation, 
are  the  engagements  of  the  missionary  each  day  on  Baro- 
tonga,  with  the  exception  of  Saturday,  when  the  natives  are 
more  or  less  individually  employed  in  personal  and  domestic 
duties,  which  leaves  the  missionary  free. 

The  missionary’s  wife,  isolated  from  all  European  society, 
as  her  first  duty,  attends  to  household  matters,  making  her 
home  as  free  from  care  as  possible  to  her  husband ; then, 
beyond  this,  if  she  loves  the  cause  of  the  natives  next  only 
to  her  husband  and  family,  she  comes  in  daily  contact  with 
the  females  of  the  district,  over  whom,  by  domestic  example, 
by  practical  deeds  of  female  education,  by  private  and  indi- 
vidual conversation,  by  classes  of  elder  girls,  and  by  Bible 
and  other  classes  for  adults,  she  exercises  a silent  and  mild, 
yet  powerful,  and  moulding,  and  lasting  influence  over  the 
entire  population  of  the  island. 


THE  ISLAND  OP  RAROTONGA. 


107 


We  have  spoken  of  the  mission  printing-office  on  Earo- 
tonga.  It  stands  on  an  elevated  site  near  the  Institution 
House,  Avarua ; it  was  the  first  stone  building  erected  by 
the  people  of  that  station,  and  it  has  been  a means  of  doing 
much  to  promote  enlightened  views  of  Christianity,  and  to 
extend  its  successes  both  in  the  Ilervey  group  and  in  islands 
many  thousands  of  miles  distant.  It  will  be  remembered, 
that  the  Rev.  A.  Buzacott  introduced  the  printing  press  to 
the  island  in  1831,  and  in  1839  the  directors  of  the  London 
IMissionary  Society  supplied  the  mission  with  a new  press 
and  new  fount  of  type.  Several  native  lads,  aided  by  the 
self-acquired  knowledge  of  Mr.  Buzacott,  became  proficient 
workmen ; two  or  three  of  whom,  in  order  to  become  perfe^ct 
in  the  art,  went  to  the  mission  printing  establishment  in 
Samoa.  At  various  times  we  have  been  much  aided  in  this 
department  of  labour  by  grants  of  paper  from  the  British 
and  Foreign  Bible  Society,  and  the  Religious  Tract 
Society.  Books  printed  in  the  Rarotongan  language,  from 
the  commencement  of  the  mission  to  the  present  time,  are  : — • 
several  editions  of  first  and  second  class  school  books  ; a 
large  edition  of  tbe  Pentateuch  and  other  separate  books  of 
the  Old  and  New  Testament;  many  thousands  of  small  and 
large  Hymn  Book ; numerous  editions  of  Brown’s,  Watts’s 
and  The  Assembly’s  Catechisms  ; a large  number  of  James’s 
Church  Member’s  Guide;  The  Sinner’s  Friend;  Bunyan’s 
Pilgrim’s  Progress ; a good  supply  of  elementary  works  on 
Geography,  Astronomy,  Arithmetic  and  Grammar;  a small 
book  on  Scripture  Characters;  a periodical  of  missionary  and 
general  information ; school  books  and  Scripture  extracts  in 
the  languages  of  Mar4,  and  Lifu,  and  New  Caledonia;  a 
code  of  laws  and  regulations  for  Aitutaki,  drawn  up  by  the 
chiefs  of  that  island ; short  commentaries  on  the  book  of 
Isaiah,  on  the  gospel  of  John,  on  the  epistle  to  the  Corinth- 
ians, on  Leviticus,  and  on  Romans;  and  two  editions,  5000 


108 


GKMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


each,  of  the  complete  Bible ; all  of  which,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  the  Bible,  Commentaries,  and  Scripture  Characters, 
have  been  printed  at  the  mission  press  on  the  island. 
During  five  years,  ending  Dec.  1851,  there  were  printed 
132,500  sheets,  containing  1,590,000  pages ; 20,350  tracts 
were  sewn  in  limp  covers,  and  5543  books  were  bound  in 
leather;  the  whole  of  this  work  was  done  by  young  men, 
some  of  the  first-fruits  of  missionary  instruction,  and  whose 
fathers  knew  no  letter  or  sign  to  represent  the  sounds  of 
their  then  unwritten  language. 

Having,  in  a former  chapter,  spoken  of  the  establishment 
and  progress  of  the  Institution  on  the  island,  for  the 
ei^ucation  of  a native  ministry,  to  the  year  1843,  we  shall 
here  give  some  account  of  its  internal  management,  and  of 
its  success  to  the  present  time.  Its  advantages  are  laid  open 
to  pious,  intelligent,  suitable  young  men  of  all  the  islands  of 
the  group,  only  requiring  that  eligible  candidates  shall  be  of 
known  piety,  of  active  habits,  and  have  been  in  twelve 
months’  membership  with  the  church  whence  they  come, 
and  that  they  always  be  recommended  as  worthy  of  trial,  by 
the  missionary  or  teacher  of  the  station.  This  being  done, 
they  are  admitted  for  six  months’  probation.  Each  married 
student  has  a cottage,  and,  as  far  as  possible,  each  single 
young  man  has  a room  to  himself ; a detached  eating-house 
is  built  near  the  Institution  House,  where  the  whole  of 
the  students  and  wives,  have  two  hot  meals  a-day,  each  in 
rotation  giving  a weekly  superintendence  to  this  depart- 
ment. An  hour  every  morning,  from  seven  o’clock  to  eight, 
is  devoted  to  classes  of  practice  in  geography,  arithmetic, 
and  to  perfecting  in  other  school  studies, — the  most  profi- 
cient acting  as  teachers  to  the  others.  Two  hours  every 
forenoon  are  devoted  to  instruction  in  class-room.  A short 
prayer  is  offered  by  one  of  the  students,  who  also  reads 
from  an  appointed  book,  when  ten  minutes  are  allowed  for 


Institution  House,  Harotonga. 


Vft  f«*«iU« 

l»>  ^zA»  but  l^  ,i?«»Wi» 

IwtfWl  Rtiir-VTlilll 

^loi»U>  W^W:  A ■ -•ftfoim^  fc'j*  7«H®' I*.  ».^ 

^t^arUik'  tivmt  49d  -jMtfimi  ^Uiv\ 

•«l-4Mk  . J»  ipiakU  4mm 

’ *d^  ai^vma  littUr<i«ub'«/  "ir^t  Mr? 

h^t'4*fatl’'AMw  ti4t  «il  i»’7iyi.j$i<Hlf  >^^api'  tHtfhtryi 
^ ,^Wm  vmii4vD  wo«mA» 

^ "'tf/il  ’r*-^  ■ ,’,J.  *^:  «(Wfc'iMaiJl»(|||W,'tMlb 

«]ltI4r9^ryv*nflrrM  ®C#f  *«»4r  (WfK  n»*t^ 
hySaB^jnm  V>  Unt#  * ^i;  uto4-r^  'fhM^ 

tM  MW -inrrw^  k^otatf Iw:  Wn  MhiOf 

^>.^4  nt 

t»t«4  #AN»  lo 

fcil>l>ti«ii«  Wni  -y  tf*; 

Ti>  Mjif '|MM>  W <IMr\>i^J!4M.  WqDKMC1 4<» '«!  H., 
a^ 4m  Jhtrahri$^'n-i9»  <«r 

M yiMiM  ul  'fiw]#  4^{«>4<ii«iil  6aro^i^«(*)(  ^«}kcMr4^ 

^i»  -•jit’ito'l  tUwjJ*  <iS^r»aiun!^tfti 

^ »**9^'^‘*«*  ‘''‘‘»a^rtl«i.<»¥»i<  Ulbtaie 

^ tdibiMt  >fe}in^it«</  ^ •Cx.^MWn^irid  « 

t?  >y>ji .u4y#'p  V 

V' lrHt*|f>  « tA 

j'vOiWi  blK^rjanA  &u«  ^4h» 

ajf  ■ 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


109 


criticisms  on  the  manner  in  which  the  reading  was  done. 
The  missionary  then  reads  a lecture,  each  student  writing 
it  as  read ; during  which,  however,  pauses  are  allowed  for 
correcting,  inquiry,  and  convei'sation.  The  course  of 
instruction  embraces  Theology,  Church  History,  Biblical 
Exposition,  Biography,  Geography,  Grammar,  and  compo- 
sition of  Essays  and  Sermons.  A body  of  divinity,  com- 
prising eighty-four  lectures,  has  been  carefully  prepared, 
and  is  transcribed  by  each  student,  during  the  first  two 
years  of  his  residence  in  the  Institution. 

From  eleven  o’clock  until  two  in  the  afternoon,  the 
students  employ  themselves  in  the  workshop;  and  during 
afternoon  they  are  severally  engaged  either  in  study,  or 
class,  or  examination. 

From  1839  to  1852,  seventy  students  were  admitted, 
thirty  of  whom  were  married,  making  a total  of  one  hundred 
individuals,  most  of  whom  remained  three  or  four  years 
under  trial  and  instruction  before  they  were  sent  out  to 
occupy  stations.  In  viewing  the  character  and  conduct  of 
these  men,  it  is  a cause  of  devout  thankfulness  to  God  and 
of  much  encouragement  in  our  woi'k,  to  find  that  so  few  of 
them  have  proved  unworthy  of  the  trust  committed  to  them. 

In  the  Hervey  group  of  islands,  no  less  than  nine  or  ten 
stations  are  efficiently  worked  by  these  native  teachers ; in 
Samoa,  three  or  four  of  them  have  stations  and  possess  the 
confidence  and  praise  of  the  missionaries ; in  Western 
Polynesia,  they  have  proved  themselves  equal  to  labour,  to 
language,  to  sufiFering,  and  to  death  for  the  gospel’s  sake; 
in  the  Maniiki  group  they  have  introduced  the  gospel ; and 
in  1853  one  of  these  was  appointed  to  labour  as  missionary 
to  the  natives  of  Karotonga  and  Mangaia,  residing  on  the 
island  of  Tahiti.  The  following  statistical  table  of  the  In- 
stitution for  a period  of  five  years  ending  March,  1852, 
will  be  interesting  and  instructive  to  the  thoughtful  reader ; 

10 


110 


GEMS  PROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


— Thirty-four  men  and  eighteen  women,  a total  of  fifty-two 
persons,  were  admitted  : of  whom  two  died;  four  retired  on 
account  of  ill-health;  two  men  and  three  women  were  dis- 
missed for  improper  conduct;  twenty-four  were  appointed 
to  stations;  and  fourteen  remained  in  the  Institution.  Of 
the  three  women  who  were  dismissed,  one  died ; the  other 
two  were  restored,  not  to  position,  but  to  repentance  and 
hope,  and  their  husbands  became  useful  assistants  in  the 
schools  of  Aitutaki  and  Mangaia.  Another  Institution  of 
kindred  character,  and  yielding  equally  gratifying  results,  is 
in  existence  in  Samoa ; and  nothing  can  be  more  conducive 
to  present  prosperity  and  future  advance  of  our  missions, 
than  that  all  such  seminaries  be  liberally  sustained ; and  let 
the  friends  of  missions  who  feel  interested  in  this  essentially 
important  agency,  remember  that  the  whole  expense  of  each 
student  is  only  five  pounds  a year ! and  that  the  entire  out- 
lay for  maintaining  such  an  Institution  as  that  we  have 
now  described — educating,  clothing,  and  boarding  twenty 
students,  and  providing  for  all  its  working  apparatus,  does 
not  amount  to  the  trifling  sum  of  three  pounds  a week.* 
This  fact  might  be  enlarged  on,  and  be  made  the  founda- 
tion of  appeal,  but  we  must  leave  this  duty  with  the  reader, 
and  proceed  in  narrating  further  incidents  connected  with 
the  missionary  history  of  this  island.  In  the  year  1849, 
when  we  had  in  some  measure  recovered  from  the  effects 
of  the  gale  of  1846,  and  were  enjoying  a good  measure  of 
prosperity,  a few  disaffected  and  evil-disposed  young  men 
determined  to  create  a disturbance,  which  affected  the  pub- 
lic peace  of  the  island.  The  site  of  the  village  of  Ngatan- 
giia  had  been  rendered  unfit  by  the  storm  for  again  building 
on,  and  the  rioters  determined  to  embrace  this  circumstance 
as  an  occasion  for  breaking  away  from  the  majority  of  the 
people,  and  forming  a new  settlement  for  themselves  some 


* Fifteen  dollars. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


Ill 


two  miles  distant  from  the  original  village.  This  plan  was 
opposed  by  the  chiefs  and  principal  landowners  of  the  dis- 
trict. The  contest  was  carried  on  between  the  two  parties 
with  such  violence  and  ill-feeling,  that  it  had  well  nigh 
proved  fatal  to  the  best  interests  of  the  whole  community. 
After  a long  season  of  anxious  suspense,  howeVer,  the  good 
offices  of  the  chiefs  of  the  other  tribes  of  the  island  were 
called  in,  and  the  matter  was  amicably  settled  by  the  estab- 
lishment of  a fifth  settlement  called  Matavera.  This  party 
soon  built  a chapel  and  school-house  for  themselves,  and 
have  now  a native  teacher  located  among  them. 

Just  twelve  months  after  the  above  trouble  was  over,  a 
party  of  ungodly  young  men  came  to  the  island  from  Tahi- 
ti, and  secretly  taught  some  of  the  natives  how  to  mix  and 
ferment  orange-juice,  so  as  to  make  orange  rum.  This  be- 
ing prohibited  by  the  law  of  the  land,  was  effectively  sought 
into  by  the  police,  and  parties  detected  were  fined.  For 
some  months  the  right  and  power  of  law  and  order,  were 
sharply  contended  with  by  those  who  wished  to  introduce 
drunkenness  and  consequent  disorder  j but  the  authorities 
of  the  island  proved  themselves  equal  to  the  occasion.  By 
their  firmness  and  diligence  the  evil  was  subdued,  and  the 
triumph  of  the  wicked  was  cut  off.  Thus  we  have  the  evil 
and  the  good,  the  light  and  the  shade,  which  make  up  the 
experience  of  the  progress  of  truth  and  righteousness  in 
every  age  and  in  any  part  of  the  world;  but  by  placing  one 
thing  over  against  the  other,  we  see  our  cause  still  in  the 
ascendant — rising  to  the  praise  and  glory  of  Him  who  has 
conquered  every  foe,  realizing  and  illustrating  the  truth, 
that  because  “ he  lives,  his  shall  live  also.’' 


CHAPTER  XI. 

Anxieties  respecting  the  rising  generation — Statement  of  annual  crirao 
— Severe  and  general  illness  of  the  people,  1851 — A very  general 
awakening  and  revival — Death  of  a ringleader  m evil  practices — 
The  church  aroused  to  prayer  and  activity — An  instance  of  obdu- 
rate hardness  of  heart — His  conversion — The  revival  advances — 
Statements  of  numbers  brought  under  convictions  of  sin — Letter 
of  a native  penitent — Speech  of  a native  convert — An  address  of 
native  to  the  church — A united  communion  service  of  all  the  church- 
members  on  the  island — Report  of  native  addresses. 


In  preceding  chapters  we  have  seen  how  the  adult  popu- 
lation of  Rarotonga  rejoiced  in  the  happy  change  which  the 
gospel  had  effected  in  their  character  and  condition ; but  at 
the  time  of  which  we  now  write,  the  large  majority  of  the 
fathers,  who  were  living  when  the  missionary  first  landed 
among  them,  had  died,  and  a new  generation,  their  chil- 
dren, lived  in  their  stead.  These  were  called  “ the  gospel- 
born  generation;”  they  knew  nothing  of  practical  heathen- 
ism, and  had  to  be  told,  as  a matter  of  history,  concerning 
the  idolatry  of  their  land.  From  their  infancy  they  had 
been  instructed  in  the  mission  schools ; they  had  attended 
on  the  institutions  of  Christianity ; and  not  a few  of  them 
were  intelligent,  active,  consistent  Christian  men — the  reward 
of  the  missionary,  the  joy  of  their  parents,  and  the  hope  of 
the  island.  But  fully  one-half  of  the  young  people  gave 
(112) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


113 


US  no  small  amount  of  anxiety ; they  had  obtained  much 
Christian  and  useful  knowledge;  they  were  Christians,  as 
much  as  any  nominally  so  in  any  Christian  country ; but  we 
desired  to  see  an  inward  change  of  heart  more  generally  in- 
dicated, as  the  only  power  which  could  resist  temptation,  and 
secure  the  growth,  and  extension  of  true  piety  and  lasting 
prosperity. 

The  two  cases  mentioned  in  the  conclusion  of  the  last 
chapter  will,  in  some  measure,  illustrate  our  meaning ; but 
the  cause  and  nature  of  our  anxiety  respecting  this  rising 
generation  will  more  fully  appear  in  the  following  police 
report  of  the  island.  In  a population  of  little  more  than 
3000  persons,  no  fewer  than  900  cases  of  crime  were  annu- 
ally brought  before  the  magistrates  of  the  various  stations; 
cases  which  represent  about  250  different  individuals,  each 
of  whom  was  imprisoned  or  fined,  two,  three,  and  four 
times  a year,  for  fornication,  stealing,  tatooing,  breaking 
public  peace,  making  orange  rum,  and  other  deeds  pro- 
hibited by  the  law  of  the  land. 

In  addition  to  anxieties  on  this  account,  the  month  of 
January,  1851,  was  a season  of  peculiar  trial;  the  whole 
community  was  visited  with  severe  attacks  of  fever,  ague, 
and  infiuenza ; many  thus  afflicted  died;  and  for  a few 
weeks  all  work,  schools,  and  public  services  were  suspended  ; 
but  in  March,  the  population  was  again  in  its  usual  health, 
and  towards  the  middle  of  the  year  there  were  evident 
tokens  of  a spiritual  blessing  about  to  be  poured  out  upon 
the  very  class  who  had  for  so  long  a time  excited  our  most 
painful  apprehensions.  When  we  were  dreading  a calamity 
which  threatened  to  overwhelm  us  as  a flood,  the  Lord,  who 
is  wonderful  in  counsel  and  mighty  in  power,  raised  up  the 
standard  of  the  Divine  Spirit;  the  billows  receded — the 
plague  was  stayed;  and  many,  very  many,  of  the  most 
wicked  and  obdurate  at  every  settlenient  on  the  island,  were 

rescued  from  present  misery  and  future  eternal  ruin. 

10* 


114 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Among  tlie  many  providential  causes  which  were  instru- 
mental in  leading  to  this  awakening,  I well  remember  the 
death  of  a fine,  educated,  wicked  young  man.  Eighteen 
months  before  this  took  place,  he  had  left  the  island  in  a 
whaling  ship  for  a voyage  to  the  Sandwich  Islands.  There 
he  associated  with  the  most  abandoned  characters,  and  on 
his  return  became  a ringleader  in  vice.  He  was,  however, 
taken  ill,  and,  during  the  first  weeks  of  his  affliction,  deter- 
mined to  harden  himself  and  companions  in  folly  and  sin, 
by  opening  his  house  to  assemblies  for  dancing  and  de- 
bauchery. But  his  illness  increased,  and  with  it  the  viper 
of  his  iniquity  gained  strength,  and  stung  his  inner  soul 
with  bitterest  remorse.  He  desired  to  die,  but  could  not. 
In  an  awful  state  of  mental  agony  he  was  kept  alive  almost 
miraculously,  to  warn  and  to  exhort  those  who  had  been  his 
willing  victims  in  crime.  While  in  this  state,  he  was  fre- 
quently visited  by  those  who  desired  his  redemption,  even 
at  the  eleventh  hour  j but  nothing  hopeful  could  be  ob- 
tained from  him — nothing  but  declarations  of  self-condem- 
nation, and  fearful,  convulsive  groans,  which,  he  said,  were 
the  commencement  of  everlasting  death.  The  excess  of  his 
folly  was  the  cause  of  his  wreck,  and  his  grave  was,  to  his 
youthful  companions,  a fire-beacon  of  danger,  which  pre- 
vented their  following  on  in  the  same  wild  career  of  de- 
struction. 

A spirit  of  prayer  was  poured  out  on  the  churches ; re- 
pentance, and  fear,  and  desire  for  religious  instruction  were 
manifested  by  those  who  heretofore  had  been  scornful  or 
unconcerned.  This  called  out  the  energies  of  the  godly; 
domiciliary  visits  were  made,  Bible-classes  were  held,  copies 
of  the  Sinner’s  Friend  were  largely  and  eagerly  sought 
after,  and  several  hours  daily  were  appointed  by  the  mis- 
sionaries and  teachers  in  the  different  villages  to  talk  with 
those  who  sought  direction  and  consolation  in  their  awakened 
state. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


115 


But  in  the  midst  of  this  time  of  spiritual  good,  there 
■were  not  wanting  those  who  did  despite  to  the  Spirit  of 
grace,  and,  as  far  as  in  their  power,  kept  themselves  back 
from  his  influences,  and  endeavoured  to  frustrate  his  de- 
signs on  others.  One  such  case  occurred  in  a young  man 
who  had  been  frequently  visited  by  two  aged  good  women, 
for  Christian  conversation.  Always  before  going  they  had 
spent  a short  time  together  in  prayer  to  God  for  his  direc- 
tion and  blessing,  but  week  after  week  the  wicked  man  only 
hardened  his  heart,  and  at  length  became  so  impudent,  that 
the  sisters  of  mercy  to  his  soul  resolved  on  paying  only  one 
visit  more;  and  the  young  man  had  also  determined  on  a 
daring  deed,  by  which  to  decide  that  this  visit  should  be  the 
last.  It  was  eventide ; the  sinner  having  arranged  his 
scheme,  sat  on  the  threshold  of  the  doorway  of  his  reed  hut. 
“ Come  in,  come  in  \”  he  cried  to  the  Christian  women,  as 
they  approached  him.  Surprised  at  this  unwonted  bland- 
ness,  the  women  entered  the  house.  It  was  dark,  and  the 
young  man  requested  that  they  would  be  seated  awhile, 
until  he  got  a light,  saying,  at  the  same  time,  that  he 
hoped  they  had  brought  their  books.  Seating  them  near 
the  doorway,  he  appeared  to  be  feeling  after  the  two  pieces 
of  touch-wood,  with  which  the  natives  get  a light,  when, 
unseen  by  the  good  women,  he  took  up  his  gun,  already 
charged  for  the  purpose,  and  pulling  the  trigger,  discharged 
it  over  their  heads.  The  flash  and  report  almost  frightened 
them  to  death ; but  finding  themselves  still  alive,  they  re- 
turned to  the  village,  thankful  for  their  own  preservation, 
yet  mourning  over  the  finally  lost  young  man.  So  they 
thought;  but  it  was  not  so.  Instantly,  on  their  leaving 
his  house,  a horror  seized  his  soul ; he  fell  to  the  ground, 
and  remained  most  of  the  night  in  an  awful  state  of 
trembling  despair.  The  extremity  of  his  wickedness  was 
the  climax  of  God’s  grace.  Ilis  mind  was  enlightened,  his 


IIG 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


heart  was  subdued,  and,  after  sorrowing  many  days  because 
of  bis  transgressions,  be  obtained  peace  to  his  soul. 

As  this  good  work  advanced,  it  became  necessary  to  have 
frequent  and  protracted  meetings  for  expounding  the  Scrip- 
tures, for  prayer,  and  exhortation.  With  an  endeavour  to 
moderate  undue  excitement,  so  natural  to  such  circum- 
stances, every  opportunity  was  afforded  to  instruct  and  to 
confirm  the  minds  of  those  so  recently  awakened,  very  few 
of  whom,  however,  were  admitted  that  year  to  church-fellow- 
ship. During  the  four  mouths  of  this  special  visitation  of 
grace  from  the  presence  of  God,  more  than  five  hundred 
souls  were  brought  under  anxious  concern  for  their  salva- 
tion, three  hundred  of  whom  remain  to  this  day  consistent 
disciples  of  Jesus,  known  and  read  of  all  men. 

It  would  be  easy  and  interesting  to  notice  in  detail  the 
history  of  many  of  the.se  numerous  converts,  but  neither 
the  design  nor  limits  of  this  work  will  allow;  but  with  a 
view  to  give  information  respecting  their  state  of  mind  when 
brought  under  those  new  and  happy  influences,  we  will 
record  the  following.  A female  wrote : — " Blessings  on  you 
from  God,  who  is  feared  by  his  angels  in  heaven,  and  by 
his  people  on  earth,  but  whom  I have  not  feared.  I have 
sinned  against  him,  and  I now  feel  that  my  sins  are  numer- 
ous. I now  remember  the  words  of  exhortation  which  you 
formerly  spoke  to  me,  and  which  I then  despised.  They  are 
now  like  thorns  in  my  flesh;  and  my  sins  are  drawing  my 
soul  down  to  destruction.  Alas  ! the  fearfulness  of  that 
place.  I am  filled  with  distress.  Oh,  that  God  would  com- 
passionate me,  and  draw  my  soul  out  of  the  net  of  the  devil  ! 
]\Iy  desire  is,  that  you  may  become  to  me  like  Evangelist  in 
the  book  of  the  Pilgrim.  I had  been  attempting  to  take  care 
of  my  own  life,  but  I have  fallen.  May  the  Lord  compa.s- 
sionate  me,  a guilty  sinner  ! I am  in  shame  on  account  of 
my  sin.  I am  an  orphan,  lean  of  heart,  and  have  no  joy; 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


117 


and  water  is  in  my  eyes  night  and  day.  I am  saying,  ‘ Where 
is  God  j will  he  cast  me  off  for  death  ?’  Fire  burns  in  my 
heart;  but  I am  seeking  salvation.  May  I not  join  the 
Bible  class  for  instruction  ? None  can  tell  how  soon  death 
may  come.  In  conclusion,  blessings  on  you.” 

The  following  train  of  thought,  spoken  by  one  of  the  con- 
verts, is  rather  amusing,  but  sufficiently  serious  in  its  con- 
clusion to  serve  our  purpose  in  these  illustrations.  In  the 
course  of  his  address  he  said  : — “ Fathers  and  brethren, — 
Last  night  as  I lay  on  my  bed,  thinking  on  my  present  ex- 
periences, the  cocks  began  to  crow,  and  all  at  once  a thought 
came  into  my  mind  that  they  resembled  our  teachers  and 
missionaries ; they  are  always  crowing — warning  and  teach- 
ing us  from  God’s  word.  Papehia  came  first,  and  he  crowed 
every  morning  and  evening,  making  known  the  sins  of  the 
people  and  the  love  of  God;  then  came  Wiliamu,  and  Piti- 
mani,  and  Barokote,  (Williams,  Pitman  and  Buzacott,)  and 
they  all  crowed,  all  alike,  and  continually.  Ah ! it  was 
morning  then;  and  some  of  you  fathers  awoke  up  out  of 
your  sleep  of  sin,  and  you  have  had  a long  day,  but  many 
of  us  slept  on : we  just  heard  the  sound  of  the  voice,  and 
lifted  up  our  eyelids,  but  soon  folded  our  hands  in  our  folly, 
and  slept  on  in  our  sin.  It  was  thus  with  me  ; but  I am  thank- 
ful the  missionary  did  not  fly  away  to  another  land,  and 
leave  us  to  sleep  on  until  death.  He  remained,  and  kept 
on  crowing  the  word  of  God.  But,  alas  ! it  is  noonday  now ; 
my  morning  is  passed ; yet  I rejoice  that  I have  been 
awakened  out  of  my  sleep,  and  desire  to  give  the  remainder 
of  my  day  to  God’s  service.” 

On  another  occasion,  an  elderly  native,  addressing  the 
church-members,  said  : “ Brethren  !”  and,  pausing  for  a mo- 
ment, continued;  “Ah!  that  is  a new  name;  we  did  not 
know  the  proper  meaning  of  that  word  in  our  heathenism. 
It  is  the  evauydia  a Jcsu,  that  has  taught  us  the  true  mean- 


118 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


ing  of  the  word  ‘ brethren.’  But,  am  I here — here  in  the 
midst  of  the  church  of  Jesus  ? What  a marvel  ! I mar- 
vel— you  marvel,  /here  ! It  is  the  boundless  love  of  God. 
You  all  know  me.”  Pointing  to  a man  about  his  own  age, 

he  continued  : “ Do  you  not  remember , whom  we  killed 

on  yonder  mountain,  and  whose  body  we  cooked  and  ate  ?” 
He  mentioned  three  others  by  name,  whom  he  and  others 
in  the  church  had  thus  devoured  in  cannibal  feasts : and 
then  with  tears  running  down  his  cheeks,  he  exclaimed, 
“ Oh,  the  love  of  God  ! how  far  beyond  all  measurement ! 
These  hands  have  killed  eleven  men  during  the  reign  of  Sa- 
tan here,  whose  bodies,  with  those  of  many  others,  I have 
eaten  in  our  feasts.  And  is  it  true  that  I am  here  ? Why, 
even  you  young  men  know  me.  I was  a wild  savage,  long 
after  the  gospel  was  preached  in  this  land.  I was  one  of 
seventy  others  who  blistered  their  breasts  over  the  sacred 
fire  of  Tangaroa’s  temple,  and  I vowed  the  vow  of  death  to 
the  word  of  Jesus.  I was  among  the  number  who  burnt 
down  the  houses  of  those  who  received  that  word ; and  the 
chapel,  and  school-houses,  and  missionary’s  house  we  burnt 
to  the  ground,  and  only  desired  to  burn  him  in  it.  But  the 
word  of  God  was  more  mighty  than  I,  and  I am  here.  I 
think  I have  loved  God  some  three  or  four  years  past,  but 
have  not  been  able  to  profess  that  love  by  joining  the  church 
until  now.  Whenever  I have  thought  of  doing  so,  the  sin 
and  guilt  of  my  cannibalism  have  always  prevented  me. 
This  has  been  the  great  barrier,  until,  six  months  ago,  I 
beard  the  missionary  preach  from  that  great  word  written 
by  the  prophet  Isaiah,  which  speaks  thus,  ‘ I have  blotted 
out  thy  transgressions  as  a cloud,  and  as  a cloud  thy  sin. 
Return  unto  me,  for  I have  redeemed  thee.’  That  word 
was  my  salvation ; my  burden  was  removed,  my  soul  was  set 
at  liberty ; and,  because  of  the  power  and  love  of  Jesus,  I, 
the  greatest  of  sinners,  am  here.” 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


119 


This  man  is  now  living,  a consistent,  useful  Christian 
elder,  and  is  a represeutative  of  hundreds  of  souls  who  have 
Kone  to  heaven,  and  of  hundreds  more  in  the  flesh  who  com- 
pose  the  first-bora  of  the  church  of  Christ,  redeemed  from 
among  the  tribes  of  the  coral  islands  of  Eastern  and  Western 
Polynesia. 

In  August,  1852,  a united  communion  service  was  held 
at  Ngataugiia,  to  commemorate  the  thirtieth  anniversary  of 
the  landing  of  the  first  Christian  teacher  on  the  island. 
Early  in  the  morning,  crowds  of  persons  were  seen  coming 
from  Avarua,  Arorangi,  Titikaveka,  and  Matavera,  until, 
about  nine  o’clock,  A.  M.,  more  than  half  the  population  of 
the  island  had  assembled  together.  About  a thousand  per- 
sons got  inside  the  chapel,  seven  hundred  of  whom  were 
members  in  communion  in  the  various  village  churches. 
Most  of  the  deacons  and  teachers  and  missionaries  from  the 
surrounding  islands  had  come  to  us  for  the  occasion.  The 
captain  and  crew  of  the  missionary  ship  were  there  j Kev. 
C.  Hardie,  representative  of  the  distant  Samoan  churches, 
was  there ; the  honoured  fathers  and  founders  of  the  mis- 
sion, Kev.  Messrs.  Pitman  and  Buzacott,  who  had  wrought 
labours  abundant,  and  had  endured  trials  unrecorded,  were 
there;  the  venerable  Tinomana  and  Pa,  chiefs  who  had 
lived  thirty  years  of  heathen  life  before  the  gospel  was  taken 
to  the  land,  were  there ; the  noble  chieftainess,  Makea,  the 
worthy  successor  of  her  sainted  parent,  was  there ; Papehia, 
the  aged  and  the  honourable,  who,  thirty  years  before,  had 
landed  in  the  midst  of  the  heathen  population,  at  the  peril 
of  his  life,  to  preach  to  them  the  word  of  salvation — he  was 
there ; and  to  complete  the  hallowed  chain,  Tapaeru,  the 
native  woman  who  was  taken  away  from  her  island  home  a 
heathen  captive,  and  returned  a Christian  pioneer — a heroine 
who  fought  for  the  life  of  Papehia,  when  her  savage  country. 


120 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


men  had  designed  his  murder — she  was  there.  Nearly  one 
thousand  native  members  of  the  church  had,  during  its 
twenty  years’  existence,  died  in  faith;  and  seven  hundred 
were  then  living,  and  that  day  were  united  in  one  commu- 
nion of  holiness  and  love,  and  partook  together  of  the  me- 
morials of  his  death,  whose  power  and  grace  had  introduced 
them  from  the  kingdom  of  darkness  into  his  marvellous 
light.  It  was  a holy  day,  a sacred  convocation,  suggestive 
of  numerous  and  practical  reflections,  salutary  in  its  various 
and  Christian  influences,  and  ever  to  he  remembered  by  the 
aged  and  the  young  who  formed  the  two  generations  present 
on  the  occasion. 

After  praise  and  prayer,  the  missionaries  spoke,  by  ar- 
rangement, on  the  past  history,  the  present  position,  and 
foreign  missionary  relations,  of  the  island; — the  elements 
of  the  communion  were  then  distributed,  and  afterwards,  a 
goodly  number  of  the  members  gave  short  and  appropriate 
addresses : the  fathers  spoke  of  themselves  in  idolatry  and 
heathenism,  and  of  themselves  now  under  the  reign  of 
Jesus ; the  young  people,  with  gratitude  for  their  privileged 
position ; and  pledged  themselves,  by  the  grace  of  God,  to 
hold  fast  their  profession,  and  to  do  all  in  their  power  to 
extend  the  blessings  of  Christianity  to  those  yet  in  heathen 
darkness  and  degradation.  Britain  and  British  churches 
were  borne  in  grateful  remembrance,  and  fervent  prayer 
was  offered  to  God,  still  to  cause  his  face  to  shine  on  her 
and  them,  to  make  her  a still  more  extended  blessing  to  the 
nations  of  the  world.  Last  of  all,  good  old  Papehia  spoke ; 
tears  rolled  down  his  furrowed  face,  whilst  he  unburdened 
the  emotions  of  his  overflowing  heart ; and  holding  up  in 
his  hand  a copy  of  the  Holy  Scriptures,  just  completed  in 
the  Karotongan  language,  he  said,  that  it  was  the  Holy 
Spirit  of  God  who  had  wrought  the  triumphs  they  had  com- 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


121 


memorated ; and  having  committed  the  word  of  God  as  his 
legacy  to  the  rising  generation,  he  prayed,  “ Now,  Lord, 
lettest  thou  thy  servant  depart  in  peace,  for  mine  eyes  have 
seen  thy  salvation, — the  glory  of  thy  people  Israel,  the  light 
to  enlighten  the  world.” 

Thus  terminated  the  Thirtieth  Anniversary  of  Christian 
missionary  labour  on  the  island  of  Rarotonga. 

11 


CHAPTER  XII. 


The  return  of  Rev.  A.  Buzacott  to  the  island,  with  first  edition  of  com- 
plete Bible  in  native  language — How  purchased  by  the  people — Na- 
tive auxiliary  missionary  societies — Letters  from  native  secretaries 
to  the  parent  society — -Missionary  efforts  among  the  young  people 
of  the  island — Children  brought  from  Rimitara  to  he  educated — 
Statistics  of  the  stations  to  1853 — Notices  on  decrease  of  population 
— Native  sailors — Shipping  trade  with  the  islanders — How  conduct- 
ed, and  results — Character,  life,  and  death  of  Tinomana,  chief  of 
Arorangi — Conclusion. 


A FEW  months  previous  to  the  meeting  recorded  in  the 
last  chapter,  the  island  was  gladdened  by  the  arrival  of  the 
Rev.  A.  Buzacott  from  England  ; he  returned  in  improved 
health,  and  brought  with  him  the  invaluable  boon  of  5000 
copies  of  the  first  complete  edition  of  the  Holy  Scriptures 
in  the  Rarotougan  language.  These  had  been  supplied  to 
the  mission  by  the  generous  aid  of  the  British  and  Foreign 
Bible  Society,  and  their  being  taken  on  shore  forms  an  im- 
portant era  in  the  history  of  the  island.  At  the  several  sta- 
tions, public  religious  services  were  held  to  commemorate 
the  event,  and  nothing  could  exceed  the  desire  of  the  peo- 
ple, each  one  to  receive  a copy  for  himself.  Those  who  had 
no  money  to  purchase,  brought  arrow-root,  dried  banana, 
coffee,  and  various  other  produce,  as  barter;  by  which  means, 
in  three  years,  they,  in  company  with  the  natives  of  the 

(122) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


123 


other  islands  of  the  group,  transmitted  to  the  Bible  Society 
more  than  five  hundred  pounds,  as  part  payment  for  the 
edition ; who,  in  return  for  the  encouragement  thus  given  to 
its  labours,  have  printed  an  additional  grant  of  5000  copies. 

Besides  in  this  manner  paying  for  their  books,  the  people 
of  Barotonga  have  formed  aii  Auxiliary  Missionary  Society, 
with  a view  to  send  contributions  to  the  parent  Society 
in  England,  the  result  of  which,  given  out  of  their  poverty, 
will  show  both  their  gratitude  and  zeal.  Having  but  little 
money,  the  larger  part  of  their  contributions  is  given  in 
arrow-root,  the  preparation  of  which  involves  an  amount 
of  time  and  labour  but  little  understood  iu  this  country. 
The  seed  is  planted,  and  as  the  plant  grows,  for  six  months 
it  has  to  be  frequently  weeded ; then  the  root  is  dug  up, 
and  is  afterwards  grated ; then  it  is  washed  three  or  four 
times  and  subsequently  dried,  and  pounded,  and  sifted  : 
and  after  this  expenditure  of  time  and  labour,  it  only  yields 
twopence-halfpenny  per  pound,  when  sold  to  the  merchant 
who  may,  at  long  and  uncertain  intervals,  bring  his  shij)  to 
the  island  to  collect  it.  For  many  years,  however,  in  this 
way  did  these  willing  and  diligent  people  prepare  4000 
pounds  weight  of  this  article  for  the  Society ; which,  together 
with  money  subscribed,  amounted  to  about  eighty  pounds 
sterling  a-year.  Latterly,  however,  they  have  prepared  less 
arrow-root,  but  by  barter  of  other  produce  have  raised  more 
money ; so  that,  in  the  year  1854,  this  native  Auxiliary  con- 
tributed to  the  funds  of  the  London  Missionary  Society  no 
less  a sum  than  one  hundred  pounds;  which  added  to  the 
amount  raised  for  the  same  object  by  the  people  of  Mangaia, 
Aitutaki,  and  the  other  islands  of  this  group,  makes  a total 
of  nearly  three  hundred  pounds  a year ! This  result  is 
as  important  as  it  is  gratifying,  and  although  we  deduct  the 
fact  that  neither  time  nor  labour  is  as  valuable  there  as  it 
is  iu  Euglaud,  yet  we  repeat  it  is  a significant  result,  and 


124 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


one  which  nothing  but  Christian  principle  could  have  secured 
— that  besides  building  and  keeping  in  repair  all  their  chap- 
els and  schools,  and  subscribing  largely,  in  native  property,  to 
the  wants  of  the  teachers  in  Western  Polynesia,  the  limited 
population  of  this  small  cluster  of  islands  should  raise  so 
large  a sum  for  foreign  missions ; — a people,  who  but  twenty 
years  ago,  were  just  emerging  out  of  the  most  abject  state 
of  heathen  destitution,  and  concerning  whom,  at  that  time, 
the  missionaries  themselves  said,  “ So  great  is  their  poverty, 
and  so  few  their  resources,  that  we  cannot  encourage  the 
hope  that  they  will  ever  be  able  to  contribute  the  least 
assistance  to  the  funds  of  the  Society.” 

In  1842,  one  of  the  secretaries  of  the  native  Auxiliary, 
writing  to  the  Society  in  this  country,  says : — “ My  letter 
is  concerning  the  growth  of  the  word  of  God ; we  are  re- 
joiced while  thinking  of  your  compassion  towards  the  heath- 
en,— but  ours  is  a land  of  no  property ; we  have,  however, 
contributed  arrow-root  the  last  three  years,  but  no  ship  has 
come  to  buy  it  until  now.  We  were  formerly  heathens, 
but  when  our  teachers  came  we  found  life : the  darkness 
fled  away,  Eph.  v.  8.  Then  we  knew  the  good  word 
of  God ; then  were  our  idols  abolished ; and  now  we  are 
thinking  that  this  word  shall  grow  in  all  lands  still  in  heath- 
en darkness.” 

Fourteen  years  after  the  above  letter  was  written,  another 
native,  sending  to  England  an  account  of  their  contribu- 
tions, writes, — “To  the  Receiver  of  the  Society’s  property. 
Blessing  on  you  from  the  Lord  Jesus,  the  Messiah.  The 
letter  you  wrote  has  come  to  my  hand,  and  I am  thinking 
by  what  means  we  may  obtain  property  to  aid  this  cause 
after  the  like  manner  with  you : you  English  people  have 
an  endless  variety  of  ways  to  get  money,  even  to  digging 
it  up  from  the  earth  beneath  you ; but  alas  ! where  shall  we 
find  such  means  ? W e can  only  cut  fire-wood,  plant  pota- 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAEOTONOA. 


125 


toes,  and  other  things,  and  sell  them  to  ships.  We  will, 
however,  be  diligent ; our  hands  are  given  us  to  work ; it  is 
right  therefore  that  we  should  be  strong ; and  our  desire  is 
great  that  the  word  of  God  may  grow  in  all  heathen  lauds. 
In  conclusion,  we  will  continue  to  aid  you.  Although  but 
small,  we  will  continue." 

With  a view  to  fulfil  this  promise  to  continue,  the  natives 
co-operate  very  largely  with  the  missionary  to  instruct  the 
rising  generation  of  the  island,  and  to  encourage  them  in 
deeds  of  benevolence.  They  have  their  Juvenile  Missionary 
Association,  and  their  half-yearly  school  examinations,  and  • 
numerous  other  engagements  whose  tendency  is  to  form  an 
active,  useful  people.  In  the  Ilervey  group  of  islands,  we 
have  more  than  three  hundred  teachers  in  the  children’s 
schools,  who  give  their  willing  and  gratuitous  services  two 
hours  a day  for  the  present  welfare  and  future  prosperity  of 
the  young  islanders.  Miss  Buzacott,  in  giving  a report  of 
her  select  school,  1854,  mentions  eighty-eight  scholars  in 
her  advanced  classes,  and  gives  a pleasing  account  of  the 
last  distribution  of  prizes  to  those  who  had  excelled  in  their 
studies.  Natives  also  from  Rimatara,  an  island  four  hun- 
dred miles  north-east  of  Rarotonga,  had  brought  six  of  their 
children  to  place  under  her  instruction,  at  the  same  time 
leaving  a native  guardian  to  watch  over  their  interests. 

In  the  midst  of  this  prosperity  which  prevailed  on  the 
island  at  the  time  of  which  we  write,  the  people  were  visited 
with  the  scourge  of  measles.  The  infection  was  brouMit 
from  Tahiti,  and  was  lamentably  fatal,  so  that  the  mortality 
of  that  year,  and  consequent  weakness  of  those  who  sur- 
vived, added  to  the  previously  decreasing  population,  have 
excited  the  most  gloomy  apprehensions.  Prior  to  the  hur- 
ricane in  1831,  it  will  be  remembered  that  an  epidemic  pre- 
vailed, which  swept  off  a great  number  of  the  people;  and 
the  famine  subsequent  to  that  calamity  proved  still  more 
11 


126 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


fatal,  especially  among  the  females,  so  much  so  that,  only 
sixteen  years  afterwards,  it  was  found,  in  the  reduced  popu- 
lation of  a few  more  than  3000,  there  were  150  men  in  excess 
of  every  100  women  ! and,  for  many  years  past,  the  number 
of  deaths  beyond  that  of  births  has  been  most  fearful,  as  the 
following  table  will  reveal. 

Annual  Statistics  of  Deaths,  Births,  &c.,  on  the  Island  of 
Rarotomja,  for  eleven  years,  ending  Dec.,  1858. 


Year. 

Deaths. 

Births. 

Marriages. 

Admission  to 
Church. 

1843  . 

. . . 442 

100 

61 

91 

1844. 

. ..  220 

73 

86 

100 

1845  . 

. . . 166 

95 

78 

85 

1846. 

. . . 181 

97 

51 

84 

1847. 

. . . 168 

66 

23 

49 

1848  . 

. . . 119 

93 

45 

78 

1849  . 

. . . 159 

95 

40 

60 

1850. 

. . . 97 

89 

55 

58 

1851 . 

. . . 119 

70 

49 

112 

18.52  . 

. . . 81 

67 

47 

206 

1853. 

...  91 

92 

24 

113 

Thanks  be  unto  God  ! the  last  two  years  give  hope  for  the 
future ; but  of  the  causes  which  produced  the  alarming  de- 
crease of  population  of  former  years,  we  can  give  no  satis- 
factory explanation ; and,  but  that  almost  every  island  with 
which  we  are  acquainted  has  been  suffering  the  same 
calamity,  in  a greater  or  less  degree,  it  would  make  the 
mystery  as  peculiar  as  it  is  distressing. 

It  must  be  observed  that  the  climate  of  Rarotonga  is 
salubrious;  that  the  people  have  a vast  variety  and  generally 
an  abundance  of  food ; that  they  are  notoriously  free  from 
many  of  the  most  loathsome  gangrenous  diseases  which  for- 
merly so  extensively  prevailed ; that  they  have  no  foreign 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


127 


residents  living  with  them  on  shore ; that  they  are  active, 
and,  compared  with  some  other  islanders,  are  of  cleanly 
habits;  and  that  salutary  domestic  and  social  order  prevails, 
to  which  they  were  strangers  in  heathen  life.  We  think, 
therefore,  that  the  foundation  of  the  calamity  must  be  looked 
for  in  the  entire  want  of  physical  stamina  in  the  native  con- 
stitution, which  renders  it  peculiarly  susceptible  to  influences 
which  induce  bodily  weakness.  Amongst  these  influences, 
we  may,  no  doubt,  reckon  famine,  consequent  on  the  gales; 
introduced  diseases,  such  as  scrofula  and  dysentery;  periodi- 
cal attacks  of  influenza,  with  low  fever;  want  of  sufficient 
prudence  when  ill;  and  a lax  state  of  juvenile  morality; 
these,  together  with  the  minority  of  female  population,  may 
in  some  measure  account  for  want  of  increase ; but  we  cannot 
regard  them  as  the  entire  primary  causes  of  that  fearful 
decrease  noticed  in  the  preceding  table,  and  which  was  going 
on  before  the  introduction  of  Christianity  to  the  island ; for 
we  have  reason  to  conclude,  from  districts  depopulated  in 
heathenism,  and  from  the  well-authenticated  accounts  of  the 
people,  that  during  the  last  fifty  years  of  their  heathen  life, 
not  only  were  disease  and  war  and  infanticide  making  rapid 
havoc,  but  that  the  actual  births  were  then,  as  subsequently, 
fewer  than  the  deaths. 

We,  however,  hail  with  delight  the  manifest  improve- 
ment in  health  and  strength  which  is  at  present  seen  in  the 
population,  and  our  hope  is,  by  our  increasing  knowledge 
and  by  assiduous  attention  to  their  physical  wants,  suc- 
ceeded by  the  blessing  of  Grod,  that  a season  of  increase 
and  prosperity  may  yet  be  in  reserve  for  this  long-afflicted 
people. 

It  should  be  further  noticed,  that  the  former  dispropor- 
tion between  the  sexes  is  now  become  more  equal ; numbers 
of  young  men  have  been  taken  from  the  island  in  the  ser- 
vice of  the  American  whale  fishery,  and  are  for  the  most 


128 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


part  spoken  well  of  by  their  captains ; and  when  remune- 
rated with  equity  and  justice,  and  not  discharged  at  a 
foreign  port,  they  render  good  service  to  their  friends  and 
relatives  by  property  thus  gained.  In  connection  with  this 
subject,  and  with  a view  to  bring  the  notices  of  this  island 
to  a close,  I will  here  give  an  account  of  the  manner  in 
which  trade  is  conducted  by  the  natives  with  shipping. 

A ship  arives  otf  the  island.  On  its  approach  to  the 
shore,  a native  pilot  goes  to  it  in  his  boat,  and  the  captain, 
on  landing,  is  met  by  the  appointed  salesman  of  the  station. 
Giving  the  stranger  the  right  hand  of  brotherhood,  he 
salutes  him  in  the  native  language,  liia  ora  na,  Blessing 
on  you.  The  captain  is  then  led  to  the  markebhouse,  where 
are  stores  of  potatoes,  yams,  bananas,  pumpkins,  cocoa-nuts, 
hops,  fowls,  &c.  A chest  of  American  or  English  goods  is 
then  given  to  the  care  of  the  salesman,  who  executes  the 
order,  and  pays  all  expenses,  and  engages  three,  four,  or  five 
boats,  according  to  the  amount  of  supplies,  to  take  it  oflF  to 
the  ship.  The  whole  business  is  generally  conducted  with 
propriety  and  satisfaction,  and  the  captain  leaves  the  island, 
thankful,  or  ought  to  be,  to  the  Christianity  which  has  sub- 
dued the  cruel  barbarity  of  this  once  heathen  people,  and 
lias  made  the  island  a mart,  a refuge,  a home,  as  he  may 
require,  during  his  long  and  dangerous  voyage  from  his  far- 
distant  native  country.  During  two  years,  ending  Decem- 
ber, 1851,  upwards  of  twenty  merchant  vessels,  laden  with 
valuable  articles  of  barter,  and  sixty  whalers,  having  on 
board  more  than  100,000  barrels  of  oil,  called  at  the  island, 
did  trade  with  the  people,  were  boarded  by  the  natives, 
gained  suitable  supplies  for  their  voyage  ] and  in  each  of 
these  departments  found  law,  and  order,  and  honesty,  and 
the  commercial  deportment  of  the  islanders  to  be  such  as 
could  not  be  well  exceeded  in  any  port  of  a more  ancient 
civilized  country.  At  the  entire  group,  not  less  than  one 


THE  ISLAND  OF  RAROTONGA. 


129 


hundred  ships  annually  trade  with  the  natives,  and  receive 
produce  of  native  labour  in  exchange  for  manufactured 
wares,  amounting  to  not  less  than  three  thousand  pounds. 
In  this  way  does  industry,  civilization,  and  commerce  fol- 
low in  the  footprints  of  Christianity,  and  deriving  from  her 
their  security,  extension,  and  glory,  they  are  bound  to  do 
universal  and  perpetual  homage  to  her  power  and  grace; 
this  is  their  tendency,  and  it  would  always  be  practically 
secured,  but  for  the  pervenseness  of  man’s  covetous  and 
wicked  heart,  which  leads  it  to  extol  and  to  rejoice  in  these 
blessings,  and  at  the  same  time  to  ignore  (strange  infatua- 
tion !)  the  source  whence  they  are  derived  ! 

In  conclusion,  we  cannot  more  suitably  close  this  brief 
sketch  of  thirty  years’  history  of  Christianity  on  Raroton- 
ga, than  by  recording  the  triumphant  Christian  death  of  Ti- 
nomana,  the  chief  of  Arorangi.  By  reference  to  the  third 
chapter  of  this  work,  it  will  be  remembered  that  he  was  the 
first  chief  who  destroyed  his  idols,  and  was  also  the  first  to 
abandon  polygamy — that  prolific  source  of  heathen  war  and 
bloodshed ; these  things  he  did  in  opposition  to  his  brother 
chieftains  and  fellow-countrymen,  who  thought  him  a fool 
and  madman.  In  the  wars  previous  to  the  introduction  of 
Christianity  to  the  island,  he  and  his  people  were  driven  to 
the  mountain-fastnesses,  and  literally  hunted  by  the  canni- 
bal warriors,  like  birds  of  prey.  Those  mountains  he  never 
forgot.  Pointing  to  them,  and  referring  to  his  heathen  life 
there,  I have  frequently  heard  him  appropriate  the  language 
of  the  prophet,  and  say,  “"See  the  rock  whence  I have  been 
hewn  ! the  hole  of  the  pit  whence  I have  been  digged 
After  more  than  ten  years’  consistent  Christian  life,  he 
joined  the  church  in  1836,  at  Arorangi,  of  which  he  con- 
tinued an  irreproachable  member  until  death.  In  discharge 
of  his  civil  duties  he  was  righteous,  just,  kind,  and  firm ; 
in  the  settlement  he  was  revered  and  loved,  and  always  quo- 


130 


GEMS  FROM  TUE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


ted  as  an  authority  and  example ; in  the  church  he  was  de- 
votional, humble,  and  inquiring.  His  love  to,  and  research 
into  the  word  of  God,  were  pre-eminent;  and  the  remem- 
brance of  his  simple,  confiding  and  loving  disposition,  of  his 
benign,  active,  and  peaceful  influence,  and  of  his  kind,  sin- 
cere, and  constant  friendship,  is  among  the  sweetest, 
and  holiest,  and  most  grateful  reminiscences  of  my  mission- 
ary life.  This  testimony  is  not  mere  language  without 
spirit ; it  is  the  truthful  and  natural  unburthening  of  a heart 
that  knew  him  well,  and  that  will  fondly  and  sacredly  cher- 
ish his  memory,  until,  in  company  with  honoured  fellow- 
labourers,  Papehia,  and  Pitman,  and  Buzacott,  we  may 
present  his  redeemed  and  glorified  soul  and  body  to  the  Sa- 
viour, a gem  of  his  own  seeking  and  sanctifying ; and  who, 
with  an  untold  multitude,  will  remember  their  heathen  life 
on  llarotonga,  and  other  lands  once  like  it,  and  with  grate- 
ful and  eternal  emphasis  exclaim,  “ See  the  rock  whence  we 
were  hewn ! the  hole  of  the  pit  whence  we  were  digged  I” 
Referring  to  his  last  illness,  the  Rev.  C.  Pitman  says  : — 
‘‘  Good  Tinomana,  anxious  to  see  us  once  more  here  (Nga- 
tangiia),  was  brought  by  natives  in  his  arm-chair,  and  ac- 
companied by  his  old  and  faithful  friend,  Papehia.  Arriv- 
ing at  our  house,  he  seemed  to  forget  his  weakness,  and 
walked  alone;  but  he  soon  became  exhausted,  and  was 
obliged  to  recline  on  the  sofa.  As  soon  as  he  revived,  we 
had  delightful  conversation  together,  respecting  the  great 
things  God  had  done  for  the  sons  and  daughters  of  Raro- 
tonga, about  God’s  love  in  Christ,  prospect  of  a glorious  im- 
mortality, and  joy  at  meeting  there ; — it  was  indeed  a re- 
freshing season.  We  met  again  on  the  following  morning, 
and  after  further  conversation,  I said,  'This  is  our  last 
meeting  on  earth.’  ‘ Yes,’  he  replied;  ‘but  we  shall  meet 
above.’  I then  proposed  prayer,  and  the  aged  saint  bend- 
ing forward  on  his  chair,  prayed; — praising  God  for  mis- 


jLMjtyy  Mur  fcwijw  wetn  ^ Mf 

^ t > i*t««  f » Mt  1,1 . ’ 

fee  4;J  4 a4  «»T1  ^ j.  . 

W .T. 

W-R*aH»mi»,,.>N  tH;..  •?*  V 
trt.  k^xN<^  %t  litm  frJfmdai  if/hfu-^ 

•»w.i  iHf  ri  ^nuUlmt/  WrfT  ««tft  itpi 
frmvir  bw. 

?ftW3*>|l4  tJ'lWjl  IfiTT  «*><♦.  H ># 

«WWl  Vm»u<4  Hitr  imiim^  cl  JOHn,  , rit„.«t  *;,(  J« 
w-  i—  .Mt^l  l» 

t'.ll  Xhw  l«ro«  bas  i^iu  .i.  «J  lugk^w 

**‘!**  A ,W/ 

A^f3«j«h*caw:B^^  t ; 

» i«^  WM»W  4t^ 

••s»n  rsr.-T  ^ «ir*iu»rwii*^f.r  t.^.;i», 

' * *^*r  *'^  *A«i'S(ii  Oo  MtbM  I ( f.nikl«-* 

*****-f  r’^fSinT' 4,  t*,,,^ 

-u^W  J 

■>j»  «.»*«U  *Ui»rul.^l^i,„,  ^ ^ J 


?w 


fiifk 


THE  ISLAND  OF  UAROTONGA. 


131 


sionary  labour  on  Rarotonga ; he  earnest!}'  commended  us, 
and  our  work,  and  the  people,  to  his  continued  protection 
and  love.  They  were  holy  moments  to  us : we  felt  on  the 
very  precincts  of  a blissful  immortality.” 

The  Rev.  A.  Buzacott  frequently  visited  this  good  man 
during  his  sickness,  and  speaking  of  those  visits,  he  says  ; — 
“ On  one  occasion,  I found  him  alone,  reclining  on  his 
couch,  on  the  verandah  of  his  house,  leaning  on  his  elbow, 
intently  looking  into  his  Bible.  ‘ What,  all  alone  !’  I ex- 
claimed ; ‘ No,  I am  not  alone,’  he  replied  ; ‘ God  is  here 
with  me.’  ‘ What  have  you  been  reading  ?’  I inquired. 
Adjusting  his  spectacles,  he  took  up  his  Bible,  and  read, 
‘ For  we  know  that  if  our  earthly  house  of  this  tabernacle 
were  dissolved,  we  have  a building  of  God,  a house  not  made 
with  hands,  eternal  in  the  heavens ;’  and  looking  up  to  me, 
he  said,  ‘ That  is  what  I am  expecting.’  ” 

Reference  was  made,  by  an  old  attendant,  respecting  the 
propriety  of  his  being  interred  in  the  ancient  tomb  of  the 
chiefs,  at  Avarua,  and  to  evil  consequences  which  he  super- 
stitiously  thought  would  follow,  if  this  custom  were  not  at- 
tended to.  But  Tinomana  signified  his  desire  to  be  buried 
in  the  midst  of  his  own  people;  and  referring  to  the  entire 
overthrow  of  the  whole  system  of  heathenism,  he  exclaimed, 
‘‘  That  season  of  darkness  is  past  away,  and  a diflferent  dis- 
pensation now  exists.” 

His  heart  was  fixed  on  God,  and  in  a most  happy  frame 
of  mind  he  waited  for  his  dismissal  from  the  flesh,  which 
occurred  in  October,  1854.  He  had  reached  the  good  old 
age,  rarely  attained  by  natives,  of  threescore  years  and  ten, 
nearly  forty  of  which  were  spent  in  heathen  life,  before  the 
introduction  of  the  gospel ; he  was  the  flrst  man  of  influ- 
ence who  gave,  instrumentally,  the  death-blow  to  the  idolatry 
of  the  people ; he  lived  to  be  the  last  of  the  generation  of 
chiefs  whom  he  represented;  and  died,  cheered  with  the 


132 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


prospect  that  his  son,  of  Christian  name,  Setephano,  and 
Christian  character,  will  follow  in  his  steps.  With  this 
prospect  we  close  these  missionary  notices  of  one  of  the 
fairest  of  Polynesia’s  Coral  Islands;  only  adding,  its  first 
resident  European  missionary,  the  Rev.  C.  Pitman,  has,  on^ 
account  of  age  and  infirmity,  been  obliged  to  retire  from  the 
mission,  leaving,  at  present,  the  Rev.  A.  Buzacott  alone,  to 
superintend  its  affairs,  which  includes  five  villages,  with 
their  churches  and  schools,  and  printing  press,  and  insti- 
tution for  the  education  of  teachers  and  pastors ; in  each  of 
which  departments,  however,  he  is  happily  and  efficiently 
assisted  by  an  intelligent,  consistent,  Christian  native  in- 
strumentality. 

The  Lord  hath  done  great  things  for  us ; and  to  him  be 
all  the  praise ! 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


CHAPTER  I. 


Relative  position  of  the  island  to  Rarotonga — When  discovered,  and  the 
landing  of  Christian  teachers — An  out-station  to  the  Tahiti  mission 
up  to  1839 — Maretu,  the  first  Rarotongan  teacher  sent  to  tha 
island — Native  addresses  on  the  occasion  of  missionary  of  Arorangi 
going  to  Mangaia — Circumstances  of  the  voyage — A prayer  of  a 
native  at  sea — Circumstances  of  missionary  landing,  1841 — Week- 
ly arrangements  to  attend  to  native  inquirers — A Sahbath-morning 
prayer-meeting — Public  service — Burial  service  of  a heathen — Na- 
tive inquiries  respecting  ancient  customs — The  oppressed  condition 
of  Mangaian  females. 

The  island  of  Mangaia  is  a low  coral  rock  formation, 
situate  about  120  miles,  south-east  by  south,  distant  from 
Rarotonga.  It  is  rather  more  than  20  miles  in  circumfer- 
ence, and  is  surrounded  by  a reef  which  has  no  break  large 
enough  to  admit  a boat ; landing  is  effected  in  canoes  on  the 
rising  surf,  over  the  reef,  at  which  the  natives  are  so  expert, 
that  but  few  accidents  occur.  The  island  has  about  3000 
inhabitants,  who*  are  among  the  most  healthy,  strong,  active, 
thoughtful,  and  orderly  tribes  of  Eastern  Polynesia;  and 
12  (133) 


134 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


wtose  missionary  history  demands  special  notice  in  this  work, 
as  illustrating  the  character  and  efficiency  of  Christian  na- 
tive agency, — having  been  exclusively  left  to  that  agency 
for  twenty  years  after  the  introduction  of  the  gospel  to  its 
inhabitants. 

The  island  was  discovered  by  Captain  Cook  in  the  year 
1777.  An  attempt  was  made  to  locate  Tahitian  native 
teachers  there  by  the  Rev.  J.  Williams,  at  the  time  he 
was  in  search  of  Rarotonga ; hut  the  wildness  and  bar- 
barity of  the  people  at  that  time  not  only  rendered  the  at- 
tempt abortive,  but  had  well-nigh  proved  fatal  to  the  lives 
of  the  devmted  pioneei’S.  Two  years  afterward,  however, 
Messrs.  Tyerman  and  Bennett,  accompanied  by  the  Rev.  T. 
Threlkeld,  were  making  a voyage  from  the  Tahitian  islands 
to  S}’dney,  and  two  young  men,  Davida  and  Tiera,  members 
of  the  church  on  the  island  of  Tahaa,  who  had  been  sepa- 
rated to  the  work  of  preaching  the  gospel  to  the  heathen, 
were  put  on  board  their  vessel  to  be  left  on  any  island  open 
to  receive  them.  Arriving  at  Mangaia,  intercourse  was  had 
with  the  people,  by  whom  a willing  consent  was  given  to 
them  to  commence  their  work  on  their  island.  Having  no- 
thing with  them  but  the  light  calico  dresses  which  they  wore, 
and  a portion  of  the  New  Testament,  printed  in  the  Tahit- 
ian language,  which  they  tied  upon  their  foreheads,  these 
two  devoted  pioneers,  leaping  into  the  sea  from  the  canoe, 
swam  to  the  shore,  and  were  the  honoured  instruments  of 
overthrowing  the  idolatry  and  heathenism  of  the  island,  and 
of  laying  the  foundations  of  the  kingdom  of  Christ,  which 
kingdom  has  successfully  grown  there,  and  has,  instrumen- 
tally,  by  the  aid  of  its  inhabitants,  been  extended  to  other 
and  far  distant  islands. 

For  many  years  the  mission  on  this  island  was  under  the 
superintendence  of  the  missionaries  of  the  Tahitian  islands, 
and  occasional  visits  were  made  to  it  by  the  honoured  brethren 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


135 


Barff  and  Platt,  who  were  privileged  to  gather  into  church- 
fellowship  the  first-fruits  of  Christian  native  labours  there  ; 
many,  very  many  of  whom  passed  from  this  life  into  life 
eternal  before  a European  missionary  took  up  his  permanent 
abode  on  the  island,  and  who  are  now  among  the  redeemed 
in  glory. 

In  1839,  Rarotonga  having  received  a reinforcement  of 
missionaries,  Mangaia,  naturally  belonging  to  its  group,  was 
passed  over  by  the  Tahitian  mission  to  our  care ; and  we 
had  great  pleasure  in  sending  to  the  island,  Maretu,  one  of 
the  most  intelligent  and  efficient  Karotongan  native  pastors, 
to  take  the  oversight  of  its  schools  and  churches,  and  the 
general  interests  of  the  people.  Davida,  the  first  teacher, 
was  yet  living,  and  labouring  there,  and  had  sustained  a 
consistent  Christian  character ; but  his  advanced  age,  his 
fifteen  years’  isolation,  together  with  his  limited  knowledge, 
rendered  this  step  necessary,  and  it  was  followed  by  the  most 
beneficial  results. 

In  1841,  it  was  arranged  that  we  should  visit  Mangaia, 
and  with  a view  to  gain  correct  knowledge  re.'-pecting  it,  and 
to  advance  the  interests  of  its  people,  we  proposed  to  remain 
among  them  some  three  or  four  mouths.  The  natives  of  our 
station,  on  Rarotonga,  fell  in  with  these  plans  in  a spirit 
worthy  of  Christianity,  as  will  be  manifested  in  their  addresses 
at  a meeting  of  the  church,  held  previous  to  our  departure. 
One  member  said : — “ Brethren,  the  time  we  have  been  ex- 
pecting has  come.  Jehovah  has  sent  a ship  to  take  away  our 
teacher  from  us,  that  he  may  go  for  a while  to  our  brethren 
on  Mangaia.  They  have  no  missionary  residing  in  their 
midst.  We  are  now  sorrowing  that  our  missionary  is  goins 
to  leave  us ; but  what  shall  we  do  ? Shall  we  say  he  must 
not  go?  No;  that  would  be  sin.  While  we  weep  at  his 
departure,  we,  in  compassion  to  our  brethren  on  Mangaia, 
say  to  him,  Go  ! and  prayer  for  his  safety  and  blessing  shall 
be  our  constant  employment  during  his  absence.’^ 


136 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Another  said : — “ My  brethren,  I have  been  looking  at 
that  passage  of  the  word  of  God  where  the  apostle  says, 

‘ Pray  for  us,  that  the  word  of  God  may  be  glorified  among 
us  as  with  you.’  I am  thinking  this  is  just  what  our  friends 
on  Mangaia  are  saying  to  us  to-day.  We  have  prayed,  and 
it  is  now  time  that  the  word  of  God  had  covered  every  district 
of  that  land ; let  us,  therefore,  send  our  missionary.  Do 
uot  let  us  be  vexed  because  he  is  going — but  let  us  still 
pray  that  success  may  attend  liis  visit  there.” 

An  older  member  then  rose,  and  said : — “ I have  a word  of 
consolation  to  address  to  you.”  Observing  some  who  were 
weeping,  he  continued,  “Has  not  Jesus  said,  I will  not 
leave  you  orphans,  but  I will  give  my  Spirit  unto  you,  and 
he  will  be  your  Father  and  Comforter.  Now,  if  we  are 
his  disciples,  he  will  be  with  us,  as  he  was  with  his  disciples 
of  old.  We  are  one  in  him.  This  also  is  a ground  of 
consolation.  He  is  the  Head  of  all  his  members.  Our 
bodies  only  may  be  separated,  but  we  shall  continue  one  in 
Jesus.  I have  been  thinking  of  the  sun  in  the  heavens; 
there  are  not  many  suns — there  is  only  one  sun  for  all  the 
people  of  this  world — they  all  look  to  it,  and  all  receive 
light  and  heat  from  it.  There  is  also  but  one  Jesus  for  us, 
for  those  who  remain  and  for  those  who  go ; let  us,  then, 
be  comforted ; he  will  shine  into  all  our  hearts ; we  shall 
be  one  in  him;  let  us  think  of  this.” 

Such  were  the  simple  Scripture  sentiments  expressed  by 
the  natives  of  the  Arorangi  church,  on  the  eve  of  our  leaving 
them  for  the  island  of  Mangaia.  It  is  not  needful  to 
apologize  for  their  insertion : the  design  of  this  work  is,  as 
far  as  possible,  to  give  a correct  idea  of  native  thought  and 
character;  and  this  we  hope  will  in  some  measure  be 
secured  by  the  following  notices  of  the  inhabitants  of  this 
island. 

The  voyage  from  Rarotonga  to  Mangaiia,  is  generally  made 


THE  ISLAND  OP  MANOAIA. 


137 


iu  one  or  two  days,  but  the  little  schooner  which  took  us  was 
niue  days  on  her  passage.  The  sea  was  rough  and  the  wind 
contrary,  and,  much  to  our  distress,  we  were  driven  hither 
and  thither,  until  we  had  well-uigh  determined  to  put  back 
for  Rarotonga.  Ill  however  as  we  were,  we  could  uot  help 
smiling  at  a part  of  a prayer  offered  by  a native,  one  morn- 
ing, and  this  we  did  without  any  conscious  irreverence.  Af- 
ter praying  for  grace  to  enable  us  to  bear  with  patience  our 
present  affliction,  the  good  man  said, — “ 0 Lord,  I have 
been  thinking  that  we  are  like  the  children  of  Israel  M'ho 
were  led  by  thee  up  and  down  the  wilderness,  forty  years, 
on  account  of  their  sius.  Surely  this  is  just  our  case  now. 

“ When  we  left  Rarotonga  we  thought  we  should  soon  be 
at  3Iangaia;  is  it  not  a very  near  land  ? But,  alas  for  us  ! 
we  are  driven  about  in  this  troubled  sea — we  are  first  on. 
this  tack,  then,  on  the  other;  we  are  sometimes  near  the 
land,  then,  we  are  blown  off.  Alas  ! we  have  need  to  con- 
fess our  sins  before  thee ; 0 Lord,  hear  us ; have  mercy  on 
us  j forbid  that  we  die  here,  as  the  people  of  Israel  died  iu 
the  wilderness 

This  prayer  was  answered  for  us,  and  nine  days  after 
leaving  Rarotonga  we  were  permitted  to  see  Mangaia.  As 
we  drew  near  to  the  coast  of  the  principal  station  a number 
of  canoes  came  off  to  us;  these  were  manned  with  young 
men,  who  appeared  evidently  well-disposed  towards  us,  but 
they  were  most  wild  iu  their  manners  and  appearance ; their 
bodies  were  but  partially  clad,  their  long,  very  long,  black 
hair  was  either  hanging  over  their  shoulders,  or  was  tied  iu 
a knot  on  the  top  of  their  head,  the  back  part  of  their  heads 
being  shaven,  and  their  sing-song  chant,  while  rowing  their 
canoes,  was  most  heatheulike ; altogether  we  were  disap- 
pointed and  surprised,  and  were  only  relieved  by  being  in- 
formed that  these  belonged  to  a party  disaffected  to  Chris- 
tianity, and  who  lived  in  the  interior  of  the  island,  away 
from  all  instruction. 

12* 


138 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Finding  the  surf  on  the  reef  too  high  to  allow  us  to  land 
at  the  station,  we  sailed  leeward — here  we  found  the  sea 
more  quiet,  and  the  reef  nearer  the  beach ; which  is  a bold 
shore  of  perpendicular,  barren,  coral  rock,  varying  from  20 
feet  to  60  feet  high,  indented  with  deep  caverns,  into  which 
the  mighty  sea  beats,  with  awful  grandeur,  when,  lashed  by 
the  wild  winds,  they  pass  the  natural  reef  boundary. 

We  embarked  in  a canoe  about  half-an-hour’s  passage 
from  the  land,  and  on  our  approach  were  glad  to  hud  that  a 
goodly  number  of  the  natives  had  come  from  the  settlement 
to  assist  our  going  on  shore.  Most  of  these  waded  knee-deep 
into  the  sea,  to  the  edge  of  the  reef,  and  as  our  canoe  ap- 
proached, some  of  them  swam  towards  it,  and  took  it  to  the 
place  where  the  surf  breaks,  when  those  who  were  waiting 
there  caught  it  simultaneously,  and  raising  it  to  their  shoul- 
ders bore  us  away  to  the  village. 

There  was  no  little  stir  in  Mangaia  that  morning.  We 
were  the  hi’st  European  missionaries  come  to  reside  among 
the  people — and  the  missionary’s  wife  excited  no  small  curi- 
osity and  surprise.  Having  in  some  degree  recovered  from 
the  morning’s  excitement,  we  held  a public  meeting  in  the 
afternoon.  About  800  persons  came  together,  to  whom  we 
explained  the  object  of  our  visit,  and  the  probable  length 
of  our  stay.  On  the  evening  of  the  same  day,  upwards  of 
eighty  persons  came  to  the  class  room  in  the  teacher’s  house, 
where  we  were  residing;  they  came  to  express  to  us  their 
gladness  at  our  arrival,  and  anxious  to  lose  no  time,  told  us 
that  they  desired  we  should  at  once  begin  instruction. 
Some  of  them  were  members  of  the  church,  and  others  were 
candidates.  Not  a few  had  brought  their  New  Testaments, 
and  wished  explanation  on  passages  which  they  had  marked 
in  the  course  of  their  reading ; others  wished  to  converse  on 
subjects  connected  with  civilization,  and  some  about  duties 
of  social  and  domestic  life.  All  this  was  very  grateful  to  a 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


139 


missionary’s  heart,  but  continuing  night  after  night,  we 
found  it  necessary  to  make  orderly  arrangements  to  enable 
us  sufficiently  to  attend  to  their  desires.  We  therefore  de- 
cided on  the  following  plan  for  each  week  during  our  stay. 
Monday  evening — to  converse  with  as  many  as  chose  to 
come  to  the  class  room,  about  the  sermons  of  the  Sabbath. 
Tuesday  evening — for  explanations  of  passages  of  Scripture 
to  those  who  had  found  difficulties  in  the  course  of  their 
reading.  Wednesday  evening — to  meet  ten  male  members 
of  the  church,  and  five  female  members  in  the  forenoon. 
Thursday  evening — to  meet  inquirers  and  candidates  for 
baptism  and  church  communion.  Friday  evening — a Bible- 
class  with  young  men  who  were  members  of  the  church  and 
congregation ; and  Saturday  evening — to  meet  the  deacons 
and  native  teachers.  This  arrangement  gave  us  time  to  at- 
tend to  schools  and  other  duties  of  the  settlement  during 
the  day ; it  met  with  the  general  approbation  of  the 
people,  and  was  conducive  to  our  comfort  and  usefulness. 

Our  first  Sabbath  on  this  island  was  a day  of  peculiar 
interest,  and  would  have  refreshed  the  heart  and  rewarded 
the  labours  of  all  who  take  active  interest  in  the  cause  of 
missions;  and  its  services  most  especially  illustrate  the  pro- 
gress of  Christianity  under  the  sole  agency  of  natives. 

I contrived  to  attend  unobserved  the  early  morning 
prayer  meeting,  which  was  conducted  by  the  natives.  More 
than  300  persons  were  present.  A church  member  entered 
the  desk,  and  gave  out  a hymn,  which  was  sung  by  the  whole 
congregation.  He  then  read  a portion  of  Scripture,  and 
engaged  in  prayer.  It  was  truly  delightful  to  hear  the 
simple  heart  eloquence  of  the  good  man  while  he  praised 
God  for  the  mercies  of  the  past  week,  for  the  overthrow  of 
idolatry,  for  the  blessings  of  the  gospel,  and  while  he  prayed 
for  blessings  to  rest  on  the  minister,  and  congregation,  and 
schools  that  day.  To  every  sentence  of  this  devout  effusion, 


140 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


the  most  enlightened  Christian  might  have  uttered  his 
hearty  Amen. 

Another  church  member  then  officiated,  another  hymn 
was  sung,  another  portion  of  the  word  of  God  was  read, 
and  prayer  again  offered.  Then  a deacon  entered  the  desk, 
and  gave  a few  words  of  suitable  exhortation,  which  he  con- 
cluded by  a short  prayer.  On  my  return  home,  I was  de- 
tected ; but  the  object  I had  in  view  had  been  accomplished ; 
luy  heart  was  filled  with  gratitude  to  God,  and  I think  it 
was  reconsecrated  that  day  to  a work  which  yields  such 
blessed  fruits — a foretaste  of  more  glorious  results  to  be 
realized  above. 

On  my  way  to  the  chapel  for  the  forenoon  service,  I 
visited  the  school ; 800  or  900  children  and  young  persons 
were  present,  who,  after  singing  and  prayer,  were  led  in 
classes  to  attend  public  worship.  The  chapel  was  a lime 
and  wattle  building,  130  feet  long,  38  feet  wide,  walls 
14  feet  high.  Looking  at  it  as  the  entire  work  of  the 
natives,  it  was  the  wonder  and  admiration  of  all  who  visited 
the  island.  The  numberless  rafters  of  the  roof,  each  neatly 
coloured  with  native  paint,  were  supported  by  12  or  14 
pillars  of  the  finest  wood,  which  were  carved  in  cathedral 
style.  This  large  building  was  not  only  full,  but  overflowing; 
even  tbe  windows  were  crowded  with  attentive  listeners  to 
the  word  of  life  ; there  could  not  have  been  fewer  than  2000 
persons  present,  individuals  who  but  a few  years  before 
were  sunk  in  base  and  cruel  heathen  practices.  In  the 
morning,  I preached  on  “ Christ  crucified,  the  glorious 
theme  of  the  gospel  ministry,”  and  in  the  evening,  from 
John  ix.  25,  “One  thing  I know,  that,  whereas  I was  once 
blind,  now  I see.” 

It  was  altogether  a day  of  deep  interest — one  that  we 
had  little  expected  to  experience  among  a people  who  had 
only  been  favoured  with  a native  teacher’s  instruction. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


141 


A day  or  two  after  our  arrival,  a Christian  young  man 
wished  me  to  bury  his  father,  who  had  died  a heathen  at  an 
inland  district.  Thinking  it  would  be  a favourable  oppor- 
tunity to  speak  to  the  living  of  the  place,  I consented  to 
the  service.  The  corpse  was  brought  to  the  grave  by  the 
heathen  friends  of  the  departed ; and  two  of  his  wives  and 
their  numerous  children  were  also  jmesent.  They  were  dis- 
tinguished from  the  Christian  party  by  their  long  hair,  by 
their  dress,  by  their  wrist  and  ankle  ornaments,  and  by  their 
wildness  of  manner.  The  whole  party,  however,  listened 
attentively  to  an  address  giving  a Scripture  account  of  death, 
of  a future  state,  and  the  increased  guilt  of  those  who  reject 
the  offers  of  mercy  made  through  Christ — founded  on  John 
viii.  21,  “ Ye  shall  die  in  your  sins,  and  whither  I go,  ye 
cannot  come.”  Through  the  blessing  of  God,  a salutary 
effect  was  produced  on  the  hearts  of  many — the  widows,  and 
many  of  the  children,  soon  afterwards  joined  the  settlement 
and  schools,  and  were  led  to  make  an  intelligent  and  con- 
sistent profession  of  faith  in  Christ  as  their  Saviour. 

Among  the  population,  there  were  many  individuals  who 
had  renounced  idolatry  and  heathenism,  but  who  as  yet  had 
very  imperfect  notions  respecting  the  spiritual  nature  and 
requirements  of  the  gospel  of  Jesus;  and  there  were  others 
who  still  adhered  to  old  customs;  it  was  not,  however,  a 
bad  sign  to  find  them  desirous  to  be  instructed  in  things 
connected  with  their  daily  life,  and  although  their  questions 
were  sometimes  amusing,  yet  they  were  natural,  and  im- 
portant to  them.  “ Is  it  a sin  to  eat  raw  fish  ?”  one  would 
ask;  “We  are  very  fond  of  half-cooked  pork,”  anotlur 
would  say ; “ is  it  wrong  to  eat  it  ?”  “ Does  the  Bible  com- 
mand wives  to  sit  at  meals  with  their  husbands  ?”  a third 
would  inquire.  Others  said,  that  they  began  to  think  that 
they  were  wrong  in  being  angry  at  the  birth  of  girls  in 
their  families,  instead  of  boys;  nearly  all  the  men  were  very 


142 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


inquisitive  respecting  their  plan  of  making  the  women  do 
the  most  laborious  work  of  the  island,  and  not  a few  inquired 
if  it  was  wrong  to  eat  rats.  These,  and  many  other  such 
questions  connected  with  their  old  customs,  gave  some  little 
uneasiness  to  the  whole  of  those  who  came  to  converse  with 
us,  for  only  few  of  them  had  had  principle  strong  enough, 
on  their  joining  the  Christian  settlement,  entirely  to  lay 
them  aside. 

Some  of  the  more  zealous,  who  had  risen  superior  to  their 
brethren,  wished  the  chiefs  of  the  island  to  make  laws  to 
prohibit  these  practices  among  the  entire  population.  We, 
however,  informed  them  that  it  was  not  needful  for  Chris- 
tianity to  call  in  the  aid  of  such  authority  to  effect  the 
change  which  they  desired.  Referring  to  themselves  as  an 
illustration  of  the  power  of  an  enlightened  mind,  we  advised 
them  to  instruct  the  people  in  the  true  religion,  and  to  have 
confidence  in  its  efficacy,  to  regulate  all  things  appertaining 
to  daily  life  in  obedience  to  its  laws. 

The  most  important  thing  to  be  corrected  was  the  degra- 
dation and  oppression  to  which  the  female  part  of  the  popu- 
lation was  subjected;  it  universally  prevailed  in  their  heathen 
life,  and  was  found  to  be  the  last  thing  which  yielded  to  the 
benign  influences  of  the  gospel.  We  always,  however, 
found  that  expositions  of  Christian  duty  on  this  matter 
were  listened  to  by  the  women  with  deep  interest,  and  they 
were  not  altogether  without  a beneficial  effect  on  the 
sterner  sex,  who  were  literally,  on  Mangaia,  masters  of 
their  wives. 


CHAPTER  II. 

Erection  of  a new  school  house — The  opening  service — Native  speeches 
— The  number  and  character  of  scholars — Want  of  books — Parents 
betroth  their  children  in  infancy — Visit  to  Tamarua — A public  ser- 
vice there — Desire  of  the  people  for  a missionary — Settlement  of  a 
native  pastor  there — Experienee  of  a young  convert — Increase  of 
people  attending  Sabbath  services  at  Oneroa — People  erect  galleries 
in  the  large  chapel — Notice  of  subterranean  caverns — Account  of 
heathens  on  the  island,  1841 — Desire  of  the  young  people  to  attend 
the  schools — Number  in  church  communion  at  principal  station — 
Native  contributions  to  London  Missionary  Society — Native  letter 
to  London  Missionary  Society. 

Finding  that  the  school  accommodation  was  too  limited 
for  the  number  of  scholars  in  attendance  on  the  station,  we 
proposed  to  assist  the  natives,  during  our  stay,  to  build  a 
new  house.  This  was  agreed  to,  and  a goodly  nutuber  of 
them  gave  themselves  willingly  and  voluntarily  to  the  work ; 
a site  was  cleared,  and,  in  less  than  two  months,  a conveni- 
ent school-house  was  built,  the  dimensions  of  which  were  92 
feet  long  and  45  feet  wide  : the  walls  being  wicker-work 
covered  with  lime  plaster.  On  its  completion  it  was  pub- 
licly opened,  and  the  occasion  was  one  of  much  rejoicing. 
A large  feast  of  fowls,  pigs,  and  native  fruits,  was  prepared, 
which  being  arranged  under  booths  of  cocoa-nut  branches, 
in  front  of  the  building,  the  children  assembled  for  a reli- 
gious service.  The  house  was  quite  full,  1200  children  and 

( 143  1 


144 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAE  ISLANDS. 


young  people  got  inside,  and  a goodly  number  of  tbeir  pa- 
rents crowded  the  windows  and  doors.  Our  subject  of  dis- 
course was  fouuded  on  1 Chron.  i.  10,  11 — Solomon’s  prayer 
for  wisdom  and  guidance,  an  example  and  encouragement 
for  the  young  to  seek  the  Lord.  The  children  listened  with 
undivided  attention,  and  their  speaking  eyes,  expanded  with 
an  expression  of  deep  interest,  were  too  full  of  meaning  to 
be  misunderstood,  and  too  affecting  to  leave  the  missionary’s 
heart  untouched.  In  the  afternoon  another  service  was 
held  in  the  school-house  for  young  people  and  adults.  A 
hymn  of  praise  was  sung,  a prayer  was  offered,  and  after- 
wards many  speeches  were  delivered.  One  old  man,  who 
had  spent  his  best  days  in  idolatry  and  war  said, — “ Friends, 
this  is  a new  era  to  us, — an  era  of  love, — an  era  which  our 
fathers  and  forefathers  never  knew.  God  has  loved  us,  even 
us,  and  therefore  we  love  each  other.  During  the  dominion 
of  Satan  over  our  land  we  had  gatherings,  but  not  like  this. 
Of  our  food,  at  our  ancient  feasts,  we  used  to  take  a large 
portion  to  the  gods,  our  false  gods, — but  to-day  we  look  to 
Jehovah.  He  is  our  God.  He  giveth  us  all  things. 
Formerly  our  wives  were  not  allowed  to  eat  with  us,  but 
to-day  they  are  here,  and  our  children  are  here,  and  we  are 
not  afraid  to  leave  our  homes, — all  is  love, — all  is  peace, — this 
surely  is  in  part  the  fulfilment  of  what  Jesus  said,  ‘ My  peace 
I leave  with  you.’  And,  look  at  this  new  building,  built  by 
ourselves,  and  for  what  purpose  ? to  teach  our  children  the 
word  of  God.  Oh,  how  strange  ! how  glorious  ! these  are  new 
things ; and  now  let  us  give  good  heed  to  our  children,  and 
put  no  hinderance  in  the  way  of  their  learning.” 

Another  old  man  rose  up  hastily,  at  the  conclusion  of  the 
above  address,  and  with  much  energy  called  out,  “ Brethren, 
the  fields  are  white  unto  the  harvest : come  ye  teachers,  who 
have  been  taught  to  read,  come,  here  is  work ; come  teach 
these  children  !”  and  in  this  strain  he  encouraged  the 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


145 


teachers  to  commence  their  work  in  the  new  school-house. 
Good  old  Davida,  the  first  native  teacher  to  the  island, 
contrasted  their  present  with  their  former  condition,  and  the 
whole  service  was  one  of  much  delight  to  all  present,  and  a 
means  of  helping  forward  both  the  aged  and  the  young 
in  duties  connected  with  their  civilization  and  Christian 
education. 

Before  opening  the  school-house,  we  had  assembled  all 
the  children  in  the  chapel  for  the  purpose  of  arranging 
them  into  classes,  and  found  no  less  than  1060, — 550  boys, 
510  girls,  had  been  in  the  habit  of  attending  to  daily 
instruction.  The  boys,  from  the  age  of  six  to  fifteen  years, 
were  fine-looking  lads,  their  shoulders,  backs,  and  arms 
were  beautifully  tatooed  with  varied  designs  of  foliage ; they 
appeared  healthy,  but  their  long  hair  gave  them  a very 
wild  appearance ; still  we  were  pleased  to  see  them,  and  to 
find  that  upwards  of  300  of  them  could  read  well.  Not 
so  with  the  girls ; having  had  to  submit  to  the  oppression  we 
have  before  noticed,  they  possessed  neither  the  time  nor 
mental  vigour  necessary  to  their  improvement;  only  50  of 
the  510  could  read  1 For  this  mass  of  children,  arranged 
into  more  than  100  classes,  our  next  anxiety  was  to  pro- 
vide teachers,  and  we  succeeded  in  gaining  60  young  men 
for  the  boys’,  and  50  for  the  girls’  classes  : only  one-half  of 
this  number  we  considered  competent,  but  the  other  half 
were  all  of  good  moral  character,  and  could  read  well,  and 
we  were  glad  to  have  their  services  for  the  smaller  children. 
Our  want  of  books  was  much  felt ; we  had  brought  from 
Karotonga  copies  of  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles  and  of  the 
Pentateuch  ; also  elementary  reading  first-class  books,  and 
others  on  geography  and  arithmetic;  but  in  many  cases  we 
were  obliged  to  divide  each  book  into  three  or  four  parts, 
and  in  some  classes  to  distribute  them  in  leaves  only  to  the 
children  ; and  we  only  had  50  slates  for  the  schools  of  the 
whole  island. 


146 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


The  practice  of  parents  betrothing  ehildren  in  their 
infancy  prevailed  much  on  IVIangaia  in  their  heathen  life;  it 
was  not  wholly  overcome  when  we  visited  them,  and  was 
found  to  have  many  injurious  results  on  the  rising  genera- 
tion of  the  island,  and  on  the  domestic  relations  of  the 
people  generally, — one-half  of  those  recently  married  had 
been  compelled  to  do  so  by  engagements  made  for  them  by 
their  parents.  This  evil  we  attempted  to  remedy,  by 
reasoning  with  the  adult  population,  and  by  determining 
not  to  marry  any  party  until,  by  the  strictest  inquiry,  we 
had  discovered  the  real  wishes  of  those  most  intimately 
concerned. 

Having  thus  set  things  in  order  at  this,  the  principal 
station,  we  took  leave  of  the  teachers,  and  visited  Tamarua, 
the  second  village  of  importance  on  the  island.  Our  path- 
way lay  over  low  barren  hills,  and  narrow  fertile  valleys  ; 
these  were  bounded  on  either  side  by  perpendicular  walls  of 
coral  block,  fifty  feet  to  one  hundred  feet  high.  As  we 
entered  one  of  these  long  valleys,  full  of  cultivated  taro 
patches,  and  shaded  with  young  and  old  cocoa-nut  trees, 
we  saw  at  a little  distance  a newly-finished  lime-built  house 
of  prayer.  At  this  spot  many  of  the  natives,  who  had  heard 
of  our  approach,  came  out  to  meet  us,  and  on  reaching  the 
village  we  took  up  our  abode  in  a native  reed  building. 

Tamarua,  up  to  this  time,  had  not  had  a resident 
teacher ; those  living  at  Oneroa  had  alternately  visited  it  for 
school  instruction  and  Sabbath-day  services ; the  whole 
population,  however,  was  professedly  Christian  : very  many 
had  been  baptized,  and  seventy  persons  had  been  admitted 
to  communion  with  the  church  at  Oneroa.  These  were  now 
desirous  to  have  a teacher  of  their  own,  and  to  be  settled  at 
their  own  station.  At  a public  meeting  of  the  natives,  held 
in  the  afternoon  of  the  day  of  our  arrival,  we  were  much 
pleased.  The  chapel  was  large,  and  pleasantly  situated  on 


Mangaia  Misaion  House.  Chapel.  &e. 


till;  . ' ''' 

b^jiie  mU  wtH  «o;  ri^iW  , < -I'  ■.'*■  '4'  4 

!■.!:«»,.  1 jv«"  ; . -*  V “i*  J^ii***^*. 

i- -j  r...  ' • .•■  :^S7\.-ifp  ■>.•  Nt*; 

utlflV'  " I'.-  .0*V  ‘r,  l>ll»vt''  .1  ’ .'*■  illAiiaViaiiiitft 


*'^''■^{•'1  '••'  -yf;  ■-•■  • ‘.-.-I':?! 

<?il<i  i..vf.'  yUmL ,!':rtalLV?-''  "'jl  ■■•'■•  , ".If- ' 

flit ' •(*■  U'  ‘ '.n- iii  . . • JO  .i’;*'"  ‘ 5^**^ 

sit  t*ilr ••'  lUi!> 

•■ : Vijfeoial  . 1 Hi  li:.  ■,:.  6.<^y‘-  /'''ovl'i 

- > .-,►.<!? So  jf.tr- /ii-.'7'< 

ft  j»i  <!t  t»tfTi>lisl3.3<6  •:.  »«>^>i  :bt)'!‘*^  »*  ’ I’tf  <l 

‘ ^ dirt. 'll-  >!.1  iWoWia  '.-Jj  «*•  ' 3«)d>r-i 

ttBejt  9flT  u*i  -f*  ‘;ult  Ult 

At  * i‘!t  w i..'*.-I±  ^ 

; .■•1-, h ad  it  V t I'  -'tiil 

-_.:  X«'V  Jvr,  .rn*^yfcui>  -W  .iLtiii-  v.!x  I • 

''asit# ".I  .i.--,;yK‘  ..n  .vtuijyf 

- ■ ' ^ >tf  ' it;  J Ml  t v <i!i''  i''«  Sb  lU 

.,  *,--.  < - < ./i  li' t • ■I-'-  •'  ■ •;<<*■  ■ ‘A 

• ‘ W#vi-a>«  ‘ Jil^iiiwqv  up 

itMrt*  ‘-ft  oi  ■'  c. ’h : ihi4^oi  4«rL  ]■  j*^4 

i-'ij.  :'  -;  rt  t'n»';  *.t  tatsiaxU)<r  • m il. 

•>.<  -vtlj  I i/njj7k  ’* 


/ .<Jl  '-i/,  ■i.  :•  . i :c  .K^J-T  ‘ ■■ 

nd^  .' lif'I  io  Mir.'.'J*  ■ . • 'V 

.,,.  ;.  J ;>TlUW  . 'liH 

i.  ••  •.  ■•’  ■'.  •■-■ 

»$r  • •• 

uiti  !«.  ;■• . 


-.  ^>daiM4gt||U 
. ..  , , ...attXi5Mfc£v 


, j.fJ  o .t  • , - o.  . Mt  I ]n 

«.'  - *l  ,ilis^  i .■  Jli-ij  ■ y J 'I*  i'» 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


147 


a rising  eminence  in  the  valley,  and  it  was  well  filled  with 
a people  thirsting  after  knowledge  ; here  we  saw  the  aged 
man,  just  spared  to  behold  the  light  of  the  gospel-day  before 
he  died ; here,  also,  we  saw  young  men,  whose  softened 
manners,  earnest  attention,  and  glistening  eye,  half  lost  in  the 
rising  tear,  excited,  as  we  looked  on  them,  joyful  emo- 
ticons of  heart,  unspeakable.  We  exclaimed.  Truly  the  isles 
wait  for  thee,  0 Lord  ! and  we  thought  of  the  prophecy,  “ lie 
shall  see  his  seed ; he  shall  prolong  his  days,  and  the 
pleasure  of  the  Lord  shall  prosper  in  his  hands.” 

After  giving  a short  addre.ss,  the  people  were  invited  to 
speak.  One  church-member  said,  “ Now  look  at  our  house  of 
prayer — it  is  finished  j look  at  our  children  here  ready  to  be 
instructed — these  also  are  the  members  of  the  church; 
all  that  we  want  is  a missionary,  and  a missionary  we  must 
have.  You  say  Maretu  is  going  back  for  a while  to 
Rarotonga,  and  that  Rupe  will  be  stationed  at  Oneroa; 
but  remember  the  ship  is  gone,  and  we  will  not  pray  for  its 
return  : the  deep  sea  is  between  us  and  your  land,  and  here 
we  intend  to  keep  you  until  you  let  us  have  a teacher.” 
Another  closed  his  remarks  by  saying, — “ Yes,  we  are  all  of 
one  opinion ; we  have  been  left  long  enough  j year  after 
year  we  have  prayed  for  missionaries  to  come  to  us  from 
Beritani  (Britain)  or  Rarotonga ; and  now  you  are  come, 
you  must  remain.”  A third  said,  “ Why  should  there  be 
missionaries  on  Rarotonga,  and  not  on  Mangaia  ? Are  they 
afraid  of  us?  Since  the  days  of  our  ignorance  we  have 
never  ill-treated  a servant  of  God.  But  alas  ! here  are  the 
sheep  ! where  is  the  shepherd  ?”  These  appeals  were  over- 
powering ; and  my  reflections  at  the  time  were  : “ Oh,  that 
the  churches  of  Christian  England  could  see  this  assembly, 
and  hear  these  addresses  ! surely  some  one  of  the  thousands 
of  Israel  there  would  say,  ‘ Here  am  I,  send  me.'  ” 

In  reply  to  their  speeches,  I said,  that  we  on  Rarotonga 


148 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


•wore  fully  alive  to  the  importance  of  Mangaia,  and  should 
have  visited  the  island  before,  but  that,  owing  to  the  death 
of  Mr.  Williams,  the  mission-ship  had'  been  put  out  of  her 
intended  route ; and  that  now,  determined  to  wait  no 
longer,  we  had  engaged  a vessel  to  bring  us,  at  the  cost  of 
350  dollars.  Rarotonga,  they  knew,  printed  books  for  all 
the  group,  and  had  an  Institution  for  the  education  of 
teachers,  therefore  needed  continual  missionary  superin- 
tendence; but  that  we  had  no  doubt  that  a missionary 
would,  in  a year  or  two,  come  out  from  England  to  reside 
among  them.  With  these  explanations  they  appeared 
satisfied,  especially  as  we  appointed  a native  pastor  to  dwell 
with  them  in  the  mean  time.  A day  was  fixed  on  for  the 
settlement  of  this  teacher  at  Tamurua ; numbers  of  persons 
from  the  other  stations  came  to  the  service ; the  chapel 
was  crowded ; I preached  from  1 Cor.  ix.  22 ; Maretu 
took  the  devotional  exercises ; and  the  teacher,  in  reply  to 
several  questions,  gave  a concise  and  intelligent  account  of 
his  views,  and  purposes,  and  doctrines  of  the  Scripture;  and 
he  was  set  apart,  by  the  laying  on  of  hands  and  by  prayer,  to 
the  duties  of  his  office.  In  the  afternoon  another  meeting 
of  the  people  was  gathered,  who  were  addressed  on  their 
duty  and  responsibility,  from  Ezekiel  xxxiii.  4.  And  this 
was  the  first  service  of  the  kind  which  had  been  conducted 
on  Mangaia. 

The  schools  at  this  station  next  engaged  our  attention. 
The  adult  school  numbered  200,  and  the  children’s  school 
250 ; and  here  again  we  felt  the  want  of  more  books. 

Among  the  many  applicants  for  books,  with  whom  we 
were  interested  during  our  stay,  was  a young  man  who 
had  recently  joined  himself  to  the  people  of  God.  Coming 
one  evening  to  our  reed  hut,  he  said,  “ that  he  had  a great 
desire  to  pos.sess  a hymn-book.”  I told  him  that  all  the 
hymn-books  I had  brought  for  that  station  had  been  dis- 


THE  ISLAND  OP  MANOAIA. 


149 


posed  of.  “ But  have  you  no  others  ?”  he  inquired.  Yes,” 
I replied,  “I  have  others  at  Oneroa,  some  of  which  I will 
bring  when  I come  inland  again ; but,  having  only  a few, 
I must  reserve  them  for  the  teachers.  Are  you  a 
teacher  ?”  I inquired.  “ No,”  he  replied,  “ I have  but 
lately  forsaken  my  sin.”  “Then  you  have  lived  your  past 
years  in  the  service  of  sin  ?”  I said.  “ Yes,”  he  answered, 
“ I have  been  one  of  the  most  wicked  young  men  in  the  vil- 
lage.” “ Were  you  more  conspicuous  than  others  in  your 
wickedness  ?”  “ I think  so  now,”  was  his  reply.  “ I have 

been  before  the  judges  six  times  for  crime.”  “ But  what 
has  produced  the  change  ?”  “ The  love  of  Jesus.”  “ Did 

you  long  resist  that  love  ?”  “ Yes,”  he  replied,  “ from  my 

childhood  until  Maretu  came  to  us.  His  preaching  about 
the  love  of  Jesus  to  the  guilty  made  my  hard  heart  soft. 
I hated  my  sin ; I left  my  wicked  companions ; and  am 
now  united  to  the  people  of  God.”  I gave  him  a translation 
of  the  Sinner’s  Friend,  and  James’s  Church-Members’ 
Guide,  and  promised  him  a hymn-book  on  my  return  to 
the  station.  This  young  man  became  an  intelligent  and 
consistent  student  of  the  word  of  God.  With  a view  to 
devote  his  life  to  teaching  in  the  schools,  he  went  with  us 
to  Karotonga  for  further  instruction;  but  there  he  was 
taken  ill  and  died,  to  enter  into  the  fulness  of  that  love,  in 
which  he  had  begun  to  rejoice  on  earth — a brand  plucked 
from  the  burning,  a reward  and  joy  to  the  church,  and  a 
triumph  of  the  Redeemer’s  saving  and  sanctifying  grace. 

On  our  return  to  Oneroa  station,  we  found  that  the  con- 
gregation had  so  much  increased,  that  the  whole  of  the 
people  could  not  be  admitted  to  the  chapel;  it  was,  there- 
fore, decided  to  erect  galleries;  one  hundred  workmen 
volunteered  their  services ; each  man  had  an  adze,  but 
there  were  only  six  saws  and  twelve  chisels,  and  a few 
gimlets,  as  tools  for  the  whole  work ; yet  so  great  was  their 
13* 


150 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


diligence  and  ingenuity,  that  the  work  was  quickly  done, 
and  done  well,  by  these  natives.  Being  completed,  they  were 
occupied  by  the  children,  and  much  added  to  the  comfort 
and  improvement  in  conducting  public  worship. 

One  of  the  natural  curiosities  of  Mangaia  is  its  numerous 
subterranean  caverns,  which  abound  in  stalactite  spars  of 
great  variety  and  beauty.  During  our  stay  on  the  island, 
we  visited  some  of  these  caverns,  and  found  them  very 
high  and  deep,  extending  in  some  instances  three  or  four 
miles  towards  the  centre  of  the  island ; one  or  two  of 
them  have  lakes  of  brackish  water,  which  are  evidently  con- 
nected with  the  sea.  In  each  of  these  caverns  there  is 
an  endless  number  of  deep  narrow  recesses,  into  which  the 
women  and  children  were  wont  to  escape  for  safety  in  time 
of  heathen  war,  and  much  valuable  heathen  property  still 
remains  there  : many  of  these  recesses  are  now  used  as  tombs 
for  the  dead. 

In  order  to  understand  the  reference  to  attempts  to  bring 
under  Christian  instruction  a party  called  “ heathen,” 
which  we  found  on  this  island,  we  must  remark  that  there 
were,  in  1841,  thirty  or  forty  families,  who  lived  in  the 
valleys,  and  who  had  resisted  all  efforts  to  bring  them  to 
join  the  Christian  settlements.  They  had  given  up  idolatry, 
but  still  retained  many  customs  connected  with  heathenism. 
These  were  brought  in  almost  daily  contact  with  the 
Christians,  and  many  of  the  younger  branches  of  their 
families  were  able  to  read : the  church-members  on  the 
island  took  a lively  and  prayerful  interest  in  their  welfare. 
We  visited  all  these  families,  and  found  many  of  them 
thoughtful,  inquiring,  and  kind ; but  most  of  the  old 
people  said,  that  they  intended  to  adhere  to  the  things  left 
them  by  their  fathers,  and  after  their  death  their  children 
might  do  what  they  thought  right.  One  of  these  much 
interested  us.  He  was  more  than  seventy  years  old,  of  fine 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


151 


tall  figure,  over  wtich  was  cast  a flowing  robe  of  the  best 
white  native  cloth ; the  hair  on  his  head  and  beard  was  very 
long,  and  white  as  snow.  I frequently  visited  him,  and 
read  the  Scriptures  to  him,  and  prayed  with  him ; he  always 
gave  me  welcome,  and  learnt  to  repeat  the  fifty-first  Psalm, 
lie  never  came  to  the  Christian  settlement,  but  he  had  a 
clear,  although  limited  view  of  Divine  tmth;  and  I cannot 
help  thinking  that  his  spirit  is  among  the  polished  gems  of 
grace  in  heaven,  sought  out  from  the  heathen  world. 

Many  of  the  children  of  these  heathen  families  had  a 
great  desire  to  attend  the  schools  at  the  settlements,  but 
were  prohibited  by  their  parents.  Some  of  them,  in  the 
excess  of  their  desire,  did  evil  with  a view  to  secure  their 
object ; they  stole  cocoa-nuts  and  bananas  from  the  planta- 
tions, and  secured  other  youths  to  give  information  against 
them,  in  order  to  be  taken  to  the  Christian  settlement 
before  the  police  authorities ; and,  after  paying  their  fine, 
they  remained  many  days  attending  the  children’s  school. 
While  there,  they  gained  from  their  companions  school- 
books and  hymn-books ; these  they  took  with  them  when 
they  returned  home,  and  formed  a daily  class  in  the  valleys, 
to  instruct  themselves ; and  some  of  them  have  subsequent- 
ly become  intelligent,  active,  and  consistent  Christian  men. 

The  time  now  drew  near  for  our  return  to  Karotonga;  we 
had  been  on  the  island  three  months,  and  had  become  deeply 
interested  in  the  people;  our  labour  had  been  incessant, 
but  our  reward  was  great.  If  one  thing  more  than  another 
caused  us  anxiety,  it  was  the  largeness  of  the  number 
who  had  been  admitted  to  church-fellowship  by  the  native 
teachers.  More  than  four  hundred  were  in  communion  at 
the  principal  settlement.  During  our  stay  we  had  private 
and  individual  conversation  with  each  of  these.  With 
three-fourths  of  them  we  were  satisfied,  both  as  regarded 
their  intelligence,  experience,  and  consistent  Christian  life ; 


152 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


but  there  were  some  respecting  whom  we  doubted;  and 
this  was  to  be  expected,  left  as  they  had  been,  more  than 
fifteen  years  before  our  visit,  to  the  entire  superintendence 
of  the  first  teachers,  who  had  but  limited  advantages  during 
the  infant  state  of  the  Tahitian  mission.  Altogether, 
however,  viewing  teachers  and  people,  the  advance  of  the 
population  was  wonderful  in  our  eyes.  It  was  indeed,  the 
Lord’s  doing,  and  not  man’s  ! 

On  leaving  the  island,  the  natives  committed  to  our  care, 
as  contributions  to  the  London  Missionary  Society,  the 
sum  of  £16  2s.  Ad.,  and  £47  17s.  Od.  to  the  British  and 
Foreign  Bible  Society,  in  payment  for  New  Testaments 
they  had  received  from  that  noble  institution.  These 
amounts  were  raised,  not  in  money,  but  by  labour,  in  fish- 
ing-nets and  arrow-root ; and  twelve  months  afterwards, 
these  same  people,  by  the  same  means,  sent  a further  con- 
tribution of  £11  12s.  6(Z.  to  the  Missionary  Society,  enclosed 
in  the  following  letter  to  the  Directors: — “Friends,  Bre- 
thren, and  Sisters — Blessing  on  you  from  God ! When 
Wiliamu  ma  first  came  to  us  we  were  heathens, — they 
brought  us  the  word  of  God,  and  we  ill-treated  them  and 
their  wives, — we  scattered  their  property,  and  took  the 
books  which  they  brought  us,  and  used  them  as  ornaments 
in  our  heathen  dances.  This  we  did  in  our  blindness;  but 
when  we  knew  the  word  of  God  we  wept  greatly.  But  the 
word  spoken  by  Isaiah  (ix.  2),  is  now  fulfilled.  Through 
your  compassion  and  prayers  we  have  obtained  the  knowledge 
of  Jesus  our  Saviour.  Our  former  gods — many  in  number — 
were  of  wood  and  stone ; each  family  had  its  separate  god ; 
but  now  we  have  one  God,  as  is  written  by  Paul,  Ephe- 
sians ii.  13.  Look  at  that  passage ! Brethren,  here  is 
another  little  word  to  you — we  are  much  in  want  of  slates, 
paper,  pens,  ink,  and  peneils.  We  have  learned  to  write  on 
sand  and  on  leaves,  and  we  desire  you  to  send  us  a supply 


THE  ISLAND  OP  MANGAIA. 


153 


of  the  things  mentioned.  We  now  greatly  rejoice  in  the 
testimony  of  Paul,  2 Cor.  v.  18,  19.  By  that  word  we  know 
our  former  state  of  blindness,  and  are  now  reconciled  to 
God : because  of  his  great  love  our  war-clubs  are  laid  aside, 
and  we  are  become  brethren  ! 

Signed — “ Numangatini,  who  collects.  (Treasurer.) 

SoLOMONA,  who  writes.”  (Secretary.) 


CHAPTEK  III. 


Calamitous  accident  to  the  native  pastor — His  removal  to  Rarotonga  — 
Missionary  visit  to  Ivirua  settlemeut — Industry  of  the  people  and 
beauty  of  the  valleys — The  old  natives’  remembrance  of  Captain 
Cook’s  visit  to  the  island — Their  sorrow  at  the  cruel  treatment  of 
Papchia — Homage  done  to  the  first  pig  put  on  shore — Opening  of  a 
new  chapel  at  Ivirua — Settlement  of  Pori  there  as  native  pastor — 
An  English  eaptain’s  unjust  trade  with  the  people — Third  missionary 
visit  to  the  island  in  1843 — State  of  education  at  the  principal  station 
— Christian  Visitors’  Association — Statistics  of  Oneroa — Missionary 
visit  to  a heathen  family — The  death  of  Ngatae,  a native  teacher. 

Twelve  months  after  our  return  to  Karotonga,  from  the 
visit  to  Mangaia,  noticed  in  the  preceding  chapter,  we  were 
called  to  go  back  to  the  island  under  circumstances  most 
painful.  An  American  whaler  had  called  there,  and  had 
taken  in  a supply  of  hogs,  yams,  potatoes,  &c.,  the  captain 
of  which  had  shown  much  kindness  to  the  people.  On  his 
taking  leave  of  them,  they  asked  him  to  favour  them  by 
giving  two  or  three  volleys  from  the  te  pupui maata  o te  pai, 
or  the  big  guns  of  the  ship,  the  report  of  which  they  had 
heard  was  like  mangungu  or  thunder.  Getting  on  board 
his  ship,  the  captain  gratified  the  desire  of  the  people,  and 
they  heard  the  thunder  report  of  the  great  guns,  which  won- 
derfully astonished  and  pleased  them. 

With  a view  to  return  the  compliment,  Maretu  filled 
(154) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


155 


hIs  double-barrelled  gun  with  powder,  and  fired  a salute;  in 
doing  so,  however,  the  barrels  burst,  and  one  of  his  hands 
was  completely  shattered ; and  the  poor  man  fell  as  dead  to 
the  ground.  A canoe  was  immediately  sent  off  to  the  ship 
to  give  information  of  the  accident;  the  captain  went  on 
shore,  and  after  giving  the  natives  all  the  information  in  his 
power,  as  to  the  mode  of  treating  the  case,  he  sailed  direct 
for  Rarotonga,  in  order  to  communicate  to  us  the  distressing 
intelligence. 

A small  trading  schooner  had  just  come  to  Rarotonga 
from  Tahiti,  which  we  chartered,  and  sailed  for  Mangaia, 
which  we  reached  a week  after  the  accident  had  taken 
place.  Getting  near  to  the  shore,  several  natives  came  oflF 
to  us  in  their  canoes,  calling  out,  as  they  approached  us, 
“ Praise  be  to  God  ! You  are  come ; hasten  on  shore ; 
Maretu  still  lives,  and  has  been  praying  to  see  you.”  Poor 
fellow!  We  found  his  hand  fearfully  fractured,  and  his 
whole  body  in  a high  state  of  fever.  Detaining  the  vessel 
several  days,  we  did  our  best  to  subdue  the  worst  symptoms, 
but  concluded,  that  in  order  to  prevent  mortification,  it 
would  be  necessary  to  amputate  some  part  of  the  arm ; and 
not  wishing  to  undertake  this  responsible  work  alone,  we 
resolved  to  remove  him  to  Rarotonga;  this  we  did  with  as 
little  loss  of  time  as  possible,  and  the  good  man  recovered, 
re-entered  on  his  labour,  and  is,  at  this  time,  one  of  the 
fathers  among  the  native  pastors  of  the  islands. 

Previous  to  our  leaving  the  island  in  1841,  we  visited  the 
third  settlement  called  Ivirua.  On  our  way  thither,  we 
were  gratified  with  the  evident  marks  of  the  industry  of  the 
people.  The  land  is  sterile  and  unfruitful,  compared  with 
the  luxuriant  richness  of  Rarotonga,  whose  mountain  sum- 
mits and  coral  shores  are  alike  covered  with  every  variety 
of  verdure ; but  here  the  well-watered  and  highly  cultivated 
valleys  formed  a striking  contrast  to  the  surrounding  hills, 


156 


OEMS  FEOM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


which  were  covered  with  nothing  but  sun-hurnt  grass  and 
weather-beaten  fern. 

The  houses  which  formed  the  village  of  Ivirua,  were 
built  on  detached  spots  of  rising  ground  in  one  of  these 
valleys,  and  were  surrounded  with  taro  swamps  and  yam 
plantations,  and  shaded  with  the  wide-spread  branches  of 
the  lofty  cocoa-nut  trees.  The  population  of  this  small  station 
was  about  500,  sixty  of  whom  were  united  in  church-com- 
munion at  the  principal  station,  Oneroa;  and  two  hundred 
children  were  in  daily  attendance  at  the  school. 

During  our  stay  here,  we  had  frequent  conversations  with 
the  people  who  visited  us,  respecting  their  former  heathen 
state,  and  the  blessings  of  the  gospel  which  were  now  so 
richly  enjoyed  by  them.  The  old  natives  gained  new  vigour 
of  body  and  mind,  while’  they  related  to  us,  in  language  of 
deprecation,  the  facts  and  details  of  their  idol-worship  and 
their  heathenism.  The  last  man  who  had  seen  Captain  Cook, 
when  he  visited  the  island,  had  died  a month  or  two  before 
we  arrived ; but  most  of  the  pre.sent  population  remembered 
the  accounts  respecting  him  and  his  ship,  as  given  to  them 
by  their  own  parents;  and  they  preserved  with  great  sacred- 
ness an  axe,  and  two  or  three  old  knives,  which  were  left  on 
shore  by  this  early  navigator  and  discoverer  of  the  island. 

It  was  interesting  also  to  witness  their  emotions  of  sor- 
row, while  they  told  us  of  their  cruelty  towards  Papehia, 
the  Christian  teacher,  whom  Wiliamu  wished  to  leave 
among  them,  and  of  their  subsequent  affliction,  by  which 
God  prepared  their  hearts  to  receive  Davida  when  he  came. 
They  also  told  us,  with  much  shame,  of  a singular  instance 
of  their  heathen  ignorance  and  superstition.  When  Davida 
landed  on  the  island,  he  brought  with  him  a pig.  Having 
never  before  seen  any  animal  larger  than  a rat,  they  looked 
on  this  pig  with  mingled  emotions  of  awe  and  pleasure, — 
they  believed  it  to  be  a representative  of  some  superior 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


157 


spirit,  { te  ao  a muri  atu,  of  the  other  world.  The  teacher 
did  all  he  could  to  convince  them,  that  it  was  only  an  in- 
ferior animal,  brought  by  him  on  shore  with  a view  to  bene- 
fit the  people  ; but  they  were  determined  to  do  it  temple 
honour;  they  clothed  it  in  white  bark,  sacred  cloth,  and 
took  it  in  triumph  to  the  principal  Marae  on  the  island, 
where  they  fastened  it  to  the  pedestal  of  one  of  their  gods. 
For  some  time  she  resisted  such  honour,  and  made  attempts 
to  get  at  large,  but  all  efforts  to  escape  proved  futile ; for 
two  months  her  degraded  votaries  brought  her  daily  offerings 
of  the  best  fruits  of  the  land,  and  presented  to  her  the 
homage  of  worship.  At  length,  however,  she  repaid  the 
degraded  devotees  by  a litter;  and  the  young  ones  also  were 
considered  as  sacred  as  the  mother  : for  some  time  they  kept 
within  the  precincts  of  the  temple,  until,  becoming  more 
unmanageable  than  the  dumb  gods,  they  were  left  to  the 
privilege  of  a wide  range  over  the  land.  The  teacher,  who 
had  not  ceased  to  ridicule  their  folly,  succeeded  in  having 
the  sow  returned  to  him,  which  he  killed,  and  cooked,  and 
ate  ! Thus  was  the  spell  broken  ; and  since  then  the  pos- 
terity of  this  honoured  ancestor  of  the  pig  tribe  have  been 
left  to  their  natural  state,  administering  no  small  gratifica- 
tion to  the  people  at  their  feasts,  and,  by  barter,  are  now  the 
principal  means  by  which  they  obtain  foreign  property  from 
ships  that  call  at  the  island. 

It  will  be  pleasing  to  the  friends  of  Christian  missions  to 
the  heathen,  to  turn  from  such  degradation  to  the  scenes 
which  awaited  us  on  our  second  visit  to  this  station.  Dur- 
ing the  twelve  months  of  our  absence,  the  natives  had  built 
a large  and  commodious  chapel,  and  we  arrived  just  in  time 
to  take  the  opening  services.  This  lime-built  house  of 
prayer  stood  in  the  midst  of  the  scattered  reed  huts  of  the 
people ; the  wooden  gong  was  beaten,  the  sound  of  which 
eclioed  from  valley  to  valley,  announcing  the  worship  of 
14 


158 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Jehovah,  the  living  and  the  true  God,  in  the  place  where 
Satan  held  absolute  and  universal  dominion  a few  years  be- 
fore ; and  where  the  people  had  been  wont,  alternately,  to 
revel  in  the  delights  of  heathen  wickedness,  and  to  listen 
with  frantic  excitement  to  the  war-whoops  of  their  neigh- 
bours, who  made  frequent  attaeks  on  them.  Now,  how 
ehauged  and  how  happy  their  condition  ! We  saw  company 
after  company  coming  along  the  paths  of  the  mountains  and 
of  the  valleys,  all  cheerful,  and  enlightened,  and  free.  They 
entered  the  new  house  of  God,  and  after  praise,  and  prayer, 
and  reading  the  Seriptures,  we  meditated  on  one  of  the 
gospel  promises  by  the  prophet  Isaiah  (Ivii.  7),  “ My  house 
shall  be  called  a house  of  prayer  for  all  people.” 

After  the  morning  service,  we  held  a ehurch-meeting,  and 
had  the  pleasure  of  locating  at  this  station  Pori,  a native 
teacher  from  the  Institution,  Earotonga.  He  was  a good 
man;  and  with  prudence,  intelligence,  and  consistency  he 
fulfilled  the  duties  of  the  ministry,  until  he  was  removed  by 
death  to  his  rest  and  reward. 

The  Christian  natives  of  Mangaia  were  about  this  time 
injured  and  annoyed  by  an  injustice  in  barter,  which  was 
calculated  to  excite  the  worst  passions  of  retaliation.  An 
English  captain  went  on  shore,  who,  by  friendliness  towards 
the  teacher,  disarmed  the  people  of  all  idea  of  deceit  in 
trade.  The  deacons  of  the  church  were  in  want  of  wine  for 
the  communion-service,  and  offered  to  barter  fishing-nets — 
the  contribution  of  the  church — in  order  to  obtain  a supply. 
The  captain  assured  them  that  he  had  on  board  the  best 
that  could  be  bought,  and  that  he  would,  as  a favour,  let 
them  have  some,  but  it  was  very  expensive;  terms  were 
stated ; an  agreement  was  made ; the  box  of  wine  was 
landed,  for  which  an  unheard-of,  exorbitant  price  was  paid, 
and  the  captain  left  the  island.  On  opening  the  purchase, 
however,  it  was  found  to  be  the  veriest  filthy  mixture  of 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


159 


claret,  water,  rum,  and  other  things,  that  can  be  conceived 
of,  and  the  whole  was  thrown  away.  This  act  of  unjust  ad- 
vantage on  the  ignorance  and  siuiplicity  of  the  natives,  done 
by  one  who  professed  to  have  interest  and  sympathy  in 
Christian  missions,  did  much  to  withdraw  the  confidence  of 
the  godly,  and  became  a justification  with  the  ungodly  in 
their  attempts  to  impose  on  foreigners  who  afterwards 
visited  their  shores. 

In  1843,  not  having  a missionary  ship  for  the  islands,  we 
were  obliged  to  charter  a trading  vessel  to  take  us  to  the  out- 
stations  of  the  Hervey  group,  aud  on  the  17th  of  June  we 
again  lauded  ou  iMaugaia  ; it  was  our  third  visit  to  the  island, 
and  we  remained  there  six  months  ; during  which  time  we 
gained  much  information  respecting  the  correct  state  of  its 
churches,  schools,  and  stations,  the  whole  of  which  was 
peculiarly  gratifying,  as  the  result  of  native  Christian  in- 
strumentality. One  of  the  most  pleasing  features  of  the  island 
at  this  time  was  the  prosperity  in  the  adults’  and  children’s 
schools.  No  fewer  than  ninety  male  and  female  teachers 
were  daily  employed  in  instructing  nine  hundred  children. 
With  these  teachers  we  had  four,  and  sometimes  six  classes 
a week,  giving  them  lessons  in  history,  biography,  geography, 
and  Biblical  expositions.  Besides  these,  we  met,  every  other 
day,  adults  in  church-fellowship,  aud  others  under  instruc- 
tion, of  whose  attainments  the  following  figures  will  give  to 
the  thoughtful  reader  a pretty  correct  idea  : — 

An  adult  male  Bible-class,  23  in  number — 19  able  to  read 
well  j 6 had  Testaments;  17  had  leaves  of  books  only. 
Another  male  class,  17  in  number — 4 only  not  able  to  read ; 
only  1 had  a complete  Testament.  In  a third  class,  19  in 
number — 14  could  read  well ; 14  had  complete  Testaments. 
In  two  other  classes,  49  in  number — 37  could  read  well;  42 
had  complete  Testaments.  In  the  adult  female  classes,  con- 
ducted by  the  missionary’s  wife,  it  was  gratifying  to  find 


160 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


that  a decided  improvement  had  taken  place  in  their  con- 
dition since  our  last  residence  among  them.  Much  more, 
however,  remained  to  be  done  before  they  attained  a proper 
mental  or  social  position.  In  a Bible-class  of  female  adults 
14  in  number — 3 only  could  read,  and  12  had  portions  only 
of  books.  In  another  class,  20  in  number — 4 only  could 
read  well,  and  3 only  had  complete  books.  In  two  other 
classes,  39  in  number — 18  were  able  to  read ; 8 only  of 
whom  had  Testaments. 

In  accordance  with  arrangements  made  by  us  in  1841,  no 
members  had  been  admitted  to  the  church,  but  all  candi- 
dates had  been  formed  into  Bible-classes,  receiving  weekly 
instruction  from  the  teacher;  and  hence  we  found  seventy 
men  and  women,  some  old,  others  young,  waiting  among  the 
inquirers  after  Zion,  with  their  faces  thitherward. 

Many  of  the  members  of  the  church  had  also  united  them- 
selves together  in  a Christian  Association,  for  visiting  the 
careless  and  ungodly  of  the  island.  The  following  were  the 
resolutions  agreed  on  by  themselves,  under  the  superin- 
tendence of  Tairi,  an  excellent  Rarotongan  teacher  : — 1st. 
“ That  compassion  towards  our  brethren  in  this  land,  who  are 
living  in  unbelief  and  sin,  leads  us  to  unite  in  this  plan  for 
their  good.  2nd.  That  we  purpose  to  visit  such  at  their 
houses  twice  a-week,  and  also  on  Sabbath  evenings,  for  con- 
versation, reading,  and  prayer.  3rd.  That  we  meet  the 
first  Wednesday  of  every  month  at  the  teacher’s  (native) 
house,  to  give  in  a report,  and  to  unite  together  in  consulta- 
tion and  prayer.” 

To  the  efforts  of  this  Association  the  subsequent  spiritual 
prosperity  of  Mangaia  is  mainly  indebted.  Most  of  its 
members  were  pious,  active,  prudent  men ; and  many  of 
those  for  whose  welfare  they  laboured  are  now  the  glory 
and  stability  of  Christian  truth  on  the  island.  The  general 
statistics  of  Oneroa,  the  principal  station,  in  1843 — not 


f ^ 5' '•  s k . • / - • .6  » 

, -OAmm  *»rr  «ub***>  tki-tf 

-no*  T|*rf«  «i  «Mli,  btrf  4»*n«V«Nf»d  .^  • ial|  ’ 

^«hW»  <f4eJf  •■  SKlAion  >Hudii»«/i  >**»<(  tmf  ci$|pj»  „.  ai> 

' <<■  r«4»  ^.diwl  xia*»  W *wn**«>t 

trin»<iw»h*|q^^ bai  it  bn.  f4iio» ytno  «t  -.-rlhiiii  a . 

4 — ^imtv  nl  OV  lii  f 4tikiM4  b#  ' 

•fdvj  nw  .1  1^  W H imn>i« 

In  xbm  nl 

*m  ,lhtn  ^ >tn«flfnxa«TM  «in.i»*ti.** 

‘ftne'  iU  .jK«hIi  odl  «4  b*Mi«ii>«  *^4 
<W*on  ^iiryb»'iin  V4ni  bj^t^  ttaml  UA  mub' 

^ X^'Mb  batr^ t-«ir  ( rW  .iriT oJ|  nmnt  ttiUnuz^km 

¥rnms0i*ta^im»<0rti  . " 
‘ 'tutdt  Attw 

•wwft  Mfrilir  C*!y  trrj  ihov^  94,  woiiUtfMs.  nfdt  hh^Mli  - 
bd* 'i,>1  .#..)*r«Tir»^  Vj4Ji||8i  iw»to»  ' *" 

HffiimfirAndl'  0^  v»  b»«  ,,  ' 

»di  wiwty  .«^l>,.rt,^  ^ ^ b«>i»4^i.4jnb.«-*  • >, 

«•  oiial’  V <»inrbo.4  - ^ 

id»  0e(«  .irtr^  i^m,4i  #«y,(b«4  ^ 

tMi  tti  dj4<^ibu'V  Qt  oxLXfwrj  •«  tMir  ibaJf  4>not,  t»iif  ^ ^ 

udr  m lKJ«'4ti,iW.n44«r># 

| (^bdiO^*yrf^rHi  ^ ^d^wclvi'^"  jn»i» 

IruiHS^  wft  V4f  th  «t^0<*a«44t  ‘ V 

tf(  '»  i-'.K-  -i.Hfli.bifi  vfn;«o  k 

,%J Xn«n  hiui-^,.0,  ,A«Nnt  yyt»lN,i  *»*ir -■; .J 

mJ»  4„n  vtf  b»to«f«?  ^ v V n^.«i|  ifi 

Q Irt  fotf  0ftr  hoMid  iV*l  no  liljrrt  V X^iblAflr  - ' I 

«;ci-~*iiHf  ii  *ih  \4WtwO  it,  w*#4Ji*  J 

..  ■ ! __ 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


161 


twenty  years  after  the  landing  of  the  first  Christian  teacher 
— were,  inhabitants,  2000 ; number  in  adult  classes,  306  ; 
boys  and  girls  in  children’s  school,  900 ; number  in  church- 
fellowship,  360.  For  the  year  ending  September  30,  1843, 
there  were  sixty-five  births,  forty  deaths,  twenty-two  mar- 
riages, forty-five  infants  and  four  adults  baptized. 

One  afternoon  we  passed  over  the  low  hills  which  separate 
two  districts,  in  order  to  visit  one  of  the  heathen  families 
referred  to  in  the  last  chapter.  In  a long,  low,  reed  hut  we 
found  the  father  of  this  family  seated  on  a stool.  He  was 
tall  in  person,  well  clad  with  native  cloth,  grave  in  manner, 
and  about  forty  years  old ; numerous  ornaments  of  shell  and 
human  hair  were  suspended  at  the  lobe  of  each  ear;  his  own 
long  hair  hung  dishevelled  on  his  back,  and  about  thirty  of 
his  children,  and  children’s  children  sat  around  him. 
“ Friend,  we  have  come  to  see  you,”  I .said,  on  entering  his 
house.  Blessing  on  you  !”  “ What  is  your  name  ?” 

“ My  name  is  Tira,”  was  his  reply.  “ Are  these  your  chil- 
dren i"’  “Yes,  most  of  them  are  my  children.”  “How 
many  wives  have  you  ?”  I inquired.  “ I have  only  one 
wife  now  living;  three  are  dead,”  he  replied.  “Is  this 
your  dwelling-place?”  “Yes;  here  my  father,  and  my 
father’s  father  lived,  and  here  I live  with  my  children,  and 
here  I intend  to  die.”  “ Friend,”  I continued,  “ the  light 
of  the  word  of  the  true  God  has  now  been  shining  a long 
time  on  you,  in  Mangaia.  Have  you  no  desire  to  attend  to 
instruction  in  that  word?”  “No,”  he  replied;  “but  I 
sometimes  hesitate.”  “ You  are  getting  old,  my  friend,” 
I rejoined,  “and  death  may  come  and  find  you  destitute  of 
that  good  which  alone  prepares  for  another  world.”  “ Yes, 
death  may  come,”  he  replied;  “and  then  there  will  be  an 
end.”  “ An  end  !”  I exclaimed ; “ but  you  believe  in  a 
future  state,  do  you  not?”  “Yes,”  he  continued;  “but 
who  knows  the  truth  about  it  ?”  Here  we  tried  to  explain 
li* 


162 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


to  him  the  truths  of  the  word  of  God,  about  sin  and  salva- 
tion, this  world  and  the  world  to  come,  and  these  things 
were  evidently  not  new  to  him ; but  he  became  sullen  and 
slow  in  his  replies,  and  concluded  the  conversation  by  say- 
ing, that  he  had  seen  the  folly  of  idol-worship,  but  that  he 
still  believed  in  the  religion  of  his  forefathers,  and  that  he 
intended  to  remain  in  his  present  state.  Finding  that  he 
could  read  a little,  I sent  a New  Testament  for  his  accept- 
ance, expressing  my  hope  that  he  would  read  it ; but  to  the 
dismay  and  grief  of  all,  he  returned  it,  saying  he  had  made 
up  his  mind  to  do  without  it.  This  was  the  first  and  the 
only  instance  known,  in  the  history  of  the  island  of  refusing 
to  accept  a book,  and  it  produced  no  little  anxiety  in  many 
of  his  children  who  attended  to  Christian  instruction.  This 
man  was  frequently  visited  by  the  members  of  the  church, 
hut  he  lived  on  in  obstinate  unbelief  until  death  came  upon 
him ; and  the  native  teacher,  speaking  of  his  death,  says : 
“ Tira  lay  ill  a long  time,  and  became  very  unhappy.  His 
mind  was  light,  but  his  heart  was  hard.  He  was  full  of 
fear,  and  trembled  continually.  He  told  his  children  not 
to  follow  him  in  his  unbelief  j but  he  died  in  obstinate  un- 
belief himself.” 

His  eldest  son  became  an  excellent  Christian  man,  and, 
with  many  of  the  younger  branches  of  his  family,  joined  the 
Christian  village. 

Three  elderly  men  of  the  same  class  as  Tira,  received 
New  Testaments,  allowed  their  children  to  come,  without 
opposition,  to  the  schools,  and  welcomed  the  members  of  the 
native  visiting  Association  to  have  Bible-classes  and  prayer- 
meetings  at  their  houses ; but  they  never  made  a public 
profession  of  Christianity.  One  of  the  wives  of  these  men, 
however,  after  a long  season  of  reproach  and  persecution, 
induced  her  husband,  who  had  two  other  wives,  to  give  her 
up.  He  retained  two  of  their  children,  and  she  brought 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANOAIA. 


163 


two  with  her  to  the  settlement,  where  she  lived  with  some 
of  her  relatives,  and  became  a consistent  member  of  the 
church. 

A severe  and  fatal  epidemic  was,  about  this  time,  brought 
to  the  island,  and  many  of  the  natives  were  prematurely  cut 
olf  from  the  midst  of  the  living,  in  the  prime  of  life.  Among 
these  was  Ngatae,  one  of  the  teachers;  but  the  joy  and 
peace  which  he  experienced  in  death,  did  much  to  comfort 
and  instruct  the  people ; not  that  we  needed  this  to  assure 
us  of  his  fitness  for  heaven,  for  his  life  had  been  a perpetual 
evidence  of  his  faith  j but  his  dying  experience  was,  at  the 
time,  peculiarly  appropriate  to  the  afflicted  circumstances  of 
the  people.  His  words  of  consolation  to  the  godly,  and  his 
exhortations  to  the  ungodly,  were  lessons  of  instruction  em- 
ployed by  the  Holy  Spirit  for  much  good.  His  last  words 
were  : “ The  billows  of  death  are  breaking  over  me,  but  my 
vessel  is  safe;  it  is  fixed  by  the  anchor  which  entereth 
within  the  vail,  where  Jesus,  our  forerunner,  is.  My  heart 
is  fixed,  my  heart  is  fixed  on  him  !" 


CHAPTEK IV. 

Amusing  incident  connected  with  the  first  rabbit  seen  by  the  natives — 
Alarm  occasioned  by  cats  being  taken  to  the  island — Practice  of 
tattooing,  and  laws  respecting  it — Conversion  of  a native  from  an 
exposition  of  Romans  vii.  9 — A native’s  encounter  with  a shark  at 
sea — Happy  results — Third  visit  to  Ivirua — The  journey — A tale 
of  heathen  barbarity — A missionary  prayer-meeting — Schools  and 
church  of  Tamarua — Historical  notice  of  an  old  native — The  mis- 
sionary’s departure  from  Rarotonga— Reflections. 

We  have  already  had  occasion  to  notice  that  the  people 
of  Mangaia  in  their  heathenism  knew  no  animal  larger 
than  a rat;  we  have  also  observed  their  ignorance  and 
superstition  on  seeing  the  first  pig  that  was  taken  on  shore. 
It  will  be  somewhat  amusing,  and  not  altogether  below  the 
design  of  these  pages,  in  noticing  native  habit  and  character, 
to  give  a brief  account  of  the  introduction  of  another 
animal,  which  now  so  largely  abounds  on  the  island. 

On  our  voyage  thither  in  1843,  we  were  accompanied  by 
many  natives,  among  whom  was  a young  man  who  was  re- 
turning from  Sidney,  whither  he  had  gone  as  a sailor.  This 
young  man  was  taking  home  a rabbit;  it  was  a fine  creature, 
and  much  thought  of  by  the  owner,  and  by  the  natives  on 
board.  One  day  while  standing  on  deck,  fondling  his  rabbit, 
and  thinking  what  notoriety  he  would  gain  among  his  coun- 
trymen for  taking  it  on  shore,  the  young  man  was  accosted 
(164) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


105 


by  an  elderly  man,  a friend  of  his,  who  was  a deacon  in  the 
Mangaian  church — a man  of  known  piety  and  integrity,  and 
moreover,  honourably  connected  with  the  bench  of  magis- 
tracy on  the  island.  “ Friend,”  said  this  worthy  man, 
“that  is  a pretty  creature ; what  is  its  name?”  “It  is  a 
rabbit,”  replied  the  young  man,  “ and,”  he  continued, 
“ they  are  very  numerous  in  foreign  lands.”  “ Numerous, 
are  they  ?”  replied  the  old  gentleman,  “ allow  me  to  nurse 
it  awhile.”  The  rabbit  was  immediately  handed  over  to 
him,  and  for  some  time  he  continued  to  stroke  its  head  and 
back  very  playfully,  and  then,  in  a moment,  to  the  distress 
of  all  who  stood  by,  he  wrung  its  neck,  and  cast  it  into  the 
sea.  Astonished  and  irritated  at  this  unprovoked  conduct, 
I united  in  condemning  it,  and  in  demanding  an  explanation. 
But  finding  myself  too  much  vexed  to  institute  a calm 
inquiry,  I turned  aside,  leaving  the  enraged  young  man  to 
discuss  the  matter  with  his  friend,  who  was  provokiugly 
easy,  and,  withal,  apparently  kind  in  the  midst  of  the  storm 
of  angry  words  which  bore  down  upon  him. 

Some  time  afterward  I seated  myself  among  them,  and 
asked  an  explanation,  assuring  the  good  deacon  that  I 
thought  he  had  done  a very  wrong  act.  “ Oh  no,”  he  re- 
plied, “ it  will  all  be  right  when  we  get  on  shore.  I shall 
report  it  to  the  magistrate ; the  thing  will  be  justified,  and 
the  young  man  will  receive  native  property  more  than  the 
value  of  the  animal.”  “ Indeed  !”  I inquired ; “ how  so  ?” 
“ Last  year,”  the  old  man  replied,  “a  ship  came  to  our  land 
and  put  on  shore  two  beasts  much  like  that  rabbit.  At  first 
we  were  all  pleased  with  them,  but  very  soon  they  became 
the  plague  of  the  island.  They  took  up  their  abode  in  the 
hills  and  bush  ; and  so  rapid  was  their  increase,  and  so 
ferocious  and  wild  their  habits,  that  they  had  well  nigh  de- 
stroyed all  our  poultry.”  “ Tell  me  what  kind  of  beast  it 
was,”  I asked.  “ It  was  much  like  that  rabbit,”  rejoined 


IGG 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


the  old  man,  who  continued  his  conversation  with  an  air  of 
consciousness  that  he  had  done  right.  “ These  animals  be- 
came so  destructive,  that  the  chiefs  and  landholders  held  a 
council  and  resolved  to  hunt  them  to  death,  and  that  no  such 
animal  should  ever  be  permitted  to  be  brought  on  shore.” 
“ What  do  you  call  it?”  I inquired.  “ We  call  it  Keao,” 
answered  the  old  man.  “ Keao,  K6ao  !”  I repeated  again 
and  again,  “ what  can  it  be  ?”  “ Oh,  it  is  a real  savage  beast ! 
You  will  soon  see  it,”  was  the  reply.  About  a fortnight 
after  landing,  a terrible  uproar  was  heard  at  midnight, 
in  the  settlement.  On  making  inquiry  as  to  the  cause,  I 
saw  a multitude  of  half  naked  natives  armed  with  sticks 
and  stones,  and  carrying  flambeaux,  and  was  told  it  was  a 
Keao  hunt  j and  in  a short  time  afterwards,  shouts  of  vic- 
tory were  heard,  and  the  hero  of  the  night  was  seen  return- 
ing through  the  settlement,  holding  up  a large  cat  by  the 
tail ! Yes,  it  was  poor  puss  ! She  had  been  landed  among 
a people  who  did  not  know  her  quiet  domestic  habits ; 
circumstances  had  driven  her  to  the  bush,  where  she  had 
become  wild,  and  had  occasioned  the  grave  incidents  we 
have  noticed  in  the  island  life  of  the  people  of  Mangaia  I 
The  young  man  to  whom  the  rabbit  belonged  received  pro- 
perty, by  order  of  the  chief,  from  the  public  store,  which 
more  than  remunerated  his  loss,  but  which  did  not  over- 
come his  regret,  that  his  quiet  and  pet  animal  had  been 
mistakenly  supposed  to  have  relationship  to  the  cat  tribe. 

Among  the  many  laws  made  by  the  people  of  Mangaia, 
the  one  prohibiting  tattooing  was  the  occasion  of  more 
trouble  and  annoyance  to  the  police  than  any  other.  The 
natives  of  this  island  more  generally  practised  this  art,  and 
were  more  proficient  in  its  execution,  than  those  on  the 
other  islands  of  the  group.  We  had  frequently  questioned 
the  propriety  of  imposing  a penalty  on  its  practice  ; not  that 
we  thought  its  continuance  desirable,  but  from  an  opinion 


THE  ISLAND  OP  MANGAIA. 


167 


that  the  individual  who  tattooed  himself  committed  no  public 
wrong,  and  that  a just  sense  of  propriety  induced  by  a con- 
tinued course  of  proper  education,  would  in  time  do  away 
with  the  custom.  The  native  authorities,  however,  who 
knew  the  nature  and  design  of  the  practice,  were  determined 
to  attach  a severe  fine  to  its  execution,  which  occasioned  a 
large  majority  of  the  young  men  of  the  island  to  be  brought 
into  the  criminal  court,  before  the  age  of  twenty ; which 
doubtless  did  as  much,  or  even  more  injury  to  their  moral 
feelings,  than  the  act  for  which  they  were  judged.  Thus  in 
this,  and  many  other  things  of  which  the  native  code  of  civil 
law  takes  cognizance,  the  missionary  on  those  islands  often 
finds  great  opposition  in  his  advice  to  secure  prudence  and 
moderation,  and  much  difficulty  in  showing  the  people  the 
difference  between  rules  for  the  exercise  of  discipline  in  the 
church,  and  laws  for  the  establishment  of  order  and  morality 
in  a general  and  mixed  population  : hence  the  caution 
necessary  in  advising  tribes  just  emerging  from  heathenism 
about  the  adoption  and  enforcement  of  civil  law,  lest  in 
some  cases  they  increase  and  perpetuate  the  very  crimes 
which  they  desire  to  subdue. 

I well  remember  an  address  given  by  a young  man  on  his 
admission  to  church-fellowship,  at  one  of  the  villages  on  this 
island.  He  said,  that  between  the  years  of  fifteen  and 
twenty,  he  had  often  been  publicly  tried  in  the  criminal 
court  for  tattooing,  and  had  been  degraded,  and  heavily  fined. 
At  first  he  felt  the  degradation  most  severely,  but  he  after- 
wards became  hardened,  until  he  found  himself  destitute  of 
any  desire  for  that  which  was  good,  and  entirely  free  from 
shame  in  reference  to  that  which  was  evil.  Thus  he  con- 
tinued to  sink  deeper  and  deeper  in  sin,  until  one  Sabbath 
afternoon  he,  thoughtlessly,  came  to  the  chapel.  A sermon 
was  preached  from  Romans  vii.  9,  concerning  the  spiri- 
tuality and  extent  of  God’s  law.  “ It  was  then,”  said  the 


168 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


young  man,  “ that  I felt  for  the  first  time  the  nature  of  the 
law  of  God, — I felt  that  it  was  above  me,  and  under  me, 
and  around  me,  and  in  me — all  my  sins,  of  hand  and  heart, 
came  up  to  my  view,  and  I became  as  a slain  man.  At  first 
I desired  to  die,  but  I could  not.  It  is  this  that  has  driven 
me  to  Jesus  as  my  Saviour  and  refuge  : — now  I have  peace 
in  him.  He  alone  is  my  joy  and  trust.”  In  this  way  the 
divine  efiicacy  of  the  gospel  most  illustriously  appears  in 
the  moral  regeneration  of  these  once  degraded  tribes ; — 
translating  them  from  the  kingdom  of  Satan  into  the  king- 
dom  of  Christ,  which  is  righteousness,  and  peace,  and 
joy. 

At  the  same  church-meeting  at  which  the  young  man 
referred  to  above  was  admitted,  another  man,  redeemed 
from  among  the  vilest  of  the  heathen,  gave  an  account  of 
himself ; he  had  been  brought  to  see  the  error  of  his  way 
by  a different  means  than  his  companion,  but  the  nature 
and  effects  of  the  change  were  the  same.  Standing  before 
the  members  of  the  church,  he  said  : — “Brethren,  my  heart 
is  wondering  at  the  way  by  which  I have  been  brought  in 
from  my  sin,  and  led  to  seek  fellowship  with  you.  You 
know  that  I have  been  one  of  the  most  vile  young  men  in 
this  village.  It  is  true  I frequently  used  to  come  to  chapel, 
but  all  I heard  there  I laughed  at,  for  I loved  folly,  and 
after  it  I ran.  But  one  day,  while  fishing  in  my  canoe  out- 
side the  reef,  a shark  upset  the  canoe,  and  for  some  time  he 
held  my  thigh  in  his  mouth j I had  no  hope  of  life;  my 
pain  of  body  was  great,  but  a shining  light  burst  into  my 
mind — all  my  former  life  came  up  to  my  view.  The  shark 
still  held  my  thigh;  I felt  his  teeth  go  to  the  bone,  and 
expected  it  to  be  bitten  off  by  him ; but  God  had  mercy  on 
me.  I did  not  cry  for  mercy  at  the  time,  for  I had  nothing 
but  horror  and  despair  in  my  heart.  A companion,  who 
was  also  fishing,  came  to  my  assistance,  and  helped  me  on 


THE  ISLAND  OP  MANGAIA. 


'169 


sliorc.  I lay  ill  a long  time ; many  members  of  the  church 
came  to  see  me,  who  talked  and  prayed  with  me,  and  led  me 
to  see  that  Jesus  was  the  Saviour  I needed.  I have  given 
myself  to  him, — he  has  led  me  in  among  you  to-day,  and 
my  heart  is  full  of  wonder  and  praise.” 

Again  leaving  Ivirua  in  charge  of  the  native  teacher, 
we  proceeded  to  Tamarua  j our  path  lay  over  hill  and 
dale, — sometimes  we  were  on  the  summits  of  the  hills, 
whence  the  whole  island  and  the  far-extending  sea  lay  open 
to  our  view ; at  other  times  we  were  passing  through  the 
dales,  which  were  richly  and  gratefully  shaded  with  groves  of 
cocoa-nut  trees.  Our  company  would  have  afforded  no  small 
amusement  to  an  English  spectator.  Owing  to  the  badness 
of  the  roads,  the  missionary’s  wife  was  borne  in  a chair  on 
men’s  shoulders ; the  missionary  followed,  and  then  came, 
single  file,  a motley  group  of  merry  natives,  carrying  our  bed 
and  boxes,  and  other  articles  necessary  for  a temporary  so- 
journ in  a native  reed  hut,  at  Tamarua.  As  we  proceeded 
on  our  journey,  the  old  people  pointed  out  to  us  many  spots 
of  renown  for  heathen  cruelty  and  death.  One  of  these  in 
particular  excited  our  sympathy  and  grief.  It  was  a small 
valley,  at  the  foot  of  two  low  hills ; on  reaching  it,  an  • old 
man,  as  if  awaking  from  a reverie,  exclaimed,  “This  is  a spot 
of  ancient  fame, — this  was  the  devil’s  ground  !”  We  halted 
awhile,  and  another  of  our  company  related  a sad  tale  of 
heathen  wickedness  and  sorrow,  one  would  think  not  often 
surpassed  even  in  cannibal,  savage  life.  On  an  occasion  of 
general  peace  on  the  island,  about  six  or  eight  years 
after  the  visit  of  Captain  Cook,  an  aspiring  chief,  who  had 
been  defeated  in  former  wars,  conceived  a plan  of  wholesale 
slaughter,  before  unknown  to  the  people.  Sending  his  mes- 
sengers to  all  the  tribes  on  the  island,  he  gave  an  unlimited 
invitation  to  all,  to  attend  a feast  in  commemoration  of  the 
peace  : the  day  was  fixed  on  j a large  quantity  of  food  was 
15 


170 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


prepared ; and  on  the  morning  appointed,  an  immense 
number  of  the  people  from  the  different  clans  came  to- 
gether. An  oven  of  extraordinary  dimensions  was  heated, 
which  consisted  of  a large,  deep  hole  dug  in  the  ground, 
filled  with  stones  heated  to  a red-hot  heat.  But  when  all 
was  ready,  and  each  man  was  about  to  arrange  his  food  in 
the  oven,  a host  of  bloody  warriors,  belonging  to  the  chief 
who  had  given  the  invitation,  rushed  forth,  at  the  sound  of 
a preconcerted  signal,  and,  with  ficnd-like  fury,  hurried  an 
untold  number  of  the  visitors  into  the  flames  of  the  oven, 
and  for  many  days  afterwards  the  sky  was  literally  dark- 
ened by  the  ascending  smoke  of  this  gigantic  funeral  pile  ! 
The  old  man  who  gave  us  this  account  was,  at  the  time  it 
took  place,  a heathen  little  boy,  but  is  now  a consistent  Chris- 
tian deacon  of  one  of  the  village  churches.  “ Let  us  rejoice,” 
he  said,  addressing  those  who  stood  around  him,  “ that  those 
dark  days  are  passed  away,  never  more  to  return ; the  bright 
Sun  of  Righteousness  has  arisen  upon  us  with  healing  be- 
neath his  wings  : let  us  rejoice  in  his  light  and  salvation  !” 

On  the  evening  of  the  day  the  above  was  told  us,  we  held 
a missionary  prayer-meeting  in  the  chapel  of  Tamarua ; 
and  it  was  indeed  cheering  to  hear  the  praises  and  the 
prayers  of  those  whose  fathers  had  been  in  the  degraded  state 
referred  to ; they  were  sensible  that  they  were  indebted  to 
the  gospel  for  all  the  privileges  of  their  changed  condition, 
and  were  devoted  in  their  desires,  and  contributions,  and 
agents,  to  extend  the  same  blessings  to  the  heathen  beyond 
them. 

Encouraging  progress  had  been  made  by  the  people,  at  this 
station,  under  the  teacher’s  superintendence,  since  our  visit  in 
1841.  The  total  number  of  children  in  daily  attendance  at  the 
school  was  255  ; and  no  less  than  fifty-six  men  and  women 
had  joined  the  adult  classes  ; many  of  whom  we  were  grati- 
fied to  meet  as  candidates  for  church-membership.  During 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA.  171 

our  stay  we  admitted  some  of  these  to  communion,  one  of 
wliom  was  the  oldest  man  in  the  settlement,  who,  in  giving 
an  account  of  his  experience,  said  : — Listen  to  me,  my 
brethren  ; I am  an  old  man,  and,  as  I have  now  taken  upon 
me  the  word  of  life,  I will  say  a little  about  my  former  his- 
tory. I was  born  a heathen  j my  father  was  a great  warrior, 
and  he  was  determined  that  I should  be  one  too.  I remem- 
ber, when  I was  very  young,  he  frequently  led  me  out  to 
see  the  bodies  of  the  victims  he  had  taken  in  war,  and  he 
taught  me  to  eat  human  flesh.  As  I grew  older,  I was 
always  with  my  father, — he  taught  me  all  the  manners  and 
customs  connected  with  idol-worship  and  heathenism,  and  he 
gave  me  a war-club,  and  a spear  of  his  own  making ; and 

when  he  knew  I had  killed  N , of  yonder  settlement, 

he  was  much  rejoiced ; a great  feast  was  prepared  on  the 
occasion,  and  afterwards  I became  wise  in  all  the  practices 
of  the  priesthood  ; and  thus  my  heathen  greatness  continued 
to  increase  until  the  teachers,  the  men  of  Jehovah,  came  to 
our  land.  Some  people  of  Oneroa  received  them,  but  we 
despised  them ; I was  full  of  pride  and  anger  towards  them, 
and  more  than  once  I led  my  people  to  flght  against  the 
Christian  party.  Many  of  our  tribe  went  to  live  near  the 
teacher  in  order  to  be  instructed,  but  I,  and  my  wives, 
and  our  children,  remained  here,  at  Tamarua.  About  three 
or  four  years  ago,  I went  to  the  teacher’s  village  to  see  my 
brother ; there  I first  listened  quietly  to  the  meaning  of  the 
word  of  Grod,  and  afterwards,  Maretu  came  to  preach  in  this 
place  ; he  visited  me,  and  explained  to  me  all  about  myself 
and  salvation.  I then  began  to  attend  the  word  of  God  on 
tlie  day  of  the  Lord,  and  my  mind  became  enlightened.  I felt 
that  my  heart  was  as  old  in  sin  as  my  body  was  old  in  years. 
I have  truly  been  very  wicked,  but  I am  now  looking  to  the 
cross  of  Jesus.  He  is  my  Saviour, — a great  Saviour  for  a 
great  sinner  !”  And  turning  to  the  members  of  the  church. 


172 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS, 


he  said  ; — “ Brethren,  in  the  name  of  Jesus,  receive  me  as 
one  of  his  saved  ones.” 

It  is  a pleasing  reflection,  that  most  of  these  natives  ad- 
mitted to  church-fellowship  during  our  visits  to  the  island, 
have  remained  faithful  to  their  profession.  Many  of  them 
have  died,  leaving  their  characters  as  bright  examples  to 
succeeding  generations,  in  all  practical  godliness ; and  others 
are  now  living,  the  pillars  of  the  church  in  Mangaia. 

Beturning  from  Tamarua  to  Oneroa,  the  principal  station, 
we  prepared  for  our  voyage  to  Karotonga.  An  American 
whaler  came  to  the  island,  the  captain  of  which  otfered  us  a 
passage  thither.  It  was  Sabbath  morning  when  the  captain 
landed  j in  the  afternoon  our  arrangements  were  complete, 
and  I preached  a farewell  sermon.  The  large  chapel  was 
crowded  to  excess,  by  a congregation  of  more  than  two 
thousand  natives,  who  listened  with  deepest  attention  to  a 
discourse  founded  on  Rev.  iii.  II : — “ Hold  fast  that  which 
thou  hast,  that  no  man  take  thy  crown.”  The  manifest 
expressions  of  aflection  and  sympathy  of  the  people  were 
beyond  all  description  : sobs  and  cries  frequently  interrupted 
the  service,  and  the  whole  circumstances  of  the  day  were 
fraught  with  gratitude  for  the  past,  joy  in  the  present,  and 
hope  for  the  future  welfare  of  these  interesting  islanders. 
Nearly  three  thousand  of  them  accompanied  us  to  the  beach, 
while  a few  of  the  most  sturdy  and  expert  took  charge  of 
our  canoe,  which  was  on  the  boundary  reef,  and  rising  with 
the  swelling  surf,  we  were  paddled  to  the  boat  in  waiting, 
and  taken  on  board  the  ship. 

As  we  sailed  away  from  the  island  under  these  circum- 
stances, our  hearts  were  full  of  wonder  and  praise  at  what 
our  eyes  had  seen,  and  what  our  hands  had  been  permitted 
to  do,  in  the  moral  and  spiritual  elevation  of  a race  of  men 
who,  less  than  a quarter  of  a century  before,  were  savage, 
heathen  idolaters,  and  scarcely  known  to  the  world;  but  who 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


173 


now,  by  native  teachers’  instruction,  and  occasional  visits 
from  the  European  missionary,  had  attained  a position  in 
intelligence,  in  morality,  in  civilization,  and  in  consistency 
of  Christian  character,  that  suffered  nothing  by  comparison 
with  missions  of  older  date,  or  other  islands  of  Eastern 
Polynesia. 

The  word  that  Isaiah,  the  son  of  Amos,  saw,  concerning 
the  mountain  of  the  Lord’s  house,  has  come  to  pass : it  is 
exalted  on  the  top  of  the  hills,  and  all  nations  flow  into  it. 


15* 


CH APTEE  V. 

Another  teacher  sent  to  the  island — Supply  of  books  in  native  language 
— Appointment  of  English  missionary  to  Mangaia — His  landing  in 
the  year  18-i5 — Native  speech  on  the  occasion — Missionary  daily 
labours  among  the  people — Reading — Schools — -Assisting  in  work — ■ 
Building  new  chapel — Native  laws  respecting  foreigners  who  came  to 
the  island — Arrival  of  two  Frenchmen  with  letter  from  French  con- 
sul— General  statistics  of  the  island,  1845 — Native  views  of  the  past 
and  present  position  of  the  island — Exhortations — Pleasing  state  of 
the  mission  on  the  island,  January,  1846 

The  circumstances  of  the  mission  on  Rarotonga  in  1844 
prevented  us  from  visiting  Mangaia  that  year,  hut  we  were 
happily  able  to  send  an  excellent  native  evangelist,  Katuki, 
to  occupy  Ivifua  station.  By  him  we  sent  300  copies  of 
the  New  Testament,  400  copies  of  Psalms,  and  other  copies 
of  the  Old  Testament,  1000  Hymn-books,  and  1000  ele- 
mentary hooks  for  the  schools,  all  of  which,  except  the 
New  Testaments,  had  been  printed  and  bound  at  the  Raro- 
tonga printing  ofidee;  these  were  distributed  among  the 
people  of  the  three  villages,  and  proved  a great  blessing,  in 
facilitating  the  onward  progress  of  the  mission  on  this 
island. 

While  we  have  rejoiced  in  the  progress  of  Christianity 
and  civilization  on  Mangaia,  under  the  superintendence  of 
native  agency,  as  given  in  the  foregoing  details,  it  must  have 
(174) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


175 


occurred  to  the  reader  that  the  future  improvement  of  the 
people  rendered  it  desirable  that  a missionary  should  be 
permanently  stationed  there.  Under  this  impression  the 
Directors  of  the  London  Missionary  Society  about  this  time 
appointed  the  Rev.  George  Gill  as  resident  missionary  on 
the  island.  On  his  voyage  thither,  he  was  detained  a few 
months  on  Rarotonga,  and  the  delighted  people  of  Mangaia, 
hearing  that  he  was  there,  wrote  a letter  to  us  to  hasten  his 
arrival  among  them,  of  which  the  following  is  an  extract, 
written  by  Maretu,  the  native  pastor.  “ Friend, — Your 

letter  has  reached  us,  by  which  we  know  that  our  mission- 
ary has  come  from  England.  We  have  long  prayed  for  him, 
and  now  the  church  is  rejoiced.  Great  good  is  growing 
upon  the  land,  and  the  church  is  dwelling  in  peace.  We 
have  prepared  to  build  a house  for  our  missionary,  but  we 
are  hesitating  as  to  the  kind  of  house  he  will  desire.  Do 
not  linger — come  speedily!  We  send  our  love  to  our  new 
missionary  and  his  wife.  Do  not  linger,  but  come  to  our 
May  meetings  I” 

On  the  19th  of  July,  1845,  the  new  missionary  ship, 
John  Williams,  was  seen,  for  the  first  time,  off  the 
island  of  Mangaia,  and  had  on  board  the  missionary  so  long 
desired  by  the  people;  with  a view  of  introducing  him  to  his 
sphere  of  labour’,  and  of  rendering  him  assistance  in  his 
new  work,  we  also  accompanied  him'.  It  was  a lovely 
South  Pacific  day,  and  the  sea  so  calm,  that  the  waves 
broke  with  more  than  ordinary  gentleness  on  the  reef.  We 
embarked  in  the  ship’s  boat,  and  on  approaching  the  land, 
we  heard  the  shouts  of  the  joyous  people,  echoed  from  the 
coral  rocks  which  form  the  back  ground  of  the  settlement ; 
Ko  te  Pai  Oromedua  teia  ! Ko  nga  tavini  o te  Atua  teia  ! 
Kua  tae  mail  Kua  tae  mai  ia!  ! “It  is  the  missionary 
ship  I Here  are  the  servants  of  God ! They  are  come  1 
They  are  truly  come  !”  Rowing  the  boat  near  to  the  reef, 


17G 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


it  was  seized  by  a number  of  natives,  who  bore  it,  and  us  in 
it,  to  the  teacher’s  house.  At  a meeting  held  about  two 
weeks  after  our  landing,  for  the  purpose  of  giving  public 
welcome  Jo  their  missionary,  the  following  characteristic 
speech  was  delivered  by  one  of  the  natives.  Addressing 
the  people,  he  said,  “ Brethren — God  is  truly  a hearer  and 
answerer  of  prayer.  We  have  prayed  to  see  what  we  now 
see  this  day.  God  has  heard  us,  and  here  is  our  missionary 
among  us.  He  is  going  to  live  with  us.  But,  brethren, 
do  not  let  us  leave  off  praying.  Let  us  ask  God  to  assist 
him  in  learning  our  language  j that  is  the  first  thing,  and 
then  to  assist  him  to  do  his  work,  and  then  let  us  seek  to 
be  prepared  ourselves  to  receive  instruction.  Pray  also  for 
his  wife,  and  for  their  child,  now  so  young ; and  ask  that 
he  may  live  and  become  a missionary  to  our  children.  Wo 
all  rejoice  that  our  teacher  has  come.  Now,  this  is  my 
thought : let  us  see  to  it  that  not  one  lock  of  his  hair  be 
ruffled, — I do  not  mean  by  the  winds  of  heaven, — but  that 
his  heart  be  not  grieved  by  any  evil  conduct  on  the  land,  or 
in  the  church.  Let  us  go  to  his  house  frequently,  and 
inquire  of  him  about  things  of  which  we  ai’e  ignorant,  and 
about  the  word  of  God.  Remember  he  is  neither  an  angel, 
nor  a spirit  merely — that  you  should  not  go  near  him.  He 
is  come  to  live  with  us,  as  our  brother,  companion,  and 
friend.  If  you  see  his  face,  and  hear  his  voice  on  the  Sab- 
bath only,  you  will  not  receive  much  good.  You  must  be 
matau,  accustomed  to  him  daily,  and  he  to  you.  Let  us 
praise  God  for  his  love  to  us  ! May  we  remember  what  I 
have  said  ! And  may  the  Holy  Spirit  prosper  our  mission- 
ary in  the  midst  of  us  !” 

Surely  no  language  could  be  more  appropriate,  or  loving, 
or  scriptural  than  this  was  under  the  circumstances  of  its 
delivery,  and  it  is  suggestive  of  much  that  is  gratifying  and 
useful.  This  speech  was  made  on  Friday,  the  first  of 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


177 


August,  and  with  a view  of  giving  an  idea  of  what  mis- 
sionary work  is  at  such  a station,  I will  transcribe  a few 
notes  from  my  Journal  for  the  month,  as  they  were  entered 
daily : — 

“ August  2.  Morning,  met  the  parents  of  a number  of 
children,  who  were  to  be  baptized  on  the  morrow.  Noon, 
with  the  deacons  of  the  church,  for  conversation  and  ar- 
rangement of  matters  about  the  church  and  settlement. 
Evening,  at  the  church-meeting,  for  prayer  and  exhortation.” 
“ August  3.  Lord’s  Day.  Morning,  preached  in  Oneroa 
chapel,  2000  persons  present.  Text,  Dan.  xxxii.  25,  ‘ Shoes 
of  iron  and  of  brass,’  or  divine  grace  appropriate  and  suffi- 
cient to  daily  labour  and  trial.  Afternoon,  public  admini- 
stration of  the  ordinance  of  the  Lord’s  Supper  to  more  than 
300  church-members,  in  the  midst  of  the  great  congregation. 
Evening,  united  prayer-meeting  with  native  preachers,  and 
their  families,  in  the  class-room  of  our  house.” 

“ August  4.  Morning,  at  adults’  early  school.  Forenoon, 
at  the  children’s  school.  Held  a meeting  with  some  of  the 
principal  people  of  the  station,  who  are  desirous  to  build  a 
stone  chapel.  Noon,  assisting  in  making  some  alteration  in 
mission-house.  The  new  missionary  having  brought  from 
England  some  glass  windows.  This  was  the  first  glass  the 
natives  had  ever  seen,  and  it  caused  no  little  wonder  to  them. 
Afternoon,  visited  one  or  two  sick  persons.” 

“August  5.  Morning,  held  missionary  prayer-meeting 
in  the  chapel;  read  to  the  people  letters  just  received  from 
two  of  their  own  countrymen,  who  are  native  teachers,  on 
the  distant  island  of  Tana.  Forenoon,  met  the  teachers  of 
the  adult  classes.  Evening,  Bible-class  with  young  men.” 
“August  6.  Forenoon,  at  the  children’s  school.  After- 
noon, a public  service — preached,  John  iii.  8,  ‘ The  influ- 
ences of  the  Holy  Spirit  in  conversion.’  Evening,  a meet- 
ing with  the  visitors  of  the  Christian  Instruction  Society. 


178 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Increased  their  number  for  that  village  from  twelve  to 
twenty.” 

“ August  7.  This  morning  a monthly  prayer-meeting  of 
the  teachers  of  Oueroa  schools : 48  male  teachers,  and  51 
female  teachers  present.  Noon,  assisting  natives  in  mission- 
house  work,  and  preparing  books  for  inland  stations.  Even- 
ing, church-members’  Bible-class.” 

“ August  8.  Attended  the  teacher’s  class  this  forenoon. 
At  noon  a schooner  arrived  off  the  island,  from  Tahiti — 
brought  information  of  the  surrender  of  the  Queen,  which 
occasioned  much  remark  and  sadness  among  the  people. 
Afternoon,  went  to  the  village  of  Tamarua;  five  o’clock, 
p.  M.,  held  public  service  in  the  chapel  there.” 

“ August  9.  Morning,  attending  to  the  sick ; met  candi- 
dates for  baptism,  and  had  private  conversation  with  the 
deacons  of  the  village.  Native  teachers’  labours  had  been 
blessed  to  the  people — schools  were  well  attended — and  up- 
wards of  fifty  candidates  for  church-communion.” 

“ August  10.  Lord’s  Day.  Preached  in  Tamarua  chapel. 
More  than  700  persons  present.  Text,  Philip,  ii.  12,  ‘Pear 
and  trembling  connected  with  securing  salvation.’  Afternoon, 
public  service,  text.  Psalm  li.  11,  ‘ Take  not  thy  Holy 
Spirit  from  me.’  Evening,  attended  a prayer-meeting  in 
the  native  teacher’s  house.” 

“ August  11.  Attended  early  morning  adult  school ; 300 
present.  Noon,  dined  with  the  chief  of  the  village.  After- 
noon, met  the  deacons,  made  arrangements  to  locate  a 
teacher  here,  whom  we  had  brought  from  Rarotonga  Insti- 
tution. Evening,  visited,  with  the  natives,  one  or  two  of 
the  subterranean  caverns.” 

“August  12.  Forenoon,  at  children’s  school — after  which 
selected  a singing  class  of  young  people, — all  delighted  with 
brother  George’s  proficiency  to  teach  them  singing : much 
room  for  improvement  in  them — but  they  are  diligent  and 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


179 


willing  learners.  Afternoon,  churcli-members’  candidate 
class.  Evening,  church  prayer-meeting.  Night,  met  seve- 
ral young  men,  who  wish  to  go  to  Rarotonga  Institution.” 
“August  13.  Morning,  a preaching  service — text,  Deut. 
vi.  12,  ‘ Necessary  caution  while  in  the  possession  of  privi- 
leges.’ Forenoon,  took  leave  of  the  people  of  Tamarua,  and 
journeyed  to  the  village  of  Ivirua.  People  gave  us  a hearty 
welcome  to  their  resident  missionary.  Evening,  preached 
from  Psalm  Ixxxix.  15,  ‘The  blessedness  of  hearing,  and 
attending  to,  the  joyful  sound.’  ” 

“August  14.  Forenoon,  disposing  of  hooks  to  the  people. 
The  missionary  wives  with  the  girls’  school.  Afternoon, 
visited  some  of  the  heathen  party,  to  whom  reference  has 
been  made  in  former  chapters.” 

“August  15.  Morning,  instructing  the  teachers  of  the 
children’s  schools.  Noon,  a native  teacher  came  with  his 
proposed  bride  to  make  arrangements  for  their  marriage. 
Evening,  conversed  with  a member  who  had  been  suspended 
from  the  church  for  disorderly  conduct.” 

“August  16.  Forenoon,  met  the  deacons  of  the  church  at 
Ivirua — added  an  excellent  and  tried  young  man  to  their 
number.  Evening,  meeting  of  the  church-members — six 
candidates  admitted.” 

“August  17.  Lord’s  Day,  public  services  were  well 
attended — sermons  from  Job  xlii.  5,  6,  ‘ Knowledge  of  God 
necessary  to  true  repentance  and  from  Isaiah  v.  20,  ‘ Delu- 
sions and  punishment  of  sinners.’  The  young  missionary 
made  his  first  attempt  to  speak  in  native  language,  publicly, 
by  reading  the  Scriptures,  and  olfering  prayer.” 

“August  18.  Attended  children’s  school,  and  took  our 
return  journey  to  the  settlement  of  Oneroa.” 

“August  19.  Forenoon,  had  private  conversation  with 
Maretu  about  texts  he  had  selected  for  sermons.  Noon,  a 
little  girl  having  fallen  from  a precipice  was  brought  with 


180 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


fractured  limbs  to  be  dressed.  Afternoon,  cburcli  prayer 
meeting.  Evening,  young  men’s  Bible-class.  At  night,  a 
little  boy  was  brought,  whose  stomach,  while  he  was  asleep, 
had  been  dreadfully  mutilated  by  a savage  pig — it  was 
dres.sed,  but  the  poor  fellow  died.” 

“August  20.  Drawing  plans  for  proposed  new  stone 
chapel.  Afternoon,  married  Tangiia  the  native  teacher  to 
Miriama.  Evening,  preached  from  text,  Gen.  xxviii., 
‘Jacob’s  journey,  trust,  and  vow.’” 

“August  21.  After  attending  to  children’s  school,  was 
with  natives  marking  out  the  foundation  of  new  chapel,  90 
feet  long,  by  62  feet  wide,  which  was  partly  dug  out  in  the 
afternoon.  Evening,  church-members’  Bible-class.” 

“August  22.  Teachers’  classes  in  arithmetic  and  geogra- 
phy. Noon,  conversation  with  candidates.  Afternoon,  with 
carpenters  who  have  commenced  window  and  door  frames 
for  new  chapel.  Evening,  public  service.  Night,  conversa- 
tion with  one  of  the  native  teachers.” 

“August  23.  Preparation  for  Sabbath  services.” 

“August  24.  Lord’s  Day,  large  chapel  full — subjects  of 
discourse,  ‘ Zeal  for  God’s  house,’  Neh.  ii.  20;  and  Zech. 
iii.  2,  ‘ A brand  plucked  from  the  fire.’  Evening,  house- 
hold prayer  meeting.” 

“August  27.  Public  service  on  the  site  of  the  new  chapel 
— upwards  of  2000  persons  present.  Brother  George  gave 
out  a hymn ; I read  a portion  of  Scripture ; Maretu  en- 
gaged in  prayer,  after  which  I gave  an  address.  The 
foundation-stone,  in  which  were  placed  native  books,  and 
writings  respecting  circumstance  and  date  of  the  build- 
ing, was  then  laid  by  Numangatini,  the  chief  of  the 
island ; and  the  services  of  the  day  closed  with  singing  and 
prayer.” 

Such  were  our  daily  public  missionary  engagements  for 
the  month,  and  which,  with  but  little  variation,  occupy 


THE  ISLAND  OP  MANGAIA.' 


181 


the  time  and  thoughts  of  the  missionaries  now  on  the 
island. 

The  native  population  of  Mangaia  had  been  frequently 
visited  by  foreigners,  some  of  whom  had  taken  up  a tem- 
porary abode  among  them ; none,  however,  had  perma- 
nently resided  on  the  island,  except  one  Frenchman  and  an 
American — these  had  married  native  females,  and,  for  the 
most  part,  had  conducted  themselves  with  propriety.  Two 
or  three  others  had  also  married  native  females,  but  after  a 
time  they  had  left  them  and  their  families,  which  had  occa- 
sioned no  little  trouble  to  the  people.  Hence  the  authori- 
ties of  the  island  made  laws  to  prohibit  marriage  of  native 
females  to  foreigners,  and  also  the  sale  of  land. 

Soum  little  time  before  we  reached  the  island,  1845,  two 
Frenchmen,  and  an  American  who  gave  himself  out  to  be  a 
Mormon,  came  to  the  island  from  Tahiti.  They  brought  a 
letter,  purporting  to  be  from  the  French  Consul,  Tahiti,  to 
the  chief,  of  which  the  following  is  a copy  : — 

“ Papeete,  April  22nd,  1845. 

“ To  the  chief,  and  those  in  power  at  Mangaia — Blessing 
on  you  ! Certain  Frenchmen  are  now  going  to  your  land, 
and  the  governor  desires  that  you  should  treat  them  kindly, 
and  with  justice  like  other  foreigners.  No  evil  will  be  to 
your  land.  But  if  you  ill-treat  these  said  foreigners,  or  any 
other  Frenchmen  who  may  hereafter  come  to  you,  evil  con- 
sequences will  be  to  you.  Blessing  on  you  I” 

On  their  arrival,  the  strangers  delivered  the  above  letter 
to  the  chief  of  the  island,  and  they  were  treated  with 
courtesy ; but  on  being  assured  that  the  people  intended  to 
abide  by  their  law,  not  to  marry  their  females  to  foreigners, 
nor  to  sell  any  land,  they  left  the  island  in  the  same  vessel 
which  brought  them. 

The  general  statistics  of  the  island  in  the  year  1845  were, 
16 


182 


GEMS  FROM  TITE  CORAL  ISLAUDS. 


adult  males,  655,  adult  females,  676.  Young  persons  and 
children  of  parents  then  living,  1789.  Young  persons  and 
children  whose  parents  were  dead,  447,  making  a total  of 
3567  population,  of  whom  1429  were  females,  and  2138 
were  males.  500  persons  were  in  church-communion,  be- 
sides whom,  there  were  600  in  adult  classes,  receiving  daily 
instruction.  For  the  year  ending  December,  1845,  there 
were  on  the  island  101  deaths,  156  births,  99  baptisms,  and 
50  marriages. 

Such  was  the  position  of  the  mission  on  the  island  of 
Mangaia  when  we  left  it  in  charge  of  the  Rev.  George  Gill, 
1845,  and  returned  to  Rarotonga  to  resume  our  labours 
there  ; and,  beyond  the  pleasing  features  brought  out  in  the 
above  statistics,  it  is  gratifying  to  remember,  thaflbesides 
supplying  a sufficient  staff  of  native  agency,  for  schools  and 
other  organizations  connected  with  sustaining  the  cause  of 
Christianity  and  education  on  their  own  island,  the  church 
of  Mangaia  sent,  during  a period  of  ten  years,  no  fewer 
than  thirty-four  of  its  members,  male  and  female,  to  the 
Institution  on  Rarotonga,  as  native  teachers  and  evangelists 
to  the  heathen  ! 

Just  before  leaving  the  island  we  attended  a public  service 
at  Tamarua,  where  one  of  the  elders  of  the  people  gave 
an  address,  in  which  he  unburdened  the  joy  of  his  grateful 
heart,  in  language  so  appropriate  to  the  circumstances  of 
the  island,  that  a few  sentences  of  it  cannot  fail  to  interest 
the  Christian  reader.  “ Brethren,”  he  said,  “ I am  an  old 
man,  hut  to-day  I feel  young  again  with  joy — the  darkness 
and  distress  of  our  heathen  life  are  passed  away, — that 
season  was  indeed  a dreary  winter  season,  but  it  is  past — 
we  now  have  light,  and  joy,  and  peace  ; and  I have  been 
thinking  of  one  of  our  prettiest  heathen  songs,  which  ex- 
horted the  people  to  be  glad  on  the  approach  of  spring; 
it  was  as  follows  : — 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANOAIA. 


183 


‘ The  sky  is  bright,  and  storms  are  o’er, 

The  bud  and  the  fruit  reward  the  sower ; 

The  birds  are  singing,  and  the  trees  rejoice, 

The  winter  is  past;  exalt  your  voice  !’ 

“ This,”  continued  the  speaker,  “ was  never  properly  ful- 
filled in  heathenism,  but  it  has  now  come  to  pass.  This  is 
a season  of  sunshine.  Our  storms  are  now  blown  away  lee- 
ward. The  messengers  of  God  now  sing  in  the  land.  We 
have  begun  to  eat  the  fruit  of  summer,  and  a richer  harvest 
of  knowledge  and  love  yet  awaits  us.  Let  us  rejoice  !”  In 
concluding  his  remarks,  he  said,  “ But,  my  friends,  in  the 
midst  of  this  joy,  I have  a little  trouble  : we  have  not  yet 
reached  the  heights  to  which  we  aspire,  but  we  are  still 
climbing  upwards.  Oh,  let  us  not  resemble  those,  who 
climbing  up  the  hills,  hold  by  the  tufts  of  grass,  and  sud- 
denly fall  backwards ! I mean,  let  us  not  merely  hold  by 
ravenga  kopapa  ua,  outward  forms,  and  bodily  doings,  but 
let  us  lay  hold  of  Jesus,  as  the  root  of  our  faith,  and  then 
we  shall  be  safe.”  This  good  man  did  hold  fast  his  profes- 
sion, with  consistency  and  honour,  until  death  introduced 
him  into  the  joy  and  purity  of  heaven,  for  which  he  had 
been  prepared  on  earth  by  the  grace  of  Jesus,  his  Saviour. 

In  reporting  his  first  year’s  progress,  and  giving  a short 
notice  of  a new  year’s  service,  held  the  1st  of  January,  1846, 
the  missionary  says,  “The  members  of  the  three  village 
churches  met  this  day  at  Oneroa.  Early  in  the  morning 
they  assembled  with  propriety  and  delight.  I preached 
from  Psalm  exxii.  6,  ‘ Pray  for  the  peace  of  Jerusalem  •’ 
after  the  sermon  we  surrounded  the  table  of  communion,  in 
remembrance  of  our  erucified  Redeemer.  I remembered 
that  formerly  these  very  men  lived  in  enmity,  war,  and 
bloodshed,  but  now  they  walk  together  in  peace  and  concord. 
Many  a greyheaded  and  feeble  old  man,  who  had  journeyed 
six  miles  before  morning  dawn,  in  order  to  be  present  at  the 


184 


OEMS  FROM  THE  OORAL  ISLA'NOS. 


service,  was  there;  and  as  their  countenances  were  ani- 
mated with  delight  in  the  service,  I wished  the  churches  in 
England  could  have  been  spectators  of  their  joy.”  Yes, 
such  scenes  are  incontrovertible  evidences  of  the  power  of 
the  religion  of  Jesus;  also  of  its  universal  suitability  to  all 
the  wants  of  men; — they  are  its  triumph  and  its  glory. 
Where  is  the  wise  ? Where  is  the  scribe  i Where  is  the 
disputer  of  this  world  ? Hath  not  God  chosen  the  foolish 
things  of  this  world,  and  the  base  things  of  this  world,  and 
the  things  which  are  despised,  to  confound  the  things  which 
are  mighty — that  in  his  presence  no  flesh  should  glory  ? 


CHAPTER  VI. 


An  account  of  a devastating  hurricane,  March,  1846 — The  natives  rise 
above  their  depressing  circumstances — Send  contributions  to  London 
Missionai-y  Society  and  to  Bible  Society — Improvement  of  publio 
roads  round  the  island — Arrival  of  missionary  ship  at  the  island, 
1848 — A joyful  and  refreshing  public  service  with  the  natives — An 
address  on  the  occasion  by  a native — Opening  of  a new  ohapel — 
Present  chapel  and  school  accommodation  on  the  island — Arrival  of 
English  missionary  to  inland  stations — First  complete  edition  of 
Bible  in  native  language  received  on  shore — Effects  of  a rain  storm 
— Two  men,  the  last  of  the  heathen  families,  converted — Death  of 
the  first  native  teacher  to  the  island — Death  of  the  native  who  first 
destroyed  the  idols  of  the  land — Conclusion. 


The  year  whicli  commenced  so  happily,  as  noticed  in  the 
last  page  of  the  preceding  chapter,  was  one  of  severe  trial 
and  toil,  both  to  the  missionary  and  to  the  people  on 
3laugaia.  The  destructive  hurricane  of  March,  1846,  the 
effects  of  which  we  recorded  in  the  narrative  of  Rarotonga, 
extended  its  ravages  to  Mangaia.  Travelling  at  the  rate  of 
about  thirty  miles  an  hour,  it  commenced  its  fury  on  this 
island  about  four  o’clock  on  the  morning  of  the  17th  of 
IMarch.  The  missionary  and  his  family  were  aroused  from 
sleep  by  the  bursting  open  of  all  the  doors  of  their  house  ; 
the  sparkling  foam  of  the  billows  rolling  in  from  the  sea,  as 
it  dashed  on  the  reef,  gave  light  to  the  darkness  of  the  night, 
16  * ( 185 ) 


186 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


and,  as  dawn  of  morning  appeared,  the  wind  and  the  sea 
increased  in  violence;  the  sand  brought  from  the  beach  by 
the  wind,  fell  like  stones  of  hail  on  the  settlement,  and  the 
whole  population  was  thrown  into  a state  of  the  utmost 
confusion.  Speaking  of  this  calamity,  the  missionary  says, 
“ Driven  from  our  house,  we  were  supported  by  natives,  for 
it  was  impossible  to  stand  without  help.  Who  can  describe 
the  anxiety  of  that  hour  ! Our  dwelling-house  was  roofless, 
and  the  gable  end  had  fallen.  The  house,  in  which  we  kept 
our  stores,  was  shivered,  and  rocking,  and  roofless  ; the  rain 
fell  in  torrents,  and  we  were  without  shelter,  and  trembling 
with  cold.  The  natives  gathered  around  us  for  comfort  and 
counsel,  but  I was  unable  to  speak.  An  awful  shriek  then 
rent  the  air ; it  rose  higher  and  louder  than  the  roar  of 
winds  and  waves.  The  wind  had  changed, — it  had  assumed 
the  character  of  a whirlwind,  the  roof  of  every  house  in 
the  village  was  caught  up  by  its  violence ; trees,  either 
torn  up  by  the  root,  or  broken  off,  were  whirled  rapidly, 
like  wheels,  in  the  air.  Another  gust  came,  and  other 
houses  and  the  large  school  house  fell.  But  looking  toward 
the  new  chapel,  in  the  upper  settlement,  I rejoiced  to  see 
it  standing ; but  another  moment, — and  another  gust,  — it 
rocked  the  chapel  as  a cradle, — the  roof  was  lifted  up, 
entire,  in  the  air, — and  the  whole  building  fell !”  The  mis- 
sionary saw  it  fall,  and  with  it  he  fell  to  the  ground,  and  for 
some  time  remained  comparatively  senseless.  The  follow- 
ing evening  was  as  calm  and  serene  as  the  morning  had 
been  tempestuous  and  destructive.  Almost  every  house  on 
the  island  was  destroyed,  and  at  night,  the  missionary  and 
the  natives  lay  down  to  rest,  but  not  to  sleep  : they  watched 
the  broad  expanse  of  the  starry  heavens,  and  all  being  peace 
in  the  midst  of  desolation,  they  endeavoured  to  comfort  them- 
selves in  the  promises  of  God. 

The  succeeding  Sabbath  was  a day  of  mingled  humiliation, 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


187 


ami  prayer,  and  praise.  Amidst  the  wreck  of  homes  and 
plantations,  and  the  desolation  of  the  sanctuary,  the  people 
sat  down  and  wept.  The  missionary,  as  well  as  he  was  able, 
gave  a few  words  of  address,  and  afterwards  many  of  the 
natives  spoke  appropriate  words  of  warning,  encouragement, 
and  consolation.  “ Why  are  we  thus  ?”  inquired  one 
speaker.  “ Who  can  tell  me  ? I ask  the  sea,  and  the  land, 
and  they  reply, — ‘ It  is  God.’  I ask  the  ruins  of  our  habi- 
tations, the  havoc  on  our  plantations,  and  the  desolations  of 
our  house  of  prayer,  and  they  answer, — ‘ This  is  of  God.’ 
The  Lord  is  great,  and  of  great  power — his  ways  are  un- 
searchable !” 

Under  these  circumstances  of  trial,  all  public  instruction 
in  schools  and  classes,  was  for  some  months  suspended ; but 
in  the  mean  time  temporary  chapels  were  built,  and  the 
people  rejoiced  in  the  ordinances  and  rest  of  the  Sabbath. 
Encouraged  by  the  sympathy  and  assistance  received  from 
England,  both  they  and  the  missionary,  as  soon  as  the  planta- 
tions had  been  attended  to,  began  to  restore  their  settle- 
ments ; and  only  one  year  after  these  afflictions,  they  gave 
substantial  proof  of  their  interest  in,  and  gratitude  to,  the 
London  Missionary  Society,  by  sending  a contribution  of 
seventy-three  pounds  to  its  funds ; and,  in  addition  to  fifty 
pounds  to  the  Bible  Society,  in  1848  they  sent  one 
hundred  and  twenty  pounds  to  the  Missionary  Society. 
Thus,  this  poor  and  destitute  people,  blessed  by  the  labours 
of  the  British  churches,  rejoiced  to  aid,  even  in  the  midst 
of  their  troubles,  the  cause  of  Him  whose  love  had  made 
them  rich  in  spiritual  blessings. 

In  1847,  the  missionary,  besides  attending  to  other  and 
more  important  duties,  connected  with  the  education  of  the 
people,  had  great  pleasure  in  superintending  the  making  of 
a public  road  round  the  island ; the  old  paths  were  bad,  and 
frequently  crossing  the  taro  swamps  were  often  impass- 


188 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


able.  The  settlement  also  of  Tamaraa,  formerly  situated 
iu  an  unhealthy  valley,  was  removed  to  a higher  site.  These, 
and  other  sanitary  improvements,  if  done  at  all,  had  to  be 
looked  after  by  the  missionary,  and  in  return  for  such 
labours,  he  had  much  gratification  in  witnessing  the  con- 
tinual advance  of  the  islanders  in  things  essential  to  their 
civilization. 

In  May,  1848,  the  John  Williams  reached  Mangaia, 
on  her  second  voyage  from  England.  The  natives  had  long 
anticipated  her,  and  were  desirous  to  have  a religious  service 
on  shore  with  the  captain,  crew  and  the  missionaries  who 
were  bound  to  stations  westward  : this  desire  was  now  gra- 
tified, and  the  day  will  live  long  in  the  remembrance  of  all 
who  were  present.  At  an  early  hour  the  company  came  on 
shore  : the  morning  service  was  conducted  in  the  usual 
manner;  but  in  the  afternoon.  Captain  Morgan  gave  an 
account  of  the  missionary  voyage,  and  of  the  continued 
sympathy  of  friends  in  England  towards  the  islands  of  Poly- 
nesia. Mamoe,  a Samoan  teacher,  who  was  returning 
from  England,  quite  electrified  the  delighted  people,  by  giving 
an  account  of  what  he  had  seen  and  heard; — the  wonders  of 
the  far-distant  country — the  love  of  the  churches  to  the 
heathen  — and  other  things  connected  therewith,  were 
spoken  of  with  emotions  of  unspeakable  joy  and  gratitude. 
When  so  excited  as  unable  to  express  himself  in  language, 
he  used  gesticulations,  which  frequently  continued  for  many 
minutes;  for  instance,  wishing  to  convey  his  idea  of  the 
extent  of  British  love,  he  silently  exhorted  his  hearers,  by 
the  movement  of  his  hands,  to  trace  the  extended  circum- 
ference of  the  horizon,  which  could  be  seen  from  the  chapel, 
stretching  far  away  beyond  the  sea ! 

At  the  conclusiou  of  Mamoe’s  address,  Meduaarutoa, 
an  elder  deacon,  spoke.  He  commenced  his  remarks  by 
exclaiming, — “ Behold,  what  manner  of  love  the  Father  hath 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


189 


bestowed  on  us ! Never  has  this  land  seen  the  like  of  this 
before.  Here  are  our  brethren  from  England ; formerly  we 
had  fellowship  with  them  in  prayer  and  thought  only,  but 
to-day  we  have  so  in  body.  We  are  all  the  children  of  God 
— there  is  no  difference ; they  and  we  are  all  the  same — we 
and  they  are  children  of  God.  I have  now  a thought  which 
makes  me  wish  to  die  soon,  that  I might  see  my  brethren 
who  have  died,  even  from  the  time  of  Moses  j for  we  and 
they,  and  they  and  we,  are  the  children  of  our  Father  who 
is  in  heaven.  My  heart  is  large  when  I look  upon  our 
brethren  and  sisters  from  Britain.  I shall  only  see  them  to- 
day in  the  flesh,  but  I shall  soon  die,  and  then  I shall  see 
them  again  with  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob.”  At  this 
meeting,  Christian  brethren  from  England,  and  Tahiti,  and 
llarotonga,  and  Aitutaki,  and  Atiu,  and  the  distant  islands 
of  Samoa,  met  together : missionaries,  native  teachers, 
native  deacons,  and  the  members  of  the  several  native 
churches  on  the  island,  were  united  in  Christian  fellowship, 
who,  twenty  years  before,  were  not  only  ignorant  of  each 
other,  but  who,  for  the  most  part,  were  a heathen  and  an 
idolatrous  people ! 

Three  years  after  the  devastations  of  the  hurricane  to 
which  we  have  referred,  the  natives  of  Mangaia  had  rebuilt 
their  house  of  prayer,  at  the  principal  station.  It  was 
ninety-six  feet  long  and  sixty-six  feet  wide,  having  an  end 
gallery,  and  would  seat  upwards  of  two  thousand  persons. 
The  opening  services  of  this  noble  stone  building  formed  a 
pleasing  era  in  the  history  of  the  island,  especially  after  the 
destruction  of  their  former  chapel.  Two  sermons  were 
preached,  one  by  a native  pastor,  and  another  by  the  mis- 
sionary. Past  sufferings  and  trials  were  for  the  time  for- 
gotten ; the  promises  of  a faithful  God  were  experienced, 
and  the  house  was  filled  with  his  glory. 

The  present  chapel,  and  school  accommodation  on  the  island 


190 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


may  be  estimated  by  the  following  figures : — there  are  six 
large,  substantial,  stone  buildings,  the  walls  of  wbicli  are 
three  feet  thick;  the  three  chapels,  called  Barbican,  Bethel, 
and  Beulah,  measure  unitedly  248  feet  long,  by  158  feet 
wide;  and  the  three  school-houses  measure  211  feet  long, 
by  114  feet  wide. 

The  people  of  the  inland  settlements  on  Mangaia  had 
long  been  desirous  to  secure  the  permanent  residence  of  a 
European  missionary  among  them,  and  at  a meeting  held  in 
1848,  they,  through  the  missionary  at  Oncroa,  resolved  to 
write  to  the  directors  of  the  London  Missionary  Society,  on 
the  subject.  Finding  their  call  not  acceded  to  as  speedily 
as  they  wished,  they  said,  “Write  again;  ask  how  much 
property  we  shall  send  to  England  to  buy  a missionary;  for 
we  will  buy  one,  and  will  feed  him,  and  pay  him.”  Consi- 
dering the  isolated  position  of  this  island,  and  with  a view 
to  assist  the  brethren  on  Rarotonga  in  visiting  the  other 
islands  of  the  group,  the  directors  acceded  to  the  importu- 
nate request  of  this  interesting  people,  and  appointed  the 
Rev.  Wyatt  Gill  to  the  station ; who,  after  a voyage  of  seven 
months  and  a half  in  the  John  Williams,  landed  on  Man- 
gaia, on  the  1st  of  March,  1852. 

Long  before  the  arrival  of  the, vessel,  the  natives  had  been 
expecting  it,  and  were  looking  forward  with  pleasure  to  re- 
ceive by  it  the  complete  edition  of  the  Bible  in  their  lan- 
guage; so  great  was  their  desire  to  obtain  this  boon,  that 
many  of  them  brought  payment  for  volumes  some  months 
before  the  ship  came.  The  length  of  time  that  elapsed,  ex- 
cited their  worst  fears  and  doubts  re,specting  its  coming  at 
all.  Some  said,  “ Surely  Barokoti  (Buzacott)  is  dead.” 
Others  thought,  “The  Society  could  not  finish  the  work.” 
At  length,  however,  all  their  apprehensions  were  put  to 
flight;  the  missionary  ship  came,  and  for  two  days  many 
able-bodied  men  were  engaged  in  bringing  the  boxes  over 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


191 


the  reef,  with  the  greatest  spirit  of  zeal  and  delight.  It  was 
with  difficulty  they  could  be  restrained  from  breaking  open 
the  boxes,  in  order  to  see  the  whole  Bible  j and  when  a 
copy  was  held  up  before  them,  they  gave  utterance  to 
their  feelings  in  a loud  and  long  continued  shout  of  joy  and 
pleasure. 

A box  of  the  sacred  volumes  was  then  taken  into  the 
chapel,  and  after  praise  and  prayer,  they  were  distributed 
to  the  people.  At  a subsequent  missionary  prayer-meeting, 
an  aged  disciple,  addressing  the  assembly  from  Job  v. 
17 — 19,  said : — “I  have  often  spoken  to  you  from  texts  out 
of  other  parts  of  the  Bible  than  those  which  we  had,  but 
this  is  the  first  time  we  have  seen  the  book  of  Job,  in  our 
own  language.  It  is  a new  book  to  us.  When  I received 
my  Bible,  I never  slept  until  I had  finished  this  book  of 
Job.  I read  it  all.  Oh,  what  joy  I have  felt  in  the  wonderful 
life  of  this  good  man ! Let  us  read  these  new  books — let  us 
go  to  the  missionary  and  inquire  into  their  meaning ; let  us 
be  at  his  door  before  he  rises ; let  us  stop  him  when  we 
meet  him,  that  he  may  tell  us  about  these  new  words.” 
And  lifting  up  his  Bible  before  the  whole  congregation,  he 
continued,  “ My  brethren  and  sisters,  this  is  my  resolve. 
The  dust  shall  never  cover  my  Bible, — the  moths  shall 
never  eat  it, — the  mildew  shall  never  rot  it ! My  light ! my 

joy  •” 

The  Rev.  Wyatt  Gill,  soon  after  landing  on  the  island, 
was  stationed  at  Tamarua,  and  in  speaking  of  the  people,  he 
says,  “ that  he  could  hardly  realize  the  fact,  that  they  had 
been  in  former  years  nurtured  in  superstition  and  idolatiy  : 
during  the  first  year  of  his  labours,  seven  members  were 
admitted  to  the  village  church,  and  six  went  to  the  Raro- 
tonga Institution,  for  the  education  of  native  teachers.  In 
the  midst,  however,  of  his  successes,  his  ardent  spirit  had  to 
pass  through  a trial  of  patience  and  labour,  in  the  effects  of 


192 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


a rain-storm,  which  deluged  the  low  grounds  of  his  station, 
in  February,  1854.  At  midnight,  a mountain  torrent  swept 
through  the  village,  situated  on  the  upper  ridge  of  the 
island  ; and  rushing  down  to  the  plantations  in  the  valleys, 
devastated  the  whole  of  the  district.  But  although  these 
trials,  and  others  of  a more  serious  nature,  often  oppressed 
the  heart  of  the  missionaries,  yet  receiving  strength  from  on 
high,  they  rose  above  them ; and,  resuming  their  labours, 
they  are  now  cheered  with  growing  success. 

Very  recently  two  of  the  last  of  the  heathen  party,  alluded 
to  in  former  chapters,  were  brought  in  from  the  folly  of  their 
ways,  to  place  themselves  under  Christian  instruction.  One 
of  them  had  often  said,  “ My  father  lived  and  died  a heathen, 
and  I wish  to  live  and  die  as  he  did.”  Much,  however,  to 
the  surprise  of  the  missionary,  who  had  frequently  visited 
him,  when  the  Bibles  were  being  sold  he  came  to  purchase 
one  for  himself.  “ Is  it  true  that  you  are  come  for  a Bible  ?” 
inquired  the  missionary.  “ Yes,  it  is  true ; my  thoughts 
are  now  very  different  from  what  they  were  formerly.  Let 
you  and  me  talk  together,  and  I will  tell  you  all.”  He  was 
found  to  be  deeply  affected  with  his  past  conduct, — his  con- 
science was  awakened ; he  sought  peace,  and  became  one 
among  those  who  inquire  what  they  must  do  to  be  saved. 

Another  case  is  that  of  an  aged  man,  who,  for  many  years, 
was  an  officiating  priest  in  heathenism.  On  listening  to  a 
sermon  from  Jer.  vi.  4,  “Woe  unto  us!  for  the  day 
goeth  away,  for  the  shadows  of  the  evening  are  stretched 
out,”  he  was  seen  to  be  much  interested,  and  it  led  to  the 
redemption  of  his  soul.  Feeble  and  infirm,  he  now  often 
comes  to  the  house  of  his  spiritual  teacher,  for  conversation 
and  instruction.  His  snow-white  head,  and  eye  dim  with 
age,  carry  the  thoughts  back  to  a period  when  he,  in  his 
darkness,  vainly  directed  his  fellow-countrymen  to  dumb 
idols  and  to  superstitious  rites,  in  order  to  obtain  peace. 


Mangaia.  A Rain  Storm.  p 192. 


THE  ISLAND  OP  MANGAIA. 


193 


The  history  of  such  a man,  embracing,  as  it  does,  some  forty 
years  of  heathen  life,  and  twenty  years  of  opposition  to  the 
gospel,  and  afterward,  some  few  years  of  gradual  and  effec- 
tual opening  of  his  heart  to  receive  Jesus,  as  his  Lord  and 
Saviour,  is  indeed  a history  of  interest  and  wonder,  that 
will,  in  eternity,  reveal  to  us  the  amazing  sin  and  depravity 
of  man,  and  the  over-abounding  power  and  love  of  God, 
which  passeth  knowledge. 

In  bringing  our  missionary  notices  of  this  island  to  a 
close,  we  cannot  do  so  more  appropriately  than  by  recording 
the  happy  death  of  the  honoured  teacher  who  introduced  the 
gospel  to  the  people ; and  also  that  of  the  native  who  first 
destroyed  the  idols  of  the  island,  and  was  instrumentally  the 
cause  of  the  overthrow  of  the  whole  system  of  heathenism. 

The  father  and  founder  of  this  mission  was  Lavida,  who, 
it  will  be  remembered,  landed  here  in  1824.  During  the 
whole  period  of  his  missionary  life,  he  had  been  a consistent, 
active  man.  In  his  last  illness  he  delighted  to  contrast 
what  Mangaia  now  is,  with  what  it  was,  when  he  came  to 
its  heathen  people;  and  one  day,  speaking  to  the  missionary 
with  all  humility  of  his  labours,  he  inquired,  “ Is  it  right 
for  one  to  adopt  the  language  of  Paul,  and  say,  ‘ I have 
fought  the  good  fight ; I have  finished  my  course’  ? These 
people  were  wild  beasts  when  I came  among  them,  but  the 
sword  of  the  Spirit  subdued  them.  It  was  not  I ; it  was 
God  who  did  it.”  At  another  time,  he  dwelt  with  much 
anxiety  on  the  passage,  “ Lest  that  by  any  means,  when 
I have  preached  the  gospel  to  others,  I myself  should  be  a 
castaway.”  While  disease  was  making  rapid  inroads  upon 
his  body,  a beloved  daughter  died,  after  which  he  sunk  fast. 
“ Do  you  really  know  that  this  is  the  hand  of  death  on 
you  ?”  asked  the  missionaiy.  “ I know  it,”  was  his  reply. 
“ This  is  the  messenger — I shall  soon  go;”  and  seizing  the 
missionary’s  hand,  as  if  resigning  the  earthly  charge  which 
17 


194 


GEMS  FROM  TGE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


he  had  so  honourably  sustained,  he  said,  with  much  anima- 
tion and  emphasis,  “ I go  to  God,  and  to  Christ ! Oh  ! what 
life  ! Oh  ! what  joy  !”  Thus  his  body  died  : devout  men 
carried  it  to  its  burial,  and  made  great  lamentation  over  it, 
but  his  spirit  entered  into  honour,  glory,  and  immortality ! 

This  good  man  landed  on  Mangaia  in  1824,  when  idol- 
atry and  heathenism  were  rampant  in  every  district,  and  the 
whole  population  was  a race  of  the  most  haughty,  despotic, 
cruel  savages,  of  all  the  tribes  of  Eastern  Polynesia.  He 
died  in  1849 ; just  five-and-twenty  years  after  he  commenced 
his  missionary  labours ; and  was  honoured  to  see  the  com- 
plete and  universal  spread  of  Christianity  on  the  island. 
500  members  were  in  consistent  church  communion ; 1600 
children  and  adults  were  under  daily  instruction;  and,  be- 
sides the  evangelists  gone  to  the  heathen  islands,  almost 
3000  miles  away,  there  were  more  than  one  hundred  native 
teachers  in  the  schools,  willingly  and  gratuitously  employing 
themselves  in  teaching  the  generation,  rising  up  to  fill  the 
places  of  their  fathers  ! 

Davida,  the  teacher,  is  now  united  in  glory  with  his  old 
friend  Meduaarutoa,  who  was  formerly  a heathen  priest  and 
warrior,  and  was  the  first  man  on  the  island  who  embraced 
Christianity.  For  nearly  thirty  years  he  was  one  of  the 
most  zealous  and  devoted  fruits  of  the  gospel  among  the 
people  of  Mangaia ; as  a deacon  and  class  teacher,  he  was 
most  efficient ; and  his  occasional  exhortations  were  always 
characterized  with  intelligence,  power,  fervour,  and  energy. 
During  his  last  illness,  his  enlightened  confidence  in  the 
love  and  merits  of  his  exalted  Saviour  was  cheeringly  ex- 
plicit. The  emphatic  motion  of  his  emaciated  hand,  and 
the  reanimation  of  his  dying  eye,  as  he  said,  “ I know  in 
whom  I have  believed,”  were  satisfactory  and  encouraging. 
His  hope  of  a glorious  resurrection  was  unclouded,  and 
his  joy  in  death  often  excited  him  into  ecstatic  expressions 
of  heavenly  gratitude  and  praise. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANGAIA. 


195 


Oh  ! it  is  joyous  to  realize  that  Davida,  and  Meduaarutoa, 
and  Barima,  and  Meduaauti,  and  Ngatae,  and  Tairi,  and 
Simioua,  and  an  untold  number  of  other  Mangaia  worthies, 
are  now  among  the  saints  in  light — having  learnt  more  fully, 
and  are  still  learning,  the  mysteries  of  that  mana,  e te  arou, 
power  and  love  in  salvation,  of  which  they  were  wont  to 
talk  on  earth.  And  it  is  no  less  encouraging  to  rememher^ 
that  there  are  now  living,  Numangatiui,  and  Bokoia,  and 
Sadaraka,  and  Ata,  and  Zacharia,  and  Katuki,  and  others, 
who  by  their  faith,  patience  and  labours,  are  consistently 
discharging  the  duties  of  life ; are  holding  honourable  in- 
tercourse with  the  foreigners  who  call  at  their  shores;  and 
are  sowing  the  seeds  of  Christian  example  and  educa- 
tion, which,  by  God’s  blessing,  shall  spring  up,  and  perpet- 
uate and  extend  the  triumphs  of  the  gospel  for  generations 
to  come.  Even  so.  Lord ! And,  “ Let  the  whole  earth  he 
filled  with  thy  glory.  . Amen  and  Amen.” 


THE. ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


■ CHAPTER  I. 

Aitutaki,  the  third  island  of  the  group  in  size. and  population — The  first 
visited  by  the  Christian  teacher — Mission  commenced,  1821 — Suc- 
cess of  native  teachers — Complete  overthrow  of  idolatry — The 
Camden,  mission  ship,  visits  the  island,  1839 — Location  of  Rev. 
H.  Royle  on  the  island — Wanton  act  of  cruelty  by  a captain  of  an 
English  ship — Fears  of  the  people — Inconsistency  and  laxity  in 
marriage — Evils  of  divorce— Evils  arising  from  hetrothment  of 
children — Missionary  fidelity  and  consequent  troubles — Encourage- 
ment in  schools — Chapel  burnt  down  by  a disaffected  party — Chapel 
rebuilt — An  attempt  to  set  the  whole  settlement  on  fire — New  chap- 
el destroyed — Missionary’s  life  threatened — Successful  issue  of  faith, 
patience,  and  labour. 

The  island  of  Aitutaki  is  situated  150  miles  north  of 
Rarotonga.  It  is  a small  island  enclosed  within  a barrier 
reef,  which,  towards  the  south,  is  nearly  seven  miles  from 
the  beach.  The  land  itself  is  a fertile  little  garden,  rich  in 
every  variety  of  tropical  fruit,  and  its  interesting  people  are 
now  amongst  the  best  educated,  and  most  orderly  of  all  the 
inhabitants  of  the  Ilervey  group  of  islands.  Although 
(196) 


THE  ISLAND  OP  AITUTAKI. 


197 


the  third  island  in  the  group  in  size  and  population,  it  was 
first  to  receive  the  messengers  of  Christianity;  and  although 
in  its  subsequent  history  it  raised  much  opposition  to  the 
purity  of  practical  godliness,  yet  in  later  years  it  has  pro- 
duced, and  is  still  yielding,  some  of  the  brightest  gems  of 
Christian  character  to  be  found  in  the  native  churches. 

In  the  year  1821  the  Rev.  J.  Williams  visited  Aitutaki. 
The  natives  who  came  off  to  his  vessel  were  the  most  wild 
and  savage  he  had  ever  seen.  Some  of  them,  he  says,  were 
tattooed  from  head  to  foot;  some  were  painted  with  pipe- 
clay and  ochre,  others  were  smeared  all  over  with  charcoal ; 
and  all  were  dancing  and  shouting  in  their  canoes,  in  such 
a frantic  manner,  as  quite  bewildered  and  surprised  the 
good  man’s  heart, — for  these  Aitutakians  were  the  first 
heathens  Williams  had  then  seen.  The  chief  of  the  island 
came  off  to  the  missionary  ship,  and  there  he  heard  the 
strange  tale  of  the  total  destruction  of  idols  and  idol  worship 
on  Tahiti — the  overthrow  of  the  dominion  of  Tangaroa, 
and  of  Kongo,  and  of  Oro,  gods  well  known  and  wor- 
shipped by  the  people  of  Aitutaki.  He  was  also  told  of  the 
word  and  knowledge  of  the  true  God  by  which  this  revolu- 
tion had  been  brought  about,  and  was  asked  if  he  would 
receive  on  shore,  and  give  his  protection  to  native  teachers, 
who  had  come  from  Tahiti,  in  order  to  instruct  him  and  his 
people. 

Most  marvellous  to  relate,  the  chief  not  only  offered 
no  opposition,  but  with  much  willingness  and  desire  gave 
an  affirmative  to  the  inquiries  of  the  missionaries : yea,  on 
having  the  teachers  introduced  to  him,  he  seized  them  with 
delight,  and  by  the  ceremony  of  rubbing  noses,  which  con- 
tinued some  time,  he  gave  them  a hearty  welcome.  Thus, 
having  gained  an  entrance  to  the  people,  Papehia  and 
his  companion  Vahapata  commenced  the  work  of  teaching 
Christianity  to  the  people  of  Aitutaki.  Twelve  months  after- 
17* 


198 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


wards,  anotlier  native  evangelist  was  sent  to  the  island,  who 
took  with  him  a supply  of  books  in  the  native  language, 
and  some  school  material ; good  progress  had  been  made 
against  the  old  institutions  of  idolatry  and  heathenism,  but 
the  people  were  evidently  afraid  to  destroy  their  idols — 
lest  some  great  calamity  should  befall  them.  “ Tell  the 
missionary  to  come  to  us,”  they  said  to  the  messenger  who 
was  about  to  return  to  Raiatea,  “ tell  the  missionary  to  come, 
and  we  will  then  burn  our  idols,  destroy  their  temples,  and 
give  ourselves  to  learning  the  word  of  God.” 

With  a view  to  encourage  the  teachers,  and  hoping  to 
gain  access  to  other  islands  of  the  group,  the  missionary 
returned  to  Aitutaki  in  the  second  year  of  its  missionary 
history,  and  to  his  great  surprise  he  found  that  most  of  the 
idols  had  been  destroyed,  that  the  profession  of  Christianity 
was  general,  that  not  a single  idolater  remained  on  the 
whole  island,  and,  that  a chapel  200  feet  long  had  been  built 
by  the  people,  for  the  worship  of  the  true  God  ! Novel, 
romantic,  and  almost  incredible,  is  the  tale  of  triumph 
effected  by  the  labours  of  these  native  teachers,  as  recorded 
by  Williams ; but  it  was  true,  all  true,  and  we  have  in 
the  former  details  of  these  pages  witnessed  the  same  thing 
over  and  over  again,  leading  us  to  exclaim,  “It  is  not  by 
might,  nor  by  power,  but  by  thy  Spirit,  0 Lord ! It  is 
thy  doing,  and  is  marvellous  in  our  eyes.” 

For  eighteen  years,  however,  after  the  introduction  of  the 
gospel,  this  island  was  left  without  the  superintendence  of 
a resident  missionary — occasional  and  hurried  visits  were 
paid  by  some  of  the  fathers  of  the  Tahitian  mission,  as  we 
have  seen  was  the  case  on  Mangaia ; but  its  distance  from 
that  group,  and  the  urgent  duties  of  stations  there,  which 
were  only  then  in  their  infancy,  rendered  it  impracticable 
for  those  missionaries  to  leave  home,  and  withal,  there  was 
no  missionary  ship  then,  in  which  to  visit  the  islands,  but 


... 


•I 

^ 

'<i  ui  fj'i  • \ 

ifitt  ► ' • 


■4, 


• I.: 


«|t  .""  I 
l.Vll  ^ 
^ir.. 

j-tll 


Ih  .1 

‘l.'k  V j- 
l>'''  j • If  i.t-'i’,.',  I 


#S»Iir^.4l  » ' 


.;  w 

V 'u  T...IV;  (U 
ii  1/}'.^^ 

■•<'  nv*.  t/  ..  ,,  I , 

../•  .1:  ■'.  , ,. 

*•'•1  vV'l  » 

« ’ * '#  * 

» ■ V.  ;.oi/ 


{ , > . ..'■ . ■ 

^ ‘ ...ij  ^ • 

".^.  ,’. ' »r  '..  . 

? ■»’>.*  y,,^  — ; ,J-  . ,,-^ 

f ■'  ''  i'  ••  ' frtj; 

’ * '"••■■ri*  . , . 41AT.VI.1.  ..,0^1, 

■*  '>^  ■'>''''V: ■ ' ■ 

•-■  '*  »■  - ih  %ii;  II  . ( . , 

•.xr  -.  .i-i'w.iMf  . :i  L, 

4i.J  ili-  , 


^«|i.{;  (M 
tit'*  ‘«i'I 

>y>!  f- 

V'  J 

' •,  lA  i 

■■  ■ jHi 

' -nr 

il*  * 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


199 


voyages  had  to  be  undertaken  in  small,  uncertain,  trading 
vessels,  and  at  a large  expense. 

In  the  year  1838  the  brig  Camden  was  given,  by  the 
churches  in  England,  to  this  work,  and  in  1839  she  reached 
the  islands,  having  on  board  the  llev.  H.  Koyle,  who  most 
praise-worthily,  and  in  the  spirit  of  self-denial  and  devoted- 
uess  to  the  welfare  of  the  natives,  willingly  adopted  the  life 
of  a solitary  missionary  on  the  lone  island  of  Aitutaki.  lie 
was  accompanied  thither  by  the  Rev.  A.  Buzacott,  who 
rendered  him  much  assistance  in  getting  an  introduction  to 
the  people.  Just  before  the  arrival  of  the  missionary  ship 
at  Aitutaki,  however,  the  natives  had  been  much  harassed 
and  annoyed  by  the  unjust  and  cruel  conduct  of  a captain 
of  an  English  ship,  which  caused  them  to  look  with  suspicion 
on  the  Camden,  as  she  approached  their  shores.  The 
captain  referred  to,  had  brought  home  a native  sailor,  whose 
wife  and  family  were  still  living,  and  who  did  not  wish 
again  to  return  to  sea ; this  much  displeased  the  captain, 
and  he  determined  to  be  avenged  of  the  authorities,  who 
could  not  see  it  their  duty  to  interfere  in  the  matter.  A 
substitute  for  the  sailor  was  provided,  who  was  being 
taken  off  to  the  ship,  but  before  he  could  reach  it,  the  irri- 
tated man  came  near  the  reef,  and  opened  fire  with  his 
guns  on  the  island.  The  first  shot,  striking  the  shore, 
bounded,  and,  proceeding  in  the  direction  of  the  chiefs 
house,  struck  a branch  of  a cocoa-nut  tree,  and  was  stopped 
by  a large  tree  only  within  a few  yards  of  the  spot  where 
the  chief  and  a number  of  his  household  were  sitting  in  con- 
sultation. The  afiFrighted  people  hastened  their  flight  to  an 
inland  fastness,  but  while  ascending  the  hill,  a second  shot 
was  fired  over  the  village,  which  providentially  missed  its 
mark,  and  entered  into  the  side  of  the  hill,  some  two  feet  deep. 
Not  knowing  the  mission  ship  on  its  approach  to  the  island, 
the  morning  after  the  above  affair,  the  people  supposed  it 


200 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


to  be  their  enemy,  and  when  the  brethren  landed,  they 
found  many  of  them  assembled  in  the  chapel,  holding  a 
prayer  meeting,  who  were  prepared  for  an  immediate  flight, 
should  another  attack  be  made  on  their  villas:e.  Nothing 
could  be  more  wanton  than  this  conduct,  and  nothing  more 
reprehensible  : the  captain  had  been  on  shore  some  days — 
trading  with  the  natives,  who  were  honest  and  obliging  to 
him,  and  with  whom  the  alfair,  of  which  he  felt  aggrieved, 
might  have  been  honourably  adjusted. 

Besides  this  calamity,  not  the  best  adapted  to  secure  for 
the  foreign  missionary  a kind  reception,  the  greater  portion 
of  the  natives  themselves  were  found  to  be  in  a state  of 
social  and  domestic  disquietude.  Many  inconsistencies  of 
opinion  and  practice  had  grown  upon  the  teachers — foreign 
sailors,  disafliected  to  missionary  purposes,  had  entered  into 
family  relationship  with  some  of  the  clans  j and  while  the 
early  teachers  of  this  island  had  succeeded  in  inducing  the 
people  generally  to  observe  the  marriage  form  and  vow,  in 
opposition  to  the  loose  immoralities  connected  with  their 
heathen  life,  yet,  both  the  form  and  the  vow  were  alike  in- 
effectual in  securing  that  sacred  ordinance  from  profanation, 
inasmuch  as  the  chief  had  introduced,  and  the  teachers  had 
sanctioned,  a system  of  divorce,  which  was  so  lax,  that  a 
man  might  marry  one  day,  and  upon  the  most  trivial  excuse, 
be  sanctioned  by  law  to  break  the  marriage  vow  on  the  next. 
IMoreover,  and  beyond  these  evils,  the  heathen  system  of 
betrothment  of  children  in  their  infancy  was  allowed  not 
only  to  remain,  but  practically  was  recognized  and  joined  to 
the  forms  of  Christianity  instituted  on  the  island.  Scarcely 
on  any  island  left  to  native  teachers  have  we  known  so  many 
trying  evils  to  have  prevailed.  There  were,  happily,  many 
fine  exceptions  to  this  character,  but  such  was  the  condition 
of  the  mass  of  the  people,  that  the  first  few  years  of  mis- 
sionary labour  among  them  were  years  of  pain,  persecution, 
and  jeopardy. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


201 


The  missionary  was  called  upon  in  the  midst  of  these 
evils  to  “ set  his  face  as  a flint,”  and  to  publish  the  re([uire- 
ments  of  the  gospel,  “■  whether  the  people  would  hear,  or 
whether  they  forbore.”  In  the  schools,  in  his  public  preach- 
ing, and  in  the  church,  he  felt  himself  to  be  set  for  a ivit- 
ness  against  the  sins  of  the  people,  and  sought  grace  from 
his  Divine  Master,  to  enable  him  to  bear  the  severe  trials  to 
which  he  was  sure  such  a course  would  expose  him.  Writ- 
ing at  this  time,  he  says: — “My  situation,  owing  to  these 
matters,  has  lately  been  so  trying,  that  but  for  daily  grace 
to  abide  by  my  determination  to  speak  the  truth,  and  to 
secure  peace  only  by  reformation,  I should  long  ago  have 
been  thrown  ofl"  my  balance,  and  have  abandoned  myself  to 
despair.  It  would  be  easy  to  render  myself  popular,  and  to 
secure  the  applause  of  the  populace,  but  I must  not  com- 
promise. I see  in  the  first  missionaries  of  the  cross,  how 
they  excluded  from  their  consideration  the  principles  of 
expediency,  and  how  boldly  they  acted  upon  the  principle 
of  indifference  alike  to  the  frowns  and  the  favour  of  men.” 
Acting  out  these  high,  holy  principles,  the  missionary,  in  the 
midst  of  such  moral  evil  and  lax  government  by  which  he 
was  then  surrounded,  soon  found  the  whole  community, 
with  but  few  exceptions,  set  on  fire  against  him;  some  even 
who  professed  sympathy  and  attachment  employed  the 
basest  means  to  slander  his  reputation,  to  misrepresent  his 
motives,  and  to  fan  the  prejudice  and  discontent  of  the  mob 
into  a devouring  flame.  It  is  really  astounding  to  witness 
the  heights  to  which  the  wickedness  of  these  times  was  per- 
mitted to  rise.  The  chief  and  people,  at  the  instigation  of 
white  men  living  on  shore,  even  summoned  the  missionary 
to  appear  before  their  tribunal,  to  disprove,  if  he  could, 
statements  made  by  them  respecting  his  character,  office, 
and  the  objects  of  his  mission.  This  was  no  doubt  done  to 
give  an  appearance  of  truth  to  the  falsehoods  they  chose  to 


202 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


circulate  among  the  people,  for  they  doubtless  knew  that  the 
missionary  would  treat  such  a summons  with  the  disregard 
it  deserved. 

Wickedness  had  now  gained  a triumphant  position,  it 
reigned  over  and  ruled  the  entire  populace,  so  that  with  a 
view  to  induce  the  missionary  to  leave  the  island,  a deputa- 
tion of  the  most  influential  men  waited  on  him,  and  stated 
plainly  that  they  needed  no  missionary  to  reside  amongst 
them,  that  there  was  nothing  new  to  be  learnt,  and  that  the 
sooner  he  left  the  island  the  better ! 

But  encouraged  by  a faithful  and  sympathizing  few,  in 
whom  he  could  repose  entire  confidence,  and  receiving  as- 
sistance from  on  high,  he  heeded  but  little  the  opposition 
he  must  have  felt  so  keenly.  He  saw  their  ignorance,  he 
mourned  over  their  folly,  and  according  to  strength  given 
him,  he  addressed  himself  to  the  real  duties  of  his  work. 
With  all  Christian  affection  he  preached  the  practice  as  well 
as  the  doctrines  of  Christianity;  with  a view  to  train  up  a 
useful  class  of  teachers  for  the  schools,  he  met  for  daily 
instruction  a number  of  young  men  and  women,  of  good 
ability,  and  who  were  desirous  to  be  taught,  and  before  the 
end  of  his  first  year  on  the  island,  he  had  the  pleasure  of 
seeing  a school  of  no  less  than  220  children  in  regular  at- 
tendance : but  as  order  and  discipline  were  introduced,  this 
number  was  soon  lessened;  still,  however,  it  became  evident 
that  good  principles  and  purity  were  gaining  ground.  Daily 
instruction  and  example,  without  being  too  contentious  with 
the  wicked,  introduced  light  and  power  to  the  community, 
and  a check  was  given  to  previously  advancing  evils.  But 
the  victory  of  truth  was  not  yet : further  struggles  awaited 
both  it  and  its  votaries. 

The  solitary  missionary,  with  his  wife,  had  retired  to  rest 
one  beautiful  moonlight  night,  when  the  sea-breezes  were 
sweeping  overland  with  more  than  usual  freshness.  On  a 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


203 


sudden  a furious  yell  of  many  mingled  voices  was  heard  from 
the  settlement,  and  the  elements  were  lighted  up  with  a 
fierce  lurid  glai’e;  the  missionary,  in  deepest  anguish  of 
spirit,  and  fear  for  personal  safety,  hastened  to  ascertain  the 
cause.  Alas  ! alas ! the  large  chapel  of  the  village  was  in 
flames,  and  in  a few  hours  it  was  entirely  reduced  to  ashes  ! 
The  reader  will  do  well  to  realize,  as  far  as  he  can,  the 
bodily  danger,  and  mental  anguish  of  a lone  missionary  in 
such  a situation,  on  a small  island  not  fifteen  miles  in  cir- 
cumference, and  no  other  land  in  sight  across  the  vast  ex- 
panse of  sea  by  which  it  is  surrounded.  The  destruction 
of  the  chapel  was  intended  as  a threat  to  the  missionary, 
but  still,  faithful  to  his  trust,  he  continued  to  preach  to  the 
ungrateful  people.  The  following  Sabbath  was  a day  of 
distress  to  the  few  who  were  anxious  to  receive  Christian  in- 
struction. On  the  sea-beach,  under  the  shade  of  the  cocoa- 
nut  trees,  a congregation  was  assembled,  and  the  words  of 
gospel  warning  and  admonition  were  delivered;  and  for 
awhile  the  passions  of  the  disaffected  subsided.  Availing 
themselves  of  this  temporary  peace,  and  protected  by  the 
arm  of  native  law,  which  was  now  enforced  for  the  punish- 
ment of  all  persons  detected  in  wantonly  disturbing  the 
peace,  the  Christian  party  rebuilt  their  chapel;  thus  encou- 
raged, the  missionary  continued  his  labours,  and  although 
he  was  much  opposed,  yet  the  numbers  of  his  attached  friends 
increased. 

Not  many  months,  however,  had  passed  away,  when  one 
night,  during  the  rage  of  a violent  thunder-storm,  the  con- 
tinued and  vivid  lightning  of  which  gave  the  surrounding 
sea  an  appearance  of  an  ocean  of  boiling  blue  flame — in  the 
midst  of  these  raging  elements  the  house  of  the  chief  judge 
was  set  on  fire,  and  the  whole  settlement  was  thrown  in  im- 
mediate confusion,  which  had  scarcely  subsided  before  an- 
other large  house  in  a different  part  of  the  station  was  seen 


204 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


to  be  in  the  same  condition.  Yells  of  destraction  vocife- 
rated from  a thousand  voices,  mingled  with  cries  for  retalia- 
tion ; and  nothing  hut  the  presence  and  the  advice  of  the 
missionary  prevented  the  whole  population  from  rising  up 
that  night,  in  general  war,  and  revenge  on  each  other, 
which  would  have  been  alike  ruinous  to  the  mission,  and 
fatal  to  the  future  welfare  of  the  island. 

From  this  time,  for  some  months,  every  week  witnessed 
repeated  deeds  of  daring  outrage  on  the  habitations  of  the 
party,  who,  although  persecuted,  continued  to  increase  in 
number  and  attachment  to  the  cause  of  Christianity;  and 
had  it  not  been  that  a night  guard  was  kept  around  the 
missionary’s  house,  it  also  would,  no  doubt,  have  shared  the 
fate  of  others. 

In  the  midst  of  all  these  disasters,  the  Christians  built  a 
large  new  chapel  of  lime  and  wattle-work,  capable  of  con- 
taining more  than  a thousand  people.  This  building  was 
opened  with  thankfulness  and  joy,  but  not  without  some 
apprehensions  for  its  safety.  Sabbath  after  Sabbath  the 
forenoon  service  was  well  attended,  and  the  evening  service 
gave  indications  of  an  improved  state  of  feeling  in  reference 
to  the  cause  of  truth  and  order. 

But  alas  ! many  months  had  not  passed  by,  before  one 
night,  this  new  building  was  also  in  flames.  The  mis- 
sionary, in  his  desire  to  save  it,  if  possible,  from  total  de- 
struction, hastened  to  the  spot,  and  had  only  time  to  escape, 
when  the  roof  fell  in  with  an  awful  crash,  and  long  before 
the  morning  light  had  dawned,  the  newly  erected  house  of 
prayer  was  a ruin  ! 

Suspended  on  a tree,  near  where  the  chapel  stood,  there 
was  found  a notice  written  on  paper,  in  the  Tahitian  lan- 
guage, u-sing  the  most  violent  threats  against  the  Christian 
party ; asserting  that  it  was  of  no  avail  to  continue  their 
attempt  to  secure  peace,  that  those  who  had  set  fire  to  the 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


205 


chapel  had  vowed  destruction  to  the  missionary’s  house,  and 
also  to  murder  him.  Under  these  trying  circumstances,  it 
was  supposed  that  the  missionary  would  leave  the  island — a 
number  of  the  chiefs  and  landholders  waited  on  him  to 
know  his  intention,  to  whom  he  replied,  “ that  he  had  no 
intention  whatever  of  leaving  them  : but  that,  by  the  help 
of  God,  he  meant  to  abide  by  the  end  of  the  persecution, 
whatever  that  might  be.” 

For  some  time  afterward,  public  services  for  worship  and 
instruction  were  held  in  the  open  air ; and  by  these  and  other 
means,  the  missionary  gave  himself  wholly  to  educating 
those  adults  and  children  who  were  disposed  to  attend  the 
schools.  A few  of  the  ringleaders  of  the  late  troubles  were 
detected,  and  one  of  them  was  banished  the  island  : faith, 
and  patience,  and  self-denying  labour  had  their  beneficial 
influence  on  the  people,  and  although  the  trials  of  this 
station  continued  numerous  and  severe,  yet  the  missionary 
and  his  faithful  few  were  able  to  rise  above  them ; and  in 
the  subsequent  chapters  of  this  narrative,  it  will  be  our 
pleasing  task  to  notice  the  many  and  substantial  tokens  of 
God’s  favour  which  now  rest  upon  them,  and  which  dis- 
tinguish the  present  inhabitants  of  Aitutaki  for  intelli- 
gence, order,  activity,  and  Christian  character,  not  to  be 
excelled  on  any  island  in  the  Pacific  Ocean.  In  weakness 
they  have  been  made  strong, — and  they  are  now  more  than 
conquerors  over  their  enemies,  through  Him,  whose  name 
was  their  tower  and  joy,  in  the  day  of  their  calamity. 

18 


CHAPTER  II. 


Effects  of  a storm  on  the  island — Many  of  the  most  abandoned  characters 
reclaimed — Deaths  of  some  of  the  missionary’s  early  native  friends 
— Illness  of  the  missionary’s  wife— Visit  to  Rarotonga — Mutual  re- 
joicing of  the  natives  of  both  islands — A speech  of  an  Aitutakian — 
State  of  the  island  in  1846 — Some  reasons  why  a mission  ship  is 
needed  for  the  islands — Missionary’s  ill  treatment  on  board  a ship — 
His  danger — Another  voyage — Misconduct  of  seamen — A vessel 
wrecked  on  the  reef  of  the  island — Disorder  introduced  on  shore  by 
the  crew — European  missionaries  for  some  time  required  at  stations 
visited  by  ships — The  mission  advances — Pleasing  instance  of  a 
young  Christian. 


After  about  twelve  months’  prosperity,  the  island  of 
Aitutaki  was  laid  prostrate  by  a hurricane ; the  sea  rose  f;ir 
above  its  usual  bounds;  large  trees,  which  had  apparently 
stood  for  ages,  were  torn  up  by  the  roots ; many  houses  were 
destroyed ; two  chapels  and  school  houses  were  blown  down, 
and  the  food  plantations  were  entirely  devastated.  So  scarce 
was  native  provision  after  this  calamity,  that  many  of  the 
people  had  to  subsist  on  the  roots  of  various  shrubs  and 
trees — which  are  only  resorted  to  in  extreme  cases  of 
famine;  but  while  in  the  midst  of  these  troubles,  the  heart 
of  the  missionary  was  cheered  and  encouraged  by  an  in- 
gathering to  the  church  of  God,  of  some  of  the  most 
wicked  and  abandoned  characters  on  the  island.  No  fewer 
(206) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


207 


than  fourteen  of  such  were  in  one  year  convinced  of  sin, 
and  enlightened  in  heart,  who  by  a consistent  Christian  life 
and  conversation,  proved  the  genuineness  of  the  change 
which  they  professed  to  have  undergone. 

Two  of  these  had  been  special  ringleaders  in  the  destruc- 
tions noticed  in  the  preceding  chapter,  and  had  sought  to 
destroy  the  life  and  the  property  of  the  missionary.  In 
speaking  of  them,  the  rewarded  Christian  teacher  says,  “I 
shall  not  soon  forget  the  emotions  with  which  the  members 
of  the  church  listened  to  their  confessions  of  sin  and  guilt; 
and  from  my  own  eyes,  I am  not  ashamed  to  confess,  they 
drew  copious  floods  of  tears.”  These  converts  learned  to 
read  well,  and  one  of  them  became  a useful  teacher  in  the 
boys’  school ! This  class  of  natives,  it  will  easily  be  ima- 
gined, were  looked  upon  by  the  missionary  with  peculiar 
interest.  In  the  days  of  their  ignorance,  when  they  little 
understood  the  benevolent  intentions  which  actuated  him, 
or  the  genius  of  the  gospel  which  he  taught,  they  had  done 
many  evil  deeds ; but  now  they  were  as  docile  as  they  were 
formerly  wild,  as  truthful  as  they  were  formerly  deceitful, 
and  as  useful  as  they  were  formerly  injurious. 

About  this  time  the  missionary  was  called  to  mourn  over 
the  death  of  many  who  had  been  amongst  his  faithful  and 
unwavering  friends  from  the  commencement  of  the  mission; 
but  it  was  his  joy  to  see  such  gathered  into  the  garner  of 
the  Lord,  as  corn  fully  ripe.  One  of  these  was  an  impor- 
tant individual  on  the  island, — a chief,  of  considerable  rank  : 
his  natural  disposition  was  proud,  hasty,  and  resentful;  but 
he  had  become  humble,  forbearing,  and  kind.  When  near 
death,  the  missionary  asked  him  if  he  thought  he  had  done 
anything  to  merit  eternal  life.  His  only  reply  was  “ a flood 
of  tears  which  accompanied  a most  emphatic  negative  shake 
of  the  head ;”  and  afterwards,  he  said,  “ Neither  is  there 
salvation  in  any  other,  for  there  is  no  other  name  uuder 


208 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


heaven  given  among  men  -whereby  we  must  be  saved.”  This 
was  the  last  time  he  spoke  so  as  to  be  understood.  He  died 
in  peace,  a trophy  of  redeeming  grace,  and  entered  into  the 
rest  and  glory  of  the  people  of  God. 

In  the  month  of  May,  1843,  we  visited  this  island,  and 
saw  the  early  fruits  of  Mr.  Hoyle’s  devoted  labours.  We 
had  heard  much  of  the  improvement  of  the  islanders,  hut  the 
half  had  not  been  told  us.  In  the  settlements  and  houses, 
the  persons  and  manners  of  the  natives,  we  were  pleased  to 
see  the  total  absence  of  every  thing  which  characterized 
their  former  savage  rudeness.  The  schools  received  the 
daily  personal  attention  of  the  missionary  j and  upwards  of 
one  hundred  members  were  united  in  church  communion  ; 
in  whose  lives  the  principles  of  Christianity  were  exemplarily 
illustrated. 

The  health  of  the  missionary’s  wife  now  failed ; and  relief 
from  labour,  with  change  of  air  and  circumstances,  was 
deemed  essential  to  her  recovery ; but  the  visits  of  whalers 
and  merchant  ships  to  this  beautiful,  yet  lonely  spot,  were 
uncertain,  and  a passage  in  them  expensive ; the  natives, 
therefore,  built  a small  schooner,  with  a view  to  bring  her  to 
Earotonga.  Happily,  however,  before  it  was  completed,  a 
kind-hearted  American  captain  called  at  the  island,  and, 
by  giving  the  mission  family  a passage  in  his  ship,  relieved 
their  anxieties. 

Many  of  the  natives  followed  their  teacher  to  Earotonga, 
and  there  had  intercourse  with  native  Christian  brethren,  of 
whom  they  had  often  heard,  but  had  not  had  much  inter- 
course subsequent  to  the  first  year  of  the  mission  on  the 
islands.  During  their  stay  at  Earotonga  it  was  pleasing  to 
see  Papehia  and  Tapaeru,  and  these  Aitutakian  worthies, 
often  grouped  together,  talking  of  the  incidents  of  their 
early  life,  and  especially  remembering  those  facts  of  their 
history  which  we  have  recorded  in  the  narrative  of  Ihiro- 


Tire  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


209 


tonga.  At  a public  meeting,  held  to  give  welcome  to  the 
strangers,  one  of  the  Aitutakians,  an  old  man,  addressed 
the  assembly  as  follows  : — “ Brethren, — Let  us  praise  God 
that  we,  who  once  lived  in  idolatry  on  Aitutaki  and  llaro- 
tonga,  are  now  worshippers  of  Jehovah,  the  true  God.  Oh 
the  love  of  God  ! How  great  it  is  ! Let  us  rejoice  that 
we  are  met  together  to-day  to  talk  about  that  love.  We 
have  been  brought  across  the  soft  path  of  the  sea,  and 
now  in  this  house  of  prayer,  we  look  at  each  other  with 
wonder.  We,  the  old  people,  know  the  dreadful  state  from 
which  we  have  been  redeemed.  Let  us  talk  to-day ; do  not 
let  the  young  men  speak  ; but  let  us  old  men  rise  up  and  tell 
what  the  evangelia  a Jesii  has  done  for  us.  Brethren,  my 
heart  is  full.  Suppose  we  at  Aitutaki  had  built  a vessel  in 
our  heathenism  and  had  come  to  you.  IIow  should  we  have 
been  treated  ? What  would  have  been  the  result  ? We 
should  have  been  murdered,  and  you  would  have  taken  our 
property  and  ship  as  your  own.  But  how  ditferent  is  it  with 
us  now  ! We  are  safe,  our  property  is  safe,  and  you  call  us 
brethren  ! All  this  comes  out  of  the  love  of  God.  The 
great  sea  we  have  crossed  is  become  a sea  of  love ; the  air 
we  breathe  is  full  of  love ; from  the  top  of  the  mountains, 
down  to  the  belt  of  the  lowland,  is  all  encircled  with  love ; 
the  church  of  Aitutaki  is  come  to  salute  the  church  at 
llarotonga,  and  you  have  embraced  us  in  love.  Brethren, 
let  us  praise  God ; he  is  the  author  of  this." 

These  delighted  and  grateful  people  returned  to  their  own 
island  home  refreshed  in  heart,  and  strengthened  for  the  dis- 
charge of  its  civil,  social,  and  Christian  duties:  In  the  year 

184G  we  again  visited  them,  and  whilst  there  were  still  trials 
and  anxieties  connected  with  the  discharge  of  missionary 
work,  yet  nothing  was  more  palpable  than  the  advance  which 
the  people  had  made  in  every  department  of  general  know- 
ledge and  practical  Christianity.  We  had  not  been  lung  on 


210 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


shore  when  a native  came  to  invite  us  to  dine  at  his  house. 
On  inquiring  the  occasion  of  the  feast,  we  learnt  that  he  had 
just  finished  building  a stone  house  for  himself,  and  that, 
according  to  their  practice,  he  wished  to  have  a religious 
service  of  prayer,  praise,  and  exhortation  there,  before 
he  and  his  family  took  up  their  abode  in  it.  Accompanied 
by  Mr.  Royle,  we  went  to  this  service,  and  were  highly 
pleased  with  every  portion  of  it.  In  the  afternoon  of  the 
same  day,  we  held  a public  missionary  meeting  in  the 
chapel  of  the  largest  settlement.  It  was  a fine  stone 
building,  and  1800  persons  were  present  j Rev.  T.  Heath 
gave  an  account  of  the  Tahitian  mission  j the  Rev.  G.  Stal- 
worthy  gave  an  account  of  his  long  residence  on  the  Mar- 
quesa  islands ; others  spoke  of  our  projected  voyage  to 
Western  Polynesia ; and  many  of  the  natives  encouraged 
each  other  to  prayer  and  contributions  for  the  sending  the 
word  of  God  to  heathen  lands. 

With  a view  to  show  the  importance  of  having  a ship  in 
those  seas  exclusively  devoted  to  the  service  of  the  mission, 
we  will  narrate  a fact  or  two  connected  with  missionary 
voyages  from  island  to  island  in  other  ships.  The  missionary 
had  on  one  occasion  been  waiting  some  time  on  a neighbour- 
ing island  an  opportunity  to  be  conveyed  to  Aitutaki.  At 
length  one  occurred ; and  agreeing  to  give  a fair  remunera- 
tion, it  was  gladly  embraced;  but  it  was  attended  with 
circumstances  of  discredit  to  the  captain,  and  danger  to  the 
missionary,  which  had  a most  injurious  effect  on  the  minds 
of  the  natives.  Insult  was  added  to  unkindness  by  the 
parties  on  board  towards  the  man  and  his  family,  who  were 
devoting  themselves  for  the  welfare  of  the  islanders,  and 
who,  apart  from  spiritual  blessings  conveyed  by  his  instruc- 
tion, was  training  them  to  hold  honest  and  kind  commercial 
relations  with  captains  and  crews  of  every  nation  that  might 
call  at  their  island  home.  Arriving  off  the  entrance  into 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


211 


the  lagoon,  they  found  the  sea  so  much  troubled  as  to  render 
landing  almost  impossible.  Uncomfortable,  however,  as  cir- 
cumstances were  on  board  the  ship,  yet,  for  the  sake  of  life, 
the  missionary  proposed  to  lay  off  until  the  next  day ; this 
being  opposed,  he  signified  his  willingness  to  be  taken  on  to 
the  port  whither  the  vessel  was  bound,  but  this  also  was  for- 
bidden, and  he  was  reluctantly  compelled  to  descend  into 
the  boat,  and  to  attempt  a landing.  On  reaching  the  reef, 
the  surf  was  rising  so  high,  and  its  foam  so  great,  that 
another  effort  was  made  to  prevent  what  appeared  to  be  a 
most  presumptuous  act : pointing  towards  the  direction  of 
the  break  in  the  reef,  through  which  the  boat  had  to  pass, 
“ Do  you  think  you  can  enter  now  you  see  the  real  state  of 
the  sea?”  inquired  the  missionary,  who  was  tremblingly 
anxious  for  the  sake  of  his  wife  and  children,  who  were  with 
him  in  the  boat.  “ I mean  to  try,”  was  the  answer  of  the 
man  who  had  charge  of  the  boat;  and  instantly  he  ordered 
the  crew  to  pull  smartly,  but  a mighty  billow  swept  half 
across  them,  their  oars  were  as  useless  as  straws,  and,  gun- 
wale deep  under  water,  they  were  taken  many  yards  out 
to  sea.  “ Take  us  back  to  the  ship,”  the  missionary  said ; 
“we  dare  not  make  another  attempt  to  land  in  the  present 
state  of  the  surf.”  “ I will  not  detain  the  ship,”  was  the 
reply;  “ You  must  land  1”  By  this  time  a numerous  body 
of  natives  had  come  to  the  reef,  some  of  whom  swam  off 
to  the  boat,  and,  finding  that  the  captain  had  made  up  his 
mind  not  to  wait  a few  hours,  they,  at  the  risk  of  their  own 
lives,  rendered  all  assistance  in  their  power,  and  mercifully, 
yea,  almost  miraculously,  the  mission  party  got  on  shore 
alive. 

On  another  occasion,  this  good  man  was  returning  to  his 
island  home  on  Aitutaki  from  a missionary  visit  to  an  island 
of  the  group,  more  than  a hundred  miles  distant,  and  had 
to  endure  trials  and  dangers  which  we  cannot  do  better  than 


212 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


give  in  his  own  language.  ‘‘I  cannot  say  how  long,  hut  it 
was  many  hours  after  we  left  the  shore,”  he  says,  “ before 
we  reached  the  vessel;  and  when  we  went  on  board  we 
found  the  mate,  part  of  the  crew,  and  some  of  the  passen- 
gers, were  in  a state  of  intoxication.  We  were  nine  days 
and  nights  making  a passage  which,  by  proper  order  and 
management,  ought  to  have  been  made  in  thirty  hours.  Dur- 
ing these  nine  nights  I do  not  think  I was  two  hours  below 
in  the  cabin.  In  fact,  it  was  some  time  before  any  cabin 
accommodation  at  all  could  be  gained  for  us,  and,  when 
gained,  I used  nightly  to  see  my  family  into  their  berths, 
and  then  return  on  deck,  where  I sought  rest  for  my  weary 
limbs,  but  where  my  mind  was  frequently  and  severely 
pained  by  the  most  obscene  language  ever  uttered  by  human 
tongues.  The  captain  expressed  himself  much  pained  on 
our  account,  but  could  do  nothing  to  prevent,  and  very  little 
to  alleviate  our  circumstances.  We  must  have  passed  Aitu- 
taki  the  second  night  we  were  on  board,  but  the  excesses  of 
the  people  led  to  its  not  being  seen.”  These  notices  require 
no  comment;  they  will  show  that  apart  from  the  direct 
service  rendered  by  the  missionary  ship  in  opening  new 
fields  of  labour  on  heathen  lands,  its  character  and  service 
are  almost  essential  to  the  well-being,  if  not  to  the  continued 
existence  of  our  older  missions. 

Escaping  from  these  troubles  at  sea,  the  missionai’y  of 
Aitutaki  was  about  this  time  called  to  endure  another 
severe  trial,  not  so  much  from  the  natives  as  from  foreigners 
cast  on  their  shores.  On  his  return  from  one  of  his  visit- 
ations to  the  small  islands,  he  found  a beautiful  large  new 
ship,  lying  broadside  on  the  reef,  a complete  wreck.  One 
unfortunate  sailor  had  been  lost,  and  upwards  of  forty  were 
let  loose,  the  missionary  writes,  on  this  small  island,  who 
gave  themselves  up  every  day  to  drunkenness,  and  who  in 
their  ill-judged  kindness  freely  distributed  wines  and  all 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITDTiiKI. 


213 


kinds  of  ardent  spirits  amongst  the  natives.  To  an  infiint 
mission,  scareely  yet  consolidated  in  its  social  or  civil  in- 
stitutions, nothing  can  be  more  injurious  than  these  evils 
from  without.  There  are  many  Christian  native  commu- 
nities now  in  a flourishing  and  progressive  state,  entirely 
under  the  care  of  native  pastors,  and  which,  but  for  inter- 
course with  foreigners,  might  be  left  to  themselves  with 
safety,  but  who,  having  to  contend  with  evils  arising  out  of 
that  intercourse,  must  for  years  to  come  have  the  presence 
and  superintendence  of  an  European  missionary.  It  will 
be  well  for  the  friends  of  Christian  missions  to  the  heathen, 
to  think  about  these  facts ; and  while  they  desire  to  see 
native  stations  self-provided,  and  self-sustaining,  not  to 
expect  or  urge  a premature  withdrawment  of  foreign  agency 
and  assistance. 

We  have  seen  in  this  chapter  a glimpse,  and  only  a 
glimpse,  of  the  trials  which  arise  to  a missionary  at  an 
infant  station,  from  influences  from  without.  More  might 
be  said;  but  we  trust  the  above  will  be  sufiiciently  sug- 
gestive, and  lead  to  some  practical  results.  It  is  however 
cheering  to  turn  aside  from  the  contemplation  of  such  hin- 
drances, and  on  the  other  hand  to  witness  the  positive 
advance  of  Christianity  beyond  the  limit  of  its  first  suc- 
cesses. Such  is  the  case  on  Aitutaki.  In  every  depart- 
ment of  missionary  labour  on  this  island,  there  was,  despite 
all  the  foregoing  troubles,  positive  advance  and  improve- 
ment each  year,  which  cheered  and  encouraged  the  faithful 
labourer.  Nowhere,  however,  was  this  more  visible  than  in 
the  schools ; to  these  the  missionary  and  teachers  daily 
gave  their  best  and  undivided  attention,  and  they  were 
permitted  to  see  the  fruits  of  their  toils. 

Speaking  of  One  young  woman  who  was  prepared,  instru- 
mentally,  by  those  instructions,  to  leave  earth  for  heaven, 
the  missionary  says,  “ She  was  marked  by  death  as  an  early 


214 


OEMS  FUOM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


victim  for  the  tomb.  She  had  long  been  in  the  habit  of 
attending  my  select  Bible-class,  and  her  attendance  was  not 
ill  vain  ; like  Lydia,  her  heart  was  opened,  and  she  was 
directed  to  Jesus,  whom  she  received  as  her  Saviour.  She 
was  devotedly  attached  to  the  divine  ordinances,  and  fre- 
quently have  I seen  her,  seated  against  the  trunk  of  a tree, 
quite  exhausted  in  her  attempts  to  reach  the  house  of  God. 
Alluding  to  a native  practice  of  friends  bringing  presents 
of  cloth  and  other  things  when  they  visit  the  sick,  she  said, 

‘ Tell  them,  I do  not  wish  for  property  ; — a word,  a prayer, 
an  exhortation,  I will  value  more  than  all  the  property  they 
can  bring.’  She  was  comparatively  a child  in  years,  but 
had  attained  a maturity  in  Christian  knowledge  and  expe- 
rience. When  near  death,  she  said,  ‘ I have  visited  the 
cross — there  I have  been  able  to  leave  my  burdens.’  Oh  ! 
how  sweet  these  words  : ‘ He  bore  our  sins,  and  carried  our 
sorrows — Jesus  is  my  anchor;  Jesus  is  my  refuge;  Jesus  is 
my  all ! Peace  be  with  you,  my  teacher  !’  ” 

Such  testimonies  as  these  do  give  peace  to  the  Christian 
teacher;  a peace  which,  through  grace,  enables  him  to  be 
calm  in  the  midst  of  trial,  toil,  and  persecution ; these  are 
his  joy  here,  and  the  crown  of  his  rejoicing  hereafter,  when 
he  will  present  them  to  the  Saviour  as  the  eternal  trophies 
of  his  own  free  and  boundless  grace. 


CHAPTER  III. 


An  American  whale  ship  wrecked  on  the  island — A native  letter  of  re- 
port— The  captain’s  testimony — Contrast  in  the  cruelty  of  natives  of 
a heathen  island — Missionary  encouragements — The  church  the 
keystone  of  society — State  of  the  two  stations  on  the  island — Mis- 
sionary’s wife — Maternal  Association — Numbers  in  school — Mission- 
ary zeal  of  the  native  church — Its  members  gone  to  heathen  lands 
— Devastation  of  a storm  in  ISo-t — Gratifying  instance  of  native 
kindness  and  concern  for  the  mission  family — Ravages  of  measles 
on  the  island — Practical  Christianity  of  the  natives — Their  mission- 
ary contributions — Conclusion. 


In  order  to  illustrate  the  honesty  and  business-like  habits 
of  the  natives  of  this  island,  we  have  now  to  record  circum- 
stances which  attended  the  wreck  of  an  American  whale 
ship,  which  occurred  prior  to  that  mentioned  in  the  last 
chapter.  The  vessel  was  homeward  bound  from  the  Sand- 
wich islands,  and  full  of  oil.  Coming  between  the  islands 
of  the  Hervey  groups,  the  currents  carried  the  ship  beyond 
the  captain’s  reckoning ; and  on  a dark  and  squally  night 
she  struck  on  the  reef,  which  extends  .some  miles  off  shore ; 
the  sea  was  rough,  and  the  surf  broke  violently  over  tbe 
wreck,  so  that  in  a very  short  time  the  noble  vessel  was 
shattered  to  pieces.  Of  her  five  boats,  only  two  remained, 
and  in  these  the  crew  reached  the  shore,  thankful  that  the 

(215) 


216 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


accident  had  not  occurred  on  a heathen  island.  The  natives 
rendered  every  assistance  to  the  shipwrecked  mariners,  and 
aided  them  in  saving  a good  portion  of  their  property.  On 
leaving  the  island,  the  native  authorities  gave  the  captain  a 
document,  written  by  one  of  their  number,  to  the  owners  of 
the  ship.  It  was  as  follows  : — 

‘‘Sirs — the  owners  of  the  ship  which  is  now  a wreck 
here.  We  make  known  to  you  the  circumstances.  When 
we  arose  early  in  the  morning  the  ship  was  completely 
broken  up.  We  then  hastened  to  the  assistance  of  the  crew, 
and  found  them  all  safe.  A part  only  of  the  cargo  is  lost, 
and  a part  we  have  saved.”  Here  follows  an  account  of  the 
cargo  saved  by  them ; and  the  letter  concludes  with,  “ Bless- 
ing on  you  from  the  Lord.” 

The  captain  of  this  ship,  who  remained  some  time  with 
the  natives,  and  had  good  opportunity  of  seeing  them  as 
they  were  in  their  every-day  life,  wrote  a statement  of  his 
views  and  feelings  to  “ The  Friend”  of  the  Sandwich 
Islands,  of  which  the  following  is  a copy  : — “ During  my 
stay  at  Aitutaki,  I found  the  natives  a kind  and  hospitable 
people;  they  have  a large  stone  church  which  will  contain 
a thousand  persons,  and  which  was  well  filled  every  Sabbath 
while  I was  there.  Every  morning,  the  missionary  attends 
to  the  schoolsL  There  is  also  in  this  village  a large  stone 
school-house,  and  many  stone  native  dwelling-houses.  As 
regards  civilization,  the  natives  of  this  island  have  made 
great  advancement.” 

With  a view  to  lead  seafaring  men  to  reflect  on  the 
advantages  of  missionary  labours  to  them  as  a class,  the 
same  newspaper  gives  a contrast  to  the  above  treatment 
from  natives  who  have  the  Bible,  by  narrating  the  circum- 
stances of  a slaughter  which  occurred  on  board  a whale  ship 
olf  a heathen  island  in  the  Pacific,  in  1835.  While  sailing 
among  the  islands  near  the  equator,  a numerous  company 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


217 


of  natives  came  off  to  the  vessel  for  the  purpose  of  barter. 
For  a time,  things  went  on  amicably ; but,  on  a signal  being 
given  by  the  chief  of  the  party,  the  whole  body  of  savages 
seized  the  harpoons,  whale-spades,  and  other  weapons  at 
hand,  and  a desperate  contest  immediately  ensued,  in 
which  the  captain,  two  ofiBcers,  and  many  of  the  crew  were 
killed. 

lYho  can  contemplate  these  facts,  and  others  of  like 
character,  without  seeing  that  the  diffusion  of  the  gospel 
among  those  Fagan  islanders  is  an  incalculable  blessing  to 
navigation  and  to  commerce ; and  surely,  missionaries  and 
teachers,  in  doing  this  work,  if  not  encouraged  and  assisted 
by  traders  and  seamen,  ought  at  least  to  be  saved  that 
annoyance  and  insult,  which  they  are  so  often  called  to  en- 
dure from  such  parties. 

Happily,  however,  the  motives  which  impel  the  faithful 
labourer  in  the  mission  field,  depend  not  on  either  the 
frowns  or  smiles  of  men : his  work  is  undertaken  in  obe- 
dience to  the  command  of  his  divine  Master,  and,  in  the 
devoted  discharge  of  it,  he  has  a peace  and  joy,  and  a reward 
that  the  world  knoweth  not.  It  was  thus  with  the  mission- 
ary on  Aitutaki.  Speaking  of  the  happy  change  which  has 
come  over  the  people,  since  his  first  years  of  toils  and  dangers 
amongst  them,  he  says,  “ The  church  of  Christ  in  this  island 
is  now  the  key-stone  to  the  structure  of  society.”  Politically 
free,  the  people  enjoy  liberty  of  speech  and  action  to  the 
fullest  extent.  Popular  feeling  is  so  strong  against  a mere 
profession  of  religion,  and,  when  detected,  it  meets  with  such 
severe  censure,  that  it  is  hazardous  for  any  one  to  assume 
a character  which  he  cannot  consistently  sustain.  The 
conduct  of  those  who  make  a profession  of  Christianity, 
amidst  such  a state  of  society,  is  open  to  the  closest  obser- 
vation, and  their  principles  and  motives  undergo  the  strictest 
scrutiny.  Every  gift  and  acquirement  is  viewed  by  the 
IS) 


218 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


converts  as  a talent;  every  privilege  implies  in  their  esti- 
mation, a duty;  and  every  dispensation  of  Providence  evolves 
a purpose  of  God’s  wisdom  and  love,  leading  to  some  prac- 
tical purpose : and  hence  the  devotedness  and  zeal  of  these 
native  infant  churches,  which  sometimes  astonish,  and 
always  delight,  those  who  have  been  instrumental  in  their 
organization. 

As  on  Rarotonga  and  Mangaia,  so  on  this  island,  the 
receipt  of  the  entire  Scriptures,  in  their  own  language,  was 
an  event  of  much  interest  and  joy;  and  nothing  is  more 
remarkable  in  their  character  than  their  desire  after,  and 
reverence  for,  the  word  of  God.  Besides  the  principal 
village,  where  the  missionary  resides,  there  is  another  at  a 
little  distance,  which  is  partly  under  the  superintendence  of 
a native  teacher ; and  at  both  places  the  schools  and  chapels 
are  well  attended.  In  addition  to  the  ordinary  duties  of 
attending  to  adult  female  classes,  Mrs.  Royle  has  foi*  many 
years  given  much  time  and  care  to  the  conducting  of  a Ma- 
ternal Association,  which  embraces  the  greater  part  of  the 
adult  females  on  the  island.  Her  weekly  Bible  classes 
number  no  less  than  one  hundred  and  forty  members,  and 
the  mothers  meet  her  once  a fortnight  to  pray  for,  and  to 
converse  about  the  best  interests  of  their  children.  “In  our 
schools,”  writes  Mr.  Royle,  “we  also  find  much  pleasure,  and 
our  labours  have  not  been  without  their  appropriate  reward. 
They  continue  to  be  conducted  day  by  day  without  inter- 
ruption ; more  than  nine  hundred  scholars,  adults  and 
children,  are  in  constant  attendance,  and  our  happiest  hours 
are  in  their  midst.  In  the  children’s  school  the  missionary 
is  now  efficiently  assisted  by  fifty  teachers  : young  men  and 
women,  who  for  the  most  part  were  little  children  when  the 
blessings  of  Christianity  were  conveyed  to  their  land ; but 
who,  being  the  first  fruits  of  missionary  labour,  are  giving 
themselves  to  do  what  they  can,  to  extend  and  perpetuate 
the  blessings  they  have  received.” 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


219 


It  must  also  be  recorded,  in  reference  to  the  church  on 
Aitutaki,  that  it  is  deeply  interested  in  the  spread  of  the 
gospel  to  heathen  lands ; it  has  a Missionary  Auxiliary 
Society  for  contributions,  and  many  of  its  best  men  have 
gone  to  Western  Polynesia  as  native  teachers  : fifteen  of  its 
members,  male  and  female,  have  been  sent  to  the  llarotonga 
Institution  during  the  last  ten  years,  some  of  vfhom  have 
died  on  the  high  places  of  the  field  of  conflict,  and  others 
are  still  labouring  with  devotedness  and  success.  Paoo, 
the  first  native  evangelist  to  the  Loyalty  group  of  islands 
westward,  is  an  Aitutakian.  Beleazara  was  another : he 
fought  a good  fight  in  missionary  work  on  the  islands  of 
Aneitcum  and  Tana,  where,  after  enduring  much  toil  and 
privation,  he  died,  just  when  the  holy  cause  he  served 
began  to  rise  triumphant  over  heathenism  and  idolatry. 
Apolo  was  sent  out  from  Aitutaki,  as  a Christian  pioneer 
to  the  distant  northern  group  of  Maniiki,  and  he  is  there 
doing  a good  work ; and  Vaa,  with  his  excellent  wife,  both 
from  this  island,  were  companions  with  the  men  who,  at 
the  risk  of  their  lives,  landed  on  the  shores  of  Eromanga, 
and  are  now  teaching  the  truths  of  Christianity,  with  suc- 
cess, to  the  once  savage  cannibal  men  who  murdered 
Williams  and  Harris.  Besides  these,  Ilupe,  the  native 
pastor  on  the  island  of  Atiu,  is  also  from  the  xiitutaki 
church ; and  it  is  still  its  honour  and  joy  to  have  a goodly 
number  of  like-minded  men,  children  of  parents  who  were 
heathens,  but  who  themselves  are,  by  the  grace  and  teach- 
ing of  the  Holy  Spirit,  preparing  for  usefulness  among  their 
own  population,  or  to  those  on  islands  in  the  far  distant 
Western  Polynesia. 

On  the  6th  of  February,  1854,  this  little  garden  island 
was  stripped  of  its  beauty,  and  shaken  to  its  centre,  by  one 
of  those  destructive  hurricanes,  the  desolations  of  which  we 
have  had  occasion  to  notice  on  other  islands  of  this  gi’oup. 


220 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


The  sea  rose  to  a fearful  height ; every  house  on  the  island 
was  unroofed,  every  plantation  devastated  ; and  so  terrific 
was  the  earthquake  which  accompanied  the  storm,  that  many 
miles  of  new  beach  were  raised  up,  inside  the  lagoon,  where 
there  had  been,  previously,  a deep  sea.  The  famine  which 
ensued  was  most  grievous ; but  the  people  were  spared  much 
labour  in  building,  their  chapel  and  school,  and  most  of 
their  dwelling-houses,  being  of  thick  substantial  stone  walls. 
In  the  midst  of  this  calamity  there  occurred  one  incident 
among  many,  which  shows  the  delicate  kindness  and  anxious 
concern  of  these  people  towards  their  missionary  and  his 
family.  The  storm  had  destroyed  most  of  his  household 
supplies  in  store,  so  necessary  not  only  to  the  health,  but 
almost  to  the  existence,  of  himself  and  family  in  their  iso- 
lated situation.  The  missionary  said  but  little  about  this  to 
the  natives,  but  they  knew  it  to  be  a fact,  and  deeply  grieved 
over  it.  After  many  months  of  suspense,  an  American 
whaler  was  seen  off  the  island,  and  before  the  captain  could 
have  any  communication  on  shore,  several  of  the  natives, 
unknown  to  their  friends,  went  on  board,  and  entreated  him 
to  allow  them  to  work  for  him  in  getting  off  water  and  wood 
to  his  ship,  while  it  remained  at  the  island.  The  captain 
enquired  their  terms : “ Oh,  we  do  not  want  money,”  they 
replied.  “ Well,  then,”  said  the  captain,  “ what  cloth  will 
you  require?”  “No,”  they  rejoined,  “we  do  not  want 
cloth.”  “What,  then,  do  you  wish?”  demanded  the  cap- 
tain. “ Lot  us  work  first,”  continued  the  natives,  “and  then 
we  will  tell  you  afterwards.”  “No,”  was  the  reply,  “I 
cannot  engage  you  on  those  terms;  you  must  tell  me  at  once 
what  you  will  desire  as  payment  for  your  work.”  We  will 
leave  it  with  you,”  said  the  natives,  “ but  we  wish  you  to 
pay  us  in  flour  and  sugar.”  There  was  an  unusual  reserved- 
ness and  importunity  about  the  men  that  the  captain  could 
not  understand,  but  from  which  he  could  not  escape.  'J  hey 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


221 


went  to  work ; a peculiar  earnestness  and  sobriety  marked 
their  whole  conduct,  and  on  being  paid  their  wages  in  the 
articles  they  had  desired,  they  sent  them  as  a present  to  the 
missionary,  whom  they  knew  to  be  in  want,  and  who  had 
himself  applied  to  three  or  four  ships  to  purchase  flour,  but 
bad  not  been  able  to  get  any. 

In  the  same  year,  before  the  islanders  had  recovered  from 
the  effects  of  the  hurricane,  a ship  arrived  from  Tahiti, 
having  on  board  a number  of  natives  who  were  ill  of  measles ; 
these  were  permitted  to  mingle  with  the  people  of  Aitutaki ; 
and  about  ten  days  after  the  vessel  left  the  island,  the  disease 
was  found  to  be  widely  spread  among  all  classes  on  shore. 
'While  the  cases  were  few  and  scattered,  they  were  tolerably 
manageable  by  the  missionary,  who  at  all  such  times  is  ge- 
neral physician  to  the  community ; but  the  epidemic  soon 
extended,  assuming  a formidable  character,  until  the  whole 
population  became  prostrate.  Every  available  means  was 
employed  to  relieve  the  sufiPerers,  and  faithful  warning  was 
given  to  those  who  had  escaped,  to  observe  precautionary 
measures,  necessary  under  such  circumstances. 

It  was,  however,  painful  to  witness  the  carelessness  and 
inattention  of  those  afflicted  with  this  new  disease.  Instead 
of  keeping  themselves  warm,  the  most  exposed  situations 
were  sought  after,  in  order  to  feel  the  cool  south  wind; 
some  fled  to  the  small  islands  within  the  lagoon,  away  from 
the  main  land,  and  there  died ; while  others,  under  the 
action  of  high  inflammation,  bathed  in  the  sea,  and  after  a 
lapse  of  a few  hours  fell  victims  to  their  imprudence : great 
numbers  died,  and  those  who  recovered  were  left  so  feeble 
in  constitution,  that  the  eSects  of  the  visitation  will  be  felt 
for  years  to  come.  Upon  the  whole,  it  was  one  of  the 
most  severe  trials  the  people  of  Aitutaki  have  been  called 
to  endure  since  the  introduction  of  the  gospel  to  their 
island. 


19* 


222 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Such  was  the  condition  of  this  island  in  18.54.  Often 
have  the  poor  people  been  depressed,- — -jet  they  have  been 
buoyant,  and  have  arisen  above  their  calamities.  Often 
have  the  Christian  part  of  the  population  been  east  down  ; 
but  they  have  never  yielded  to  despair ! In  their  character 
and  conduct  we  see  the  might  and  the  grace  of  the  gospel 
of  Christ : — Christianity  in  them  has  been  opposed  by 
heathenism  and  idolatry ; it  has  been  persecuted  by  armed 
foes  from  without  and  within ; its  inherent  life  has  been 
tested  by  storms  of  fire,  and  fiood,  and  disease;  but  it  has 
ever  risen  above  the  tempest,  and  is  higher  and  brighter, 
and  more  deeply  rooted  on  the  island  now  than  at  any  past 
period  of  its  history,  and  in  no  instance  have  we  a finer  illus- 
tration of  this,  than  in  the  circumstances  which  occurred 
almost  directly  after  the  afiliction  recorded  on  the  preceding 
page. 

It  had  been  the  habit  of  the  Aitutakians  for  some  years 
to  have  an  Annual  Missionary  Meeting,  in  order  to  en- 
courage themselves  to  aid  onward  the  cause,  and  to  pay  in 
their  contributions  for  the  Parent  Society.  But  this  year 
of  hurricane  and  afiliction,  the  missionary  proposed  that  the 
missionary  service  should  be  dispensed  with;  the  people, 
however,  said,  “ No ; whether  our  contributions  be  little 
or  much,  we  will  have  our  meeting.”  It  was  consequently 
held,  and  a population  not  numbering  1000  adults  con- 
tributed money  and  arrow-root,  in  that  year  of  depression, 
to  the  amount  of  no  less  than  eighty  pounds  (S400),  as 
their  subscription  to  the  London  Missionary  Society. 

Besides  this,  they  made  liberal  contributions  of  native 
cloth,  and  other  articles,  for  their  brethren  who  were  labour- 
ing in  heathen  lands.  For  Apolo,  their  teacher  on  the 
island  of  Maniiki,  they  bought  a boat  at  the  cost  of  ten 
pounds ; and  for  the  poor  heathen  people,  who,  just  coming 
out  of  the  nakedness  of  heathen  life,  had  not  the  means 


THE  ISLAND  OF  AITUTAKI. 


223 


to  buy  clothing,  these  Aitutakians  wrought  with  their 
own  hands  100  bonnets,  sixty  hats,  and  100  yards  of  native 
bark  cloth,  and  purchased  300  yards  of  English  and  Ameri- 
can calicoes  and  prints,  all  of  which  were  got  ready,  with 
much  pleasure,  to  be  taken  in  the  missionary  ship  to  the 
inhabitants  of  Western  Polynesia. 

One  day,  while  packing  these  goods  for  shipment,  the 
missionary,  who  was  with  the  people,  was  pleased  to  find 
that  the  paper  lining  of  each  hat  had  a suitable  inscription 
written  on  it ; sometimes  a passage  of  Scripture,  on  others 
a motto,  on  others  a sentence  of  admonition  or  instruction  to 
the  semi-savages  for  whom  they  were  designed.  On  looking 
into  one  of  them  he  was  deeply  affected  to  find  an  expression 
of  their  benevolence  and  pious  zeal,  recorded  in  the  follow- 
ing sentence: — E pare  teia  no  te  tangata  i ta  ia  Wiliamu! 
— “ This  hat  is  for  the  man  who  murdered  Williams !”  Verily 
here  is  a climax  ! a climax  creditable  to  themselves,  honour- 
able to  their  friend,  and  worthy  of  the  gospel  of  Christ. 
Only  thirty-two  years  before,  they  were  themselves  a wild, 
savage,  heathen  people ; Williams  then  left  among  them  two 
native  Tahitian  Christians ; for  more  than  ten  years  after 
that,  they  were  but  in  a state  of  semi-enlightenment  and 
civilization,  so  that  at  the  time  of  which  we  have  written, 
they  were  not,  as  a people,  twenty  years  old  in  an  elevated 
knowledge  and  experience  of  true  religion, — yet,  in  them 
we  now  see  the  entire  absence  of  what  they  once  were ; 
they  are  a well  educated  Christian  community,  holding 
honourable  intercourse  with  ships  that  call  at  their  shores  ; 
wisely  and  justly  regulated  by  civil  and  social  order  at  home, 
and  are  sending  out  an  influence,  a powerful  and  benign 
influence,  by  their  example,  and  men,  and  contributions,  to 
all  the  islands  of  the  Hervey  group,  and  to  other  groups 
nearly  three  thousand  miles  away  from  their  own  island 
home;  and,  above  all,  loving  and  assisting  the  very  men 


224 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


who,  in  their  ignorance  and  cruelty,  shed  the  blood  of  him 
to  whom,  instrumentally,  they  are  indebted  for  all  the  bless- 
ings they  now  enjoy. 

Let  the  parent  churches  in  England  give  thanks  to  God 
for  such  fruit  from  their  past  labours,  and  emulate  the 
spirit  and  example  of  these  its  converts,  until  all  despotism 
and  tyranny,  as  well  as  all  heathenism,  be  banished  the 
earth,  and  the  purity,  and  peace,  and  love  of  the  gospel, 
reign  triumphant  over  all  the  tribes  of  man  ! 


THE  ISLAND  OE  ATIU. 


CONTENTS. 


Tahitian  natives  driven  to  Atiu  in  a storm — The  island  discovered  in 
1777 — First  missionary  visit,  1822 — Trials  of  the  native  teachers — 
Progress  of  the  mission — Papehia  visits  the  island — Rev.  E.  Krause 
resides  among  the  people — Incidents  of  his  landing — Illness  of  M. 
Krause — State  of  mission  in  1843 — The  Rev.  II.  Ro3'le’s  visit  to  the 
island — His  labours — His  trials  and  persecution — State  of  the  people 
in  1845 — -Romantic  tale  of  a heathen  voyager — New  chapel  opened 
in  1846 — An  account  of  Rupe,  the  native  pastor,  on  Atiu — Natives 
of  Atiu  employed  in  aiding  the  missionary  cause — Conclusion. 

In  the  year  1765,  twenty  natives  of  Tahiti  embarked  in  a 
canoe  to  go  to  a neighbouring  island;  in  doing  so  they  were 
overtaken  by  a storm;  the  greater  part  of  them  perished  at 
sea,  but  four  were  brought  to  the  island  of  Atiu,  a distance 
of  nearly  700  miles.  These  Tahitians  were  kindly  received 
by  the  Atiuans ; and  when  Captain  Cook  discovered  the 
island  in  1777  three  of  them  were  then  living.  This  island 
is  called  Wateoo  on  most  of  the  old  charts,  and  is  next  in 
size  and  population  to  Aitutaki  in  this  group.  Captain 
Cook  describes  the  people  as  being  numerous  for  so  small  au 

( 225) 


226 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


island,  when  he  visited  it,  and  says,  that  they  were  of  a kind 
and  obliging  disposition.  It  must,  however,  be  remembered, 
that  he  had  on  board  a native  of  Tahiti,  who  could  talk  with 
the  Atiuaus,  and  who  told  them  such  terrific  and  extrava- 
gant tales  about  the  power  of  the  foreigners’  guns  to  blow 
the  island  to  atoms,  that  they  did  not  on  that  occasion 
manifest  their  usual  ferocious  habits. 

Ill  1822,  forty-five  years  subsequent  to  Captain  Cook’s 
visit,  the  missionaries  on  Tahiti  sent  two  Christian  teachers 
to  this  island.  These  were  received  on  shore  by  the  heathen 
people,  and  their  lives  were  spared,  but,  when  visited,  they 
were  found  to  be  in  a most  miserable  condition  ; the  natives 
had  stripped  them  of  every  article  of  property,  and  they 
were  suffering  much  from  want  and  ill-treatment.  This 
visit,  however,  was  successful  in  giving  correct  information 
to  the  people  respecting  the  object  of  the  teachers’  mission, 
and  of  leading  to  the  overthrow  of  idolatry.  A native  from 
Aitutaki,  who  had  embraced  Christianity  under  the  teach- 
ings of  Papehia,  was  on  board,  and  had  a long  conversation 
with  the  chief  of  Atiu,  explaining  to  him  the  wonders  that 
had  taken  place  on  his  own  island  since  the  people  had 
burnt  their  idols,  and  had  embraced  the  doctrines  of  the 
gospel  of  Jesus  Christ. 

The  chief  and  many  of  his  people  listened  with  much 
interest  to  these  representations,  and  detei'mined  to  give 
more  heed  to  the  words  of  their  teacher  than  they  had 
heretofore  done.  The  chief  was  especially  interested  and 
instructed  by  an  exposition  of  Psalm  cxv.  and  Isaiah  xliv. 
9 — 20  ; and  even  with  the  small  glimmering  of  light  which 
he  had  then  received,  he  expressed  himself  surprised  that 
he  and  his  people  had  been  so  long  deceived  by  dumb  and 
profitless  gods  of  wood,  and  stones,  and  feathers.  A Tahitian 
native  teacher  was  left  on  the  island,  and,  according  to  the 
best  of  his  abilities  and  ac({uiremcuts,  he  instructed  the 


’if«i 

Mj  - -4»'M  ir^.f.#i^ 

^r»riia^N*rf  ,y..^m9Jl  »>^M,-jrt^^.,.^,^  , 

<^»' ^ ;*i4ioi’  ‘iMiim  r^jM  * ,i 


ytvH  VI  M ^ V.«**r*»>i''«'^  nm#" 

^ti  #T»if  <>3li;^..i.^,^  ryis  :- 


■4St)^  Iht’  #T»«if  A>ali;^( 

Vioif)  1 - ' 

“-»»v  y,(^  ■;J|^.’'t.f 


IT>"  ■■“«'■ 


, .•»  --  ' •■'  '*aj;  ■"  rTMi  ;Jt4  t>' 

'"  “•  • ' '•“-<«  ■"'.'■»■ 


- ^ '■  WJB«  ~^i#T"^r^F',/  • « •— ■ 


v , .1,,  ^ . i., , ^ 

V ,4..ts.V^^v  l.or>»U 
ln.Hfa*..i.U,  I.  MnauWpi 

•>*'u  - •»  •* 

t*»yi»4.-  w»^- V„  „i,  ,r> ; , - ^ ^ . 

A -^.iLi  *^ycnln  •>  . -,H H 

.'Ww*'  wf**w  jT4iV-^‘i“ru  «t«| 
gwW.  «,,,;  j ^-k,  : .,1,*T-1 

•wCn^lr  ot^  /t:;ji-u>njv» 

' -If  '-r*  till  *T»- 

>vW-%r 

VitjrT^>a»-?«4^4’  htw  i‘:  ■ - ■ ,^  , ^ 

^ vil  bmumt 


»'iw4 ' 


Papchia 


THE  ISLAND  OF  ATIU. 


227 


people  of  Atiu  in  the  doctrines  of  Christianity.  A goodly 
number  of  them  received  the  word  of  life,  and  rejoiced  in 
the  salvation  they  had  gained ; good  school-houses  were 
erected,  and  were  well  attended  by  the  greater  number  of 
the  people  and  children,  and  an  infant  church  was  formed 
for  the  union  and  growth  of  those  who  were  thought  sincere 
in  their  professions  of  Christianity. 

Occasional  visits  were  made  to  this  island  by  the  mis- 
sionaries of  the  Tahitian  group,  who,  from  time  to  time, 
were  pleased  with  its  progress  under  the  superintendence 
of  the  native  teachers.  There  were,  however,  evils,  serious 
evils,  existing  on  the  island  in  connection  with  the  civil 
and  social  life  of  the  people,  which,  it  was  felt,  could  not  be 
overcome,  only  by  the  prolonged  re.sidence  of  a missionary ; 
and  as  this  could  not  be  speedily  gained,  Papehia  was  ap- 
pointed in  1836  to  visit  the  station  for  the  purpose  of  re- 
maining there  two  or  three  years.  During  his  stay  he  gave 
constant  attention  to  everything  connected  with  the  progress 
and  purity  of  the  mission,  and  the  people  received  the 
benefit  of  his  experience,  gained  by  long  residence  on  the 
island  of  Rarotonga. 

In  1842,  the  Rev.  E.  Krause  was  providentially  brought 
to  this  island  from  Central  America.  Having  a letter  of 
introduction  to  the  people  from  one  of  the  missionaries  in 
the  Tahiti  group,  he  landed  on  a part  of  the  island  where 
neither  man  nor  vestige  of  habitation  could  be  seen,  and  as 
the  boat  returned  to  the  ship,  he  kneeled  down  on  the  lonely 
beach,  and  implored  divine  guidance  and  blessing.  After 
some  time,  a native  youth  came  to  the  spot,  to  whom  he  gave 
the  letter  of  introduction  to  the  teacher  and  the  people, 
which  brought  a goodly  number  of  people  to  him  from  the 
settlement,  who  gave  him  a kind  reception.  But  the  cir- 
cumstances of  his  landing  were  most  unfavourable,  and  cal- 
culated to  excite  the  suspicions  of  the  people ; the  letter  of 


228  GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 

introduction  was  thought  to  be  authentic,  hut  it  was  some 
time  before  they  would  give  full  credence  to  his  being  a 
thoroughly  authorized  missionary;  and  this,  together  with 
the  positive  evils  among  themselves  which  he  set  himself  to 
reform,  created  a persecution  that  for  some  time  retarded 
his  success.  This  he  was  enabled  in  a great  measure  to 
overcome,  and  his  labours  were  very  useful  both  to  the 
teacher  and  to  the  natives,  hut  the  illness  of  his  wife  com- 
pelled him  to  leave  the  island  before  his  plans  had  had  their 
full  effect  on  the  population,  which  was  much  regretted. 

We  first  visited  Atiu  in  1843,  and  on  landing,  several 
hundreds  of  the  natives  came  from  the  principal  village  to 
give  us  welcome.  This  village  was  situated  on  an  eminence, 
and  was  about  two  miles  in  circumference,  in  the  centre  of 
which  were  built  a large  chapel  and  school-house.  The 
chapel  was  an  old  building,  and  in  bad  repair,  but  it  was 
well  filled  on  every  service  during  our  stay.  Copies  of  the 
New  Testament  complete,  in  their  language,  had  been  taken 
to  the  island  about  three  years  before,  and  we  were  gratified 
to  find  that  the  people  had  purchased  copies  with  arrow-root, 
to  the  amount  of  twenty-six  pounds,  which  sum  was  for- 
warded to  the  British  and  Foreign  Bible  Society.  The  de- 
sire of  these  natives  for  the  word  of  God,  and  their  intense 
delight  in  listening  to  its  exposition,  are  facts  of  much  in- 
terest and  significance. 

Walking  through  the  village  one  evening,  we  saw  a young 
man, — a silly,  self-conceited  Tahitian — who  had  just  come 
to  the  island,  and  had  induced  the  chief  to  have  a body- 
guard of  soldiers,  after  the  manner  of  the  French  Governor 
and  Queen  Pomare,  in  Tahiti.  These  soldiers  were  being 
dialled  in  military  style ; they  were  about  fifty  in  number, 
and  armed  with  long  and  short  sticks,  instead  of  guns  and 
swords.  The  chief  appeared  much  ashamed  at  our  remarks 
on  this  foolery,  and  said  he  had  merely  given  his  consent  to 
it  to  please  the  young  people. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  ATIU. 


229 


Returning  home  from  our  walk,  we  met  the  deacons  of 
the  infant  church  on  this  island,  and  found  that  thirty-nine 
members  had  been  admitted  since  its  formation;  five  of 
whom  had  been  suspended  for  improper  conduct,  and  four 
had  died;  leaving  thirty  in  communion.  It  was  also  an 
encouraging  sight  to  see  the  children’s  school  under  the 
care  of  the  native  teachers.  No  fewer  than  246  boys  and 
164  girls  were  present;  about  a quarter  of  whom  could  read 
well. 

During  our  stay  on  this  visit  to  Atiu,  it  was  our  happi- 
ness to  organize  a Juvenile  Missionary  Association,  to  aid, 
by  annual  contributions  of  arrow-root,  the  missionary  sub- 
scriptions of  the  island.  The  teachers  and  children  entered 
with  spirit  into  the  thing,  and  they  have  ever  since  done 
good  service  in  this  department. 

A general  view  of  this  small  out-station  may  be  gained 
from  the  following  figures : It  is  a reef-bound  coast  island, 

not  more  than  twelve  miles  in  circumference ; its  population 
of  1000  persons  is  divided  into  three  clans,  who  for  the  most 
part  live  in  one  settlement;  thirty  members  were  in  church- 
communion  in  the  year  1843;  150  adults  attended  schools, 
and  410  children  were  under  daily  instruction. 

The  next  missionary  visits  to  this  island  were  made  by 
Rev.  H.  Royle,  of  Aitutaki,  who  has  frequently  remained 
many  months  at  a time  with  the  people.  During  his  first 
visits  he  had  to  endure  much  opposition  and  persecution  from 
a disaffected  party  who  were  strong  in  number  and  influence, 
and  from  whom  he  had  to  experience  many  annoyances  both 
in  his  own  house,  in  the  village,  and  in  the  schools.  A code 
of  civil  laws  had  been  adopted,  but  was  too  feebly  enforced 
to  secure  general  order,  and  justice  to  the  community.  The 
very  doubtful  character  of  the  chief  also,  at  the  time, 
together  with  that  of  many  of  the  native  police,  rendered 
it  almost  impossible  to  bring  the  perpetrators  of  crime  to 
20 


230 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


punishment.  As  a specimen  of  the  outrageous  conduct  of 
some  of  this  party  towards  the  missionary,  w'e  might  state, 
that  one  Saturday  night  some  of  them  secretly  entered  the 
chapel,  and  covered  the  bottom  of  the  pulpit,  ankle  deep, 
in  mud  and  filth.  This  was  not  discovered  until  Mr.  Koyle 
had  fully  entered  the  pulpit,  on  Sabbath  morning;  and 
doubtless  there  were  some  of  the  miscreants  in  the  chapel, 
expecting  to  be  gratified  by  a public  disturbance  of  the 
service,  but  in  which  they  were  most  provokingly  dis- 
appointed by  the  quiet  patient  forbearance  of  the  mission- 
ary, who  conducted  the  whole  of  the  morning’s  worship 
standing  in  the  mire,  without  uttering  one  word  of  reference 
to  the  indignity.  The  moral  effect  of  this  forbearance  on 
the  hearts  and  opinions,  even  of  the  ungodly,  was  most 
beneficial  and  lasting,  and  hastened  a triumph  for  Christ 
and  his  gospel  which  never  could  have  been  gained  by  any 
act  of  retaliation,  however  merited,  or  of  punishment,  how- 
ever just. 

My  second  visit  to  this  station  was  in  a voyage  on 
board  the  John  Williams,  in  1845,  and  we  were  pleased  to 
find  that  the  native  teacher  left  here  by  Mr.  Royle  had  been 
much  prospered  in  his  work.  The  schools  were  well  at- 
tended, and  the  whole  population  were  more  enlightened 
and  mild  than  we  had  seen  them  before.  An  interesting 
service  was  held  in  the  chapel;  a sermon  was  preached  from 
John  xiii.  34 — Christ’s  love  our  joy  and  example;  after 
which  eighteen  members  were  admitted  to  the  church,  who 
with  their  brethren  commemorated  the  love  of  Je.sus  by 
partaking  together  of  the  emblems  of  his  death. 

We  were  accompanied  on  this  visit  by  one  or  two  elderly 
natives  from  Rarotonga,  and  on  the  evening  after  the  above 
service  we  and  they  were  walking  on  the  cliffs,  looking 
across  the  wide  extending  sea,  when  these  old  men  from 
Rarotonga  entered  into  conversation  with  some  old  men  of 


THE  ISLAND  OF  ATIU. 


231 


Atiu,  and  both  parties  became  much  animated  as  they 
talked  about  incidents  connected  with  their  former  heatlien 
life,  and  praised  God,  who  had  spared  them  to  meet  i roto  i 
toua  aroa,  “in  his  love.”  Numei'ous  deeds  of  fame  done  by 
ancient  heroes  were  spoken  of,  and  desires  expressed  that 
they  had  lived  to  see  these  gospel  times.  One  account  was 
concerning  a man  who  had  conceived  a desire  to  voyage  to 
other  lauds,  a thing  quite  novel  to  the  condition  of  the 
people  of  that  time;  he  built  himself  a large  double  canoe, 
and  succeeded  in  visiting  most  of  the  islands  of  the  Ilervey 
group,  and  returned  to  his  own  island  in  safety.  During 
the  remainder  of  his  life  he  was  deified  by  his  fellow-coun- 
trymen ; and  his  spirit  continued  to  be  worshipped  after  his 
death.  His  head  was  preserved  for  many  generations,  by  a 
process  of  embalming,  and  all  natives,  in  after  times,  voy- 
aging to  any  distance,  were  only  safe  or  successful  as  they 
paid  homage  to  it. 

On  our  way  to  Samoa,  July  1846,  we  again  called  at  Atiu, 
and  were  pleased  to  find  that  the  people  had  built  a new 
chapel,  which,  considering  their  limited  means,  was  a most 
wonderful  achievement.  The  settlement  being  some  dis- 
tance from  the  shore,  lime  was  scarce,  but  in  order  to  make 
up  the  deficiency,  the  people  had  cut  down  large  tamunu 
trees,  which  they  had  dragged  to  the  site  of  building,  some 
of  which  were  twenty  feet  long,  two  feet  thick,  and  six  feet 
wide — these  were  placed  round  the  building,  at  a distance 
of  six  feet  apart,  and  it  was  calculated  that  not  less  than 
3200  cubic  feet  of  this  beautiful  wood,  which  much  resem- 
bles mahogany,  were  in  the  walls,  and  more  than  a thousand 
cubic  feet  of  the  same  used  in  the  floors.  The  workmanship 
was  neither  fine  nor  ornamental,  but  the  strength  of  the 
building  was  well  secured. 

As  this  are  pure  aiu/a,  “ house  of  prayer,”  was  nearly 
finished,  the  people  made  arrangements  to  have  it  opened 


232 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


during  our  stay ; and  the  services  held  on  the  occasion  were 
of  deep  interest — nearly  the  whole  population  came  together; 
two  sermons  were  preached  : one  from  Rev.  xxi.  3,  The 
dwelling  of  God  with  men  on  the  earth  ; and  the  other  from 
1 Tim.  ii.  5,  One  God,  and  one  Mediator  : eight  members 
were  admitted  to  the  church,  and  the  communion  of  the 
Lord’s  supper  was  commemorated.  Many  of  the  old  people, 
who  had  been  the  first  to  receive  the  gospel  on  the  island, 
had  died,  but  it  was  pleasing  to  see  a goodly  number  of 
young  people  rising  up  to  occupy  their  places,  alike  in  the 
civil  duties  of  the  island,  and  in  the  labours  of  the  church 
of  Christ. 

It  cannot  fail  to  interest  and  delight  the  friends  of  mis- 
sions, to  know  the  history  of  the  present  native  teacher  who 
has  charge  of  the  island  of  Atiu.  The  reader  will  remember 
that,  in  our  account  of  Rarotonga,  we  had  occasion  to  notice 
the  removal  of  Tapaeru  from  that  island,  to  Aitutaki,  by 
the  captain  and  crew  who  had  caused  so  much  trouble  there. 
Tapaeru,  at  the  time,  was  a heathen  woman,  and  was  landed 
about  the  year  1820,  among  the  heathen  people  of  Aitutaki. 
Her  rank  introduced  her  to  the  families  of  the  chiefs,  to 
one  of  whom  she  became  wife.  Rupe,  her  son,  was  born 
just  about  the  time  Papehia’s  mission  of  mercy  was  received 
by  the  people  ; and  it  was  his  privilege  to  receive  instruc- 
tion in  his  childhood,  which  introduced  him  into  the  blessing 
of  the  new  dispensation.  On  the  return  of  Tapaeru  to 
Rarotonga,  Rupe  remained  with  his  father,  on  Aitutaki. 
When  the  Rev.  II . Royle  took  up  his  abode  there,  this  lad 
was  among  the  most  active  and  intelligent  of  his  generation. 
He  early  attached  himself  to  the  missionary,  and  gave 
evidence  of  his  having  some  good  thing  in  his  heart  towards 
the  Lord  God  of  Israel.  He  continued  to  grow  in  stature 
and  in  grace,  and  after  having  devoted  himself  some  time 
to  the  interests  of  religion  on  his  own  island,  he  was  sent 


TUE  ISLAND  OF  ATIU. 


233 


for  further  education  to  the  Institution,  Rarotonga,  with  a 
view  to  the  ministry.  Here  he  made  great  proficiency; 
and  in  1846,  he  was  located  at  Arorangi,  where  he  dis- 
charged the  duties  of  the  station  with  diligence  and  success; 
and  thence  was  removed  to  the  island  of  Atiu,  as  the 
teacher  of  the  people,  and  pastor  of  the  church.  Thus 
in  this,  as  in  many  other  instances,  we  see  the  children  of 
those  who  were  instrumental  in  the  overthrow  of  idolatry, 
and  of  establishing  Christianity  on  the  islands,  are  now 
raised  up  to  be  our  helpers  in  the  mission ; yea,  beyond  this, 
they  are  raised  up  to  occupy  positions  in  the  mission  that 
makes  this  native  agency  essential  to  its  very  existence, — 
an  agency  at  once  the  fruit,  the  reward,  and  the  glory  of 
our  labours. 

j Another  illustration  of  this  is  most  emphatically  afforded 
in  the  fact,  that  Atiu  itself,  where  no  European  missionary 
has  ever  had  a permanent  residence,  has  sent  out  its  quota 
of  aid  in  this  work.  Besides  sustaining  all  expenses  con- 
nected with  its  island  home  affairs,  and  contributing  to  the 
funds  of  the  Parent  Society  in  England,  it  has  also  sup- 
plied men ; one  of  whom,  Katuki,  has  been  for  some  time, 
and  still  continues  to  be,  one  of  the  most  laborious,  con- 
sistent, and  efficient  native  evangelists  on  the  island  of 
Mangaia ; and  in  1852,  Mr.  Royle  had  under  his  care  seven 
pious  young  men  from  Atiu,  who  were  candidates  for  the 
Rarotonga  Institution,  with  a view  of  devoting  themselves 
to  the  work  of  preaching  the  gospel,  either  to  the  people 
of  their  own  islands,  or  to  those  afar  off  in  heathenism. 
Speaking  of  the  present  position  of  the  mission  at  this  out- 
station,  Mr.  Royle  says,  that  during  his  four  months’  visit 
there,  he  admitted  ninety-five  members  to  the  church,  who 
were  selected  from  a numerous  band  of  intelligent  inquirers 
of  some  years’  standing;  a large  and  commodious  school- 
house  was  just  completed ; and  at  the  Sabbath  services  the 


234 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


congregations  were  overflowing.  Thus,  he  continues,  it  is 
our  unspeakable  happiness  to  report,  that,  on  every  aspect 
of  the  mission,  progress  is  written  in  legible  characters. 
We  record  this  with  profound  gratitude  to  God,  and  ascribe 
all  to  his  abounding  power  and  grace. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MAUKE. 


CONTENTS. 

The  island  visited  by  Lord  Byron — His  lordship’s  surprise  at  the  civi- 
lized state  of  the  people — Testimony  of  a sailor  who  lived  some  time 
on  Mauk4 — Lamentation  of  the  chief — Missionary  visit  to  the  island, 
1843 — Dangers  in  lauding — Arrival  at  the  village — Public  services 
— Missionary  contributions — Want  of  school  material — Missionary 
visit  to  the  island  in  1845 — Fright  of  the  natives  on  seeing  the  new 
mission  ship — Explanation  of  the  cause — Progress  of  the  mission — 
Itio,  the  teacher,  and  his  wife — Itio’s  letter  to  the  church  on  Raro- 
tonga— The  annual  meeting  of  the  schools — United  services  with 
natives  of  other  islands — Conclusion. 


MADKt  is  tte  fifth  island  in  the  Ilervey  group,  and 
native  teachers  were  placed  there  in  1822.  In  August,  the 
following  year,  the  island  was  visited  by  the  illustrious 
Eight  Hon.  Lord  Byron,  Commander  of  H.  M.  S.  Blonde. 
While  in  the  offing,  and  hesitating  as  to  the  propriety  of 
going  on  shore,  not  knowing  the  character  of  the  natives, 
his  lordship  was  much  gratified  by  receiving  a visit  from  the 
Christian  native  teacher,  who  came  to  his  ship.  Having 
gained  a statement  from  this  teacher  respecting  his  work 

( 235) 


236 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


on  the  island,  Lord  Bjron  went  on  shore,  and,  to  his  sur- 
prise and  pleasure,  found  the  most  unexpected  signs  of 
civilization  : — two  neat  and  commodious  lime  and  wattled 
whitewashed  cottages  were  already  erected,  which  were 
furnished  with  chairs,  sofas,  and  tables ; a neat  chapel  had 
also  been  built  by  the  people,  under  the  direction  of  the 
native  teacher;  Sabbath  services,  and  daily  schools,  and  the 
general  deportment  of  the  people,  bore  testimony  to  the  sub- 
duing, enlightening,  and  elevating  influence  of  the  gospel 
of  Christ. 

Some  time  after  this,  another  incidental  testimony  to  the 
state  of  things  brought  about  on  Mauke',  by  native  teachers’ 
labours,  is  given  by  a sailor,  who  was  left -on  shore,  and 
his  short  printed  record  of  what  he  saw  there  will  encou- 
rage the  friends  of  missions.  “ The  natives  received  me,” 
writes  this  man,  ‘‘with  much  hospitality  and  kindness.  The 
whole  population  make  a profession  of  Christianity;  they 
have  the  finest  chapel  I have  seen  in  any  of  the  islands ; 
they  have  family  prayer,  with  singing,  every  morning  and 
evening,  and  ask  the  blessing  of  God  on  their  meals.” 
How  sudden  and  how  complete  the  change  from  idolatry  to 
Christianity  ! and  how  honoured  those  by  whose  agency  the 
change  had  been  effected ! Benevolent  and  deeply  affecting 
were  the  tears  of  the  chief  of  Maukd,  as  he  looked  around 
on  this  change,  and  felt  in  himself  that  he  had  received  a 
moral  and  spiritual  emancipation,  and  exclaimed,  “ Alas ! 
alas ! for  the  slain  of  my  people  ! Oh ! that  the  word  of 
salvation  had  been  brought  to  my  land  years  ago ! Then, 
many  of  those  who  have  been  killed  in  heathen  war  would 
be  here  this  day,  and  with  us,  experiencing  the  great  love 
of  the  true  God.” 

One  day,  addressing  the  missionary,  and  alluding  to  the 
fewness  of  the  population  that  remained  on  the  island,  the 
same  chief  exclaimed,  while  pointing  to  the  chapel,  “ Oh, 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MAUKfi. 


237 


had  you  come  to  this  laud  only  three  years  before,  yonder 
house  of  prayer,  and  another  like  it,  would  not  then  have 
contained  the  whole  of  the  people This  exclamation  is 
full  of  important  suggestion  to  the  Christian’s  mind,  in  re- 
ference to  lands  yet  in  heathenism,  where  the  same  lament 
will  be  made,  with  increased  bitterness  and  woe,  as  the 
church  delays  to  take  to  them  the  word  of  life. 

In  the  mouth  of  June,  1843,  we  sailed  from  Rarotonga, 
in  a Samoa-built  schooner,  to  visit  this  island.  We  saw  it 
about  noon,  but  owing  to  light  winds  were  unable  to  make 
up  to  it ; and  at  nine  miles’  distance  we  embarked  in  the 
vessel’s  boat.  The  sea  was  beautifully  smooth,  and  we  rowed 
cheerfully  onward  towards  the  island,  until,  when  the  moon 
arose,  we  were  within  half-a-mile  of  the  reef;  here,  to  our 
surprise,  we  heard  the  roaring  sound  of  heavy  breakers,  and 
as  we  advanced  we  experienced  a deep,  long,  rolling  swell. 
Our  native  pilot  paddled  a-head  in  his  canoe,  but  we  dared 
not  to  follow ; and  in  this  situation,  so  near  danger,  so  far 
from  the  ship,  and  at  night,  we  became  perplexed  as  to  what 
plan  to  adopt.  We  had,  however,  but  just  decided  to  lay 
on  our  oars  all  night,  when  we  were  cheered  by  seeing  a 
large  blazing  fire  on  the  beach.  Perceiving  some  of  the 
natives  adjusting  their  canoes  inside  the  reef,  we  ventured 
to  row  nearer ; they  made  signs  for  us  to  go  forward  in  our 
boat,  but  it  being  heavily  laden,  we  remained  at  sea,  until, 
about  midnight,  the  native  teacher  came  off  to  us.  He  was 
sorry  to  find  that  we  had  left  the  ship  so  late  in  the  evening, 
but  made  arrangements  to  land  our  boat’s  company,  one  at 
a time,  in  a large  canoe.  I shall  never  forget  the  wildness 
of  the  scene,  and  the  roar  of  the  surf,  as  we  came  near  the 
reef ; but  waiting  a favourable  opportunity,  our  canoe 
mounted  one  of  the  highest  waves,  and  we  were  borne  in 
safety  to  the  shore.  On  landing,  we  found  a number  of 
the  natives  waiting  to  receive  us,  who  led  us  to  the  village, 


238 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


situated  about  two  miles  from  the  beach.  On  reaching  the 
teaclier’s  house,  the  crowd  had  increased  on  us  so  much,  that 
all  our  party  could  not  be  admitted  : the  verandah,  therefore, 
was  lighted  up  with  cocoa-nut  lamps,  and  there  we  took  our 
seats,  in  the  midst  of  more  than  two  hundred  people,  giving 
to  them  an  account  of  the  state  of  the  islands  whence  we 
had  come,  and  a statement  of  what  we  purposed  to  do,  during 
our  stay  at  Maukd. 

Being  somewhat  exhausted  by  our  sea  and  land  excur- 
sions, I proposed  to  retire  to  rest.  This  was  lustily  opposed 
by  the  assembly  j they  said,  we  could  sleep  when  we 
returned  to  the  ship — but  that  we  were  not  to  think  of 
sleeping  that  night ; in  the  first  place,  they  wanted  to  hear 
all  about  the  growth  of  the  word  of  Grod  in  Rarotonga,  and 
then,  as  they  knew  the  Rarotongans  were  good  singers,  they 
wished  to  learn  some  of  their  tunes.  Having  brought  a 
supply  of  hymn-books  to  the  island,  we  made  arrangements 
for  our  Rarotongan  companions  to  teach  them  some  new 
tunes,  which  the  delighted  people  practised  until  the  dawn 
of  morning. 

On  the  next  day,  we  held  a public  service  with  the  natives 
in  their  chapel,  with  which  we  could  not  but  be  interested. 
The  building  was  situated  on  an  open,  commanding  position; 
its  dimensions  were  sixty  feet  long,  thirty  feet  wide,  and 
twenty  feet  high.  The  walls  were  made  by  raised  uprights, 
four  feet  apart  from  each  other,  the  spaces  being  filled  up 
with  lime.  Neatly  worked  seats  were  orderly  arranged 
over  the  whole  of  the  floor,  and  a large  trunk  of  a tamanu 
tree,  three  feet  in  diameter,  was  tastefully  carved,  and  used 
as  a pulpit.  Everything  in  the  house  indicated  an  inven- 
tiveness in  handicraft,  and  an  interest  in  God’s  worship, 
which  did  honour  alike  to  the  teacher  and  to  the  people. 
The  service  we  held  in  this  house  was  well  attended ; I 
preached  from  Rev.  v.  9 ; — The  new  song,  and  the  singers 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MAUKE. 


239 


of  it  in  heaven  ; and  as  we  thought  of  the  redeemed  there, 
we  praised  God  for  the  evidence  we  had,  that  not  a few  of 
these  islanders  were  being  prepared  to  join  their  company 
and  their  praise. 

In  the  afternoon  we  held  a missionary  meeting,  and  the 
people  contributed  1830  pounds  of  arrow-root  to  the  Lon- 
don Missionary  Society,  and  84  pounds  of  finely  twisted 
cord. 

The  language  of  the  people  of  Mauke  is  the  same,  or 
nearly  so,  as  that  of  the  Rarotongans  j but  having  had  Tahi- 
tian teachers,  they  had  learned  to  speak  the  Tahitian  dialect. 
On  this  visit,  however,  it  was  arranged  that,  in  future,  they 
were  to  have  a Rarotongan  teacher,  and  all  their  books  would 
be  printed  in  the  Rarotongan  language ; at  this  they  were 
greatly  i-ejoiced,  and  nothing  could  exceed  their  expressions 
of  delight  at  receiving  the  complete  New  Testament  in  the 
language  of  their  own  group. 

It  was  also  gratifying  to  find  that  the  adult  and  children’s 
schools  were  well  attended;  that  nearly  the  whole  of  the 
youth  and  children  on  the  island  were  under  daily  tuition 
by  a fine  body  of  teachers,  who  had  been  taught  by  the 
native  missionary.  These  regretted,  and  we  as  much  as  they, 
our  scanty  supply  of  slates,  paper,  pencils,  and  pens,  for 
many  of  them  were  in  a more  prepared  state  to  advance  by 
further  instruction  than  their  means  at  hand  commanded. 
Having,  however,  done  all  that  could  be  accomplished  by  a 
hasty  visit,  we  left  this  station  again  under  the  care  of  the 
native  teacher,  and  were  not  able  to  return  to  it  until  the 
year  1845. 

It  was  a lovely  Sabbath  morning,  in  the  month  of  July, 
when  the  new  mission  ship,  John  Williams,  arrived  off 
Mauke.  As  we  drew  near  the  shore,  and  perceived  its 
luxuriant  beauty,  we  rejoiced  in  the  fact,  that  its  people  had 
been  redeemed  from  idolatry,  and  that  at  that  hour  many 


240 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


of  tliera  were  united  in  a ser^'iee  of  prayer  and  praise  to 
Jehovah,  the  true  God.  Knowing  this  practice  to  be  ob- 
served by  them,  we  were  not  much  surprised  at  not  having 
an  early  visit  from  shore ; but  we  were  more  than  surprised 
as  the  morning  advanced,  at  not  seeing  a single  native  on 
the  beach.  It  will  be  remembered,  that  Mauk^  is  a reef- 
bound  island,  and  that  we  could  not  land  without  the  aid  of 
canoes ; but  none  came  off  to  us  this  morning ; not  a crea- 
ture could  be  seen  as  we  looked  from  the  ship  towards  the 
island.  After  waiting  some  time  in  more  than  anxious  sus- 
pense, we  fired  one  of  the  ship’s  guns,  but  this  did  not 
bring  any  of  the  people  to  us.  We  then  fired  again,  and, 
to  our  great  relief,  we  now  saw  a small  canoe  bounding  over 
the  surf,  having  on  board  one  native.  In  order  to  meet  it 
we  lowered  one  of  the  ship’s  boats;  but  no  sooner  did  the 
native  get  sight  of  us,  than  he  turned  his  canoe  toward 
shore,  and,  like  a fellow  sadly  scared,  paddled  away  from  us 
with  all  his  might. 

Somewhat  annoyed  and  confounded  at  this  unusual  treat- 
ment, the  crew  of  our  boat  rowed  in  pursuit,  and  overtook 
the  runaway  near  the  reef.  On  seeing  a Rarotongan  in  our 
boat,  whom  he  knew,  he  was  evidently  relieved,  and  con- 
ducted us  to  the  beach.  By  this  time  a great  number  of 
the  people  had  come  to  meet  us,  and  on  inquiring  the  cause 
of  their  mysterious  conduct  during  the  morning,  they  said, 
that  when  the  ship  was  first  seen  they  were  holding  their 
early  morning  prayer-meeting ; and  it  being  a new  vessel, 
they  did  not  know  it  was  the  mission  ship.  While  wonder- 
ing what  it  could  be,  the  report  of  the  gun  was  heard ; this, 
they  said,  made  their  hearts  like  spilt  water;  and  having 
lately  heard  of  the  doings  of  the  French  in  Tahiti,  they 
concluded  that  it  was  a French  ship  of  war,  come  to  add 
their  island  home  to  the  possessions  of  its  nation.  “ Alas  !” 
they  exclaimed,  “ what  shall  we  do  “ Do  not  let  any 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MAUK^. 


241 


one  be  in  baste  to  go  off  to  it;”  and  they  resolved  to  protract 
tlieir  morning  prayer-meeting,  in  order  to  call  upon  God  to 
deliver  them  from  evil,  and  to  be  their  akapuanga — “ re- 
fuge,” in  the  day  of  their  distress. 

At  the  close  of  this  meeting  the  second  report  was  heard, 
and  they  thought  it  wise  to  send  their  bravest  man  to  see 
who  we  were,  and  what  we  wanted;  this  was  the  man  who, 
coming  near  to  us,  had  turned  away  in  fright ! 

Their  fears  were,  however,  now  put  to  flight,  and  we 
hastened  to  the  village,  where  we  held  an  afternoon  service; 
and  never,  I suppose,  was  there  a more  quick  and  perfect 
transition  from  dreadful  apprehension  to  peaceful  quietude, 
from  deepest  sorrow  to  highest  joy,  than  that  experienced  by 
this  people  that  day.  The  whole  population  came  together 
in  the  chapel : hymns  of  praise  were  sung;  the  Holy  Scrip- 
tures were  read  and  expounded;  prayer  was  offered;  and  a 
sermon  was  preached  on  Self  Examination,  from  2 Cor. 
xiii.  5.  After  which  we  united  with  the  little  church  in  com- 
memorating the  dying  love  of  the  Saviour.  The  whole 
service  was  one  of  much  interest  and  delight;  and  the 
truths  of  the  Gospel,  received  through  these  ordinances,  were 
as  water  to  thirsty  ground. 

In  the  evening  a public  prayer-meeting  was  held  in  the 
teacher’s  house,  and  many  of  the  people  remained  until  mid- 
night, reviewing  their  past  history,  listening  to  reports  about 
the  churches  in  England,  and  asking  questions  about  heath- 
en islands  yet  to  be  visited. 

After  meeting  the  deacons  of  the  church,  and  making 
arrangements  for  further  progress  in  the  classes  and  the 
schools,  we  located  among  them  Itio,  a pious,  intelligent 
native  missionary,  from  the  Rarotonga  Institution,  and  again 
left  this  interesting  native  station. 

These  small  islands  of  the  group  are  never  expected  to 
have  a resident  European  missionary,  neither  is  it  neces- 
21 


242 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


sary,  for  the  teac-hers  we  have  are,  in  character  and  labour, 
all  re([uired  for  such  stations ) and  it  is  a matter  of  thankful- 
ness that  we  have  such  raised  up  to  aid  us  in  our  work. 
AVhen  possible,  we  wish  these  native  pastors  to  be  accom- 
panied by  a help-meet ; and  it  is  but  rare  that  their  own 
inclinations  are  opposed  to  our  wishes  on  this  subject. 
Itio  had  set  his  affections  on  a very  suitable  companion ; 
but  untoward  circumstances  obliged  him  to  go  to  Mauke 
alone : this  was  an  equal  loss  to  the  mission,  as  it  was  a mu- 
tual trial  to  themselves,  and  the  very  rarity  of  the  circum- 
stance leads  to  its  being  mentioned  here.  An  agreement 
was  entered  into  by  the  parties,  which  extended  over  twelve 
months,  an  almost  unknown  thing  with  the  islanders;  but  at 
the  expiration  of  that  time  Itio’s  heart  was  gladdened,  his 
home  made  happy,  and  his  labours  assisted,  by  the  arrival  of 
his  very  excellent  bride  from  Rarotonga,  in  “ the  children 
of  England’s  missionary  ship,”  the  John  Williams. 

Writing,  at  a subsequent  date,  to  the  church  of  Raro- 
tonga, this  native  pastor  says,  “ Friends  and  brethren  ! 
blessings  on  you  all  from  Jesus.  I wish  you  to  know  how 
we  are  getting  on  now  in  Maukd.  We  have  many  mercies — 
some  bodily,  others  spiritual.  We  have  just  held  our  May 
meeting.  The  text  of  our  sermon  was  1 Tim.  iv.  7,  8. 
After  the  service,  many  of  the  people  spoke  and  exhorted 
to  diligence.  We  then  measured  the  contributions  of  arrow- 
root  for  the  sociit/.  This  contribution  we  regard  as  a 
true  sign  of  the  church  at  such  meetings ; and  we  collected 
more  than  190  measures  (about  1600  lbs.),  and  the  people 
were  glad.” 

Some  days  after  this  service  the  schools  on  the  island 
held  their  annual  meeting.  Itio  preached  from  1 John 
iii.  10  ; — the  signs  of  the  children  of  God  and  those  of  the 
children  of  the  devil.  The  classes  were  examined ; and  in 
the  afternoon,  accompanied  by  their  teachers,  they  gave 
themselves  to  pleasure,  and  to  native  sports  of  recreation. 


TUE  ISLAND  OF  MAUKfe. 


243 


We  have  given  these  details,  being  anxious  to  accomplish 
tha  design  of  this  work,  by  showing  the  character  and 
labour  of  the  native  teachers  in  the  islands,  and  the  progress 
of  stations  under  their  care ; we  shall  not  enlarge  by  any 
further  reflections,  but  by  transcribing  an  extract  from  a 
letter  just  received  from  Itio,  W'e  shall  pass  on  to  the  notice 
of  the  last  island  of  this  group,  and  which,  with  Atiu  and 
Mauke,  is  entirely  under  the  superintendence  of  native 
missionaries. 

The  year  following  that  in  which  the  service  alluded  to 
on  the  preceding  page  was  held,  the  people  of  Mauk^  were 
visited  by  natives  from  the  islands  of  Atiu  and  Mitiaro. 
Speaking  of  the  occasion,  Itio  says,  “ We  have  had  a joyous 
gathering  this  year  : our  brethren  and  the  teachers  of  the 
other  islands  came  to  us  in  their  canoes,  and  the  people  have 
not  had  such  a meeting  here  since  the  word  of  God  came  to 
these  lands.  The  old  men  told  us  of  the  days  when  Satan 
reigned  over  them,  and  when  they  were  enemies  towards 
each  other,  and  rejoiced  in  each  other’s  destruction ; and 
the  young  people  rejoiced  in  the  dispensation  of  gospel  love 
into  which  they  had  come  : truly,  it  is  as  written  in  the  word 
of  God,  ‘ Old  things  are  passed  away,  and,  behold,  all  things 
are  become  new  !’  ” 

• There  are  now  on  Mauke  fifty  members  in  church-com- 
munion, and  nearly  as  many  others  who  are  in  the  Bible- 
classes,  seeking  to  be  led  into  the  way  of  eternal  life.  If 
the  reader  will  attempt  to  realize  these  island-scenes  of  intel- 
ligence, civilization,  and  Christianity,  in  contrast  with  the 
ignorance,  and  anarchy,  and  heathenism  that  reigned  over 
the  same  people  thirty  years  ago,  we  think  that  the  warmest 
sympathies  of  his  heart  must  be  more  than  ever  enlisted  in 
the  cause  of  Christian  missions;  and  that,  by  more  fervent 
prayer  and  more  enlarged  liberality,  he  will  give  his  influence 
to  extend  the  blessings  they  communicate,  to  every  tribe  of 
the  world. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MITIARO. 


Tho  situation  and  general  appearance  of  the  island — Its  soil,  fruits,  and 
lake — Its  first  people  came  from  Atiu — The  people  of  Atiu  take  the 
gospel  to  Mitiaro — The  overthrow  of  idolatry  on  the  island — The  Ta- 
hitian teacher  takes  up  his  abode  with  the  people — Succeeded  by  a 
Rarotongan  evangelist — Missionary  visits  to  the  island  in  1843  and  in 
1846 — The  teacher’s  letter  to  the  missionary,  1849 — The  teacher’s 
wife  in  trouble  respecting  the  women  of  Mitiaro  smoking  tobacco — 
Her  husband’s  measures  to  do  away  with  the  practice — Teacher’s  en- 
deavours to  advance  civilization — People  prepare  to  build  a stone 
chapel — Superstitious  difficulties — many  of  the  people  visit  Mauk5 
and  Aitutaki — Opening  of  the  new  chapel — Native  contributions  to 
the  cause  of  missions — Conclusion. 

Mitiaro  is  the  smallest  island  of  the  Ilervey  group, — 
it  is  one  of  the  almost  innumerable  isolated  reef  islands 
which  bestud  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  is  but  thinly  inhabited. 
Its  circumference  is  not  more  than  twelve  miles,  four  of 
which  is  an  inaccessible,  bold,  coral  beach  ; the  other  eight 
miles  are  surrounded  by  a reef  extending  into  the  sea  at  dis- 
tances varying  from  a quarter  of  a mile  to  a mile  from  the 
shore. 

A strange  contrast  of  barrenness  and  fertility  strikes  the 
stranger  as  he  lands  on  this  island.  On  the  north  and  west 
( 244) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MITIARO. 


245 


sides  there  is  much  good  soil,  which,  being  cultivated,  yields 
its  inhabitants  a sufficient  supply  of  food : here  also  stand 
many  large  and  lofty  trees,  which  administer  to  their  com- 
fort and  couvenieuce.  The  eastern  and  southern  parts, 
however,  are  elevated  rocks,  from  thirty  feet  to  fifty  feet 
above  the  sea,  and  are  a continuous  ragged,  hollow,  brittle, 
barren,  coral  formation, — presenting  an  appearance  of  a 
reef  raised  by  the  action  of  fire.  The  whole  of  this  part  of 
the  island  is  a wild  waste,  except  where  the  chasm  has 
been  filled  up  with  drifted  soil  and  decayed  vegetable  matter, 
which  feed  the  roots  of  a few  solitary  cocoa-nuts. 

One  peculiar  object  of  interest  aud  curiosity  in  the  island 
of  Mitiaro  is  its  miniature  lake.  It  is  about  two  miles  and 
a half  in  circumference,  and  is  richly  begirt  with  low  shrubs 
of  evergreen ; its  surface  is  generally  so  calm  as  to  give  it  an 
appearance  of  a highly  polished  beautiful  mirror.  The 
native.s  frequently  fish  in  it,  and  it  is  reported  to  be  fathom- 
less in  the  centre.  Such  is  Mitiaro,  comprising,  within  a 
limited  circumference  of  twelve  miles,  a cultivated  fruitful 
garden,  a range  of  sterile  desert,  and  a perfect  lagoon  of 
surpassing  beauty.  It  is  a tiny  spot,  but  it  has  many  na- 
tural and  physical  curiosities  which  would  interest  and 
reward  the  re.searches  of  the  naturalist  and  the  philosopher  j 
but,  to  the  Christian,  its  chief  attraction  is,  that  it  is  the 
residence  of  human  beings, — a training  place  of  immortal 
souls,  and  a sphere  of  usefulness,  included  in  his  Master’s 
great  commission,  “ Go  ye  into  all  the  world,  and  preach 
the  gospel  to  every  creature  !” 

The  first  settlers  on  Mitiaro  came  from  Atiu,  which  is 
about  forty  miles  distant ; cruelties  of  heathen  war  drove 
them  to  this  place  of  exile,  and  now  to  its  present  inhabit- 
ants it  has  all  the  enjoyments  and  endearments  of  home. 

The  poor  people  told  us  heart-rending  tales  of  the  cruelty 
of  the  Atiuans,  who  in  past  years  were  wont  to  man  their 


246 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


war-canoes,  and  to  go  in  battle  fleet  array  to  Mitiaro — tales 
of  cruelty  and  bloodshed,  too  atrocious  to  be  detailed. 

We  have  already  noticed  that  the  gospel  of  Jesus,  the 
message  of  peace,  was  taken  to  Atiu  in  the  year  1822  : the 
people  there  received  this  message  as  “ good  tidings  of  great 
joy;”  they  committed  their  idols  to  the  flames,  heathen 
temples  were  demolished,  and  the  worship  of  the  true  God 
was  generally  adopted. 

As  soon  as  opportunity  presented,  the  Atiuans,  being 
blessed  themselves,  conveyed,  as  was  meet,  the  knowledge 
of  Christianity  to  the  Mitiaroans,  whom  they  had  formerly 
so  cruelly  oppressed.  The  chief  of  the  island  himself  led 
the  way;  on  his  arrival  at  Mitiaro,  he  told  the  people  what 
he  knew  about  the  new  religion ; he  exhorted  them  to  re- 
nounce idol-worship — to  place  themselves  under  the  instruc- 
tion of  a native  teacher,  and  to  build  a house  of  prayer  to 
Jehovah.  The  poor,  ignorant,  bewildered  islanders  listened 
with  astonishment,  and  somewhat  of  suspicion,  to  these 
propositions;  and  under  fearful  apprehensions  exclaimed, 
“ What ! forsake  our  gods  ! Destroy  their  temples  ! Burn 
the  sacred  one!  Shall  we  not  die?”  “No,”  replied  the 
visitors ; “ No,  you  will  not  die, — these  are  but  blocks  of 
wood,  they  cannot  kill  us ; we  have  been  deceived  in  calling 
them  gods ; forsake  them  ! commit  them  to  the  flames  !” 

Thus,  under  the  benign  influence  of  the  gospel  of  Christ, 
did  this  once  savage  chief  preach  to  the  people*  of  Mitiaro, 
and  he  was,  in  God’s  hand,  the  means  of  overthrowing  the 
system  of  idolatry  of  which  he  himself,  in  former  years,  had 
been  literally  the  head. 

A Tahitian  native  teacher  was  at  this  time  left  on  the 
island;  the  people  commenced  learning  the  truths  of  Chris- 
tianity, and  since  then  they  have  been  advancing  in  know- 
ledge and  civilization ; but  for  the  space  of  eighteen  years 
did  this  their  first  teacher  live  among  them,  receiving  only 


TUE  ISLAND  OF  MITIARO. 


247 


an  occasional  visit  from  the  missionaries  of  the  Tahitian 
islands  At  the  close,  however,  of  this  long  service,  his  age 
and  family,  together  with  the  consideration,  that  the  people 
liad  by  his  instruction  gone  beyond  his  own  amount  of 
knowledge,  led  to  his  removal,  and  an  excellent  young  evan- 
gelist from  Karotonga  was  appointed  to  this  station. 

When  we  visited  him  just  twelve  months  after  his  settle- 
ment there,  we  were  much  pleased  and  encouraged  at  the 
advance  made  by  the  people,  and  by  their  lively  attachment 
both  to  him  and  to  his  excellent  wife.  A small  number  of 
consistent  men  and  women  were  united  in  church-commu- 
nion, the  whole  of  the  children  were  under  daily  instruction, 
and  the  entire  little  community  were  living  in  order,  peace, 
and  social  propriety.  Much  to  their  gratification,  we  left 
among  them  a good  supply  of  slates,  pencils,  pens,  and  paper ; 
and  also  many  books  for  the  use  of  the  schools  and  for  the 
people  generally. 

In  1845,  we  again  visited  this  island,  and  perceived  an 
evident  advance  in  the  people,  as  compared  with  their  posi- 
tion on  former  visits.  Twenty  members  had  been  added  to 
the  native  church  j nearly  all  the  young  persons  on  the 
island  could  read  the  Scriptures,  and  a neat  lime  and  wattle 
building  had  been  erected  as  a chapel. 

The  present  teacher  labouring  on  Mitiaro  was  placed  there 
in  1848,  and  he  has  been  devoted  and  useful ; and  we  shall 
limit  the  remaining  notices  of  this  island  to  a few  extracts 
from  his  letters.  In  1849,  he  writes  : — 

“ I am  desirous  you  should  know  the  true  state  of  the 
people  of  Mitiaro,  and  therefore  will  write  all  I know. 
There  are  many  men  of  God  here,  who  love  him  and  serve 
him;  but  there  are  also  others  whose  hearts  are  dark  and 
hard.  Yet  the  word  of  God  is  growing,  many  of  the  wicked 
are  overtaken  by  the  word — the  powerful  word  of  God. 


248 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


There  are  at  present  twelve,  whose  hearts  are  pierced,  and 
who  are  coming  to  me  to  inquire  about  salvation.  These 
were  all,  a short  time  ago,  dwelling  in  the  midst  of  the  un- 
godly— they  were  loving  sin,  they  were  a trouble  to  the  land, 
they  were  wasting  their  season ; — but  now  they  are  very 
different ; their  minds  are  light,  and  their  hearts  are  soft. 
True  is  the  testimony  of  Paul,  Heb.  iv.  12,  ‘ The  word  of 
God  is  life,  it  is  power,  sharper  than  a two-edged  sword.’ 
This  is  a true  figure  to  illustrate  these  inquirers;  and  in 
them  I have  joy.  Pray  for  me,  that  I may  be  assisted  in 
this  mataJcu,  ‘ responsible  work.’  I must  also  tell  you  that 
the  former  chapel  built  here  is  not  substantial — the  people 
wish  to  see  a stone  chapel — they  are  burning  lime,  but  hardly 
believe  it  can  be  done.  I do  hope  we  may  soon  get  some 
tools  for  this  work, — Kia  ora  na  Koe  i te  Atua.  Plessing 
on  you  from  God. 

“Na  Rauraa.” 

There  are  many  points  in  such  communications  as  the 
above,  which  alike  illustrate  the  character  of  the  native 
teachers,  the  work  they  have  to  do,  and  the  manner  in  which 
they  do  it,  which,  by  reflection,  will  be  suggested  to  the 
reader’s  mind.  Without  comment,  therefore,  we  now  give 
the  translation  of  a letter  from  the  teacher’s  wife,  which  will 
be  found  equally  suggestive  and  characteristic.  Writing  to 
the  missionary’s  wife,  she  says  : — 

“ IMy  Teacher  and  Friend, — Blessing  on  you  from  Jesus 
Christ.  During  this  season  of  our  absence,  I and  my  hus- 
band are  frequently  thinking  with  sympathy  about  you,  and 
of  our  dwelling  with  you.  Rauraa  has  sent  you  word  about 
our  joy  in  the  prosperity  of  our  work  here.  This  is  true, 
all  true.  But  now  I must  tell  you  concerning  some  sorrow 
that  I have  in  my  heart.  Smoking  tobacco  is  very  much 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MITIARO. 


249 


in  practice  here,  not  only  by  the  men,  but,  alas,  by  the 
women  too ! This  is  very  bad,  especially  in  women  who 
make  a profession  of  religion.  Rauraa  has  exhorted  them 
to  leave  off  this  practice,  and  he  is  very  firm  with  those 
who  are  in  adult  elasses,  and  who  are  in  the  church.  Some 
of  them  have  received  his  advice,  but  others  are  still  obsti- 
nate. We  have,  therefore,  sought  other  means  to  do  away 
with  this  bad  practice,  llauraa  has  a book,  in  which  all 
who  are  willing  to  leave  off  smoking  write  their  names,  and 
the  thing  is  done.  This  has  been  a good  plan,  the  obstinacy 
of  many  has  been  overcome,  and  very  many  of  the  women 
are  reclaimed. 

“ My  heart  is  glad  to  tell  you,  that  the  people  are  kind  to 
us ; one  side  of  my  heart  is  joyous,  thinking  we  are  doing 
a little  good,  and  that  our  work  is  prospered,  but  the  other 
side  of  my  heart  has  many  fears. 

“ Na  Rauraa  Vaine.” 

The  practiee  of  smoking  tobacco  prevails  to  a very  inju- 
rious extent  amongst  most  of  the  natives  of  these  islands ; 
and  efforts,  both  by  precept  and  example,  are  constantly 
made  by  the  missionaries  of  this  group  either  to  prevent  or 
to  moderate  its  use;  but  where  this  teacher  gained  his 
idea  of  a pledge  in  the  matter,  I am  at  a loss  to  eonceive, 
for  nothing  of  the  kind  that  I am  aware  of  has  been  intro- 
duced to  the  people  by  the  missionaries.  The  success,  how- 
ever, which  attended  his  efforts  must  have  been  encoura<rin<r 
to  him,  and  doubtless,  beneficial  in  the  experience  of  the 
natives. 

In  the  notice  given  of  the  Training  Institution,  Raro- 
tonga, we  observed  that  we  endeavoured  to  give  the  students, 
during  their  residence  there,  a knowledge  of  those  arts 
and  usages  of  civilized  life  which  might  make  them  useful 
in  this  department  to  the  people  among  whom  they  might 
labour. 


250 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Hence  Eauraa,  the  teacher  on  Mitiaro,  while  daily  teach- 
ing the  people  in  the  schools,  and  otherwise  devoting  himself 
to  the  welfare  of  the  people,  was  ambitious  to  aid  them  in 
building  stone  houses,  and  encouraged  them  to  begin  with 
a chapel, — an  undertaking  desired  by  the  people,  hut  about 
the  accomplishment  of  which  they  had  some  doubts.  Their 
first  teachers  had  burnt  stones  into  lime,  and  had  built 
plastered  houses,  but  how  stone  on  stone  could  be  so  fixed 
as  to  be  raised  many  yards  high,  and  become  so  firmly 
cemented  as  to  bear  a heavy  roof,  was  a mystery  not  to  be 
believed  until  seen,  and  even  when  seen  still  remained  a 
mystery. 

Early  in  1850  sufficient  lime  had  been  prepared,  and  the 
teacher  fondly  hoped,  that  before  the  end  of  the  year  the 
house  of  God  would  be  finished.  A public  meeting  of  the 
people  was  convened,  every  proposition  was  acceded  to,  and 
all  bade  fair  to  end  peacefully,  until  it  was  proposed  by  a 
few  of  the  people  not  to  build  the  chapel  on  the  old  site,  but 
on  one  more  convenient  and  appropriate.  This  was  strenu- 
ously opposed  by  the  mass  of  the  people,  and  so  strikingly 
• illustrates  their  superstitions,  that  we  cannot  refrain  from 
noticing  it  here.  The  old  chapel  stood  a little  inland  from 
the  beach,  washed  by  the  sea,  falling  on  that  part  of  the 
reef  which  formed  their  most  successful  fishery,  and  some 
way  or  other  they  had  conceived  a notion  that  the  sacredness 
of  the  spot  where  the  chapel  stood,  and  the  constant  good 
supply  of  fish,  were  connected  and  inseparable  ! “ What!” 

they  exclaimed,  opposing  the  views  of  a more  enlightened 
party,  “ What ! remove  the  chapel  to  another  spot,  and 
thus  deprive  us  of  our  principal  food  I No,  we  will  never 
consent  to  that ; if  that  be  decided  on,  we  will  never  join 
in  the  work !” 

The  teacher  attempted  to  show  the  folly  of  such  notions, 
and  attempted  to  reason  the  mutter  with  them.  It  was, 


TnE  ISLAND  OF  MITIARO. 


251 


however,  of  no  avail ; their  minds  were  made  up  on  the 
point ; the  huilding  should  not  be  removed  to  another  place. 
“ Alas  !”  exclaims  the  teacher  in  a letter  written  at  the 
time.  “ Alas,  that  these  people  are  so  slow  to  leave  off  their 
old  thoughts  and  ways  ! so  slow  to  receive  the  whole  truth 
respecting  God  ! He  is  everywhere  present,  doing  good  to 
all,  and  the  whole  earth  is  full  of  his  goodness.  What  profit 
can  there  he  in  mere  place  ? But  I fear  the  majority  of  the 
people  will  have  it  their  own  way ; this  my  heart  is  sorry 
for,  not  on  account  of  the  place,  but  because  of  the  wrong 
thoughts  about  it.  We  have  decided  not  to  begin  the 
building  yet.  We  must  first  let  these  errors  and  troubles 
fall  behind  us.  I am  grieved  with  these  things,  but  I am 
trying  to  bear  them  patiently.” 

Soon  after  this,  many  of  the  church-members  on  Mitiaro 
made  an  arrangement  to  take  a voyage  to  Mauke',  the 
island  last  mentioned,  in  order  to  have  conference  and 
encouragement  with  their  brethren  there.  The  teacher 
accompanied  them  on  this  visit,  and  they  reached  Mauke'  in 
safety  after  twenty-four  hours’  sail  in  open  boats.  Here 
the  party  remained  a month,  during  which  time  many 
religious  and  social  services  were  held  with  their  brethren ; 
the  old  people  refreshed  their  memory  respecting  deeds  of 
bygone  years,  while  they  encouraged  each  other  to  gratitude 
and  praise  for  the  new  dispensation  which  they  now 
enjoyed,  and  exhorted  the  rising  generation  to  hold  fast  the 
word  of  life,  to  which  they  were  indebted  for  the  happy 
change. 

On  their  return  voyage  to  Mitiaro  this  party  had  well 
nigh  lost  their  lives  at  sea.  They  embarked  on  board  a 
native-built  schooner,  and  were  overtaken  by  a storm,  which 
kept  them  at  sea  nearly  a week ; at  length,  however,  they 
made  the  island  of  Aitutaki,  where  they  landed  in  safety, 
and  had  the  pleasure  of  attending  the  missionary  May 
meetings,  and  thence  returned  to  their  own  island. 


252 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Not  long  after  their  return,  the  people,  improved  in 
temper  and  refreshed  in  spirit,  began  to  build  the  new 
chapel.  By  a little  mutual  yielding  a site  was  fixed  on 
which  plea.sed  all  parties ; and  in  giving  the  dimensions  of 
the  house  the  teacher  says,  ‘‘It  is  72  feet  long,  40  feet 
wide,  and  the  walls  are  20  feet  high.  It  has  ten  windows, 
and  is  enclosed  under  two  roofs;  every  man  and  woman 
on  the  island  did  something  towards  the  building,  and  even 
the  elder  children  helped  us ; they  assisted  in  bringing 
stones  and  lime,  and  in  drawing  the  timber  to  the  place  of 
building.'’  “ It  is  now  finished,”  continues  Rauraa  in  his 
last  letter,  “ and  the  people  sit  and  look  at  it  with  wonder 
and  delight.  My  heart  is  also  glad,  and  I thank  God,  who 
has  assisted  me  in  doing  this  work.  His  love  is  great ! his 
power  is  great !” 

For  three  months  after  the  completion  of  this  house  of 
God,  the  teacher  and  people  anxiously  waited  the  arrival  of 
the  missionary  ship,  to  bring  a missionary  to  conduct  the 
opening  service ; but,  being  disappointed,  they  sent  mes- 
sengers to  Mauk6  and  to  Atiu  for  some  of  their  friends 
on  those  islands  to  come  over  and  unite  with  them  in  the 
hallowed  engagements  of  the  occasion.  One  native  teacher 
read  the  Scriptures,  and  another  preached.  The  sermon 
was  founded  on  1 Kings  viii.  10 — 13,  Solomon’s  Prayer, 
and  the  whole  service  was  one  of  devout  joy.  The  fathers 
of  this  people  had  never  dreamt  of  seeing  this  mighty  and 
glorious  change  now  come  upon  their  children  ; and  who 
cannot  but  rejoice  in  the  simple,  primitive,  Christian  life  of 
these  isolated  islanders ! 

As  on  other  islands,  so  on  Mitiaro,  the  people  are,  by 
their  prayers  and  contributions,  now  aiding,  according  to 
their  ability,  the  spread  of  the  gospel  to  other  lands. 
Their  money  and  their  arrow-root  are  cheerfully  given 
towards  this  good  cause.  “ It  is  but  little  we  can  do,” 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MITIARO. 


253 


they  say,  ‘‘  our  land  is  small  and  we  are  poor,  but  we  cannot 
akamjere,  deny  ourselves  the  pleasure  of  taking  a part,  in 
doing  something  for  the  word  of  God,  to  which  we  owe  our 
all.” 

We  have  now  brought  to  a close  our  notices  of  the 
Hervey  Group  of  islands,  in  which  we  have  endeavoured 
to  give  a connected  and  concise  missionary  history  of  each 
island,  and  have  illustrated  the  rise  and  development  of 
Christian  character  and  labours  of  the  native  converts. 
Prior  to  the  year  1820,  these  islands  were  all  but  unknown 
to  the  civilized  world,  and  the  entire  population  was  in  a 
rude  state  of  heathen,  idolatrous,  cannibal  life.  Christian 
converts  from  amongst  the  Tahitian  group  population  were, 
in  every  instance,  the  honoured  instrument  in  the  over- 
throw of  idolatry,  in  making  known  the  knowledge  of 
Christianity,  in  teaching  the  people  letters  to  represent  the 
sounds  of  their  language,  and  in  introducing  the  arts  and 
usages  of  civilized  life.  To  these  native  teachers  the  whole 
conducting  of  settlements,  schools,  and  churches  was  in- 
trusted, with  the  exception  of  Rarotonga,  from  fifteen  to 
twenty  years ; and  three  of  the  islands  are  at  present,  and 
will  remain,  under  their  sole  superintendence.  The  whole 
population  of  the  group  is  now  educated,  civilized,  and 
Christian ; and,  besides  maintaining  the  institutions  of 
Christianity  on  their  own  island,  the  people  are  doing  much 
to  extend  the  triumphs  of  the  gospel  to  the  heathen. 
Without  repeating  what  we  have  said,  in  the  last  chapter,  of 
Rarotonga,  applicable  to  all  the  group,  we  do  think  that  the 
present  position  of  this  mission  is  a triumph  of  the  power 
and  grace  of  the  gospel  of  Christ,  as  glorious  and  complete 
as  any  gained  in  the  past  history  of  the  world ; men, — few, 
and  feeble,  and  imperfect,  have  laboured ; but,  through  their 
22 


254 


GEMS  FR03I  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


labours,  a divine,  transforming  power  has  been  displayed ; 
and,  prostrating  our  souls  before  the  throne  of  Jesus,  we 
will  sing — 

“ God  of  Salvation  ! we  adore 
Thy  saving  love,  thy  saving  power ; 

And,  to  our  utmost  stretch  of  thought, 

Hail  the  Redemption  thou  bast  wrought.” 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANIIKI. 


Situation  of  Penrhyn  islands — Native  youth  from  Tahiti  landed  on 
Maniiki — His  report  of  Christianity — Voyages  of  the  islanders  in 
their  canoes — Consequentcalamities — Nine  natives  in  a canoe  picked 
up  at  sea  by  an  American  captain — These  are  brought  to  the  Her- 
vey  group — Landed  on  Manual — Incidents  while  there — Attempts 
of  Aitutaki  church  to  visit  them — Their  removal  to  Aitutaki — Kind 
reception — The  Maniikians  wonder  at  what  they  see  on  Aitutaki — 
The  natives  taken  to  Maniiki  in  the  mission  ship — Rarotongan 
teachers  land — Incidents  of  landing — Success  of  the  teachers — 
Chieftain  pride  rebuked — Missionary  visit  in  1852 — Complete  copies 
of  the  Bible  taken  on  shore — Present  state  of  Maniiki. 


The  Penrhyn  Isles  are  situated  about  600  miles  almost 
due  north  of  the  Hervey  group,  and  although  they  have 
been  known  for  many  generations  in  the  legends  of  the 
people  of  Rarotonga,  and  those  of  the  other  islands  of  the 
group,  yet  it  is  only  recently  that  we  have  been  able  to  take 

(255)  5^ 


256 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


to  them  the  blessings  of  Christianity.  In  this  cluster  of 
islands  we  include  numerous  low  reef  islands,  situated  be- 
tween 8°  and  10°  south  latitude,  and  158°  to  161°  west 
longitude,  two  of  which  only  have  native  teachers,  which 
are  Maniiki,  and  Tongareva. 

At  the  time  when  Tahiti  and  her  tributary  islands  were 
at  the  zenith  of  their  gospel  glory  and  liberty,  a young  lad 
who  had  been  educated  in  the  mission  school,  left  his  home 
as  sailor  in  a whale  ship.  While  cruising  about,  within  the 
range  of  latitude  and  longitude  mentioned  above,  the  cap- 
tain called  at  the  island  of  Maniiki  to  procure  a supply  of 
cocoa-nuts,  and  the  Tahitian  lad  ran  away  from  the  vessel  3 
born  too  late  to  be  a heathen  in  Tahiti,  he  gave  himself  up 
to  be  a heathen  on  the  island  of  Maniiki.  He  was  the  first 
to  tell  these  heathen  islanders  of  the  white  man’s  God;  and, 
to  their  astonishment,  he  also  told  them  of  the  overthrow 
of  idolatry  on  Tahiti — and  of  the  establishment-  there  of 
the  word  and  reign  of  Jesus  the  Son  of  God. 

These  strange  tales  caused  a gleam  of  new  light  to  enter 
into  the  minds  of  the  poor  people,  and  the  more  reflecting 
amongst  them  felt  that  an  undying  desire  had  been  awak- 
ened, to  know  more  than  the  Tahitian  lad  had  to  tell  them. 
They  and  their  fathers  had  been  in  the  habit  of  voyaging  in 
their  canoes  to  the  islands  of  Tokerau  and  Fou,  and  they  had 
heard  of  Rarotonga,  and  Aitutaki,  and  Tahiti,  but  now  they 
began  to  think  of  them  as  being  in  real  existence,  and  not 
as  they  had  been  wont  to,  only  fabulous  creations  of  the 
priests,  and  sacred  men  of  bygone  days ; some  of  the  young 
men  even  set  out  in  a canoe  expedition,  hoping  to  be  taken 
by  the  gods  to  one  of  the  above-named  islands.  In  this  and 
other  enterprises  of  kindred  character,  many  of  them  lost 
their  lives,  and  on  one  occasion  some  were  taken  to  the  dis- 
tant islands  of  Samoa. 

In  the  year  1849,  a large  party  of  these  Maniiki  natives 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANIIKI. 


257 


left  the  island  in  their  canoes,  purposing  to  visit  Rakaanga, 
situated  about  thirty  miles  from  Maniiki.  In  going  thither 
they  were  overtaken  by  a storm ; but  few  reached  Rakaanga, 
most  of  the  party  perished  at  sea,  and  those  who  remained 
came  together  in  one  canoe,  either  to  live  or  die,  as  might 
be, — of  life  they  had  but  little  hope. 

While  in  this  state,  having  been  many  weeks  at  sea,  a 
whaling  ship  was  passing  from  the  north  to  the  south 
Pacific,  the  captain  of  which  saw  these  natives  at  a little 
distance  from  his  vessel,  and  no  less  than  eighty  miles  from 
their  land.  The  benevolent  man  bore  down  to  them ; found 
their  number  to  be  five  men,  and  four  women,  some  of 
whom  were  half  dead  from  exhaustion ; he  took  them  on 
board  his  ship;  they  revived  under  his  kind  treatment,  and 
were  brought  to  the  Hervey  group  of  islands. 

In  this  way  God  accomplished  his  designs  of  mercy  to 
this  poor  people,  and  their  calamities  were  made  the  channel 
of  spiritual  blessing  to  themselves  and  their  tribe.  The 
missionaries  on  the  Tahitian,  Hervey,  and  Samoan  groups 
had  long  desired  to  visit  these  islands,  but  such  were  the 
stringent  instructions  respecting  the  course  of  the  mis- 
sionary ship,  that  the  risk  and  responsibility  of  departing  from 
it,  had  prevented  her  being  taken  on  what  would  have  been 
deemed  a voyage  of  enterprise  and  discovery.  Had  the 
voyage  been  taken  to  Maniiki  under  such  circumstances, 
and  accomplished  with  success,  of  course  all  would  have 
been  well,  but  had  any  accident  occurred  either  to  the  vessel 
or  to  the  crew,  the  blame  would  have  rested  on  the  captain 
and  his  advisers.  Hence  the  delay  in  going  to  this  island, 
but  now  that  God  had  in  his  providence  brought  these 
islanders  into  our  midst,  we  felt  it  to  be  our  duty  to  detain 
the  John  Williams  from  her  prescribed  course,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  taking  them  home,  and  of  locating  native  teachers 
on  the  island. 

22* 


258 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


The  captain,  who  had  picked  up  this  people  at  sea,  in- 
tended to  land  them  either  on  Rarotonga  or  onAitutaki,  but 
not  being  able  to  make  either  of  these  islands,  he  left  them 
on  the  uninhabited  land  of  Manual.  At  that  time  there 
was  an  American  salesman  living  on  shore,  collecting  cocoa- 
nuts,  and  feeding  swine  for  the  Tahitian  market,  and  to  his 
care  the  heathen  strangers  were  committed,  with  instruc- 
tions that  they  were  to  be  sent  on  to  Aitutaki  or  Rarotonga 
the  first  opportunity  that  presented.  In  his  circumstan- 
ces, this  salesman  gladly  availed  himself  of  the  labour  of 
these  Maniikians,  and  at  length  looked  upon  them  as  his 
subjects  and  himself  the  king  of  the  island.  This  poor 
wanderer  had,  by  imprudence  and  intemperance,  made  him- 
self as  wretched  as  he  was  poor,  but  it  appears  that  he  had 
not  entirely  forgotten  the  lessons  of  Christianity  which  he 
had  learnt  in  his  youth : he  was  wont  to  observe  the  Lord’s- 
day  as  a rest-day,  and  having  a Bible  in  the  native  language, 
he  gathered  together  the  heathen  natives  of  Maniiki  on  that 
day,  and  read  to  them  the  Scriptures;  having  the  Bible  in 
one  hand  and  his  gun  in  the  other : the  gun  he  thought 
necessary  for  self-protection,  for  in  his  opinion  he  could  place 
no  confidence  in  his  savage  companions. 

V essels  calling  at  this  island  brought  information  of  the 
natives  being  there,  to  Aitutaki;  and  with  commendable 
zeal,  and  Christian  love,  the  members  of  the  Aitutakian 
church  made  arrangements  to  send  a deacon  over  to  them, 
with  supplies  of  cloth  and  food,  and  for  the  purpose  of 
remaining  with  them  until  they  could  be  removed  in  the 
mission-ship.  But  when  this  delegate  was  on  the  eve  of 
departure  in  a native  boat,  a trading  schooner  came  in  for 
supplies,  and  otfered  to  take  him  to  IManuai,  if  the  people  of 
Aitutaki  would  ballast  his  vessel  free  of  expense.  This  pro- 
position was  willingly  aceeded  to,  in  two  days  the  work  was 
complete,  and  they  also  made  the  vessel  a present  of  fowls 
and  yams  for  the  voyage. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANIIKI. 


259 


But  the  captain,  laden  with  the  gifts  of  this  generous 
people,  left  the  island,  and  betrayed  the  confidence  which  had 
been  placed  in  him.  lie  sailed  to  Tahiti,  taking  the  deacon 
with  him,  who,  but  for  the  early  arrival  of  the  mission-ship, 
would  have  had  to  remain  there  some  time.  On  her  passage 
from  Tahiti  to  Aitutaki,  the  missionary  ship  called  at  llaro- 
tonga,  two  native  teachers  were  put  on  board,  it  sailed  to 
Manual,  found  the  natives  of  Maniiki  all  well,  and  brought 
them  to  Aitutaki  in  order  to  make  arrangements  about  con- 
veying them  to  their  own  island. 

They  were  landed  at  Aitutaki  on  a Sabbath  day  during 
the  morning  service ; in  the  afternoon  they  went  to  school  j 
here  all  was  new  to  them ; and  they  were  lost  in  speechless 
amazement  at  everything  which  they  saw.  The  people  of 
Aitutaki  were  their  brethren,  of  the  same  colour,  and  spoke 
the  same  language  as  themselves;  but  how  vast  the  contrast ! 
It  was  as  though  some  of  the  old  heathen  inhabitants  had 
risen  from  the  dead,  and  without  having  had  the  experience 
of  the  past  thirty  years  of  Christianity  on  the  island,  were 
permitted  to  see  its  advance,  and  to  contrast  it  with  their 
own  heathenism  and  idolatry ; and  the  young  men  of  Aitu- 
taki had  never  before  realized  the  greatness  of  the  deliver- 
ance which  Christianity  had  wrought  for  them,  as  they  did 
while  they  looked  on  the  savage  islanders  of  Maniiki  who 
had  been  brought  to  their  shores. 

After  visiting  the  schools,  the  Maniikians  attended  the 
evening  public  service  in  the  chapel ; the  building,  the  com- 
pany, the  engagements,  were  a new  world  of  mystery  to 
their  untutored  minds.  They  sat  in  the  midst  of  a thousand 
natives,  one  half  of  whom  but  a few  years  before  were  as 
wild  as  themselves.  They  listened  to  the  singing  of  hymns 
of  praise  to  Jehovah  from  the  great  chorus  of  voices  ; they 
looked  with  awe  on  the  whole  congregation  prostrated  in 
prayer,  and  felt  that  they  had  entered  into  a state  of  wonder 


2G0 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


and  delight.  After  singing  and  prayer,  they  heard  the  story 
of  the  cross  of  Christ  stated  and  explained,  and  were  told  of 
their  own  interest  in  that  important  transaction.  This,  in- 
deed, was  a day  of  salvation  to  them,  and  they  desired  that 
teachers  of  this  same  religion  should  be  sent  at  once  to  their 
own  land. 

They  remained  about  a fortnight  with  the  Aitutaki  church, 
and  then,  accompanied  by  two  teachers,  and  laden  with  the 
blessings  and  followed  by  the  prayers  of  the  people,  they 
sailed  towards  their  own  island.  After  four  days’  sail,  some 
delay  was  occasioned  by  not  knowing  the  exact  position  of 
Maniiki,  but  it  was  found  to  be  in  161°  4'  west  longitude, 
and  10°  28'  south  latitude : called  Humphrey’s  Island  on 
the  English  charts. 

“ Laying  off  for  the  night,”  writes  Captain  Morgan,  “ we 
held  a prayer-meeting  on  board.  Early  on  the  following 
morning  a great  number  of  natives  came  off  to  us  in  their 
canoes,  who,  on  seeing  their  friends,  whom  they  had  sup- 
posed to  be  lost,  began  to  strike  their  heads  most  violently, 
causing  blood  to  run  in  profusion  down  their  bodies  : this 
appears  to  be  their  custom,  alike  in  seasons  of  excessive  joy 
as  well  as  in  grief.  One  of  the  chiefs  came  on  board,  and, 
with  the  Karotongan  teachers,  we  had  no  difficulty  of  making 
ourselves  understood.  We  told  the  people,”  continues  Cap- 
tain Morgan,  “ that  we  were  glad  at  having  the  opportunity 
of  bringing  home  their  lost  countrymen ; and  they  told 
them  of  all  the  wonders  they  had  seen  at  Aitutaki — of  the 
overthrow  of  idolatry,  of  Jehovah  as  the  only  true  God,  and 
of  Je.sus  Christ  the  Saviour.” 

A consultation  was  then  held  about  leaving  the  teachers 
on  shore,  and  the  heathen  people  said,  that  from  what  they 
had  heard,  they  were  willing  the  tea«liers  should  land;  and 
the  chiefs  said,  that  they  would  protect  their  lives  until  the 
return  of  the  ship;  and  under  these  favourable  circumstances 


■-'  ' ' ‘ * ’ • ■ 

<mm^  ha»  l«i«  ’ ' 

b\nkt>  u.  n,i->  ^ 

' #4  liMT  iJKritaHli'r^  Miiitt«V|itt«  All^ 

t»*$  >«o.^tCiJ»rjMTi  maiik  d»  iu  l«l» »«»«», ImA 

«»«L>  tt*!Mii^  ««'4iin  »m  - dUi 

«An«J'J  n(M4[(Ti^  <h1»  « pmdt  « 

«tfi4Mr»r*>4wi  iift«  (mvthf  it  imt  y<f 
■j  ^ *w*wf  A 4«w«4l«t  l^c 

4 n’rit'Tvit/'  ' Jrnim 

^ H iMOfB  «4»  i;iiwiin4 

’ ,it*<»r  ‘J*  lM!4i<A'<jukir  <•  • ir  f nfHitalft 

J**»i»aA4  '^..^  . <fa- w itM  " 

liy<^-<4rW  >>nirqA:>^ Ji-4^  9<NIi»tt'  4pierii«p  ■ -^-= 

•*:«!  ir»A  arrMiff  a*  ,iui» 

of  friKl*.  pt »h4|>  W ■n*:t^'’ 

4h»t  ir^M(‘i|ff^uw:r'4pbfiv^j  A ««♦>  »i  4fc* 

Jr^  j?»*nlsA3*^jlm4?rt  oo  «<|hv 

iN#f  #'7#.»*rim4»  **  .>rr>.K'*i«i 
V.^  irfij*  - ^utatm*  ''tmtum440 

•rfl  4»v  A»y  Imm!  «<Miy.«f*<l^-Tw  yXi  «(e 

|Mr»>^^lirU«r<f««ibi»i 

«N»»«*4  ^ lbnd>e«ij|  f A - 

*»4I  Mh  Jnm^<>mA.«0  \ 

¥b«  r Iht«4  itH  x^^^a.nHKNf  J 

l>Mtf*«VNiy«lAr«>grMit  i^c(j  isPailten  lit  jMli-W««M* 


Coral  Beef,  Lagoon  Island. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANIIKI. 


261 


were  the  teachers  of  Christianity  first  located  on  the  island 
of  Maniiki. 

The  mass  of  natives  on  the  beach  were  very  wild,  and 
very  expert  thieves.  Although  they  were  closely  watched, 
they  contrived  to  steal  every  movable  article;  but  notwith- 
standing this,  every  one  on  board  rejoiced  at  what  had,  in 
the  providence  of  God,  been  effected. 

The  island  of  IManiiki  is  little  more  than  fifteen  miles  in 
circumference ; it  is  a barren  reef,  not  more  than  thirty  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  sea;  and  the  inner  elevated  reef,  not 
more  than  500  feet  wide,  is  the  part  of  the  island  which  is 
inhabited.  There  were  found  about  1200  people  on  this 
desolate  spot,  who  subsisted  almost  entirely  on  cocoa-nuts 
and  fish. 

In  giving  an  account  of  his  early  labours  among  this  peo- 
pie,  one  of  the  teachers  says  : — “ On  landing  here,  our  books, 
and  clothes,  and  tools,  were  all  stolen  from  us ; but  an  in- 
vestigation took  place,  by  command  of  the  chief,  and  they 
were,  for  the  most  part,  restored.  Many  days  after  we  came 
on  shore,  the  hut  in  which  we  resided,  was  crowded  by  visi- 
tors, day  and  all  night,  and  we  could  not  find  time  to  sleep. 
The  people  did  nothing  but  listen  to  what  we  had  to  tell 
them  about  the  folly  of  idolatry,  and  the  character  of  the 
evangelia  a Jem.  We  here  found  the  native  from  the  Ta- 
hitian group.  He  has  been  on  shore  many  years,  and  has 
lived  a heathen  life.  The  Maniikians  are  kind  to  strangers; 
they  do  not  often  have  fighting,  or  tamaki,  war,  among 
themselves ; they  have  a great  number  of  idols  which  they 
worship;  feasts  of  cocoa-nuts  and  fish  are  frequent,  and 
they  are  fond  of  dancing.” 

They,  however,  appear  to  have  been  much  impressed  with 
the  statements  made  by  their  countrymen  who  had  returned 
from  Aitutaki ; and  in  le.ss  than  twelve  months  after  their 
lauding,  most  of  the  idols  on  the  island  were  destroyed ; two 


262 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


buildings  were  erected  for  the  worship  of  the  true  God; 
daily  schools  were  held  for  the  children ; and  the  Tahitian 
native,  of  whom  we  have  spoken,  became  so  interested  in 
the  new  state  of  things,  that  he  engaged  himself  in  teach- 
ing a class  of  lads,  thus  aiding  the  missionaries  in  their  work. 

The  scarcity  of  food  on  Maniiki  often  compels  the  natives 
to  go  to  Rakaanga,  and  as  this  much  interfered  with  their 
settlement  and  improvement,  it  was  advised  that  a part  of 
the  population  should  go  there  to  reside,  and  one  of  the 
teachers  would  go  with  them.  But  to  this  they  would  not 
consent;  and  the  consequences  were  found  to  be  most  dis- 
astrous. Twenty  canoes  put  to  sea  on  one  occasion,  soon 
after  the  location  of  teachers  on  the  island,  to  go  to  Eaka- 
anga  for  cocoa-nuts,  having  about  two  hundred  people  on 
board.  They  were  overtaken  by  a storm ; the  canoes  were 
separated;  many  of  them  were  wrecked,  and  upwards  of 
twenty  persons  were  drowned.  In  1852,  on  representing 
the  state  of  those  reef  islanders  to  the  Christian  friends  in 
Sydney,  they  purchased  a boat  for  the  use  of  the  teachers, 
and  the  Aitutakians  purchased  another,  both  of  which  have 
been  of  great  service  to  the  natives  in  their  expeditions. 

The  following  extract  from  one  of  the  teachers’  letters,  of 
a later  date,  is  alike  characteristic  of  the  man  and  of  the 
natives  with  whom  he  resided  : — “ Friend,”  he  says,  “ I find 
your  exhortation  to  me  before  I left  to  come  here,  to  be 
quite  true — the  work  of  preaching  the  gospel  cannot  be 
done  without  labour  and  trials.  None  of  the  heathens  have 
done  us  any  injury,  but  many  of  them  persecute  us,  and 
some  of  those  who  attend  to  instruction  are  very  ignorant. 
When  they  are  taken  ill  they  are  surprised,  not  understand- 
ing the  word  of  God,  and  they  say,  ‘ How  is  this  that  we 
are  sick,  and  die  now  ? Is  not  Jehovah  a God  of  love  ? and 
Jesus,  is  he  not  a Saviour?  IIow  is  it  that  those  who  be- 
lieve in  him  are  not  saved  from  pain  and  death  ?’  ” 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MANIIKI. 


263 


These  inquiries,  of  course,  led  the  teacher  to  give  correct 
expositions  of  God  and  his  ways,  as  revealed  in  his  word; 
and  by  these  means  the  people  advanced  in  Christian  know- 
ledge and  practice.  About  this  time  a circumstance  oc- 
curred at  one  of  the  early  Sabbath  morning  prayer-meetings, 
which  will  illustrate  the  delicate  position  in  which  the  native 
teachers  are  sometimes  placed  with  such  a people  as  the 
Maniikians,  and  the  prudence  with  which  they  act.  There 
were  in  the  village  thirty  or  forty  persons  of  whose  true 
conversion  to  God  no  doubts  were  entertained.  At  the 
meetings  for  prayer,  these  were  called  on  to  take  part  in  the 
service.  On  one  occasion  the  chief  of  the  island  was  pre- 
sent. He  had  been  kind  to  the  teacher,  and  had  given  his 
influence  to  aid  in  the  formation  of  schools;  but  as  yet  he 
gave  no  evidence  of  a change  of  heart.  He  had  been  a 
sort  of  high-priest,  as  well  as  chief,  in  heathenism ; and  now 
in  his  unsubdued  pride  he  could  not  brook  to  hear  his  in- 
feriors lead  the  public  devotions  of  the  people.  As  long  as 
the  teacher  took  the  whole  of  the  service,  he  was  pleased, 
but  as  soon  as  these  his  dependents  prayed  in  the  congrega- 
tion, the  proud  heathen  chieftain  resolved  to  do  all  he  could 
to  interrupt  the  advance  of  a religion  which  regarded  a 
change  of  heart  of  more  importance  than  place  and  power. 
He  consequently  raised  a persecution,  but  by  forbearance  on 
the  part  of  the  teacher  and  instruction,  his  mind  became 
enlightened,  his  heart  subdued,  and  his  opposition  laid 
aside. 

On  our  voyage  to  Sydney,  November,  1852,  we  visited 
this  island.  We  were  surprised  at  the  desolateness  of  the 
spot,  and  advised  the  people  as  to  the  propriety  of  removing 
to  some  more  favoured  place;  but  all  arguments  and  reason- 
ings were  set  aside  by  a uniform  reply,  that  “ it  was  their 
home.”  It  was  pleasing  to  find  that  the  greater  part  of  the 
young  people  could  read,  and  that  many  of  them  had  been 


264 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


taught  to  write.  Upwards  of  fifty  individuals  were  pro- 
posed for  baptism,  but  we  declined,  stating  that  we  preferred 
allowing  the  rite  to  stand  over  until  some  missionary  could 
come  and  reside  among  them  for  awhile. 

Five  hundred  school-books,  printed  at  the  missionary  press, 
Rarotonga,  had  been  already  circulated  among  the  people, 
and  we  left  with  them  more  than  a hundred  copies  of  the 
entire  Scriptures  in  the  Rarotongan  language,  which,  with 
very  few  different  words,  is  their  own. 

Thus  in  the  short  space  of  three  years,  the  inhabitants  of 
Maniiki  were  delivered  from  heathenism  and  idolatry,  and, 
with  the  exception  of  one  hundred  persons,  were  all  under 
Christian  instruction  : the  Sabbath  was  instituted,  adult  and 
children’s  schools  were  well  attended,  a goodly  number 
were  known  to  be  true  disciples  of  Jesus,  through  regene- 
rating grace  and  faith  in  his  name,  and  numerous  copies  of 
the  complete  Bible  were  in  the  hands  of  the  people, — all 
this  accomplished,  we  say,  within  the  short  space  of  three 
years,  and  by  the  unaided  instrumentality  of  native  Chris- 
tian teachers.  Maretu,  whose  efficient  services  we  have  had 
occasion  to  notice  in  Rarotonga  and  Mangaia,  is  now  on  the 
island,  he  has  formed  a Christian  church,  he  superintends 
the  schools,  and  is  conducting  the  whole  affairs  of  the  mis- 
sion with  much  success.  It  is  to  his  labours,  and  to  those 
of  men  like  him,  that  such  stations  must  be  intrusted, — 
and  we  need  no  other ; but  it  is  highly  important  that  the 
missionary  ship  should  visit  them  at  least  once  a year;  this, 
however,  has  never  yet  been  the  case,  and  we  see  no  hope 
of  its  being  accomplished  in  the  future,  except  the  churches 
in  the  Australian  colonies  are  united  into  a vigorous  and 
well-established  Missionary  Association,  and  take  a special 
and  direct  interest  in  the  present  position  of  Christianity 
in  islands  already  visited,  and  in  its  further  extension  to 
the  numberless  islands  yet  in  heathen  darkness. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  TONGAREVA, 

OR 

PENRHYN’S  ISLAND. 


Tongareva  a lagoon  island — Visit  of  an  American  ship  in  1841 — The 
wildness  of  the  natives — Opinion  of  a Queen’s  Commissioner  re- 
specting the  natives — Murder  of  a New  Zealander — Subsequent 
blight  on  the  cocoa-nut  trees  of  the  island — A California  vessel 
wrecked  on  the  island — The  crew  saved — Two  natives  of  the  island 
brought  to  Rarotonga — Native  teachers  return  with  them  to  Tonga- 
reva— Successes — Novel  coincidence  about  the  act  of  sneezing — 
Reflections — Conclusion. 


Tongareva,  or  Penrhyn’s  island,  is  140  miles  north-east 
of  Maniiki;  it  is  a small,  lagoon  island,  about  fifty  feet 
high,  nine  miles  long,  five  miles  broad,  having  some  of  the 
chasms  of  the  reef  sufficiently  broad  to  admit  a boat  into 
the  lagoon  ; and  its  population  is  estimated  at  1300  persons. 
American  whalers  coming  from  the  Sandwich  islands  to 
Rarotonga,  had  often  told  us  of  the  savage  state  of  the 
natives  of  this  island,  which  reports  filled  the  minds  of  the 
native  Christians  with  compassionate  desire  to  convey  to 
them  the  blessings  of  the  gospel.  The  most  authentic  in- 
23  (265) 


266 


GEMS  PROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


formation,  however,  of  the  heathen  state  of  this  people  was 
gained  from  Lieut.  Ringgold,  who  had  intercourse  with 
them  on  board  the  Porpoise,  in  the  year  1841.  Those  who 
came  off  to  his  vessel,  were  the  wildest  and  most  savage- 
looking beings  he  had  ever  seen.  Their  canoes  were  inge- 
niously constructed  of  pieces  of  dark  coloured  wood  sewed 
together  with  sennit  of  cocoa-nut  fibre  ; each  contained,  on 
the  average,  ten  natives,  who  were  naked,  and  whose  frightful 
vociferations  were  accompanied  with  most  violent  contortions 
and  gesticulations.  They  seemed  at  first  to  have  no  weapons, 
but  upon  inspection  were  found  to  have  spears  concealed  in 
their  canoes.  Some  few  succeeded  in  getting  on  board  the 
Porpoise,  but  on  behaving  themselves  unruly  they  were 
ordered  back  to  their  canoes.  These  they  had  no  sooner 
reached  than  they  began  to  hurl  on  board  large  pieces  of 
coral  and  shell,  which  came  on  the  deck  with  great  force ; 
two  guns  were  then  fired  over  their  heads,  but  of  this  the 
frantic  people  took  no  notice,  and  they  continued  some  time 
brandishing  their  spears  in  an  attitude  of  defiance,  with 
yells  the  most  hideous  ever  heard  from  human  voice.  Thus 
this  island  has  been  the  terror  of  all  navigators  who  have 
passed  within  its  vicinity,  and  in  1854,  a gentleman  who 
had  been  the  Queen’s  Commissioner,  at  Port  Philip,  was 
passenger  on  board  a vessel  that  sailed  near  the  island ; he 
had  intercourse  with  the  natives,  and  openly  maintained  the 
policy  of  government  sending  a ship  of  war  to  destroy  this 
tribe  of  savages  who  were  becoming  a nest  of  pirates,  most 
dangerous  to  ships  which  approached  their  shores.  It  was 
thought  to  be  quite  certain,  that  if  a vessel  fell  into  their 
hands,  or  was  wrecked  on  the  island,  the  crew  would  without 
doubt  be  all  devoured  by  the  cannibals. 

Some  time  before  this,  a trading  vessel  was  off  the  island 
in  want  of  supplies,  and  a boat’s  crew  were  sent  to  try  to 
effect  a landing  j on  coming  near  the  reef,  a native  of  New 


THE  ISLAND  OF  TONGAREVA. 


267 


Zealand  ventured  on  shore  to  explain  the  object  of  their 
visit,  but  he  was  met  by  a body  of  armed  natives,  who  thrust 
their  spears  through  his  body,  and  he  died.  Not  long  after 
this  cruel  deed,  a blight  came  over  the  cocoa-nut  trees  of 
the  island,  and  the  sacred  men  among  the  tribe  affirmed 
that  it  was  a judgment  for  murdering  the  stranger  ; and  the 
people  became  so  impressed  with  this  affliction,  that  they 
resolved  not  to  lay  violent  hands  any  more  on  foreigners 
who  should  come  to  them.  In  this  way  did  God,  in  his 
providence,  prepare  for  the  safety  of  the  crew  of  a vessel 
that  was  wrecked  there. 

In  1853,  a Californian  trading  brig  was  thrown  on  the 
reef  of  Tongareva,  and  became  a complete  wreck.  The 
property  of  the  vessel  was  taken  by  the  natives,  but  they 
treated  the  crew  with  kindness.  Whatever  articles  the 
foreigners  appeared  most  anxious  to  secure,  those  the 
natives  invariably  took  away  from  them ; the  hogs  which 
had  escaped  from  the  wreck  were  tapu,  or  sacred,  and  a 
fifty-dollar  piece  of  gold  was  cooked  by  the  people,  and  while 
hot  they  tried  to  bite  it,  but  were  disappointed  and  surprised 
at  its  hardness  ! Waiting  some  time  in  anxious  suspense, 
a part  of  the  crew  sailed  in  a boat  to  the  island  of  3Ianiiki  •, 
others  came  away  in  a vessel  that  touched  there,  and, 
accompanied  by  two  of  the  natives  of  the  island,  came  to 
Rarotonga. 

How  little  did  the  gentleman,  who  advised  a ship 
to  go  and  destroy  the  tribe,  think  that,  at  the  very  time 
he  was  passing  it  in  so  much  dread,  there  were  shipwrecked 
sailors  on  the  land  being  kindly  treated  by  the  very  savages 
who  came  off  to  his  vessel  ! But  thus  it  was,  and  in 
this  way  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  has  been  taken  to  the 
island,  and  instead  of  subduing  the  people  by  extermin- 
ation, they  are  now  being  instructed,  and  civilized,  and 
elevated,  by  that  gospel,  to  the  position  of  our  brethren  and 
friends ! 


268 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


As  soon  as  these  circumstances  of  the  island  became 
known  to  the  students  in  the  Institution  on  Rarotonga,  a 
goodly  number  of  them  volunteered  to  go  to  this  desolate 
spot ; and  in  March,  1854,  three  of  them  were  appointed 
to  go  forth  in  the  John  Williams;  they  were  accom- 
panied by  the  two  natives  of  the  island  who  had  been 
brought  to  Rarotonga ; they  landed  on  Tongareva,  were 
favourably  received,  and  are  now  labouring  there  with  every 
prospect  of  success. 

There  is  every  reason  to  believe  that  these  tribes, 
both  on  Maniiki  and  Tongareva,  separated  by  600  miles 
of  latitude  from  Rarotonga,  came  originally  from  that 
island.  Their  appearance,  their  manners  and  customs, 
their  language  and  their  traditions,  alike  lead  to  this 
conclusion. 

A most  novel  and  singular  coincidence  has  also  been 
found  to  exist  from  time  immemorial  between  Rarotonga 
and  these  far  distant  islands,  in  reference  to  the  act  of 
sneezing.  On  Rarotonga,  when  a person  sneezes,  either 
he  or  the  by-standers  exclaim,  as  though  addressing  a 
spirit,  “ Ah  ! you  have  returned,  have  you  ?”  while  on  the 
Maniiki  islands,  the  person  sneezing  or  the  by-standers  have 
always  been  in  the  habit  of  saying,  “ Alas  ! alas ! Go  to 
Rarotonga !” 

It  is  pleasing,  after  the  lapse  of  ages,  to  follow  these  scat- 
tered tribes,  and  to  give  them  the  word  of  life;  it  is  also 
further  interesting  to  realize  that  this  is  being  done  by  their 
own  people — children  of  their  own  ancestors — from  whom, 
by  the  cruelties  of  heathen  war,  and  the  evils  of  idolatry, 
they  were  compelled  to  flee,  and  to  make  those  desolate  and 
isolated  reefs  their  home.  Within  the  last  five  years  have 
the  blessings  of  Christian  instruction  and  civilization  been 
introduced  to  Maniiki  and  Tongareva,  and,  under  the  super- 
intendence of  native  pastors,  their  inhabitants  are  advanc- 


THE  ISLAND  OF  TONGAKEVA. 


269 


ing  in  intelligence,  and  purity,  and  peace ; and,  at  the 
last  great  day,  when  the  Lord  of  the  universe  shall  judge 
the  world,  and  glorify  his  saints,  it  shall  be  found  that,  even 
from  the  barren  coral  reef  islands  of  the  Penrhyn  group, 
there  are  many  of  its  once  heathen  population  who  shall 
increase  their  number  and  swell  their  song  of  praise  to  the 
Saviour. 

The  deep,  extensive,  and  beautiful  lagoons  of  this  group 
of  islands  have  already  attracted  the  enterprise  and  the 
trade  of  the  merchant ; since  the  people  have  been  subdued 
by  the  teaching  of  Christianity,  he  has  gone  to  their  shores 
in  his  vessel  without  fear ; he  has  located  his  trading  agent 
with  his  wares  on  the  islands;  he  has  bought  tons  of  pearl- 
shells,  and  hundreds  of  pearls,  which  abound  in  the  la- 
goons ; and,  truly,  it  is  cheering  to  the  church  of  Christ 
to  be  able  to  give  to  them  the  pearl  of  immeasurable  worth, 
which,  by  its  living,  transforming,  beautifying  power  on 
their  own  character  and  conduct,  shall  make  them  righteous, 
and  glorious,  and  happy  for  ever  ! 

The  reader,  by  looking  at  a chart,  will  discover  that  there 
are  many  islands  in  this  group  yet  to  be  sought  after.  Fou, 
and  Tokerau,  and  others,  are  well  known  to  the  natives. 
These  islands  are  of  the  same  description,  and  the  people 
have  the  same  characteristics  as  those  of  Tongareva  and 
Maniiki,  and  already  there  are  men  on  Maniiki  who  are 
suitable  and  willing  to  be  pioneers  in  this  great  enterprise. 
This  work,  however,  we  repeat,  can  only  be  efficiently  sus- 
tained, and  its  triumphs  extended,  as  the  islands  are  fre- 
quently visited  by  the  missionary  ship.  With  this  vessel, 
constantly  and  properly  worked,  we  may  add  island  after 
island  to  our  gospel  victories  every  year  ; but  without  it,  as 
other  and  evil  influences  increase,  we  shall  be  in  danger  of 
losing  even  those  which  we  have. 

23* 


SAVAGE  ISLAND, 

OR 

THE  ISLAND  OF  NIUE. 


Savage  island  discovered,  1774— The  heathen  character  of  the  people — ■ 
Missionary  visit  in  1830 — Two  natives  taken  to  Raiatea — Returned 
to  instruct  their  countrymen — Were  murdered — Interview  with  a 
Savage  islander  on  board  the  mission  ship — His  reports  respecting 
his  countrymen — Intercourse  with  the  people  in  1840 — A scheme  to 
murder  the  missionary,  1842 — Native  teachers  landed  in  1846 — The 
fears  and  prejudices  of  the  islanders — Their  ill  treatment  of  the 
teacher — Subsequent  success — Chapel  built — Law  and  order  partially 
established — Lamentable  affray  with  a ship  of  war,  1852 — Visit  of 
mission  ship,  1854 — Complete  overthrow  of  idolatry — Conclusion. 

Savage  island  was  given  as  an  appropriate  name  to 
tFe  island  of  Nine,  by  Captain  Cook,  who  discovered  it  in 
the  year  1774,  whose  inhabitants  he  describes  as  running 
down  upon  him  with  the  ferocity  of  wild  boars.  It  is 
situated  19°  south  latitude,  169°  37'  west  longitude,  and  its 
distance  from  other  islands  prevents  its  being  classified  in 
any  group  ; it  is  about  four  or  five  days’  sail  from  Rarotonga, 
and  two  days’  sail  from  Samoa.  'I'he  island  is  of  oblong 

( 270) 


SAVAGE  ISLAND. 


271 


shape,  not  forty  miles  round,  and  below  a hundred  feet  in 
height ; and  has  a population  of  from  3000  to  4000  souls. 

In  animal  and  vegetable  productions  this  island  is  de- 
cidedly inferior  to  those  near  it.  Bread-fruit  and  cocoa-nut 
trees  are  scarce,  and  when  it  was  first  visited  there  were  no 
hogs,  or  dogs,  or  cats,  or  fowls,  but  the  people  subsisted  on 
taro,  banana,  arrow-root,  and  fish.  In  their  heathen  condi- 
tion the  natives  were,  with  the  exception  of  tribes  in 
Western  Polynesia,  the  most  wretched  and  wild  of  any 
islanders  with  whom  we  have  come  in  contact.  They  wore 
their  hair  and  beard  very  long ; their  bodies  were  painted 
with  charcoal,  ochre,  and  pipe-clay;  and  when  armed  with 
spears  and  clubs,  and  giving  vent  to  their  excitement  in 
savage  shouts  and  yells,  nothing  can  be  conceived  of  more 
ten'ific  and  repulsive  than  their  appearance. 

On  his  voyage  to  the  Friendly  islands,  in  1830,  the  Rev. 
J.  Williams  called  at  Savage  island,  hoping  to  be  able  to 
locate  two  Christian  native  teachers  among  its  wild  inhabit- 
ants. In  the  first  attempt  to  land,  these  teachers  were 
repulsed  by  a numerous  band  of  armed  warriors;  they, 
however,  afterwards  succeeded,  but  were  so  roughly  handled, 
yea,  almost  tasted,  that  they  were  compelled  to  forego  their 
intention  of  remaining  on  shore.  Some  of  the  natives  came 
off  to  the  ship,  among  whom  was  a chief,  who  was  the  most 
degraded  and  desperate  being  Williams  had  then  seen. 
Many  efforts  were  made  to  effect  the  landing  of  the  teachers, 
but  they  all  failed ; and  the  missionary  was  obliged  to  leave 
the  island,  much  discouraged,  yet  not  without  hope. 

Two  native  youths  on  this  occasion  were  induced  to  join 
the  missionary.  They  were  brought  to  Raiatea;  and,  after 
remaining  some  time  under  instruction,  were  taken  back  to 
their  people.  Hope  was  entertained  that  these  natives 
would  communicate  correct  information  respecting  the  char- 
acter and  object  of  the  missionary  enterprise,  which  should 


272 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


lead  to  the  introduction  of  the  gospel ; hut  this  hope  was 
frustrated  : for  the  young  men  had  scarcely  got  on-shore, 
before  all  their  little  property  was  stolen ; and  soon  after- 
ward they  were  murdered  by  their  own  savage  countrymen  ! 

In  1838,  as  we  voyaged  in  the  missionary  ship  Camden, 
from  Sydney  to  the  islands,  we  were  boarded  by  an  Ameri- 
can captain  who  had  recently  called  at  Savage  island ; he 
had  brought  away  with  him  a native,  who  accompanied  him 
to  our  ship,  and  with  whom  we  were  much  pleased.  A part 
of  his  language  was  found  to  correspond  with  the  dialects 
of  Eastern  Polynesia,  and  he  gave  us  much  information  re- 
specting the  manners  and  customs  of  his  people,  by  which 
we  were  led  to  conclude  that  they  were  not  in  reality  more 
savage  than  tribes  of  other  islands,  to  whom  Christianity 
had  been  introduced,  and  who,  under  its  influence,  were  now 
subdued,  educated,  and  happy.  This  native  also  gave  us  to 
understand  what  opinions  his  countrymen  entertained  res- 
pecting the  white  man,  which  much  modified  our  views  and 
assisted  our  future  intercourse  with  them.  Owing  to  the 
prevalence  of  influenza,  dysentery,  or  some  other  disease, 
after  the  visit  of  the  white  man’s  ship,  they  had  conceived 
a dislike  to  have  intercourse  with  him,  or  to  have  anything 
to  do  with  his  property.  While  on  board  his  ship  they  had 
also  seen  him  eat  animal  food,  and  had  concluded  that  he 
was  a man-eater;  consequently  they  resisted  any  temptation 
to  put  themselves  within  his  power ! 

The  next  missionary  visit  was  made  to  Savage  island  in 
1840,  by  a European  assistant  missionary  of  the  Samoa 
island,  in  a small  schooner,  not  more  than  twenty  tons  bur- 
then, having  many  Samoan  natives  on  board.  On  reaching 
ofiF  shore,  a numerous  company  of  islanders  came  to  the 
vessel,  all  of  whom  were  armed  with  clubs  and  spears,  and 
who  might  easily  have  taken  possession  of  it,  and  murdered 
the  strangers ; but  the  very  smallness  of  the  vessel  appeared 


SAVAGE  ISLAND. 


273 


to  take  away  all  dread  from  their  minds,  and  disposed  them 
to  be  kind ; and  although  they  were  wild  and  clamorous, 
yet  they  were  considerate,  and  had  their  confidence  increased 
in  the  objects  of  our  mission. 

Two  years  afterwards,  the  island  was  visited  by  the  Rev. 
A.  Buzacott,  in  the  Camden.  He  had  intercourse  with  the 
people,  and  in  his  attempts  to  land  a native  teacher  among 
them  he  well  nigh  lost  his  life.  The  natives  who  came  off 
to  the  ship  gave  him  to  understand  that  they  would  allow 
the  teachers  to  remain  on  shore,  that  they  would  give  heed 
to  his  instructions,  and  wished  him  at  once  to  land.  But  it 
was  thought  more  prudent  to  send  two  or  three  of  the  natives 
first,  who  were  to  remain  all  night,  and  to  bring  off  their  re- 
port in  the  morning.  This  was  well ; for  by  it  a plan  was 
discovered  which  had  been  laid  by  the  savages,  to  seize  the 
boat,  destroy  the  property,  and  to  murder  the  missionary. 

Subsequent  missionary  visits  were  made  by  Rev.  A.  Mur- 
ray, and  others,  and  although  for  a time  unsuccessful,  they 
had  a good  influence  on  the  minds  of  the  young  people, 
who  desired  to  become  better  acquainted  with  foreigners 
than  their  fathers  had  been ; hence  many  of  them  engaged 
themselves  on  board  whale  ships  and  merchant  vessels  that 
called  at  their  island,  and  were  brought  to  Tahiti,  the  Sand- 
wich islands,  and  Samoa.  Among  those  who  reached  Sa- 
moa about  this  time  were  Fakafitenua,  and  three  others  who 
took  the  names  of  Joane,  Paulo,  and  Beniamina. 

On  a missionary  voyage  in  the  John  Williams,  1846,  we 
called  at  Samoa,  and  found  Fakafitenua  and  Beniamina,  not 
only  willing,  but  by  Christian  education  prepared,  to  return 
home,  and  to  use  their  influence  to  secure  the  location  of  a 
teacher  in  the  midst  of  their  countrymen.  We  arrived  at 
the  island,  with  these  two  men  on  board,  in  the  month  of 
October,  and  there  were  with  us  both  Rarotongan  and  Sa- 
moan teachers  anxious  to  commence  their  labour  there. 


274 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Fakafitenua,  who  was  a man  of  some  influence  on  shore, 
was  landed  first ; he  held  a consultation  with  the  people  of 
his  clau,  told  them  of  all  that  he  had  seen  of  Christianity  at 
Samoa,  and  advised  them  to  receive  it  themselves.  To  this 
proposition  the  assembly  replied  that  they  could  not  be  in 
haste ; they  would  not  give  their  consent  that  either  a Ka- 
rotongan  or  Samoan  should  reside  amongst  them,  but  that 
Beuiamina,  who  had  been  under  instruction,  had  better 
come  on  shore,  and  teach  them  as  far  as  he  knew;  then  they 
should  better  understand  what  was  meant,  and  be  prepared 
to  give  a final  reply  on  the  next  visit  of  the  missionary 
ship. 

Thankful  for  this  decision,  we  acceded  to  their  proposi- 
tion ; a good  supply  of  books,  and  clothes,  and  tools  were 
given  to  Beniamina,  and,  being  commended  to  the  protec- 
tion and  blessing  of  God,  he  landed  in  the  midst  of  his 
wild,  savage  countrymen.  Thus,  after  sixteen  years  of  re- 
peated visitation  and  intercourse,  we  were  permitted  to  leave 
with  this  people  a Christian  pioneer — a teacher  of  the  facts 
and  revelations  of  the  gospel  of  Christ,  and  him  one  of  them- 
selves who  had  been,  by  the  providence  of  God,  brought  to 
one  of  our  older  mission  stations. 

From  what  has  already  been  said,  it  will  readily  be  con- 
ceived that  it  was  not  without  much  apprehension  respecting 
the  safety  of  the  teacher,  that  the  missionary  again  visited 
the  shores  of  Savage  island;  but  his  fears  were  dispelled. 
The  life  of  Beniamina  had  been  spared ; a little  light  had 
entered  into  the  minds  of  a few  of  the  poor  people  through 
his  instruction ; and  whilst  they  had  not  made  much  advance, 
yet  they  were  more  kindly  disposed  than  on  former  occasions, 
and  were  willing  to  receive  another  teacher  as  soon  as 
one  could  be  sent  to  them.  This  position,  however,  had  not 
been  gained  without  toil,  trial,  and  persecution. 

When  the  teacher  first  went  on  shore  he  took  with  him 


SAVAGE  ISLAND. 


275 


a box  of  clothes.  This  the  poor  ignorant  creatures  re- 
quested should  be  sent  back  to  the  ship,  for  they  were  afraid 
it  would  bring  sickness  to  their  land.  “ But  I am  like  your- 
selves,” reasoned  the  teacher,  “ a man,  and  no  god ; and  the 
wood  of  the  box  is  the  same  which  grows  here.”  Impatient 
of  restraint,  however,  many  of  the  wild  crowd  gathered 
around  him,  and  proposed  to  kill  him.  To  these  with  calm- 
ness he  explained  the  object  of  his  mission,  and  afterwards, 
not  knowing  the  moment  he  would  be  struck  to  the  ground, 
he  knelt  down  in  the  midst  of  them,  and  prayed  for  himself  and 
for  them.  A few  hearts  were  now  touched  with  compassion, 
and  they  wished  to  spare  him,  but  others  insisted  on  his 
being  put  to  death.  “ Let  us  do  it  now,”  they  said ; “ let 
us  do  it  now,  while  he  is  alone ; by-and-by  others  will  join 
him,  and  it  will  be  more  difficult.” 

Night  came  on,  and  this  native  evangelist,  although  on 
his  own  island,  had  nowhere  to  lay  his  head.  Fearing  pol- 
lution, his  own  countrymen  would  not  allow  him  to  enter 
their  houses ; he  was  told  he  might  sleep  under  a tree,  but 
afterwards,  they  thought  he  had  better  retire  to  an  old  de- 
serted fortification. 

At  length,  however,  a few  of  the  people  ventured  to  re- 
ceive him ; general  confidence  increased,  and  the  number 
who  listened  to  and  believed  his  reports  about  the  word  of 
God  daily  increased.  Idolatrous  priests  then  betook  them- 
selves to  the  arts  of  incantation  and  sorceries,  in  order  to 
secure  his  death ; but  their  defeat  gave  strength  to  his  posi- 
tion ; the  word  of  the  Lord  prevailed,  and  the  people  of  the 
district  where  the  teacher  lived  and  taught,  renounced  idola- 
try, and  placed  themselves  under  his  instniction. 

Thus  the  mission  on  this  island  continued  to  advance, 
and  when  visited  by  the  Rev.  A.  W.  Murray,  in  1852,  he 
was  thankfully  able  to  say,  that  the  teacher  was  prosecuting 
his  arduous  and  self-denying  labours  under  encouraging  cir- 


276 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


cumstances.  He  had  had  many  and  peculiar  trials,  but 
had  been  graciously  delivered  out  of  them  all.  A goodly 
number  of  more  than  200  persons  had,  by  their  firm  at- 
tachment to  him,  and  by  constant  attendance  on  his  instruc- 
tion, much  sustained  his  spirit,  and  assisted  his  labours. 
Having  no  pit-saw,  they  had,  instructed  by  the  teachers, 
wrought  with  axes  a quantity  of  wood  with  which  they  had 
built  a teacher’s  house,  and  also  a chapel ; the  chapel  being 
forty-two  feet  long,  and  thirty  feet  wide;  and  nearly  the 
whole  of  the  people  within  reach  of  this  house  of  prayer  to 
Jehovah,  attended  for  worship  and  instruction  on  the  Lord’s 
day. 

The  families  under  instruction  had,  for  the  most  part, 
established  family  worship,  and  not  a few  of  the  people  were 
known  to  be  in  the  habit  of  retiring  into  the  bush  for  the 
purpose  of  private  prayer ; heathen  practices  had  been 
abandoned — restraints  of  ancient  superstition  had  been 
broken  through — war  and  theft  had  yielded  to  peace  and 
honesty,  and  the  nude  state  of  savage  life,  under  a sense  of 
moral  propriety,  was  felt  to  be  a shame  and  a sin.  How 
marvellous  the  change  of  the  people,  even  at  this  stage  of 
the  mission,  as  contrasted  with  their  condition  five  years 
before  ! Surely  in  it  we  have  another  triumph  of  the  grace 
and  power  of  the  gospel ! It  must  be  remembered,  however, 
that  at  the  time  of  which  we  write,  the  majority  of  the  tribes 
on  the  island  were  still  heathen,  concerning  whom  it  was 
found,  by  more  frequent  intercourse,  that  in  many  of  their 
habits  they  resembled  the  natives  of  the  eastern  islands ; 
and  that,  in  many  things,  they  much  differed  from  them. 
Suicide  was  common  amongst  them;  illegitimate  children 
were  destroyed  by  them ; their  infirm  sick  they  were  in  the 
habit  of  removing  to  an  uninhabited  spot,  where  the  rela- 
tives erected  a temporary  hut,  in  which  they  were  visited 
and  fed,  but  no  one  remained  with  them ; their  dead  were 


SAVAGE  ISLAND. 


277 


buried  io  natural  caverns ; their  great  deity  was  Tongaroa, 
and  they  believed  in  a future  state  of  existence ; the  chiefs 
of  the  tribes  had  but  little  power,  but  successful  warriors 
always  became  persons  of  great  influence;  upon  the  whole, 
the  people  were  found  to  be  a fine  race,  having  much  im- 
petuosity and  energy,  which,  when  fully  brought  under  the 
regulating  and  directing  power  of  Christianity,  will  render 
them  enterprising,  teachable,  and  useful. 

Before  we  record  the  further  successes  which  have 
attended  the  labours  of  the  native  teachers  here,  we  have  to 
notice  a lamentable  aflair  which  occurred  to  the  islanders  in 
the  latter  part  of  the  year  1852.  A ship  of  war  called  there 
in  search  of  the  crew  of  a vessel  wrecked  on  a near  reef,  and 
intercourse  was  had  with  the  people  of  the  last-formed 
Christian  station,  most  of  whom  were  yet  under  the  influence 
of  heathenism. 

Natives  were  admitted  on  board  to  barter,  and  all  passed 
on  without  difficulty,  until  it  was  found  that  some  of  them 
had  stolen  articles  belonging  to  the  ship.  Upon  this  dis- 
coveiy,  the  whole  party  was  thrown  into  confusion  : some  of 
them  who  were  on  board  were  secured  at  once,  and  boats 
were  lowered  to  follow  those  who  were  returning  to  the 
shore.  Canoes  were  capsized  and  broken ; the  natives  were 
pursued,  fired  upon,  and  beaten  in  every  direction, — one 
man  died  in  the  sea  of  shot  wounds,  and  several  others  were 
detained  on  board  the  ship  for  two  days ; when  early  in  the 
morning,  two  of  the  natives  thus  confined  were  released, 
while  the  ship  was  near  the  shore,  and  they  landed  in  safety ; 
but  later  in  the  day  others  were  put  overboard,  three  of 
whom  landed  half-dead  the  next  day;  but  nine  of  the  party 
lost  their  lives ! 

One  of  these  nine  was  a chief  who,  only  a few  months 
before,  had  given  his  protection  to  the  native  Christian 
teacher;  his  wife,  through  grief  on  account  of  his  death,  threw 
24 


278 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


herself  from  a high  precipice,  and  was  killed.  The  guilty 
man  who  had  been  the  thief  on  board,  and  who  had  been 
the  exciting  cause  of  this  sad  affair,  escaped  to  the  shore; 
but  his  own  people  were  so  enraged  at  him,  that  they  com- 
pelled him  to  go  out  in  a small  oanoe,  and  he  perished  at 
sea  ! Thus  fifteen  human  beings  lost  their  lives,  and  a war 
was  proclaimed  amongst  the  different  clans,  and  the  best  in- 
terests of  the  mission  retarded,  through  the  hasty,  impru- 
dent, and  severe  retaliation  for  stealing  a few  articles 
belonging  to  the  white  man’s  ship.  The  missionaries  who 
visited  the  people  after  this  occurrence,  say,  “ W e cannot 
too  strongly  condemn  this  conduct.  If  foreigners  put  before 
the  heathen  an  opportunity  of  stealing,  what  can  be  expect- 
ed but  that  they  will  steal  ? and  if  punishment  is  to  be 
inflicted,  ought  it  not  to  be  done  with  proper  allowance  for 
their  heathen  state,  and  with  some  respect  to  the  degree  of 
their  guilt  ?” 

In  concluding  this  notice,  we  only  add,  that  one  of  the 
natives  confined  on  board  the  ship,  when  ordered  to  jump 
overboard,  refused,  stating  that  he  could  not  swim,  and  for 
some  time  he  clung  to  the  vessel  for  his  life.  He  was  taken 
on  to  the  distant  island  of  Rotuma,  whence  he  wrote  a letter 
to  the  missionaries  in  Samoa,  giving  an  account  of  the  whole 
transaction.  This  is  one  among  many  instances  where  a 
native  may  be  looked  upon  while,  on  board  ship,  as  a heathen 
savage,  but  who  is  a keen  observer  of  all  that  transpires, 
and  will  not  fail  faithfully  to  report  the  whole.  This  man 
is  well  known ; he  had  lived  in  the  mission  family  many 
years,  and  his  character  is  such  as  would  give  his  evidence 
much  weight  in  any  impartial  court  of  justice. 

As  far  as  the  cause  of  Christianity  and  civilization  is  con- 
cerned, we  have  reason  to  be  thankful  that  this  affair  did 
not  occur  a few  years  before ; if  it  had,  it  would  doubtless 
have  prevented  our  access  to  the  people  for  years  to  come ; 


SAVAGE  ISLAND. 


279 


but  as  it  was,  they  had  sufficient  knowledge  to  discern  the 
difference  between  such  ships  and  the  missionaiy  ship ; and 
to  know  that  such  conduct  was  not  the  conduct  of  England, 
as  a nation,  towards  them. 

The  last  missionary  visit  was  made  to  Savage  Island  in  De- 
cember, 1854;  and  it  was  gratifying  to  find  that  hostilities 
and  bad  feeling  connected  with  the  “ white  man’s  large  ship 
of  war”  had  subsided.  At  the  new  village,  occupied  by  a 
teacher  of  the  last  voyage,  things  had  advanced  with  sur- 
prising improvement.  A good  chapel  had  been  built, — 
schools  were  organized — and  two  out-stations  were  attended 
to.  At  another  station,  the  second  formed  on  the  island,  a 
similar  state  of  things  prevailed ; and,  at  the  district  first 
occupied,  fifty  persons  had  learned  to  read  well ; many  others 
had  made  different  degrees  of  progress ; the  moral  improve- 
ment of  the  people  was  everywhere  apparent ; their  desire 
for  Scriptural  instruction  was  very  great,  and  no  less  than 
twenty  persons  were  united  together  in  a Bible  class,  as 
consistent  candidates  for  the  ordinances  of  the  church  of 
Christ. 

With  but  very  few  trifling  exceptions,  heathenism  is 
abandoned  throughout  the  whole  island,  the  Christian 
teachers  are  respected,  the  Sabbath  is  observed;  school- 
books, hymn-books,  and  Scripture-extract  books  are  widely 
circulated,  and  the  whole  population  is  in  a prepared  state 
to  advance,  in  intelligence,  in  civilization,  and  in  Christi- 
anity, as  fast  as  the  means  can  be  supplied  to  them. 

Such,  then,  is  Savage  Island  now.  Eighty-two  years  ago 
it  was  discovered  by  Captain  Cook ; for  fifty-six  years  after 
its  discovery,  it  was  left  to  its  wildness  and  savageism ; the 
first  visit  of  mercy  was  made  to  it  in  1830,  and  during  the 
space  of  sixteen  years,  frequent  and  unsuccessful  attempts 
were  made  to  induce  the  people  to  receive  a Christian 
teacher.  This  was  accomplished  in  1846 ; the  subsequent 


280 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


five  years  were  years  of  toil  and  faith,  in  the  midst  of  idol- 
atry and  persecution;  and  now,  as  a result  of  native  teachers’ 
labours,  we  have,  on  this  once  savage  island,  three  Chris- 
tian settlements,  and  two  out-stations,  and  nearly  the  whole 
of  the  people  brought  under  the  enlightening  and  dignify- 
ing influence  of  the  gospel  of  Christ. 

We  would  that  Captain  Cook  could  again  visit  its  shores, 
and  see  the  children  of  those  wretched  beings  who  came 
down  upon  him  with  the  ferocity  of  wild  boars,  in  the  days 
of  their  ignorance  and  degradation  ! Surely,  taking  up  the 
language  of  the  gospel  prophet,  and  addressing  this  people 
now,  he  might,  with  emphasis,  say,  “ Henceforth  thou  shalt 
be  called  by  a new  name ; no  more  wild,  or  desolating,  or 
forsaken ; but  thou  shalt  be  called  Hephzi-bah,  and  thy 
land  Beulah;  for  the  Lord  delighteth  in  thee;  thy  land 
shall  be  married,  and  not  a few  of  thy  children  shall  be 
polished  gems  of  gospel  glory  in  the  royal  diadem  of  thy 
God  I” 


APPENDIX. 


THE  “JOHN  WILLIAMS.” 

From  the  “British  Banner”  of  July  25th,  1856. 

The  Missionary  stip,  the  “John  Williams/’  has  again 
left  the  port  of  London  for  the  distant  islands  of  the  Pa- 
cific. This  is  her  fourth  voyage  thither  •,  and,  as  on  former 
occasions,  she  is  expected  to  be  absent  from  this  country 
four  years.  The  young  people  connected  with  the  Congre- 
gational churches  of  England  have  done  nobly  in  again 
subscribing  and  collecting  more  than  enough  money  required 
for  her  repairs  and  outfit. 

As  no  public  service  was  held  on  board  the  vessel,  with 
the  missionaries,  prior  to  her  sailing,  it  will  be  a satisfaction 
to  inquiring  friends  to  know  that  an  interesting  farewell 
meeting,  for  prayer  and  exhortation,  was  held,  on  Monday 
evening  last,  in  the  Board-room  of  the  Mission-house.  On 
that  occasion,  the  Directors  of  the  Society  were  gratified  by 
having  before  them  sons  of  two  of  their  most  honoured  and 
laborious  missionaries,  who  were  “ baptized  for  the  dead”  and 
24*  (281  ) 


282 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


the  dying,  in  the  persons  of  the  Keys.  John  Barff  and  Wil- 
berforce  Philip. 

Mr.  Barff,  for  some  years  past,  has  laboured  in  the  Tahitian 
group  of  islands.  The  illness  of  Mrs.  Barff,  and  failure  of 
his  own  health,  obliged  him  to  take  a voyage  to  this  country 
last  year,  and  now,  both  being  partially  restored,  they  re- 
turn to  their  former  spheres  of  labour.  Mr.  Philip  has  but 
just  buckled  on  the  missionary  armour.  He  has,  with 
honour,  passed  through  his  educational  term,  under  the 
auspices  of  the  Society,  and  was  ordained  to  the  ministry, 
in  Albany  Street  Chapel,  EdinWrgh,  on  the  17th  of  last 
month.  He  now  returns  to  Africa,  the  land  of  his  sainted 
father’s  toils  and  triumphs,  to  sustain  and  perpetuate  the 
cause  of  Protestant  Christian  Missions  there.  This  is  the 
youngest,  and,  we  believe,  the  third  son  of  Dr.  Philip,  who 
has  given  himself  to  missionary  work  in  Africa.  Thus  in 
him,  and  in  Mr.  Barff,  we  rejoice  in  the  fulfilment  of  the 
divine  word,  that,  instead  of  the  fathers,  there  shall  come 
up  the  children,  who  shall  be  men  of  labour  and  renown  in 
the  earth. 

The  missionary  ship,  after  calling  at  the  Cape  of  Good 
Hope,  will  sail  to  Melbourne ; where  the  brethren,  by  in- 
tercourse with  the  churches,  will  call  forth  enlarged  sympathy 
and  assistance  towards  the  South  Sea  missionary  enterprise. 
From  Melbourne  the  vessel  will  proceed  to  Hobart  Town ; 
and  there  she  will  be  welcomed  by  many  old,  attached  friends 
of  the  Society,  who  with  warm  hearts  and  liberal  hands,  will 
encourage  her  onward  progress  to  Sydney. 

The  arrival  of  the  “ John  Williams  ” in  Sydney  is  always 
a missionary  era  of  deep  interest.  The  Rev.  Dr.  Ross  has 
served  this  cause  there  in  his  day  and  generation  ; and  we 
pray  that  a double  portion  of  his  spirit  may  descend  on  his 
successor,  the  Rev.  W.  Cuthbertson ; and  that,  in  union 
with  all  the  pastors  and  churches  of  our  body  in  those  colo- 


THE  JOHN  WILLIAMS. 


283 


nies,  we  may  soon  see  an  independent,  well  organized,  and 
efficient  Missionary  Society  that  shall  take  the  entire  over- 
sight of  our  missions  in  the  South  Sea,  and  especially  of 
those  in  Western  Polynesia. 

Leaving  Sydney,  the  ship  will  sail  across  the  Southern 
Ocean  to  the  Tahitian  Islands.  There  the  only  sur\dving 
fathers  of  that  mission,  Darling,  Platt,  and  Barff,  are  still 
bearing  the  burden  of  toil.  It  would  have  cheered  our 
hearts  could  these  honoured  men  have  removed,  and  have 
had  their  places  filled  with  young  men  prepared  for  the 
altered  and  arduous  work  of  those  stations.  This  was  hoped 
to  have  been  accomplished  by  various  reinforcements  sent 
out  during  the  past  few  years ; but  failure  of  health,  and 
other  untoward  circumstances,  have  compelled  the  younger 
brethren  to  relinquish  the  work,  leaving  Howe,  Chisholm, 
and  BarfiF,  jun.,  the  only  efficient  men  at  present  in  the 
midst  of  the  large  and  important  Tahitian  group,  who  also 
have  the  oversight  of  the  Austral  Island. 

Having  visited  the  different  islands  of  this  group,  the  ship 
will  proceed  to  Mangaia,  Rarotonga,  and  Aitutaki,  which 
are  between  600  and  700  miles  from  Tahiti.  Shouts  of 
gladness  will  echo  from  hill  to  hill,  on  those  isolated  lands, 
as  the  brethren  and  the  natives  gain  the  first  glimpse  of  long- 
looked-for  “ Pai  Oromedua.”  More  than  two  years  will 
have  passed  away  since  she  left  them  for  her  homeward 
voyage ; and,  being  some  thousands  of  miles  distant  from 
any  European  market,  the  mission  families  will  receive,  with 
indescribable  gladness,  the  provisions  and  supplies  of  goods 
sent  out  in  the  vessel,  which  are  so  necessary  for  their  well- 
being. 

The  Rev.  W.  Wyatt  Gill  will  there  embark  and  proceed 
from  Mangaia  to  Rarotonga,  to  reinforce  that  station,  and 
the  six  islands  of  the  Hervey  group  will  continue  to  have 
the  labours  of  Buzacott,  who  has  already  given  thirty  years’ 


284 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


service ; Boyle,  eighteen  years’  service ; George  Gill,  twelve 
years’  service ; and  of  Wyatt  Gill,  who  has  been  there  five 
years. 

The  landing  of  Isaia  on  Rarotonga,  from  his  visit  to 
England,  will  be  an  occasion  of  no  small  interest  to  the 
people  of  the  island  ; and  we  trust  the  instruction  and  im- 
pressions which  he  has  received  here  will  be  turned  to  good 
account  for  the  benefit  of  the  islanders.  The  ship  also 
takes  out  5,000  copies  of  the  Bible,  and  a large  supply  of 
other  books,  in  the  native  language,  which  have  been  printed 
in  this  country. 

Sailing  from  the  Hervey  Islands,  the  ship  will  proceed  to 
the  Samoa  group,  which  lie  about  900  miles  westward  of 
Rarotonga ; and  mingled  emotions  of  joy  and  disappoint- 
ment will  arise  in  the  hearts  of  the  brethren  there,  as  they 
go  on  board  expecting  to  receive  young  missionaries  from 
England,  who  have  come  to  their  help,  but  finding  none. 
Within  the  last  ten  years  death  and  ill  health  have  removed 
some  ten  missionaries  from  this  group,  and  of  the  ten  who 
now  remain  there,  two  or  three  are  in  ill  health,  and  two 
have  recently  lost  their  wives  by  death,  thus  leaving  the  re- 
mainder hardly  taxed  with  labours  too  abundant  to  be  long 
sustained,  at  their  almost  innumerable  stations,  together 
with  press  work,  and  institutions  for  native  teaching.  It 
was  hoped  by  these  brethren  that  at  least  two  missionaries 
would  have  gone  out  this  year  to  their  help ; and  now  that 
there  are  none,  they  will  mourn  “ as  when  the  standard-bearer 
fainteth,”  and  only  have  consolation  as  their  hopes  are  sus- 
tained by  promises  of  speedy  assistance. 

From  this  group  in  Central  Polynesia,  a noble  company 
of  Rarotongan  and  Samoan  teachers  will  embark  on  board 
the  ship  for  the  islands  of  Western  Polynesia.  These  will 
be  accompanied  by  one,  only  one,  young  missionary,  to  enter 
on  the  inviting  fields  of  Janna,  Lifu,  and  Eromanga. 


THE  JOHN  WILLIAMS. 


285 


About  this  time  next  year,  the  ship  will  have  reached  our 
extreme  stations  on  these  western  islands ; and  then  it  will 
return  through  all  the  groups  eastward,  visiting  every  island 
occupied  by  missionaries  or  native  teachers,  and  thence 
back  again  through  the  groups,  doing  entirely  missionary 
work  on  its  way  to  Sydney.  Thus,  during  the  ship’s  four 
years’  absence  from  England,  it  makes  about  two  visits  a 
year  to  each  island,  and  an  annual  voyage  to  Sydney  for  re- 
pairs and  supplies ; which,  besides  her  outward  and  home- 
ward voyages,  gives  her  a working  distance  of  many  thousands 
of  miles  every  year. 

We  give  this  statement  of  facts,  connected  with  the  de- 
parture and  voyage  of  the  John  Williams,  with  a view 
that  our  numerous  friends,  interested  in  her,  may  have  cor- 
rect information ; and  to  deepen  the  conviction,  already 
existing  in  the  minds  of  our  friends,  that  this  ship  is  a 
necessity  of  the  South  Sea  Mission — neither  prosperity  nor 

advance  can  be  secured  without  it.  We  give  thanks  to 

God  for  the  hold  it  has  on  the  affection  and  prayers  of  so 
many  people,  and  desire  that,  ere  long,  there  may  come  out 
from  among  them  many  to  do  the  work  that  waits  to  be  done. 

In  conclusion,  we  would  express  one  word  of  sympathy 
with  good  Captain  Morgan,  whose  ill  health  prevents  his 
undertaking  a four  years’  voyage  ; and  we  ask  the  prayers 
of  the  churches  that  the  ship  may  be  preserved,  and  that 
Captain  Williams,  its  present  commander,  may  long  live, 
to  occupy  his  position,  with  honour,  usefulness,  and  exten- 
sive success. 


THE  END. 


a 

, .J^«  A 4'<m»  ..>%  wtkmr%  4|piipi^ 

rnMm  'Jm*' 0-  <**>  rfliaii  *k  ^ 

* » 4MK'*  4M«iir..«4ll»  J^4>9trii^ 

(fcirtf'‘t*i*  jM  ^S  i*44f 

-■«“*  '■'  ■ ' -^  - A .li*'-' l;fM*o  «n^ 

i^lr.,*4jii»  ^ , ^4#. 4f«t-  Jfe  _?34N|^ 

KRt!H4>  i^tjtwjjy  - dm 

«ji  Y#*  nJt  - V-f^.«>>4i< 

•).%<.->.' 

1».V»  i)iN  jr-iitti^i  iitJjL  gft 

fm  : m»  tdm 

- ^ JWilj 

<N|yfc»»v/4Mi ty^ “S' 

«»>7i»»f  »4».  if^x*»f  Vy  t 
*iii  K«a 


Lr 


4 


' 4 


r 


t 


i; 


S35- 


/ 


,v 


m 


I 


* 


4 


# 


c 


1 


V 

S 


N 


